THE IPIROOIEIEIDIIISrGi-S LINNEAN SOCIETY OF NEW SOUTH WALES. (SEOOISTID SERIES.) VOL. VI. WITH FORTY-THREE PLATES. (Plates i.-xii., xii. bis, and xiii.-xlii.) FOR THIS TEAE 1891. SYDNEY: PRINTED AND PUBLISHED FOR THE SOCIETY BY F. CUNNINGHAME & CO., 146 PITT STREET., AND SOLD BY THE SOCIETY. 1892. SYDNEY : F. CUNNINGHAME AND CO., PRINTERS, PITT STREET. CONTENTS OP VOL. VI. (SEOOHSTD SERIES-) PART I. (Issued September 9th, 1891.) PAGE Notes on the occurrence of Stilbite in the Eruptive Rocks of Jamberoo, N.S.W. By B. G. Engelhardt. (Plate i.) 5 Notes on a small Collection of Hymenoptera from Narrabri, N.S.W. By W. W. Froggatt 13 Description of a new Species of Tortricidse. By J. Hartley Durrant 17 On the Anatomy of some Tasmanian Land Snails. By C. Hedley, F.L.S., Corr. Mem. (Plates ii.-m.) 19 Stray Notes on Lepidoptera. No. 2. By A. Sidney Olliff 27 Notes on Australian Aboriginal Stone Weapons and Implements. Nos. x.-xv. By R. Etheridge, Junr. (Plates iv.-viii.) 31 On the Classification of Eucalypts. By the Rev. W. Woolls, Ph.D., F.L.S 49 The Land Molluscan Fauna of British New Guinea. By C. Hedley, F.L.S. , Corr. Mem. (Plates ix.-xii. and xn. bis.)} .. 67 On the Trail of an Extinct Bird. By C. W. De Vis, M. A., Corr. Mem. 117 Note on an Extinct Eagle. By C. W. De Vis., M.A., Corr. Mem. ... 123 Elections and Announcements 1,9,45 Donations 1, 9, 45 Notes and Exhibits 8,43,125 •27774 IV. CONTENTS. PART II. (Issued December 22nd, 1891.) PAGE On the Occurrence of Barite (Barytes) in the Hawkesbury Sandstone near Sydney. By H. G. Smith, Technological Museum, Sydney... 131 Notes on Australian Economic Botany. No. n. By J. H. Maiden, F.L.S., F.C.S 133 On the occurrence of a Gum in Echinocarpus (SloaneaJ Australis, Beitfh. By J. H. Maiden, F.L.S., F.C.S 140 Onyx and Dipeltis: new Nematode Genera, with a Note on Dorylaimus. ByN. A. Cobb ...143 In confirmation of the Genus Owenia so-called. By C. W. De Vis, M. A, Corr. Mem. (Plate xiii.) 159 A Contribution to the Geology and Petrography of Bathurst, N.S.W. By Rev. J. Milne Curran, F.G.S. (Plates xiv.-xviii.) 173 Remarks on Post-Tertiary Phascolomyidce. By C. W. De Vis, M.A., Corr. Mem. 235 Description of a new Marine Shell. By C. Hedley, F.L.S., and C. T. Musson, F.L.S. (Plate xix., figs. 1-3) 247 Note on the Ova of Helicarion robustus, Gould. By C. Hedley, F.L.S. 248 Angophora Kino. By J. H. Maiden, F.L.S., F.C.S 253 The Incisors of Scejjarnodon. By C. W. De Vis, M.A., Corr. Mem. (Plate xxii.) 258 Contributions to a more exact Knowledge of the Geographical Distribu- tion of Australian Batrachia. No. n. By J. J. Fletcher . 263 Description of a supposed new Cystignathoid Frog. By J. J. Fletcher 275 Description of a new Cone from Mauritius. By J. Brazier, F.L.S. (Plate xix., fig. 4.) 276 On Queensland and other Australian Lepidoptera, with Descriptions of New Species. By Thomas P. Lucas, M.R.C.S.E., L.S.A. ... 277 Elections and Announcements 127,169 Donations 127, 169, 250 Notes and Exhibits 166,248,307 CONTENTS. v. PART III. (Issued May 23rd, 1892.) PAGE The Silurian Trilobites of New South Wales, with References to those of other parts of Australia. Part i. By R. Etheridge, Junr., Palaeontologist to the Australian Museum, and Geological Survey of N.S.W.; and John Mitchell, Public School, Narellan. (Plate xxv.) 311 On the Synonymy of Helix (Hadra) gulosa, Gould. By John Brazier, C.M.Z.S., F.L.S 321 Observations on the Chloraemidae, with special Reference to several Australian Forms. By W. A. Haswell, M.A., D.Sc. Edin., F.L.S. , Challis Professor of Biology, University of Sydney. (Plates xxvi.- xxviii.) 329 Notes on Australian Aboriginal Stone Weapons and Implements. Nos. xvi.-xvii. By R. Etheridge, Junr., Palaeontologist to the Aus- tralian Museum, and Geological Survey of N.S.W. (Plates xxix.- xxxvi.) 357 The Examination of Kinos as an Aid in the Diagnosis of Eucalypts. Part iii.— The Turbid Group. By J. H. Maiden, F.L.S., F.C.S. 389 Descriptions of two new Species of Carenum from West Australia, with Notes on the Synonymy and Distribution of some previously described Species. By T. G. Sloane ■ 427 Jottings from the Biological Laboratory of Sydney University. By Professor W. A. Haswell, M.A., D.Sc. — 15. On a simple Method of substituting strong Alcohol for a watery Solution in the Preparation of Specimens 433 Residue of the Extinct Birds of Queensland as yet Detected. By C. W. De Vis, M.A., Corr. Mem. (Plates xxiii.-xxiv.) 437 Observations on Plants collected during Mr. J. Bradshaw's Expedition to the Prince Regent's River. By Baron von Mueller, K.C.M.G., M.D., Ph.D., F.R.S . 457 Notes on Australian Coleoptera, with Descriptions of new Species. Part x. By the Rev. T. Blackburn, B.A., Corr. Mem 479 On a Collection of Land and Freshwater Shells from Queensland. By C. Hedley, F.L.S., and C. T. Musson, F.L.S 551 VI. CONTENTS. PART III. (continued). PAGE Descriptions of some new Species of Pulmonate Mollusca from Australia and the Solomon Islands. By J. C. Cox, M.D., F.L.S. (Plates xx. and xxi.) 565 Description of a new Diplomorpha. By W. D. Hartman, M.D. (Communicated by J. C. Cox, M.D., F.L.S.) (Plate xxi., figs. 1, 3, and 6) 571 Some New South Wales Plants illustrated. No. i. By R. T. Baker, Assistant Curator, Technological Museum, Sydney. (Plate xxxvn.) 572 Elections and Announcements 308, 382, 383 Donations 308, 383 Notes and Exhibits 307,381,574 PART IV. (Issued June 10th, 1892.) PAGE Revision of Australian Lepidoptera, By E. Meyrick, B.A., F.L.S. Partv. ... 581 On two undescribed Exudations from the Leguminosse. By J. H. Maiden, F.L.S., &c 679 The Land Molluscan Fauna of British New Guinea. (Anatomical Supplement, continued from p. 115.) By C. Hedley, F.L.S. (Plates xxxviii.-xlii.) 685 On a Form of Womerah, or "Thro wing-stick," presumed to be undes- cribed. By R. Etheridge, jun. (Palaeontologist to the Australian Museum, and Geological Survey of N. S. Wales) 699 In Memoriam— Sir William Macleay, Kt., F.L.S Donations Notes and Exhibits President's Address Office bearers and Council for 1892 , M.L.C 705 579,683 682, 703 706 723 Title-page, Contents, Index to Vol. vi. (2nd Ser.), List of Plates, a Corrigenda. LIST OF PLATES. VOL. VI. (SECOND SERIES). Plate i.— Stilbite from the eruptive rocks of Jamberoo, N.S.W. Plates II. -in. — Tasmanian Land Snails. Plates iv. -viii. — Australian Aboriginal Stone Weapons and Implements. Plates ix. -xii. and xn. bis. — British New Guinea Land Mollusca. Plate xiii. — Euowenia robusta, De Vis. Plates xiv.-xviii. — Illustrative of the Geology and Petrography of Bathurst. N.S.W. Plate xix. — Marine Mollusca : Eulimella moriiliforme, Hedley and Musson, and Conus (Chelyconus) worcesteri, Brazier. Plates xx. -xxi. — Australian and Solomon Islands Pulmonate Mollusca. Plate xxii. — Incisors of Sceparnodon ramsayi, Owen. Plates xxiii.-xxiv. — Queensland Extinct Avian Remains. Plate xxv. — Australian Silurian Trilobites. Plates xxvi. -xxviii. — Australian Chlorsemids. Plates xxix. -xxxvi.— Australian Aboriginal Implements. Plate xxxvii. — Acacia prommens, A. Cunn. Plates xxxviii. -xlii. — Anatomy of New Guinea Land Mollusca. CORRIGENDA. Page 51, line 11 — for E. gneorifolia read E. cneorifolia. Page 53, line 25 — for E. melissodora read E. melissiodora. Page 123, line 22 — for Haliastur leucogaster read Haliastur leucostemus. Page 474, line 11 — for Steliotropium tenuifolium read Heliotropium TENUIFOLIUM. Page 558, line 6— for P. pedicula read Pupa pedicula. Page 563, line 2 — for B. pryamidatus read B. pyramidatus. (See also Errata on p. 698. ) ^E^OOEEIDIDSr&S OF THE LINNEAN SOCIETY OF n^E'^y SOUTH WALES. WEDNESDAY, 28th JANUARY, 1891. Dr. J. C. Cox, Vice-President, in the Chair. Mr. Walter S. Duncan, Inverell, was elected a member of the Society. DONATIONS. Two Pamphlets entitled — " Notes on West Australian Oology, &c." and "Notes on the Zoology of Houtman's Abrolhos." By A. J. Campbell, F.L.S. From the Author. ", Journal of the Marine Biological Association of the United Kingdom." From the Associatio7i. "The Victorian Naturalist." Vol. VIII., Nos. 8 and 9 (Dec, 1890, and Jan., 1891). From the Field Naturalists' Club of Victoria. 2 DONATIONS. " Proceedings of the Zoological Society of London for 1890." Part 3 ; " Abstracts " for Nov. 8th, and Dec. 2nd, 1890." From the Society. Asiatic Society of Bengal— " Journal." Vol. LI. (1882), Part i., Nos. 1-4, Part ii., Nos. 14; Vol. LII. (1883), Part i. Nos. 1-4, Part ii., Nos. 1-4 (in 2 without title page and Plates i., ix. and x.); Vol. LIII. (1884), Part L, Nos. 1, 2, and Special No. ( = Nos. 3 and 4), Part ii., Nos. 1-4 ; Vol. LIV. (1885), Parti., Nos. 1-4, Partii., Nos. 1-4 ; Vol. LV. (1886), Part i., Nos. 1-3, Part ii., Nos. 1 5 ; Vol. LVII. (1888), Part ii., No. 5 ; Vol. LVIII. (1889), Part i., Suppl. ( = Part 4); Vol. LIX. (1890), Part i., Nos. 1 and 2, Part ii., No. 1 and Suppl. No. 1 ; "Proceedings" for the years 1882- 1886, and 1890, Nos. 1-3. From the Society. 11 Comptes Rendus des Seances de l'Academie des Sciences, Paris." Tome CXI., Nos. 14-20. From the Academy. "Geological and Nat. Hist. Survey of Canada. — Catalogue of Canadian Plants. Part V. — Acrogens." By J. Macoun, M.A. ; " List of Canadian Hepaticse." By W. H. Pearson. From the Director of the Survey. "American Naturalist." Vol. XXIV., No. 286 (Oct., 1890). From the Editors. "Johns Hopkins University Circulars." Vol. X., No. 83 (Nov., 1890). From the University. " U. S. Department of Agriculture. — Insect Life." Vol. III., No. 3 (Nov., 1 890). From the Secretary of Agriculture, Washing- ton. " Proceedings of the United States National Museum." Vol. XIIL, Nos. 822-824, 826-828 (1890). From the Museum. "Feuille des Jeunes Naturalistes." No. 242 (Dec, 1890). From the Editor. " Societe Botanique de Lyon. — Bulletin Trimestriel, 1889, No. 3." From the Society. DONATIONS. 3 " The Perak Government Gazette." Vol. III., No. 34 (Dec. 12, 1890). From the Government Secretary. " The Journal of Comparative Medicine and Veterinary Archives." Vol. XL, No. 11 (Nov., 1890). From the Editor. "Zoologischer Anzeiger." XIII. Jahrg., Nos. 350 and 351 (Dec, 1890). From the Editor. "Bulletin de la Societe Royale de Geographie d' Anvers." Tome XV, Fasc. 1 (1890). From the Society. " Bulletin de la Societe Beige de Microscopie. xvn.me Annee, No. 1 (Oct., 1S90). From the Society. " The Spectrum — An Australian Journal of Science." Vol. I., No. i. From the Editor. " New Zealand Journal of Science." Vol. I., new Series, No. 1 (Jan., 1891). From the Publisher, " Reichenbachia — Orchids Illustrated and Described." By F. Sander. Second Series. Vol. I., Parts 1 and 2 ; " Berliner Entomologische Zeitschrift." LIIL Band, 1 Heft (1890); "Stettiner Entomologische Zeitung." 51 Jahrg., Nos. 4-6 (1890). Also the following Journals, Magazines, &c, for 1890, as pub- lished : — " The Athenaeum ;" " Annals and Magazine of Natural History ;" " English Mechanic ;" " Entomologist ;" " Entomolo- gists' Monthly Magazine;" "The Field ;" " Geological Magazine ;" " The Ibis ;" "Journal of Anatomy and Physiology ;" "Journal of Botany ;" " Nature ;" " Proceedings of the Royal Geographical Society ;" " Quarterly Journal of Microscopical Science ;" " Science Gossip ;" "The Zoologist ;" " The Scottish Geographical Magazine." From the Hon. Sir William Macleay, F.L.S., M.L.C. " Records of the Geological Survey of India." Vol. XXIIL, Part 4 (1890). From the Director. "Department of Mines — Memoirs of the Geological Survey of N.S.W. Palaeontology, No. 7. The Mesozoic and Tertiary Insects of N.S.W." By R. Etheridge, Junr., and A. S. Olliff. From the Minister for Mines. 4 DONATIONS. " Reports of Geological Explorations (New Zealand) during 1887-88"; " Twenty -third Annual Report on the Colonial Museum and Laboratory" (New Zealand); "Report on a Journey from Adelaide to Hale River." By H. Y. L. Brown. From R. Etheridge, junr., Esq. "Grundziige der Botanik" (1877). Von Dr. C. Luerssen ; " Methodisches Lehrbuch der allgemeinen Botanik" (1880). Yon Dr. W. J. Behrens ; " Lehrbuch der Botanik fur Mittelschulen " (1876). Yon Dr. K. Prantl; " Grundziige der Zoologie" (1876). Yon Dr, C. Claus ; " Entwickelungsgeschichte der Wirbelthiere " (1861). VonH. Rathke; "Zur Morphologie der monokotylischen Knollen- und Zwiebelgewachse " (1850). Yon T. Irmisch ; "All- gemeine Befcrachtungen iiber die Triebe der Thiere " (1773). Yon H. S. Reimarus ; " Geologie oder Entwickelungsgeschichte der Erde und ihrer Bewohner" (1858). 2 Yols. Yon Sir Charles Lyell ; " Recherches Helminthologiques en Danemark et en Islande" (1866). Par H. Krabbe ; One bound volume of Pamphlets on biological subjects. From Oscar Katz, Esq., M.A., Ph.D. " Bulletin de la Societe Imperiale des Naturalistes de Moscou." Annee 1890, No. 2. From the Society. " Annales de la Societe Royale Malacologique de Belgique." T. XXI Y. (1889); Proces-verbeaux des Seances" (August, 1889, to August, 1890). From the Society. 11 Australasian Journal of Pharmacy." Yol. VI., No. 1 (Jan., 1891). From the Editor. PAPER READ. NOTES ON THE OCCURRENCE OF STILBITE IN THE ERUPTIVE ROCKS OF JAMBEROO, N.S.W. By B. G. Engelhardt. (Plate i.) This zeolite is mentioned by Prof. Liversidge, M.A., F.R.S., as having been found in a few New South Wales localities,* but, as far as I am aware, it has not yet been reported from Kiama and its vicinity. While collecting specimens of the different eruptive rocks in the neighbourhood of Jamberoo, I observed a bright red mineral in some pieces of a dense, fine-grained basalt, obtained from the northern flank of " Wallaby Hill," an eminence on the south of the Minnamurra Valley. Shortly after, I found the same mineral in a porphyritic dolerite, not far from the locality just mentioned. In either the basalt or dolerite, the mineral in question occurs almost invariably in more or less circular crystalline masses, from 5 to 100mm. in diameter; but in one instance it was found to have filled up a small fissure in the surrounding rock, having spread itself as a crust of small crystals over the adjacent surfaces of the matrix. The cleavage planes of the individual crystals in the stellate groups (in which form the mineral occurs most frequently) show the characteristic pearly lustre of stilbite. The crystals are flat prisms whose cleavage is so perfect, parallel to their shorter planes, that it was easy to split off laminse sufficiently thin and transparent for microscopical observation by transmitted light. In colour the mineral varies from a yellowish-white to purple- brown, but the most usual tints are flesh-red, scarlet, and brick-red. * Minerals of N.S.W. , 1888, p. 187. D NOTES ON THE OCCURRENCE OF STILBITE, Its hardness, tested at right angles to its cleavage, is above 3, calcite being easily scratched by it. Want of a sufficiently delicate balance prevented me from making an attempt to deter- mine its specific gravity. The crystals are subtranslucent to opaque. Before the blow-pipe the mineral gave the following reactions : it exfoliated, swelled up into curiously shaped white ramifications, fusing easily to an opaque white enamel. Moistened with cobalt nitrate and strongly ignited, the assay gave a somewhat dull blue mass, indicating presence of alumina. In the closed tube it yield eel water readily. The powdered mineral was decomposed by hot hydrochloric acid, leaving after evaporation the silica as a some- what slimy powder. The filtered solution, after super-satuiation with ammonia, gave with oxalic acid a distinct white precipitate of oxalate of lime. I next examined a thin cleavage section under the microscope. Its appearance by central illumination when magnified 50 diameters is shown in PI. I., fig. 1. Bright orange bands, more or less recti- linear, and of varying degrees of intensity of colour, traverse the section of the mineral parallel to each other. (The greater or less vividness of the tint, no doubt, depends on the thickness of the section at various points, as well as on the mass of pigment injected.) These bands are crossed at right angles by others having either the same colour or a brownish tint. Between these coloured stripes appear colourless or faintly yellow portions, while everywhere, but especially in the deeply coloured regions, groups of black dots are visible, often arranged into lines running parallel to the orange bands mentioned above. Irregularly scattered over the colourless or faintly yellow parts of the slide are small patches of a bright yellow or orange tint, encircling a greater or less number of small black particles. At the point marked A in PI. I., fig. 1, these crystallites are arranged in lines concentric with the contour of the surrounding colour patch. Prof. Zirkel, in his " Beschaffenheit der Mineralien und Gesteine,"* states that these * Op. ciL, p. 167. BY B. G. ENGELHARDT. 7 black spots are the pigment which gives to stilbite its various shades of colour, and that they are microscopic crystals of either gothite, limonite, or perhaps red hematite, the mineral itself being originally colourless. PL I., fig. 2, represents an almost colourless section of stilbite, only a few yellow spots being visible, but the orange bands are almost totally absent, while comparatively few of the black crystallites are present. In a similar specimen, unfortunately lost by an accident in mounting, I observed some beautiful dendrites of a bright sulphur-yellow, and as perfectly developed as the macroscopic dendrites of manganese oxide so often found on the cleavage planes of schists, slates, «tc. The occurrence of these dendritic aggregates tends to prove, to my mind, conclusively, that the pigment of red stilbite entered the mineral by the process of secondary infiltration of a solution of hydrated per-oxide of iron, derived from the hydration of the magnetite in the surrounding basalt. The solution has spread itself between the thin laniime composing the prisms of stilbite, having found its way through the hair-like cracks (due to shrinkage caused by the drying-up of the fluid in which the zeolite crystal- lized) which can be seen traversing the section in irregularly curved lines. Between crossed Kicols the mineral proved to be anisotropic, suffering four extinctions in a complete revolution of the section. It is also very slightly pleochroic, the different tints darkening feebly when the section is rotated above the fixed polariser. NOTES AND EXHIBITS. In reference to Mr. Engelhardt's paper Mr. David remarked that the occurrence of stilbite at Kiama was very interesting. He too had noticed the presence of the same mineral with remarkable persistence in the lavas which are interbedded with the productive coal-measures of Raymond Terrace, Maitland, and Greta, which lavas are probably of near about the same age as those of Kiama. Mr. R. L. Jack, F.G.S., the Govt. Geologist of Queensland, has recorded the occurrence of a similar mineral in the lavas which there underlie the Bowen River coal-field. This is the first record however of the occurrence of stilbite at Kiama. Mr. Brazier exhibited a lamp of native pottery from the Pelew Islands, collected by Dr. John Rabe. Also on behalf of Mr. R. C. Rossiter, Corr. Member, of Noumea, New Caledonia, two very fine examples of Cyproza tigris, Linne, having the dorsal surface of a fine bright yellow colour with very few spots, the margins having the spots very small and of a beautiful cream colour. Mr. Froggatt exhibited two specimens of a grasshopper (Fam. Gryllidce), taken at Double Bay, which frequents the flowers of Eucalyptus corymbosa in order to capture the common honey bees (Apis mellificaj visiting the blossoms. Also, a few specimens of Hymenoptera received from the Rev. T. Blackburn, B.A., who captured them on the snow at altitudes of from 5,000 to 6,100 feet, during his trip to the Australian Alps, Victoria, last November. Mr. Musson exhibited on behalf of Mr. Moseley of Narrabri, an example of the freckled duck, Stietonetta ncvvosa, Gould, obtained at Narran, near Angledool, not far from the Queensland border, early in December last. The Rev. R. Collie showed an interesting collection of sponges from Wollongong, and a fine specimen of Gorgonia from Thursday Island. WEDNESDAY, 25th FEBRUARY, 1891, The Hon. James Norton, LL.D., M.L.C., in the Chair, Mr. C. J. K. Uhr was present as a visitor. DONATIONS. Pamphlet entitled "The Lejeuneae of Lindenberg's Herba- rium." By W. H. Pearson. From the Author. "Journal of the Royal Microscopical Society, 1890." Part 6 (Dec). From the Society. " Bulletin de la Societe Beige de Microscopie," xvnme. Annee, No. 2 (1890). From the Society. " The Perak Government Gazette." Vol. iii., No. 35 (Dec, 1890). From the Government Secretary. " Report upon the State Forests of Victoria." By G. Perrin, F.L.S. From the Author. " Hints for the Preservation of Specimens of Natural History " (4th edition). From the Trustees of the Australian Museum. "Journal and Proceedings of the Royal Society of N.S.W." Vol. XXIV. Part 1 (1890). From the Society. " Proceedings of the American Academy of Arts and Sciences." Vol. XXIV. (1888-89). From the Academy. 10 DONATIONS. " The Journal of the Cincinnati Society of Natural History." Vol. xiii., No. 2 (1890). From the Society. " Bulletin of the Museum of Comparative Zoology at Harvard College, U.S.A." Vols. I., II. (wanting No. 1), III. (wanting Nos. 1, 2, 5, title-page and index), IV., V. (wanting Nos. 2-5), VI., VII. (No. 1 and index), VIII., IX., X., No. 1 (1863-82), and XX, Nos. 3 and 4 (1890); "Annual Report, 1889-90." From the Curator. "Johns Hopkins University Circulars." Vol. X., No. 84 (Dec, 1890). From the University. "The American Naturalist." Vol. XXIV., No. 287 (Nov., 1890). From the Editors. Department of Agriculture, U.S.A. — "Insect Life." Vol. ill., No. 4 (1890). From the Secretary of Agriculture. " The Canadian Record of Science." Vol. IV., No. 4 (1890). From the Montreal Nat. Hist. Society. " The Journal of Comp. Medicine, and Veterinary Archives." Vol. XI., No. 12 (1890). From the Editor. U.S. National Museum. — "Proceedings." Vol. XIII., Nos. 821 and 825; "Report," 1887-88 (Ten Parts, pp. 3-84, 93-104, 107-111, 225-386, 387-491, 493-529, 531-587, 589-596, 597-671, 677-702). From the Museum. " L'Academie Royale de Copenhague — Bulletin pour 1890." No. 2 (Mars-Mai). From the Society, " Zoologischer Anzeiger." xiii. Jahig. No. 352 (Dec, 1890). xiv. Jahrg. No. 353 (Jan., 1891). From the Editor. " Comptes Rendns des Seances de l'Academie des Sciences de Paris." Tome cxi., Nos. 21-23 (Nov. and Dec, 1890;. From the Academy. DONATIONS. 11 Three Government Reports— [1] " Food-Fishes of Queensland" (1889); [2] "Pearl and Pearl-shell Fisheries of Queensland" (1890); [3] " Beche-de-Mer and Pearl-shell Fisheries of N. Queensland ;" also two Pamphlets, " Presidential Address to the Queensland Royal Society" (Nov., 1890); and "Oysters and Oyster-culture in Australasia." By W. Saville-Kent, FLS., F.Z.S., &c. From the Author. "Victorian Naturalist." Vol. XII., No. 10 (Feb., 1891). From the Field Naturalists' Club of Victoria. "Feuille des Jeunes Naturalistes — Catalogue de la Bibliotheque." Fasc. No. 10. From the Editor. "The Darwinian Theory of the Origin of Species." By F. P. Pascoe, F.L.S. From the Author. "Transactions of the Entomological Society of London, 1890." Part iv. (Dec, 1890). From the Society. " Leitfaden fiir den Unterricht in der Zoologie." Von Dr. Otto Vogel; "Vorwort zu dem Leitfaden;" "Zoologische Zeichentafeln;" "Leitfaden, &c., in derBotanik;" "Die Cryptogamen Deutschlands." Von Dr. O. Wiinsche (1875) ; " Pflanzen-Tabellen." Von Dr. A. B. Frank ; " Synopsis der Pflanzenkunde " (1847). Von Prof. J. Leunis ; "Die Lebenden Schnecken und Muscheln der Umgegend Berlins." Von J. P. E. Stein. From Dr. Katz. "Agricultural Gazette of N.S.W." Vol. II. Part 1 (Jan., 1890). From the Director of Agriculture. "Journal of Conchology." Vol. vi., No. 8 (Oct., 1890). From the Conchological Society of Great Britain. "The Minerals of New South Wales, etc." (1888). By A. Liversidge, M.A., F.R.S. ; " Records of the Geological Survey of N.S.W." Vol. II. Part ii. (1890). From the Department of Mines. 1 2 DONATIONS. " Bulletin de la Societe Zoologique cle France." Tome XV., Nos. 8 and 9 (1890). From the Society. "Bollettino dei Musei di Zoologia ed Anatoinia Comparata della R. University di Torino." Vol. V., Nos. 74-93 (1890). From the Museum. " Department .of Agriculture, Brisbane — Bulletin." Nos. 1-6 (1890). From the Under-Secretary for Agriculture. " List of named Insects in the South Australian Museum, Adelaide." Third Series. From J. G. 0. Tepjier, Esq., F.L.S. 13 NOTES ON A SMALL COLLECTION OF HYMENOP TERA FROM NARRABRI, N.S.W. By Walter W. Froggatt. I beg to offer the following brief notes, bearing chiefly on the subject of geographical range, on a small but very interesting collection of bees and wasps obtained in the neighbourhood of Narrabri, N.S.W., by Mr. C. T. Musson, F.L.S, and forming part of the general collection exhibited by him at the meeting of this Society in December last. As far as it goes it is a typical collection of Australian hymenoptera ; no species of Formicidce or Mutillidce are represented in it, and Mr. Musson, to whom I am indebted for the specimens, tells me that he only took such wasps and bees as thrust themselves under his notice while collecting land molluscs. As little has yet been done in systematically collecting hymenoptera in this part of New South Wales, I have no doubt, judging from the specimens now before me, that it would prove a rich field to anyone devoting his time to this group. Altogether, twenty-four species are contained in Mr. Musson's collection ; but several of them are not in sufficiently good condition for determination. 1. Gen. et sp. incert. (Fam. Ichneumonidce, subfam. Oryptmse). This species also occurs at Adelaide, S.A., in Victoria, and at Sydney, where it is plentiful, and is parasitic on the larva of a common garden moth. 2. Gasteruption sp. (Fam. Evannidw). A species which also occurs about Sydney. 3. Chrysis sp. (Fam. Chrysididce). A species which has a wide range from Sydney northwards. Several species are parasitic in the clay nests of Alastor, and other genera of Eumenidte. 14 ON A SMALL COLLECTION OF HYMENOPTERA FROM NARRABRI, 4. Scolia CORONATA, Smith. A large black wasp, with beautiful deep blue wings ; one of our commonest Sydney insects, but with an extensive range. 5. Pompilius aurifrons, Smith. Also an insect with a very wide range, having been recorded from all parts of Australia. 6. Pelopo:us l^tus, Smith. Two specimens of this handsome slender-bodied wasp ; unlike the members of most of the genera of the family S]ihegididce, it constructs clay cells, which it provisions with small spiders. It has a considerable range along the eastern coast, and is a common insect in the dry western or central lands. 7. Ammophila suspiciosa, Smith. This species has a range from South Australia to Queensland, and is another of the common wasps in the western country, where, in company with the last species, it may be taken hovering over the flowers along the banks of creeks and lakes. 8. Pison spinol,e, Shuckard ; and | q "D ,T»T,^T^.^^ a -4-u c (Farm Larridce.) y. P. marginatus, Smith. J v ; Members of this genus construct very thin clay nests of an oval or elongate form, which they store with lepidopterous larva? ; the young wasp larva?, when full grown, form strong cocoons in which to undergo their metamorphosis. Both the above species are recorded from Adelaide and Sydney. 10. Odynerus concolor, Saussure. ) 11. O. bicolor, Saussure. j Both species range from North Queensland to New South Wales. 12. Disccelius sp.? I have this species also from Adelaide and Sydney. 13. Polistes humilis. This large red-coloured paper wasp takes the place of our P. variabilis, Sauss., in the western parts of New South BY WALTER W. FROGGATT. 15 Wales, and is much dreaded by bushmen on account of its severe sting. It is most likely this species which stung Major Mitchell ("Three Expeditions," &c, Vol. I., p. 104), and not Abispa australiana, Mitch., as generally stated. Several of the most interesting specimens belong to the family Thynnidce ; and though so many species of this large family are restricted in their range, no part of Australia is without some representative of this fine group. Australia is the home of Thynnus, the only other parts of the world in which the species are found being several of the islands in the Pacific, and the western coast line of South America. According to Cresson's Catalogue the genus does not extend into North America. 14. Thynnus sp. (3 2s). The females being wingless, often quite unlike in markings, and not one-third the size of, the males, it is almost an impossi- bility to determine a species from female specimens alone. 15. Thynnus pulchralis, Smith. This beautiful wasp was described from South Australia, and is figured in Brenchley's "Cruise of the Curacoa" (1873). It has also been recorded from Rockhampton and Port Denison, Queensland, and the northern parts of New South Wales. 16. Thynnus Brenchleyi, Smith. This distinctly marked insect was named by Smith after Brenchley, who captured it at Champion Bay, W.A., and presented the specimen to the British Museum. This species is not represented in any of the collections in Australia, and Mr. Musson's capture of it on the opposite side of the continent, almost in the same latitude (Champion Bay being about 100 miles north of Narrabri), is a very remarkable discovery. While referring to this group I should like to call attention to another species described and figured in Brenchley's work, under the name T. conspicuus. Smith, from the N.W. coast of Australia. A number of specimens of this species are in the Macleay Museum, which were taken by me feeding on the flowers of 16 ON A SMALL COLLECTION OF HYMENOPTERA FROM NARRABRI. Melaleuca leucadendron growing on the banks of the Fitzroy River, near Derby, N. W. Australia. Previous to this, Smith (Trans. Ent. Soc. London, 1868, p. 233) had described a very different species from South Australia under the same specific name. Both specimens are in the British Museum, so that it is hard to understand why the error has not been rectified before. I should propose that the northern species, which evidently has no right to the specific name cons2ncuus, should be re-named Smithii. 17. Xylocopa muscaria, Smith. Four specimens (£) of the common carpenter-bee, which con- structs nests in the flower stalks of the grass-trees {Xantlior- rhcea) ; found all over New South Wales. 18. Xylocopa ^estuans, Latr. Four specimens of this larger species, which ranges into North Queensland. 19. Crocisa nitidula, Fabr. This handsome spotted bee has a wide lange, from South Australia to North Queensland. 20. Anthopora pulchra. Three specimens of this fine blue-banded bee, which is found over the greater part of Australia. 21-23. Megachile spp. Five specimens of leaf-cutting bees, referable to three species, all of which are also to be found about Sydney. 17 DESCRIPTION OF A NEW SPECIES OF TORTRIClDiE. By J. Hartley Durrant. (Communicated by A. Sidney Ollij}.) tortricim:. GRAPHOLITHINJE. PAL^OBIA, Meyr. Pal^obia longestriata, sp.nov. Antennce pale cinereous. Palpi ochreous-brown, paler above. Head and thorax ochreous-brown. Forewings elongate, costa slightly arched at base, apical margin sinuate, apex hardly produced : ochreous-brown, above the fold a longitudinal white line extending from the base, becoming abruptly attenuated before attaining a somewhat triangular white spot, situated above the fold near the anal angle. This spot is convex towards the base of the wing, and very slightly concave externally ; above and before the triangular spot is a small round white spot ; between this spot and the longitudinal line the ground-colour is slightly darker, the basal two-thirds of the wing below the costa are slightly clouded with whitish, the veins themselves being indicated by the brownish ground-colour ; two distinct brown spots, separated by the paler colour, are situated on the apical third of the costa, the outer of which is continued across the wing as an indistinct fascia, becoming most noticeable on the outer side of the triangular spot ; this darker colouring is margined by a very indistinct paler fascia ; cilia slightly paler than the ground-colour with a darker line running through them near their base. 2 18 DESCRIPTION OF A NEW SPECIES OF TORTRICIDiE. Hinclwings cinereous, slightly darker externally ; cilia cinereous, faintly tinged with ochreous and having a darker line running through them near their base. Abdomen greyish-fuscous ; anal tuft paler. Legs pale greyish-fuscous. Exp. al.t 15-17 mm. Hab : Tumut (C. W. Peel), Mt. Kosciusko, N.S. Wales, 6000ft., March, 1889 (R. Helms, Aust. Mus.). Type, <-££, Mus. Walsingham. This species agrees in neuration and structure with the typical forms, but can hardly be said to have the apex of the forewings produced. It is a very distinct species. 19 ON THE ANATOMY OF SOME TASMANIAN SNAILS. By C. Hedley, F.L.S., Corr. Mem. (Plates ii. and in.) The material for this paper was chiefly collected by myself during a short holiday excursion to the Island of Tasmania. To Mr. W. F. Petterd, of Launceston, the well-known conchologist, and to Mr. W. R. Dyer, of Scottsdale, I am under great obligations; without the kind assistance of these gentlemen my scientific booty would have been but small. As far as the shells are concerned, the molluscan fauna of Tasmania has been closely studied, but information regarding structural details of the animals is much needed. For until we have acquired this knowledge, no classification worthy of the name can be constructed. Full particulars of the shells whose soft parts I am about to describe will be found in the Monographs of Dr. Cox, Messrs. Legrand and Petterd, and further notices in the writings of Reeve, Semper, Quoy and Gaimard, Tenison- Woods, Tryon, Pilsbry, &c. It will therefore be unnecessary for me to add bibliographical references in dealing with these well- known species. Bulimus dufresni, Leach. This handsome shell has attracted the notice of every scientific visitor to the island. The figure of the animal in the " Voyage of the Astrolabe," Vol. n, pi. x., fig. 1, is unsatisfactory, showing as it does a well-marked pedal groove where none exists. I have therefore re-figured it in the accompanying plate. From a specimen of the small variety common round Hobart I drew up 20 ON THE ANATOMY OF SOME TASMANIAN SNAILS, the following description : — Animal 35 mm. in total length and, measured a little posterior to the tentacles, 6 mm. in breadth, and the same in height; colour slate, sometimes with a yellowish tinge on the body, darkening into black on the tentacles, greyish- yellow on the sole of the foot and on the mantle-collar ; the muzzle and anterior dorsal area (in short, 4that space enclosed by the two conspicuous furrows which run back from the lips to the mantle, which I will call the facial area) are ornamented by long narrow tubercles, arranged in about a dozen longitudinal rows, the sides and tail are divided into irregular polygonal spaces, which are partially subdivided and finely granulated ; the tail tapers slightly, is rounded posteriorly, and never keeled ; the tentacles are 10 mm. long, tapering gradually, finely granulated, the bases 3 mm. apart, the terminal bulb is asymmetrical, being only developed on the under side ; the genital orifice appears just beneath the groove bounding the facial area, 5 mm. behind the risrht oculiferous tentacle. Habits bold and active ; the tail is the first portion to emerge from the mantle and the last to disappear within it ; when the animal is in motion the axis of the shell is oblique to that of the body, the initial whorl being carried on the right side of the tail, which projects 2 or 3 mm. beyond it, the penultimate whorl resting on a wide, smooth, saddle-like space. It haunts the under side of logs, stones, fallen tree-ferns, &c, and ranges over the whole island. Another animal, from the Kinga- rooma district, measured, total length 46 mm., height 12 mm., length of tentacles 15 mm. The egg has been described and figured by Tenison- Woods (P.L.S.N.S.W., Vol. m., p. 91, pL vii., fig. la.). Specimens of the egg of this species, which I received from Mr. Petterd, do not quite accord with the observation quoted ; they are regularly oval, not so rounded as the figure, pure white, shining, minutely granular, the granulations viewed through a lens recalling those on an emu's egg ; major axis, 11mm.; minor axis, 8 mm. Mr. Dyer tells me that they are BY C. HEDLEY. 21 deposited in the ground under a log during October and November. The radula and genitalia have been figured by Semper, who incorrectly locates the species in the Sandwich Islands (Reis. im Philip. Vol. in., p. 123, pi. xii., figs. 23, 24, 25, and pi. xvi., fig. 7). The jaw I find to be boomerang-shaped, smooth, arcuate, ends rounded, with no median projection. Bulimus tasmanicus, Pfeiffer. This species is arboreal in its habits, and confined to a narrow belt of coast country. I was unable to visit its haunts and view the creature alive. Mr. Petterd kindly presented me with some alcohol specimens, from Maria Island, for dissection. He informs me that the animal is greenish-grey in colour, with flat, thin, pointed tail. This species, as might be inferred from the resemblance of the shells, closely approaches B. mastersi, Cox, (P.R.S.Q., Yol. vi., p. 250, pi. xiv.) in its dentition. The jaw is thin, membranous, semitransparent, light horn-colour, crossed obliquely on each side by about sixteen delicate folded ribs denticulating both margins ; these ribs run obliquely towards the median line of the jaw, and, meeting in the centre, form a median triangular space. The radula is composed of 130 rows of 84-5-1-5-84; of these the rachidian presents a single, ovate, lanceolate cusp, whose extremity reaches the margin of the basal plate ; this is flanked by five laterals having the distal posterior angle of the basal plate briefly alate and a small cusp developed upon the outer base of the main cusp, whose stout ovate blade just projects over the base of attachment ; seven rows from the centre the marginal type appears, the main cusp becoming bicuspidate ; on approaching the edge of the ribbon the teeth grow smaller, and assume that slender, sinuous aspect so characteristic of extreme marginals. The distinguishing features of the genitalia are : — penis-sac long and slender, produced into an extremely long flagellum, which is coiled up at the tip, and apparently without a 22 ON THE ANATOMY OF SOME TASMANIAN SNAILS, retractor muscle ; prostate aud vagina spirally twisted, the former connected by a short but much convoluted hermaphrodite duct with the ovotestis, a compact bilobed body. Anoglypta launcestonensis, Reeve. This species is confined to a mountainous district in the N.E. of the island. I collected it among the fern-tree gullies on Mr. Dyer's estate, where it was plentiful. The animal was not very different in form from B. dufresni, and measured (total length) 47 mm. ; tentacles 10 mm. ; colour dark chestnut shaded to choco- late on the back, tentacles shaded to black on the tips. Habits very shy and timid, crawling very slowly; it frequents damp places under logs and decaying stems of tree-ferns. The fire and axe of civilisation threaten to diminish the already narrow range of this splendid and interesting species ; but its haunts are so rugged and remote that I do not fear its extinction. Mr. Dyer says that an egg resembling, though different from, that of B. dufresni is laid by this mollusc at similar seasons and in similar localities. The jaw is rather straight and broad, irregularly slightly dentate on the cutting margin, smooth on the convex margin, closely and finely transversely striate. The teeth are arranged in 160 rows of 40-6-1-6-40 ; the rachidian cusp is single, straight, slender, smaller than the laterals, the cutting point reaching four-fifths of the length of the widely expanded basal plate ; the laterals possess a single stout cusp with a rounded cutting point overlapping the posterior margin of the basal plate, whose distal margin is alate ; from these the marginals differ in the longer more inclined cusp, the extreme marginals having their cusps low and irregularly notched. The genitalia are characterised by a long, flattened, twisted penis-sac, retractor muscle inserted near apex, and the spermatheca on a long slender duct. BY C. HEDLEY. 23 Rhytida lampra, Pfeiffer. This carnivorous mollusc is generally distributed throughout Tasmania. Mr. Petterd relates its cannibal propensities as similar to those of its Queensland relative (P.R.S.Q., Vol. v., p. 152). The specimen I examined measured, when expanded, 40 mm. from head to tail ; but I am informed that the species in other localities attains larger dimensions. Colour, orange-brown on the edge of the foot, passing through chestnut-brown to black upon the head and tentacles, mantle-collar orange-brown. Down the centre of the back runs a small groove from the shell to between the tentacles, and on either side of this the facial area is ornamented by three longitudinal rows of small round tubercles ; tail and sides divided into irregular polygonal spaces which are partially sub-divided and finely granulated. The tail is extremely short, hardly passing the shell, while the anterior portion of the body, as in other Agnatha, is capable of a leech-like extension, a provision for enabling the creature to stretch itself into the remoter whorls of a shell whose inhabitant it may be engaged in devouring. Habits bold and active ; crawls more rapidly than the HelicidcB usually do. The radula is constructed of 75 rows of 40-0-40, is strap-shaped, measuring 15 mm. in length and 4 in breadth, each half-row curving from the margin and meeting its fellow at an acute angle in the centre of the ribbon ; the rachidian (as is usual in the genus) has been lost, the two inner- most laterals are usually rudimentary, but the third attains its full development, having a basal plate the shape of the sole of a man's foot and a straight slender cusp in the same plane, the whole tooth resembling a clasp knife with the blade open ; the teeth continue of the same size to the margin, the pattern differing slightly by the basal plate of the remotest becoming triangular. In the genitalia the penis-sac is slender; a sessile globose sperma- theca is inserted upon a short pyriform vagina. 24 ON THE ANATOMY OF SOME TASMANIAN SNAILS, Helicarion verreauxi, Pfeiffer. This is the southernmost member of its genus, the "enfant perdu" of its race. The other species that have been associated with it, fumosa, Tenison-Woods, and milligani, Pfeiffer, may be referred to Paryphanta until their position be authoritatively- decided by scalpel and microscope. Like B. dufresni and R. lampra, this species ranges over the entire island, hiding in dry weather under logs and stones. The animal measures 37 mm. in total length, resembles in form the continental species, //. robustus, Gould, and H. hyalinus, Pfr., but differs in colour, the entire body being coal black with the exception of the tail, whose extremity is lemon-yellow. The jnw is arcuate, with central projection, smooth, ends rounded. The radula consists of 130 rows of 70-17-1-17-70 ; the rachidian is broadly reflected and overlaps the basal plate laterally for more than half its length, then is divided into a slender lanceolate median cusp exceeding in length the basal plate and two small accessory cusps with well developed cutting edges ; the laterals have the outer posterior margin of the basal plate very short and square, the main cusp is slightly larger than that of the rachidian and bears at its outer base a well developed accessory cusp, which increases as the teeth retreat ; the marginals possess slender inclined knife-like cusps which become bind as the border of the ribbon is approached. As regards the genitalia, the penis-sac is long and slender, twisted into a figure of eight, and terminating in a round knob, retractor muscle inserted on the distal curve of the 8 ; vas deferens con- torted on its departure from the prostate ; spermatheca large, slightly dilated, acuminate above, connected with the genital system by a short wide duct. Cystopelta petterdi, Tate. A figure and description of this mollusc will be found in the preceding volume of these Proceedings (PI. i., p. 44). I took the BY C. HEDLEY. 25 opportunity of comparing Tasmanian specimens with those collected by Mr. Helms on Mt. Kosciusko, also with some taken by Mr. Musson at Eallarat, and I find no differences of specific importance between them. In Tasmania I gathered the species under the guidance of the gentleman whose name it bears, from the original locality, Cataract Hill, near Launceston. I also found it at Dennison Gorge and on Mr. Dyer's estate, Scottsdale. In the first locality the animals lived under logs, upon a dry, scantily-timbered hillside ; in the two latter places they inhabited damp fern-tree gullies. As the consequence, probably, of more favourable surroundings, those from the moist situations were larger in size and lighter in colour than the type variety. Mr. Petterd pointed out that its habits were gregarious. A dozen likely pieces of fallen timber might be searched without result, yet the next might conceal a score of these slugs. The larger form was pale greenish-yellow spotted with black ; the black spots on the shield are most irregular in size and distribution. The figure I published from a spirit specimen gives no idea of the animal in life, therefore I append a second sketch taken from a living individual on the spot. EXPLANATION OF PLATES. Plate ii. R., Rachidian tooth; o.t., ovotestis ; h.d., hermaphrodite duct; ov. oviduct; c.o., common orifice; sp., spermatheca ; p., penis-sac; r.m.p. retractor muscle of penis. Fig. 1. Jaw of Bulimus dufresni. Magnified. Fig. 2. Jaw of Bulimus tasma,7iicus. Magnified. Fig. 3. Central portion of radula of ditto. Magnified. Fig. 4. Genital system of ditto. Fig. 5. Jaw of Anoglypia lauucestonensis. Magnified. 26 ON THE ANATOMY OF SOME TASMANIAN SNAILS Plate ii. (continued). Fig. 6. Central portion of radula of ditto. Magnified. Fig. 7. Genital system of ditto. Fig. 8. Radula of Rhytida lampra. Magnified. Fig. 9. Genital system of ditto. Fig. 10. Jaw of Helicarion verreauxi. Magnified. Fig. 11. Central portion of radula of ditto. Magnified. Fig. 12. Genital system of ditto. Plate hi. Fig. 1. Animal of B. dufresni. Fig. 2. Animal of A. launcestonensis. Fig. 3. Animal of It. lampra. Fig. 4. Animal of H. verreauxi. Fig. 5. Animal of G. petterdi. 27 STRAY NOTES ON LEPIDOPTERA. By A. Sidney Olliff, Government Entomologist, New South Wales. No. 2. A short time ago, Mr. Lionel de Niceville, the author of that admirable handbook " The Butterflies of India, Burmah, and Ceylon," in offering some friendly criticism of my small pamphlet on Australian Butterflies,* published by the Natural History Association (now the the Field Naturalists' Society) of New South Wales, and originally written for a weekly newspaper, suggested to me that the butterfly which, for many years past, has been known in our local collections as Libythea myrrha, Godart, was in reality quite distinct from that species. Mr. de Niceville, I believe, arrived at this conclusion from a comparison of the rough but characteristic figure of the Australian insect, contained in the pamphlet in question, with typical specimens of L. myrrha ; and I must confess that the suggestion did not cause me much surprise, as I had noticed some months previously, when examining a series of Libythecv from New Guinea, that certain specimens from Port Moresby, although agreeing in every particular with the Australian species, exhibited certain marked differences from the true L. myrrha. The genus Libythea appears to have been first recorded as belonging to the Australian fauna by Sir William Macleay, who called attention to the presence of a species of the genus (referring to the insect as Libythea myrrha) in a small collection of Cape York lepidoptera exhibited at a meeting of the Entomological Society of New South Wales in September, * "Australian Butterflies : a Brief Account of the Native Families, &c." Sydney, 1889. 28 STRAY NOTES ON LEPIDOPTERA, 1866.* Mr. G. Masters! included the species in his Catalogue of Butterflies, on the authority of specimens obtained at Somerset by- Mr. J. A. Thorpe, the taxidermist of the Australian Museum, during a collecting trip which he made to Cape York in the year 1867-68, and others subsequently collected in the same locality by Mr. Darnel. The remains of one of the former specimens is in my possession owing to the kindness of Mr. Masters, and I am in a position to definitely state that the insect which has passed for many years in Australia as Libythea myrrha is quite distinct from that species, and is identical with the insect here descril ed under the name Libythea Nicevillei. It is hardly a matter of surprise that, once made, the mistake as to the identity of our butterfly should hitherto have escaped detection, as the species is apparently very rare, only one or two specimens existing in collections. As some doubts have been raised as to the claims of the genus Libythea to be regarded as indigenous in Australia, it may be well to state that there can be no question as to the authenticity of the specimens obtained by the collectors mentioned above. LEMONIID^E. LIBYTH.EIN.E. Libythea Nicevillei, sp.n. Head, palpi, antennae, and body dark brown. Wings above dull smoky-brown, darker outwardly. Forewing inclining to dull ochreous-yellow at base and on basal two-thirds of inner margin, with the following bluish-white markings : — an elongated spot near costa about two-thirds from the base, divided by a dark vein, an ovate spot at end of discoidal cell, an elongate spot between veins 4 and 6, divided by vein 5, and a much larger rounded spot between veins 2 and 4, beginning at a point just beyond the cell *Trans. Ent. Soc. N.S. Wales, I. p. lxi. t " Catalogue of the described Diurnal Lepidoptera of Australia." Sydney, 1873. BY A. SIDNEY OLLIFF. 29 and extending towards the hind margin ; the latter spot divided by vein 3 at about its anterior fourth. Hindwing inclining to dull ochreous-yellow at the base, hind margin darker, with a broad oblique ochreous-yellow discal band or fascia, which extends posteriorly from vein 7 ; this band is of uniform width through- out, clearly defined in front, and gradually effaced behind. Under- side : — Much paler in colour than above. Forewing beyond the anterior markings (which correspond with those of the upper side) and on the inner margin silvery-grey, the apical portion mottled with small irregular transverse brown lines ; the discoidal cell occupied by a rather bright ochreous-yellow patch, which is somewhat suffused on the costal margin. Hindwing silvery-grey, indistinctly irrorated with purplish, and closely striated with brown ; with indications of two indistinct lighter oblique bands extending from the costal and hind margins respectively to the inner margin near the base. Cilia ochreous-brown. Expanse 53-55 mm. Somerset, Cape York, N. Australia ; and Port Moresby, British New Guinea. As stated before, this species of Libythea has been confused with a species (L. myrrha, Godart), with which it has little in common, ever since the first specimens from Cape York were recorded; but it will be evident upon even the most cursory comparison of the Aus- tralian form and L. myrrha that the species are abundantly distinct. In the Australian insect the fore wings are comparatively broader, with the hind margins less distinctly angulated below the apex, and the disk ornamented with whitish markings. The charac- teristic transverse streak in the cell of the forewing of L. myrrha is replaced in our species by a single rounded spot, in which respect it resembles the Indian L. rohini, Marshall,* described from the Khasi Hills. The latter species, indeed, would appear to be its nearest ally, although sufficiently distinguished by having the markings on the hindwing white like those of the forewing, and by the presence of additional spots near the costa of the former. * Journ. A. S. Bengal, xlix., p. 248 (1880), and de Niceville, "Butterflies of India, &c," II., p. 303, pi. 24, fig. 114, ? (1886 . 30 STRAY NOTES ON LEPIDOPTERA. HESPERIID^E. Euschemon RafflesijE, Macleay. E. albo-omatuS) var.nov. A striking modification of this remarkable Hesperid was obtained at Dunoon, Richmond River, during the month of April by Mr. R. Helms, in which the fore and hindwings are intense blue-black in colour, and the markings silvery-white instead of bright yellow as in the typical form. Except for the presence of a larger number of blue scales near the hind margin of the forewing (in the shape of a gradually narrowing band) and on the underside, the type and the modification here recorded agree marking for marking. An examination of some thirty specimens of Euschemon Rafflesice, from various localities, has revealed little or no tendency to vary in colour or marking, a fact which increases the interest attaching to the Dunoon specimen. 31 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN ABORIGINAL STONE WEAPONS AND IMPLEMENTS. By R. Etheridge, Jun., &c. (Paleontologist to the Australian Museum, and Geological Survey of New South Wales.) (Plates iv. -viii.) I am able to continue* investigations in this interesting subject through the kindness of several collectors, notably Sir W. Macleay, Dr. J. C. Cox, and Mr. C. W. de Vis, M.A., Curator of the Queens- land Museum. To the first I am indebted for the loan of nine stone weapons from " various parts of N. S. Wales," which were exhibited at this Society's Meeting on October 31st, 1883, by Mr. J. G. Griffin, C.E.f; to the second for a series of N. S. Wales tomahawks in different stages of preparation ; and to Mr. De Yis for a valuable selection of implements from the Queens- land Museum, Brisbane. There will also be found descriptions of the remainder of Mr. W. W. Froggatt's specimens from North- west Australia ; some from the Mining and Geological Museum, and a few others from different sources, which will be suitably acknowledged later on. I am indebted to my colleague Mr. T W. Edgeworth David for assistance in determining the minera- logical composition of the rocks used for the weapons, but as microscopic sections could not be made, the determinations are tentative only. x. — Knives. (PI. v, fig. 1 ; PI. vi, fig. 1 ; PI. vii, fig. 1.) Mr. De Vis has forwarded to me five knives, three of the general type of those I lately described as used in the Mika operation, J but differing in an important particular ; one of a * Proc. Linn. Soc. N. S. Wales, 1890, v. (2), Pt. 2, pp. 251, 289, and 367. i Ibid. 1884, viii, p. 442. X Loc. cit. 1890, pp. 251, 289. 32 AUSTRALIAN ABORIGINAL STONE WEAPONS AND IMPLEMENTS, flesh-coloured quartzite resembling therein some spear-heads to be noticed later on ; and another made of glass (PI. VI., fig. 1). Four of the knives are mounted, and the fifth has been, as evinced by the still adherent gum at the butt. Two of the mounted, and the unmounted knife from " Northern Queensland," are flaked from an impure, streaky, flint-like quartz, but which does not produce so fine and cutting an edge as those formerly described. They are, with one exception, of a rather different type to the latter. It will be remembered that one of those in the Australian Museum was described as more scalpriform than the others, thicker along the back than at the cutting edge, the surface gradually sloping off from the former to the latter, without any angularity. The three knives in question are of this character, altogether stronger and thicker than the Mulligan River Alika-knife. Evans figures! such a knife in the Christy Collection from Queensland, with a " thick somewhat rounded back, not unlike that of an ordinary knife-blade, the butt being covered with fur and wound round with string." The unmounted knife is four and a quarter inches long, and three-quarters of an inch broad at the back, and is the widest. The cutting edge, in two instances is sharp but uneven, in the third thicker, and blunter. Both lateral surfaces in one are smooth and unworked, but in the other two one face is facetted by chipping. As regards the hafting, the butts of the two mounted specimens have been surrounded with a fibre, the lower end covered with a piece of canvas, or worn blanket, and a handle so formed. Over the fore part of this, native string has been wound, and this coated with one of the black gum preparations so commonly used by the Aborigines. The string used on one of the knives is made of yellow fibre, but round the other a much finer string made of hair, perhaps human, has been wound alternately with the fibre-string. In this instance the gum coating has been continued up the broad back of the knife, nearly to its apex (PI. vii., fig. 1), and gives one the idea of a protection to a fore-finger, T Ancient Stone Implements, &c, Gt. Brit., 1S72, p. 265, f. 198. BY R. ETHER1DGE, JUN. 33 supposing the knife to be so held. The length of the knives, complete, is respectively eight inches, and seven and a half. The surface of the flints is smooth and shining. When describing the Mika-knives a short time ago, T surmised that they were also used for other purposes, and I have since been informed that such knives are employed in fighting, practically in a kind of duello. The glass knife (PI. vi., fig. 1), also from "Northern Queensland," is exceedingly interesting, consisting of a small piece of bottle-glae-s chipped to an oval form, and mounted with black gum to a small wooden handle, which Mr. F. Turner, of the Department of Agri- culture, tells me is probably made of the Acacia sentis, a very porous wood. The latter is to some extent split, and conveys the idea that the glass is inserted between the halves, which are also partially wound round with fine string of native manufacture. The entire weapon is six inches in length, but the glass blade extends beyond the gum mounting for one inch only. Several similar knives are figured* by Mr. T. Wilson from Southern Utah and other localities, hafted with wood, the attachment being made with bitumen. One is flint, and the others are made of jasper. Another knife of obsidian has the base wrapped in otter skin. The general appearance of these knives closely resembles those now described, particularly the glass knife. f The quartzite knife is granular and deep flesh-coloured (PI. v., fig. 1). It is very interesting as being intermediate in form and character between the Mika-knives, | formerly described by me, and a spear-head from Torres Straits, in the Australian Museum, to which my attention was called by my colleague Mr. Brazier. That it is a knife, however, appears tolerably certain from the form of the * A Study of Prehistoric Anthropology. — Handbook for Beginners. U.S. Nat. Mm. Report, 1887-88, p. 639, f. 14, p. 641, f. 75-78. f Glass has probably been used by the Aborigines for a long time. The York's Peninsula Tribe made their knives of shells and afterward of glass, "for they related that they used occasionally to find bottles on the beach many years before the whites came to reside in South Australia." Curr's Australian Race, 1886, n., p. 143. X Proc. Linn. Soc. N. S. Wales, 1890, v. (2), Pt. 2, PI. 9 and PI. II, figs. 8 and 9. 3 34 AUSTRALIAN ABORIGINAL STONE WEAPONS AND IMPLEMENTS, gum handle, which resembles that of the Mulligan River knife* ; whilst the blade is more akin to one of those from " Northern Queensland," in the Australian Museum, f angular in the middle line of one face, flat on the other. The specimen is five and a half inches long, but the apex is a little broken. The cutting edges, although sharp, have not that degree of fineness visible in the Mulligan River knife, which may be described as razor-edged. The edges in the present case are uneven and a little notched, and would inflict a jagged and awkward wound. It is generally comparable to the knife figured by Smyth, used by the natives of Booloo and Cooper's Creek, { except that ours does not possess a handle. It is from the Gregory River. xi. — Spear-heads from Kimberley. (PL v., fig. 2 ; PI. vi., fig. 2 • PI. vii., figs. 2 and 3 ; PI. viii., figs. 1-3.) Mr. W. W. Froggatt has lent me twelve spear-heads, brought by himself from the Lennard River. They are similar to those lately described by me from the Ord River, || now in the Mining and Geological Museum. One is of bottle glass, one of a chocolate- brown, close-grained, ferruginous clay shale, another of an olive- green banded quartzite, two of opaque white chalcedonic quartz, similar to those before described, two of clear rock crystal, and five of opaque milky- white quartz. As regards shape there are two forms, the elongately lanceolate, and the more or less foliolate, corresponding to those already received from the same district. Examined more in detail there are four types, thus : — a. Elongately lanceolate, slightly angular on both faces. b. Ditto, angular on one face. c. Ditto, flat on both faces. d. Foliolate, slightly angular on one face, and thicker than a-c. The bottle glass spear-head, the green quartzite, and three of the milky quartz heads are chipped to an exceedingly fine apex, especially the second one mentioned. The head formed of * Loc. cit. pi. 9. f Ibid. pi. 11, figs. 8 and 9. X Aborigines of Victoria, 1878, I., p. 380, f. 200. || Records Geol. Survey N. S. Wales, 1890, II., Pt. 2, p. 61, pi. 6. BY R. ETHERIDGE, JUN. 35 chocolate-brown clay shale, the green quartzite, those of opaque white jasperoid quartz, and the rock crystal heads are plain edged and without serrations, and so also are three of the milky quartz, but two of the latter and (hat formed of bottle glass are beauti- fully and finely serrated. The whole of the faces are facetted by percussion, even in the milky quartz and rock crystal spear-heads, although the facets on the former of these are less apparent than on the others. When we take into consideration the refractory conchoidal fracture of quartz and glass, the chipping of these spear-heads is a remarkable feat, more especially that of the milky quartz heads with their serrations. This teething is not pointed, or " dog-toothed," but each serration is in most instances square, or at right angles, and corresponds exactly to the figure given by Rear- Admiral King, and referred to in my previous account. The following table gives the measurements of the eleven spear- heads obtained by Mr. JFroggatt, with their forms and mineralcgical composition. No. Form. Length. Breadth. Thickness. Rock, etc. 1. EloDgately lanceolate, angled on one face. 3|in. lfin. £in. Bottle glass ; edges serrated. 2. Ditto. 3g H f White opaque milky quartz ; edges serrated. 3. Ditto. H x4 i White opaque milky quartz. 4. Elongately lanceolate, angled on both faces. 3| i Ditto; edges serrated. 5. Ditto. 2£ 1 1 *8 1 White opaque milky quartz. 6. Foliolate. n § Smoky quartz. 7. Ditto. h I 1 Ditto ; apex broken. 8. Elongately lanceolate, flat on both faces. 2§ n i 4 Dirty olive-green banded quartzite ; apex very sharp. 9. Ditto. 3| 1 1 A4 1 Brown-red (ferruginous) clay shale. 10. H 1 White chalcedonic quartz. 11. n 1| 1 Ditto ; poor specimen. .''(') AUSTRALIAN ABORIGINAL BTQNE WBAPONS and IMPLEMENTS, Thene figures show bow very uniform in general the size of the spi'.u- heads is ; or, when there is a gradation, it is regular and gradual. 'Tin' eleventh specimen is rough and unfinished, and the twelfth is hardly worth recording in detail. Somewhat similar spearheads are figured from the United States l.y Mr. T. Wilson, especially one with square jagged edge* and marginal facets.* Mr. Froggatt informs me that the Leonard River Blacks use these sjHMi- heads almost wholly in personal attaek and oneounters, seldom in sporting, and that these extremely tine heads are carried about unmounted, and placed in position on the spears as required. They are carried in a chignon, made of emu feathers matted together, and attached to the hack hair. The hair is worn long, similar to that of the Cooper's Creek natives, who do it up in a head net.t Inside this chignon the spear heads are wrapped in paper-bark. Thanks to Mr. Froggatt 1 have much pleasure in exhibiting one of these ingenious contrivances. The Lennard River Aborigines, like those of the Victoria River described by Mr. T. B tines, and referred to in my former paper On similar spearheads, place themselves in a squatting position when preparing these weapons, and use the ball of one of their great toes as a cushion, against which the stone to be chipped is placed and then struck. In addition to the foregoing, Mr. r-Yoggatt has also brought a curious stone weapon which appears to be a partially prepared spear head of a rather different type (PI. IV., tig. 1). A small transversely elongated and roughly rounded piece of black lami- nated jasperoid clay stone, arched on one side, and flat, or a little concave on the other, has been roughly chipped along the arched sides producing irregular eonchoidal facets. The weapon is three and a half inches long, and one inch wide at the base. The flattened under surface has not been worked at all, but presents the naturally worn surface of the stone. The central line of the * A study of Pr«Ma&orio Anthropology. — Bandbook for Beginners. ^'.^ yat. Mat. Report, 1887 88, p. 688, f. 1% + A. W, Howitt in Smyth's Aborigines of Victoria, 1S7S. ii., p. 801. BY H. ETHERIDCE, JUN. 37 arched side bears traced of longitudinal facets. The apex is obtuse and chipped, and the section irregularly triangular. If a spear-head, and I do not see any other possible interpreta- tion, it is certainly different to any others I have seen from Northern Australia, and will probably form a separate group, following Nos. 1 and 2 in the classification given by me in the first account of the Kimberley spear-heads.* At the same time there is a certain resemblance between it and the fine long axe- head of flesh-coloured quartzitei lately figured. f xii. — Spear-heads from Settlement Creek and Nicholson River. (PI. iv., figs. 2 and 3.) Tiie three spear-heads now to be noticed are a part of the Queensland Museum Collection forwarded to me by Mr. De Vis. Two are made of a semi-granular flesh-coloured quartzite,| similar to but coarser than the knife first described from the Gregory River, and perhaps more akin to the stone of the axes from "North Queensland," in the Australian Museum. Both these spear-heads have still adhering to their bases portions of the gum used in mounting. One of them is six and three-quarter inches long, by one and a quarter wide ; the other is shorter, six and a quarter long, and broader, being one and five-eighths wide. The section is triangular, flat, or partially concave on one facp, acutely angular and sharp in the middle line on the other, tapering to a moderately acute apex. The third spear-head is composed of a dark chocolate felsite with flesh-coloured orthoclase, and is slightly enlarged at the base * Records Geol. Survey N. S. Wales, 1890, n., Pt. 2, p. 65. + Proc. Linn. Soc. N. S. Wales, 1890, v. (2;, Pt. 3, PI. 12, f. 14. % The blacks near the Daly River, Arnheim's Land, are said by A. C. Gregory to possess spears formed of reeds with "large heads of white Bands tone" (Journal* of Australian Exploration, by A. C. and F. T Gregory, 1884, p. 158, 8vo, Brisbane). It is possible that this rock may be similar to the quartzite deseribed above. The use of the white man's materials for aboriginal weapons is again illustrated in the case of spear- heads. In the Queensland Court of the Indian and Colonial Exhibition of 1880 were righting spears from the Ktheridge River, pointed and barbed with pieces of telegraph wire, exhibited by Mr. W. Samwell, the Warden at Georgetown. 38 AUSTRALIAN ABORIGINAL STONE WEAPONS AND IMPLEMENTS, to afford a good grip to the cementing medium, portions of which still remain. It is six and three-eighths inches long, by one and two-eighths wide, with an acute apex. The median angular line is very acute, but at the base a large chip has been taken out of it (PI. vi., fig. 3). One of the flesh-coloured heads, the shorter and broader, has a similar piece flaked off, but the longer of the two bears a narrow longitudinal facet, extending almost the whole length of the weapon, whilst at the apex there is a small supple- mentary triangular facet, and a larger one at the base. The cutting edges of all are sharp, but those of the felsite spear-head are naturally sharper ; they are not strictly parallel edged in either, but there is a slightly flexuous or curved outline, which throws the apex more or less to one side, and renders it excentric to some extent. This curved appearance is well illustrated by Smyth in the case of a " knife" from the Paroo River,* the base of which is wrapt in 'possum fur, but otherwise the resemblance to our spear-heads is very strong. A glance will at once show how different these are to the Kimberley spear-heads of glass and varieties of quartz, but of the general type of the small head of black jasperoid claystone obtained by Mr. Froggatt. In fact, the latter and the three spear- heads now under discussion will probably form a separate section in the classification of Australian stone spear-heads lately proposed by me,f between Nos. 2 and 3, and may be defined thus : — No. 2a. Double-edged, three-faced, elongately-lanceolate, slightly curved heads, with a more or less entire margin. Nicholson River and Settlement Creek, North-west Carpentaria At the same time their resemblance to the flesh-coloured axe- heads from "North Queensland"! must not be forgotten any more than in the case of the small Kimberley spear-head of jasperoid claystone. A comparison with these renders it clear that these spear-heads are rather longer weapons, more slender for their size, and with the somewhat curved lateral margins, which do not exist in the axe-heads. * Aborigines of Victoria, 1878, i., p. 380, f. 201. + Records Geol. Survey N. S. Wales, 1890, n., Pt. 2, p. 65. t Proc. Linn. Soc. N. 8. Wales, 1890, v., Pt. 2, p. 368, pi. 12, f. 14. BY R. ETHERIDGE, JUN. 39 xiii. — Talismanic Stones, or Teyl. (PI. via., figs. 4-6.) The Teyl from Cooktown,* in the cabinet of Mr. G. Sweet of Brunswick, Melbourne, consisted of a mass of quartz crystals in one piece, and free of gum mounting. The present fine example (PI. VIII., fig. 4) is again from Northern Queensland, and from the Queensland Museum Collection, and consists of two prismatic crystals of clear quartz united at the base by gum, and set along- side of one another. The cementing medium is rendered more coherent by being mixed with hair, which seems to be human. It would be exceedingly interesting to ascertain from what portion of the pilous system this hair is derived. According to Police- Trooper Gason the Dieyerie Tribe of South Australia use a belt of human hair called Yinka,j "ordinarily three hundred yards in length, and wound round the waist." It is said to be greatly prized owing to the difficulty of procuring the necessary material. Mr. Howitt also mentions that the Cooper's Creek natives wear a " very long cord wound round and round the waist like a belt,"J and I am informed by my colleague Mr. J. E. Carne, who has travelled extensively throughout that region, that the hair so used is pubic, obtained from the women, and only worn by the old men of the tribe. I quote these facts with the view of suggesting that the hair used in this tael may be similarly derived. Mr. E. C. Blomfield, of Boorolong, has very kindly forwarded to my colleague Mr. W. Anderson, of the Geological Survey, three other Taels. The first of these consists of a small six-sided prism of slightly smoky quartz, with a fairly perfect termination. The crystal is one and a quarter inches long. The second stone is an irregularly shaped piece of clear white rock crystal (PI. vin., fig. 5) excentrically fractured, about half the size of a walnut. The third and fourth charms consist of opaque coffee-coloured quartz, one in the form of an irregular rhomb (PI. VIII., fig. 6), the other * Ibid. p. 370 + The Native Tribes of S. Australia, edited by J. D. Woods, 1879, p. 289 • and Smyth's Aborigines of Victoria, 1878, I., p. 281. % Smyth's Aborigines of Victoria, 1878, n., p. 302. 40 AUSTRALIAN ABORIGINAL STONE WEAPONS AND IMPLEMENTS, a transversely elongated pebble, two and a half inches long.* The angles of these stones are all well rounded, and they had evidently undergone considerable attrition before selection for their abori- ginal use. The longest diameter of the largest is two and a half inches. Touching these stones, Mr. Blomfield makes the following remarks in his letter accompanying them : — "The specimens were obtained by my brother from an old blackfellow at Mount Mitchell, Eastern New England, who told him that they had belonged to the last ' medicine man ' of the tribe, and as he was the last represen- tative, and not a ' doctor,' he had no use for them, and seemed rather glad at being relieved of their charge. He told my brother on no account to let any blackfellow know that he had given them to him. I know that the ' medicine men ' in all the tribes carry these stones and attach great importance to them, never showing them to a white man. I have been told by the blacks that if a gin dared to look at them, she would be instantly killed. They pretend to work all sorts of cures with these stones, and I believe they are never shown except at their Bora meetings. These are the only ones I ever saw, except once, when an old 'medicine man' was doctoring one of my black boys, and pretended to suck one out of his head. I believe they descend from father to son, and those I send you have most likely been in use for generations. The blacks always carry them in a small dilly-bag under the arm, together with the bones of dead relatives." xiv. — Gouge. (PI. v., fig. 6.) Gouges, such as the specimen exhibited, and sometimes called chisels, seem now to be very rare, and little has been written on them. The present specimen, from " Northern Queensland," was forwarded by Mr. De Vis, and also forms a portion of the Queens- land Museum Collection. It appears to me that the term gouge is preferable to that of chisel, and such will be here adopted. The late R. Brough Smyth saysf that this implement is " formed of a * According to Smyth, some of the white toe£-stones carried by the Victorian "Doctors" are called Warra-goop. {Aborigines of Victoria, 1878, i., p. 464.) t Aborigines of Victoria, 1878, I., p. 379, f. 199. BY R. ETHERIDGE, JUN. 41 fragment of quartzite, firmly set into the end of a rough handle of wood, and secured in its place by gum." His example was seventeen inches in length. In the tool from the Queensland Museum more of the quartzite head is exposed than in Smyth's figure, and the handle, thirteen inches in length, is proportionately more slender and better finished, producing altogether a handier though slighter instrument. The handle is gently curved in the plane of the breadth of the chisel, so that the leverage of the operator's hand is much more increased than if the stick were straight. It is thickest in the middle, tapering off at both ends, and is composed, Mr. F. Turner tells me, probably of a species of Myoporum, one of the sandal-woods of the interior. The small stone-head was produced by chipping, the lower side convex, the upper more or less flattened, and the cutting edge gently curved. The gum securing the head to the handle is curiously put on. On the convex face, or that side answering to the convexity of the handle, the largest amount of surface is left exposed, the edge of the gum curving from the cutting edge in a concave sweep. On the other side, or that answering to the concavity of the handle, the edge of the gum in the centre is horizontal, with a little lappet on each side projecting forwards. According to Smyth* this implement is " commonly used by the natives inhabiting the country north-east of the Grey Ranges." It is also met with in West Australia, for this author figures a larger instrument of a similar nature, but differing in detail. He remarks on thisf : — " Below the lump of gum in which the stone is fixed, the implement for the length of an inch and a half is smooth ; then there is a hollow, and below that the round stick is grooved longitudinally, so as to enable the mechanic to obtain a firm hold of it. The wood is not heavy "but very hard, and of a dark reddish-brown colour. It is used for cutting and shaping- boomerangs, shields, clubs, &c, and is employed also in war and hunting. It is thrown in such a manner as to turn over in its flight, and if it strikes a man or a kangaroo death is certain." Smyth adds that the gouge resembles the implement used by the Grey * Aborigines of Victoria, 1878, I., p. 379. t Ibid. p. 340, f. 150. 42 AUSTRALIAN ABORIGINAL STONE WEAPONS AND IMPLEMENTS, Ranges natives, but is a more finished tool. Herein it resembles the specimen from the Queensland Museum, but it stands to reason that so much slighter an instrument as the latter could not produce the effects ascribed to the heavier weapon from West Australia. Iu the last-named province it is called Dow-ak or Dhabba.* Tn his account of the Aborigines of Cooper's Creek,f Mr. A. W. Hovvitt refers to these gouges, and says that they are used " by the workman sitting down upon the ground, holding the piece of wood between his feet, and then adzing it, with the tool held towards him." xv. — Spike or awl. (PI. vi, fig. 3.) Although not a " stone" implement, this very interesting object, from amongst Mr. Froggatt's Kimberley gatherings, is worthy of notice. It appears to be of the nature of a spike or awl, and is formed of an old-fashioned cast-iron four-sided nail sharpened at one end and inserted in the proximal half of a human left radius, and the point of insertion coated in the usual manner with gum. I am ignorant whether human bones were much employed by our Aborigines in their manufactures, but I believe not, although bones of marsupials are to some extent, especially for some of their smaller implements. Mr. Froggatt is unable to explain explicitly to what use this implement was put, but it may have been used as a carver in the ornamentation of wooden implements, or simply as an instrument for piercing or boring. EXPLANATION OF PLATES IV. -VIII. Plate iv. Fig. 1. — Spear-head, partially prepared, of black laminated jasperoid clay- stone ; Kimberley. Coll. Froggatt. Fig. 2. — Spear-head, granular flesh-coloured quartzite ; Settlement Creek. Coll. Queensland Museum. Fig. 3. — Spear-head, dark chocolate felsite, with flesh-coloured orthoclase ; Nicholson River. Coll. Queensland Museum. * Curr figures a very different form of chisel, consisting of a facetted stone mounted on a rough wooden handle by the aid of wax and string. [Australian Race, 1886, i., 11th plate.) t " Notes on the Aborigines of Cooper's Creek." Smyth's Aborigines of Victoria, 1878, n., p. 300. BY R. ETHERIDGE, JUN. 43 EXPLANATION OF PLATES (continued). Plate v. Fig. 1. — Knife, granular flesh-coloured quartzite ; North Queensland. Coll. Queensland Museum. Fig. 2. — Spear-head, elongately lanceolate, with serrated edges, of white opaque milky quartz ; Kimberley. Coll. Froggatt. Fig. 3. — Gouge; Northern Queensland. Coll. Queensland Museum. Plate vi. Fig. 1. — Knife, bottle-glass mounted on wooden handle (Acacia sentisj with black gum ; Northern Queensland. Coll. Queensland Museum. Fig. 2. — Spear-head, elongately lanceolate ; of bottle-glass serrated on edges ; Kimberley. Coll. Froggatt. Fig. 3. — Awl (?) formed of a cast-iron four-sided nail inserted in the proximal half of a human left radius ; Kimberley. Coll. Froggatt. Plate vii. Fig. 1. — Knife, of streaky flint-like quartz, broad along the back, mounted in old canvas and twine, and secured with black gum composi- tion, which extends along the back ; Northern Queensland. Coll. Queensland Museum. Fig. 2. — Spear-head, elongately lanceolate, of white opaque milky quartz ; edges unserrated ; Kimberley. Coll. Froggatt. Fig. 3. — Spear-head, elongately lanceolate, and with a very sharp apex ; Kimberley. Coll. Froggatt. Plate viii. Fig. 1.— Spear-head, white opaque milky quartz, and edges serrated; Kim- berley. Coll. Froggatt. Fig. 2. — Spear-head, white chalcedonic quartz; Kimberley. Coll. Froggatt. Fig. 3.— Spear-head, foliolate, of smoky quartz ; Kimberley. Coll. Froggatt. Fig. 4. — Teyl, of two prismatic crystals of clear quartz, held together by gum cement mixed with hair ; North Queensland. Coll. Queensland Museum. Fig. 5. — Teyl, irregular shaped clear rock crystal ; New England. Coll. Mining and Geological Museum. Fig. 6. — Teyl, rhomb of opaque coffee-coloured quartz ; New England. Coll. Mining and Geological Museum. NOTES AND EXHIBITS. Mr. Etheridge showed a fine collejtion of aboriginal stone knives and implements in illustration of his paper. Mr. Olliff exhibited specimens of the butterfly described in his paper 44 NOTES AND EXHIBITS. Mr. Musson showed a named collection of about sixty species of New Zealand mosses. Mr. Hedley showed a colony of the nests of a trap-door spider, together with specimens of the animal, from Rose Bay. These spiders are abundant round Sydney, occurring even in the public parks of the city. A favourite spot for them is a patch of mossy earth in the crevice of a sandstone rock. The species exhibited forms a wafer-like lid, not as in some species a thick door like a gun-wad. The presence of several egg-bags in the larger burrows would indicate that the present month (February), is the breeding season. Mr. Fletcher exhibited two specimens of a land planarian {Bipalium keivense, Moseley), collected by Mr. J. J. Lister at Upolu, Samoa, under stones in the bush ; and a specimen of the same species from Eltham, Victoria, collected by Mr. W. W. Smith ; seeing that this planarian has now undoubtedly been introduced into many widely separated localities, and that the species of the genus whose habitats are certainly known belong to the Palsearctic and Oriental regions, there seems little ground for supposing it to be indigenous in Samoa. Also two instances of floral prolification in the "Flannel-flower" ( Actinotus helianthi), in which from the ordinary umbels spring, in one case about seven, in the other eleven small secondary umbels, each with its involucre of woolly bracts ; the specimens were gathered at Oatley a few days ago. Also living specimens of three species of frogs (Hyla ccerulea, H. peronii, and Limnodynastes sahninii, Stdr.), brought from Goangra on the Namoi, near Walgett, by Mi-. A. Carson ; these specimens offer fresh evidence of the very wide distribution of these three species in the interior of the colony ; in the specimens of L. salminii the dorsal stripes, which in spirit specimens are pink or rose-reel, are of quite a different tint, being a bright ochreons- yellow. Specimens of an interesting frog (Hyla gracilenta) from the Richmond River (collected by Mr. R. Helms) were also exhibited ; the species has not previously been recorded from N.S.W. 45 WEDNESDAY, 15th MARCH, 1891. The President, Professor Haswell, M.A., D.Sc., in the Chair. ?vlr. Oswald B. Lower, Adelaide, was elected a member of the Society. DONATIONS. 11 Gesellschaft fur Erdkunde zu Berlin — Verhandlungen." Bd. xvii., Nos. 8-10 ; " Zeitschrift." Bd. xxv., Heft 5 (1890). From the Society. "The Australasian Journal of Pharmacy." Vol. VI., No. 62 (Feb., 1891). From the Editor. " Report of the Board of Governors of the Public Library, &c, of South Australia, 1889-90." From the Board. " Zoologischer Anzeiger." xiv. Jahrg., Nos. 354 (Jan. 9, 1891), and 355 (Feb. 2, 1891). From the Editor. " Comptes Rendus de Seances de l'Academie de Paris." T. cxi., Nos. 24-26, T. cxii., Nos. 1 and 2 (1891). "Tables des C. R." T. ex. (1890). From the Academy. " Perak Government Gazette." Vol. IV., Nos. 1-3 (Jan., 1891). From the Government Secretary. "Zoological Society of London. — Abstracts." Jan. 6, 1891, Jan. 20, 1891, and Feb. 3, 1891. From the Society. " Reports and Statistics of the Mining Department, Victoria, for Quarter ended Dec. 31st, 1890." From the Secretary for Mines, 46 DONATIONS. " List of Canadian Hepaticse " By W. H. Pearson. From the Author. Asiatic Society of Bengal. — "Journal." Vol. lviii. (1889), Part i., No. 3 ; Part ii.5 No. 5 ; Vol. lix. (1890), Part ii., Nos. 2 and 3.—" Proceedings, 1890." Nos. 4-10 (April- December). From the Society. " Memoires de la Societe des Naturalistes de la Nouvelle Russie, Odessa." Tome XV., No. 2 (1890). From the Society. " Reichenbachia. — Orchids illustrated and described." By F. Sander. Second Series, Vol. I., Part 3. From the Hon. Sir William Macleay, M.L.C., F.L.S. " Entomologisk Tidskiift." Arg. x., Haft 5 (1889) ; Arg. xi., Haft 1-4 (1890). From the Entomological Society of Stockholm. " Annales de la Societe Geologique de Belgique." T. XVI., 2e Livr ; T. XVII., 4e Livr. From the Society. " Proceedings of the Royal Society of London." Vol. XXXIII., Nos. 218 and 219 ; XXXIV, No. 220. From the Society. "Proceedings of the United States National Museum." Vol. XII. (1889). From the Museum. " Bulletin of the American Museum of Natural History, New York." Vol. iii. (1890), No. 1, and pp. 113-128. From the Museum. " Memoires de l'Academie Imperiale des Sciences de St. Peters- bourg." viime- Serie, T. xxxvii., Nos. 8-10. From the Academy. " Verhandlungen der k. k. zoologisch-botanischen Gesellschaft in Wien." XL. Bd., Parts 1 and 2 (1890). From the Society. " The Pharmaceutical Journal of N.S.W." New Series, Vol. iii., Part 14 (Feb., 1891). From the Publishers. " Proceedings of the Second Congress of the Agricultural Bureau of South Australia." From the Secretary. DONATIONS. 47 "Annali del Museo Civico di Storia Naturale di Genova." Serie 2% Vols. VII.-IX. (1889-90). From the Museum. " Memoires de la Societe Zoologique cle France pour l'Annee 1890." T. iii., Part 4 ; "Bulletin." T. xv, No. 10. From the Society. " Report of the Auckland Institute and Museum for 1890-91." From the Secretary. " Notes on a new Tasmanian Plant of the N.O. Burmamiiacece." By Baron von Mueller, K.C.M.G., F.R.S. (Advance copy). From the Royal Society of Tasmania. "Victorian Naturalist." Vol. vii., Nos. 11 and 12 (in one, March and April, 1891). From the Field Naturalists' Club of Victoria. "Journal of Comparative Medicine and Veterinary Archives." Vol. XIL, No. 1 (Jan., 1891). From the Editor. " American Naturalist." Vol. XXIV., No. 288 (Dec, 1890). From the Editors. " Bulletin of the American Geographical Society." Vol. xxii., No. 4 (Dec, 1890). From the Society. " Bulletin of the Museum of Comparative Zoology at Harvard College." Vol. XX., Nos. 5-7. From the Curator. Pamphlet (4to) entitled " Sculptured Anthropoid Ape Heads, &c." By James Terry. From the Author. "Journal of Morphology." Vol. IV, No. 2 (Oct., 1890). Pamphlet entitled "Ueber Temnocephala, Blanchard." Von Max Weber. From Professor Haswell, M.A., D.Sc. " New Zealand Journal of Science." Vol. I., n.s., No. 2 (March, 1890). From the Publishers. "Insect Life." Vol. V., No. 3 (Jan., 1891). From the Secre- tary, U.S. Department of Agriculture. 48 DONATIONS. " Quarterly Journal of the Geological Society, London." Vol. XLVIL, Part 1 (1891). From the Society. " Annales de la Societe Beige de Microscopie," T. XIV. (1890); "Bulletin." T. XIV.-XVI. (1889-90). From the Society. " Report of the Second Meeting of the Australasian Association for the Advancement of Science, held at Melbourne, 1890." From the Association. 49 ON THE CLASSIFICATION OF EUCALYPTS. By W. Woolls, Ph.D., F.L.S. No genus, whether in reference to the identification of species, or the arranging of them in groups, has given more trouble to botanists than that of Eucalyptus. In the early days of the colony, when only a few species were known, it was considered that they might be divided into sections according to the shape of the operculum or lid of the flower-buds, and hence Willdenow in his Species Plantarum (1799) arranges all the species then known, amounting only to 12 in number, under the two divisions (1) operculo conico, and (2) operculo heniisphserico. With the exception of E. obliqua, L'Heritier (which, according to Baron F. von Mueller, was the first of all the species rendered known in Europe, having been collected in Tasmania shortly before the foundation of the colony of N. S. Wales), the species recorded by Willdenow were found in the primeval forests around Port Jackson, probably on the spot where Sydney now stands. His list is as follows : — (1) Operculo conico. E. robusta, Sm. E. resinifera, Sm. E. pilularis, Sm. E. capitellata, Sm. E. tereticomis, Sm. E. saligna, Sm. (2) Operculo hemisphserico. E. botryoides, Sm. E. obliqua, L'Her. E. hcemastoma, Sm. E. corymbosa, Sm. E. piperita, Sm. E. paniculate/,, Sm. (1) As far as can be ascertained from the short descriptions of these species, E. robusta is known by the popular name of "Swamp 50 ON THE CLASSIFICATION OF EUCALYPTS, Mahogany f E. pilularis, " Blackbutt "; E. tereticornis, " Grey Gum "j E. resinifera, first of all " Red Ironbark," but according to the Flora Australiensis "Red Mahogany"; E. capiteUata, the coast form of " Stringy-bark ;" and E. saligna, " Blue or Flooded Gum." The specific name is not appropriate, as the leaves are only exceptionally narrow and willow-like, being generally of the size and form represented in Baron Mueller's Eucalyptograplma (Vol. I., Dec. 2). (2) E. botryoides is known as "Bastard Mahogany"; E. hcemas- toma, "White Gum"; E. piperita, "Peppermint"; F. obli qua, the form of "Stringy-bark" common to Tasmania, Victoria, and the southern part of N. S. Wales ; E. corymbosa, " Blood-wood "; and E. paniculata, " White Ironbark." The plan of arranging the species according to the shape of the operculum was followed by D'Candolle with certain modifications ; and George Don, F.L.S., in enumerating the species in 1832, gives descriptions of them in a similar manner. He remarks, on the authority of R. Brown, that there were in New Holland (as Australia was then called) about 100 species, but "hardly half of tint number were rightly known." His list is as follows : — ■ I. Alternifoli^e. * Operculum conical, longer than the calycine cupula. 1 . E. comuta, Labill. 3. E. resinifera, Sm. 2. E. tereticornis, Sm. 4. E. longifolia, Link ** Operculum conical, equal in length to the cupula. 5. E%robusta, Sm. 11. E. virgata, Sieb. G. E. marginata, Sm. 12. E. micrantha, DC. 7. E. inerassata, Labill. 13. E. stellulata, Sieb. 8. E. persicifolia, Lodd. 14. E. oblonga, DC. 9. E, punctata, DC. 15. E. vbninalis, Labill. 10. E. acervula, Sieb. 16. E. capiteUata, Sm. 17. E. saligna, Sm. BY THE REV. W. WOOLLS. 51 ** * Operculum nearly conical or hemispherical, shorter than the cupula. 18. E. ovata, Labill. 27. E. Lindleyana, DC. 19. E. scabra, Dum. Cours. 28. E. botryoides, Sm. 20. E. pilularis, Sm. 29. E. piperita, Sm. 21. JE. radiata, Sieb. 30. E. pallens, DC. 22. E. stricta, Sieb. 31. E. obliqua, L'Her. 23. E. hcemastoma, Sm. 32. E. corymbosa, Sm. 24. E. ligustrina, DC. 33. E. paniculata, Sm. 25. E. amygdalina, Labill, 34. E. gneorifolia, DC. 26. E. ambigua, DC. 35. E. obtusifolia, DC. **#* Operculum hemispherical, much broader than the cupula. 36. E. gomphocephala, DC. ***** Mature operculum depressed in the centre, where it is umbonate, shorter than the cupula. 37. E. globtdus, Labill. II. Oppositifoli^e. 38. E. diver sifolia, Bon pi. 40= E. cor data, Labill. 39. E. pidvigeva, Cunn. 41. E. pidveridenta, Sims Doubtful Sjiecies. * Leaves opposite. 42. E. glauca, DC. 45. E. Cunninghami, Don 43. E. piurpurascens, Link 46. E. rigida, Hoff. 44. E. tuberculata, Parm. 47. E. Iiy per id folia, Dum. Cours. ** Leaves alternate. 48. E. microphylla, Willd. 51. E. elongata, Link 49. E. stenophylla, Link 52. E. media, Link 50. E. myrti folia, Link 53. E. reticulata, Link 54. E. umbellata, Dum. Cours. 52 ON THE CLASSIFICATION OF EUCALYPTS, No change was proposed for the classification of the Eucalypts until 1858, when Baron Mueller, in a paper read before the Linnean Society, suggested what may be termed the " cortical system," or a mode of arranging the species according to the structure of the bark, whilst at the same time he directed atten- tion to the valves of the fruit as affording an additional character for the identification of species. The Baron's monograph refers especially to the Eucalypts of tropical or sub-tropiachyphylla As a further assistance in describing species of Eucalyptus, the Baron next suggested that attention should be paid to the shape and opening of the anthers ; and in his Fragmenta Phytographiaz Auntralice, Vol. n. (1861), in which he devoted 38 pages to the consideration of the genus, he notes particularly the form and colour of the anthers. I am not aware that any previous botanist 54 ON THE CLASSIFICATION OF EUCALYPTS, had noticed with a view to classification that the variations in the stamens afforded a means whereby species might be grouped together; but Mr. Bentham, in arranging the species of Eucalyptus in the Flora Australiensis, not only described with accuracy the form of the anthers in each species, but made the variations a basis for the elaboration of his anthereal system. In the Flora, Vol. in. (1866), that eminent botanist tells us of the difficulties he had experienced in grouping the species. The comparative length of the operculum, the shape and position of the leaves, the character of the inflorescence and fruit, and the nature of the bark (of which in dried specimens he was totally unable to judge), had all failed to give him a satisfactory mode of classification. He says : — " I have thus been compelled to establish groups upon such characters as appeared to me the most constant among those which are supplied by the specimens : in the first place upon the form of the anthers, and secondly upon that of the fruit, and in some cases on the inflorescence or the calyx." It is evident that Mr. Bentham regarded his arrangement as simply provisional, for he expresses a hope that Baron Mueller, " from his knowledge of the gum-trees in a living state, might be able to devise a truly natural arrange- ment founded upon the proposed cortical system, or any other system which experience may induce him to adopt." So far as the stamens are concerned, Mr. Bentham grouped the species in the following manner : — Series I. — Renantherce, or such as have the anthers reniform or broad and flat. Series II. — Heterostemones, or those which have the outer stamens anantherous. Series III. — Porantherw, or those that have small and globular anthers. Series IV. — Micrantherce, or those having small globular anthers. Series V. — Normales, or those with oblong-ovate or nearly globose- anthers opening longitudinally. The other series are founded on the inflorescence, the shape of the calyx, the position of the valves in the fruit, and the nature of the fruit itself. BY THE REV. W. W00LLS. 55 In his preface to the Eucalyptoyraphia, 1880, (in which 100 species are figured and described), Baron Mueller has adopted Mr. Bentham's system, with certain modifications, for all the Eucalypts in Australia. Whilst still retaining the opinion that the "cortical system" is useful for work in the field, he recognises the anthereal system as most convenient for arranging specimens in the museum . Without, however, finally arranging his figures according to any fixed plan, the Baron says, that, on full consideration, he has deemed it best to leave the lithograms unnumbered, so that any one who " had occasion to utilise his work might arrange the plates either in accordance with the method derived from the stamens, or according to the cortical system, or, if he should think it more convenient, alphabetically." The anthereal system, as modified by the Baron, is thus explained : — I. —Renantherece \ ,..,.■,■,. ,, fco XT V as already indicated in the flora. II. — rorantkerece ) III — Strongylantherecb) having anthers not or scarcely longer than broad, usually round, opening by longitudinal slits. IV. — Orthantherece, having anthers distinctly longer than broad, opening by almost parallel slits. In tracing the study of Eucalyptus, it may be seen how diflicult it is to fix on any peculiar characters for the determination and grouping of species. Before R. Brown had visited these shores and had returned to Europe with 4000 specimens of plants almost new to science, few species of Eucalypts were known. Nor do they appear to have received much addition from the labours of that eminent man, for as his collections were made either at Port Jackson, or on the coasts of Australia when voyaging with Flinders (1801-1805), he had no opportunity, of discovering any inland species. Brown, however, was the first to notice that some of the Eucalypts had a double operculum, the outer, in his opinion, being in the form of a calyx, and the inner in that of a corolla. The species connected with his name are : — E. calophylla, R.Br. ; Western Australia. E. grandifolia, R.Br. ; Northern Australia. 56 ON THE CLASSIFICATION OF EUCALYPTS, E. perfoliate*,, R.Br. ; Northern Australia. JE. Baxteri, R.Br, j probably from Kangaroo Island, and now regarded as a variety of E. santalifolia, F.v.M. E. hypericifolia, R.Br.; from Risdon Cove, Tasmania, and now joined with E. amygdalina, Labill. E. JRisdoni, Hook. ; collected by Brown at Risdon Cove. E. clavigera, A. Cunn. ; collected by Brown at Careening Cove, Northern Australia. Caley, who resided in Parramatta from 1800 to 1810, when only a small portion of the colony was known, could not have noticed any of the Eucalypts excepting in those parts now distinguished as the County of Cumberland and Hunter's River, so his name does not appear to be connected with the genus. Caley's time was not exclusively devoted to botany, for he made valuable collections in every department of natural history. It appears that he was the first to send to Europe specimens of the " Red-flowering Ironbark," and the large variety of the " Swamp Mahogany." He also collected specimens of the following species : — E. polyanthema, Schau E. viminalis, Labill. E. bicolor, A. Cunn. E. metadata, Hook. E. longifolia, Lk, and Otto. E. eugenioides, Sieb. E. siderophloia, Benth. Caley was one of the first that made any progress in crossing the Blue Mountains, and advanced as far as the place called iC Caley's Repulse," marked by a heap of stones near Woodford ; but all his specimens of Eucalypts were collected in what is now known as the County of Cumberland. On his return to Europe, he was offered by the King of Prussia £350 for his collection of birds, but he refused the money and generously presented them to the Linnean Society, as he thought it discreditable for them to go out of England. It was not until the Blue Mountains had been crossed by Wentworth, Blaxland, and Lawson in 1813, that the distin- guished botanist and explorer, Allan Cunningham, had an oppor- tunity of collecting specimens on the Mountains and beyond the BY THE REV. W. WOOLLS. 57 Dividing Range. He accompanied Lieut. Oxley, then Surveyor- General of the colony, in his expedition to explore the Lachlan in 1817, and subsequently visited Liverpool Plains by a practicable pass over the Range. In these expeditions he discovered several new species, whilst about the same period Sieber appears to have collected specimens on the Blue Mountains. Cunningham was indefatigable in sending collections to Europe, but such was the apathy of those days in reference to botanical discoveries in Australia, that many of his packages remained unopened for nearly a quarter of a century ; and it was not until Mr. Bentham was engaged in preparing, with the assistance of Baron Mueller, his great work on the Flora of Australia, that Cunningham's labours were in any way appreciated. It must be admitted that the genus Eucalyptus was not a favourite with our early botanists. They found so much difficulty in distinguishing one species from another, that it used to be said the workmen at Port Jackson knew more about the different kinds of Eucalypts than those who endeavoured to define species by the usual characters. Even within my recollection, it was maintained by some that many of what are now regarded as species were simply varieties, whilst it was asserted by others that a process of hybridisation was going on amongst them. In the English Encyclopaedia, which was published in 185 4, a writer remarks "in many species the leaves are so variable in their form and other characters at different ages of the tree, or in different situations, that it is a matter of difficulty to know how they are to be botanically distinguished from each other ; and in fact the subject of the distinction of species has hardly yet been taken up, no botanist feeling competent to under- take the task without some personal acquaintance with the plants in a native state. The leaves, instead of presenting one of their surfaces to the sky and the other to the earth, as is the case with the trees in Europe, are often arranged with their faces vertical, so that each side is equally exposed to the light." He then goes on to lament over the difficulty of understanding the names by which the colonists call Eucalypts in different parts of Australia, and expresses a wish that some settled nomenclature may be introduced. 58 ON THE CLASSIFICATION OF EUCALYPTS, The labours of Bentham and Mueller have formed a new era in the history of Eucalyptus. They have enabled us to identify species but little known a quarter of a century ago, and to refer to their proper places in a systematic arrangement all the known Eucalypts. It is to be hoped, therefore, in due course that a "settled nomenclature " may be devised, and that the obscurities arising from '-local names" may be cleared up. In reviewing the different modes adopted for describing and grouping the species, it will be seen that, whilst some of the former characters have been abandoned, or are now only partially relied on, the cortical and anthereal systems have thrown much light on a subject which all botanists, from the days of Brown to the present time, have regarded as beset with many difficulties. The first mode of arranging species, as already stated, was founded on the comparative shape and length of the operculum. This method, if adopted only in arranging the specimens of the last century, is now found to be misleading, for the operculum of E. saligna is sometimes conical and sometimes hemispherical, and this seems to have led to some confusion in mixing together the specimens of two very different species, the one a gum-tree, generally with smooth bark (E. saligna), and the other a mahogany with fibrous bark (E. botryoides), and differing very much in habit. As the genus became better known, and more species were added to Willdenow's list, it was found that some had variable opercula, especially in E. viminalis, and the larger forms of E. hcemastoma, E. resinifera, and E. punctata, and that the double opercula were confined to a few species, such as E. globulus, E. maculata, E. eximia, and E. peltata. For a long time, how- ever, the system of classifying by the operculum was continued for the want of any better, and it was sought by means of noting other peculiarities in that organ, and by recording the shape and position of the leaves, to distribute the species with some degree of regularity. Those who paid any attention to Eucalypts before Mueller and Bentham devised their respective systems, are well aware of the mistakes which arose from trusting to any descrip- tions founded simply on the character of the opercula and the BY THE REV. W. WOOLLS. 59 leaves, and they recognise the difficulty of relying on brief descriptions, which, according to the judgment of different observers, were sometimes applied to very different trees. In referring to some of the lists which were published half a century since, it is amusing to notice the mistakes that occurred in the misapplication of botanical names. Thus, for instance, the blue- gum (E. saliyna) was referred to E. piperita, or the peppermint ; the stringy-bark (E. capitellata or E. eugenioides) to E. robusta the swamp mahogany ; white gum (E. hcemastoma) to E. tereticornis, grey gum or bastard box ; and spotted gum (E. maculata) to E. hcemastoma. It is no wonder that the systematic arrangement proved so fallacious, when it is considered that the operculum, even in the same species, is subject to variation, and that the leaves are of various shapes and sizes on the same kind of trees. This is seen in some species more than in others, whilst, as Mr. Bentiiam found, as the result of long observation, that no sure diagnostic characters could be taken from such sources. It is true that in some species the venation is well defined, and that even a few may be determined by the shape of the leaf, but these are exceptional cases ; and perhaps of all known genera no genus affords less assistance to the systematic botanist in the character of its foliage than Eucalyptus. When, therefore, so many difficulties presented themselves from previous endeavours to classify our Eucalypts, Baron Mueller's plan of grouping them according to the nature of their bark was hailed with satisfaction by observers in these colonies. The system, it is true, cannot be appreciated by European botanists, or those who have not an opportunity of seeing the trees in a living state; but to persons who are studying the species as they appear in their native forests, it affords an easy method of referring them to a recognised position. Besides, the terms "Gums," "Stringy-barks," and "Iron-barks" are so natural and familiar to the colonists, that any system founded on the smooth, fibrous, or rugged character of the bark, commends itself to them. The cortical system, therefore, has proved a step in the right direction, and it may be regarded as a popular method of overcoming some portion of the difficulty which has attended 60 ON THE CLASSIFICATION OF EUCALYPTS, the study of our Eucalypts. But, after all, as the learned Baron himself would acknowledge, the system is only an instalment towards the object sought after, for as certain trees are as variable in their bark as others are in their leaves, his sectional arrange- ment does not hold universally. There are exceptions, for instance, to the Leiopthloice ; for E. hcemastoma, E. saligna, E. viminalis, E. stellidata, and E. punctata are sometimes half- barked, whilst instances occur in which E. tereticornis has fibrous bark. The different kinds of Box are not always half-barked, and so some of the Hemiphloice incline to the Leiophloice in extreme age. I have noticed this peculiarity in E. largijiorens, and in some of the blackbutts (E. pUularis). The fibrous-barked trees, such as blood-wood, stringy-bark, and mahogany, are less liable to variation in the bark ; but in the woolly-butt (E. longifolia), of which the Baron regards the bark as wrinkled, somewhat fibrous and persistent, I have seen old trees which might have been mistaken for E. tereticornis, their trunks having completely shed their bark and become similar to gum-trees. This species, how- ever, is well defined by its large flowers and fruits, usually in threes ; but the specific name longifolia is scarcely applicable to the trees as they advance in age. The iron-bark group {Schizo- phloice) is less liable to variation in the nature of its bark than any of the preceding sections ; and yet in some forms of E. paniculata the bark is less rough and deeply furrowed than in its allies, whilst in exceptional cases, when it goes under the popular names of "Iron-bark Box," and "Bastard Iron-bark," the wood and fruit are those of iron-bark, but the bark less rugged. Some years ago, when the late Mr. Thomas Shepherd was residing with Mr. Bell, at Cabramatta, he called my attention to a tree which, so far as its general characters were concerned, appeared to be an iron-bark, the shape of the buds, flowers, and fruit being similar to those of E. paniculata, and the wood being, in the opinion of the workmen, like the ordinary iron-bark of the neigh- bourhood. Mr. Shepherd called the tree "Black Box" and "Iron- bark Box," and entertained an idea that it might be an undescribed species. Although I have had specimens of this tree for some BY THE REV. W. WOOLLS. 61 years, it is only of late that I have come to the conclusion that the tree in question is really an iron-bark, for on Mr, H. Bray's property at Concord a similar one has been pointed out to me. This the workmen called " Bastard Iron-bark," as the wood resembles that of iron-bark, whilst the bark is not furrowed as iron-barks usually are, but is more like that of box or woolly-butt- Having examined the fruit and leaves of this tree, and having ascertained that the wood is similar to that of iron-bark, I am now convinced that the tree which puzzled Mr. T. Shepherd and that growing in Mr. Bray's paddock are identical, both of them being varieties of E. paniculata. If hybridisation were possible in the sen us, one would think that the "Iron-bark Box" is a cross between iron-bark and box, but according to the opinion of the late eminent naturalist W. S. Macleay, F.L.S., the impregna- tion of the flowers takes place before the operculum falls off, and hence in such a case crossing cannot be effected. As this matter has never been carefully investigated by any observer, nothing- like certainty can be affirmed of the probability or improbability of hybridisation. If, indeed, such a contingency might be supposed, it would relieve us of many difficulties in the fixing of species, and lead to the belief that some of the forms which resemble each other closely in flowers and fruit, but differ only in wood and bark, are merely varieties. If nature does not admit of crossing in the genus Eucalyptus, it certainly encourages that of grafting, for, in the neighbourhood of Mudgee, "the Apple" ( Angoplwra inter- media) may be seen grafted naturally on E. rostrata, whilst, on the Richmond Common, a similar eccentricity may be seen on E. tereticomis. Whatever may be discovered, however, in reference to natural changes which may be going on amongst our Eucalpyts, Baron Mueller's cortical system is one of the greatest utility, for although there are exceptional cases in which there is some uncertainty from variation of the bark in the same species, yet, generally speaking, his grouping can be maintained, and in cases where the bark seems abnormal or differing from the ordinary type, mistakes may be obviated by an examination of the flowers and fruits. 62 ON THE CLASSIFICATION OF EUCALYPTS, The anthereal system, which was in some degree suggested by Baron Mueller's descriptions in his Fragmenta, and was subse- quently worked out with great ingenuity by Mr. Bentham in the Flora Australiensis, is that now generally adopted by botanists. The Baron, in his preface to his Fuca/yptographia, expresses the opinion that it is most convenient for the arranging of specimens in herbaria, and that the method brings also into close contact most of the Eucalypts which are bound together by natural affinity. But whilst these gnat men have rendered incalculable assistance in the classification of the genus, it remains for further investigation to clear up the anomalies which still exist in the anthereal system. Though as a system for grouping the species it proves so useful, yet it must be confessed that it is not so satis- factory to the general observer, or to one who has not the leisure for microscopic investigations. When the anthers are small or in their configuration vacillating between two sections, a powerful lens or even a microscope may be necessary for accurate determination. Few persons have the time or the ability for such examinations, and, therefore, whilst the system may give great assistance to the scientific botanist in his museum, it cannot be of general use in the field or to the majority of observers. Nor, indeed, is it without its difficulties to the botanist, for, as the Baron candidly acknow- ledges, some species may be regarded as transits from one section to another, and that the characteristics of aberrant forms of any species are not covered by his synopsis. It is probable that as the species become better known and those of one district are compared with those of another, the general characters of the anthers in such species may be more accurately determined; but still the difficulty must remain of subjecting the floral organs to minute inquiry, or indeed of finding the anthers in a proper state for examination. Though, in the majority of instances, the anthereal system brings into close contact species allied by natural affinity, yet there are some remarkable exceptions to the rule. For instance, some of the "Iron-barks" stand in Porantherea?, and others in Parallelanthereae. The same may be said of some of the " Mahoganies ;" whilst a few of the " Gum Trees " are separated from those very similar in BY THE REV. W. WOOLLS. 63 appearance. But these irregularities, as they would be popularly regarded, are of much less importance than mistakes which have arisen from a too rigid application of the an thereat system without reference to the bark, wood, or habits of certain trees. In the excellent " Forest Flora of South Australia" by Mr. J. E. Brown, F.L.S., two such instances occur, the first in E. leucoxylon, F.v.M., and the second in E. panicidata, Sm. The former of these is called in South Australia " White Gum," " Blue Gum," and " Pink Gum," and from the character of its bark it stands in the Baron's Leiophloice. Its specific name denotes that the wood is white, and the tree is said to assume a variety of forms. Now, by adhering too strictly to the anthereal system, this gum tree is said to be identical with our "Red-flowering Iron-bark" of Eastern Australia, a tree remarkable for the dark colour of its wood, and the deep fissures of its rough bark. There is certainly great similarity in the flowers and fruit, but to those who have had opportunities of seeing the two trees in their native forests, it seems marvellous that they should be regarded as the same species. Our red-flowering iron-bark is Cunningham's E. sideroxylon, and I believe that Baron Mueller now recognises it as such. E. paniculata is called in South Australia the panicle-flowered "White Gum," a small tree never found to exceed 30 or 40 feet, having deciduous bark, light-coloured wood, and a stunted spreading habit. There can be no doubt that the true E. panicidata belongs to Port Jackson, as it was one of the first of which specimens were forwarded from N. S. Wales to Europe, and which, since the publication of the Flora Australie?isis, has been identified as the " Pale or White Iron-bark " (so called to distinguish it from the iron-barks with darker wood). This tree rises to 100 feet and upwards, has very tough wood, persistent bark, and an upright habit. The two trees, notwithstanding the close resemblance of flowers and fruit, must be regarded as two distinct species. Another instance occurs in E. polyanthema, under which the "Poplar-leaved Box" or "Lignum vitas" of the low countrv is confused with the "Red Box or Slaty Gum " beyond the Dividing Range The trees differ very much from each other in bark, wood, and habit, for whilst 64 ON THE CLASSIFICATION OF EUCALYPTS, that of the low country is a small tree with hard dark-coloured wood and little esteemed, the " Red Box " beyond Mudgee is a fine tree with wood highly valued in the building of bridges, &c. In the consideration of specific differences, little stress has been laid on the nature and position of leaves, because they are so variable even iu the same species. It is true that some have alternate, and some opposite leaves, and some have the leaves opposite when young, and alternate as they grow older; but these variations do not afford any character for sectional division. The trees which have opposite leaves are chiefly : — E. pidvemdeyita (including E. tetragona (nearly so) E. ciaerea) E. odontocarpa ) (opposite or E. mehmopJdoia E. tetrodonta J alternate) E. cordata (Tasmania) E. gamophylla E. macrocarpa . #. setosa E. perjo'iata E. pruinosa (nearly) E. erythrocorys (nearly so) E. doratoxylon (nearly) Those which have the leaves opposite when young are : — E. vimincdis E. Stuart iana E. pilularis E. goniocalyx E. globidus E. amygdalina To these may be added a few species which appear with opposite leaves simply as seedlings; but it does not seem ' probable that, even with a more extensive knowledge of the foliage (desirable as such information is), much advantage would be gained in the way of classification. Some have thought that, in the determination of doubtful species, the texture of the wood should be considered. It is no doubt very useful for cabinet purposes to collect specimens of the wood ; and the late Sir William Macarthur was in the habit of having such neatly arranged in the form of books. I could imagine that a set of Eucalypt woods, carefully polished so as to exhibit the grain for examination, would assist materially in the identification of some species, but I caunot think that 150 different kinds of woods, arranged in the way specified, would contribute much towards classification. I have been told by practical men that the timber of some trees differs very much in proportion to BY THE REV. W. WOOLLS. 65 its age, and that even in some cases one side of a tree has better wood than the other. The soil also is said to affect the character of the wood. Without seeing the bark as well as the wood, even experienced men are deceived, and I have heard of cases in which inferior species have been passed off as iron-bark for railway sleepers. The late lamented Tenison- Woods, F.G.S., F.L.S., who had paid considerable attention to the genus Eucalyptus, was of opinion that much might be done by studying the shape, size, and peculiarities of the seeds, and he had commenced collecting them with that view. There are great differences in the seeds, as may be seen by the figures in Baron Mueller's Eitccdyptographia, and of the 100 species there illustrated, the following have a membrane or wing attached to them. E. abergiana. E. tetragona. E. pachyphylla. E. ficifolia. E. corymbosa. E. oldfieldii. E. setosa. E. gamojihylla. E. ptychocarpa. E. pyriformis. E. foelscheana. E. santalifolia. E. todtiana. E. tessalaris. It is well to place on record any further differences that may be noticed, as they may serve as notes for the fixing of species ; but probably nothing is of greater importance than the shape of the fruit, the position of the capsule, the number of its cells, and the appearance of the valves. Some years ago, when writing about Eucalyptus, I remarked that, "viewed practically, Baron Mueller's method of grouping our Eucalypts, according to the nature and texture of the bark, is the best system which has yet been promul- gated ; and whilst future observations may render it more precise by defining with accuracy the particular group under which each species should be ranged, the basis of the system is likely to be permanent." The anthereal system had not then been elaborated, nor was I aware that the cortical system was liable to any serious exceptions. I do not see, however, any reason to alter the opinion I expressed, for by paying more attention to the figure and openings of the anthers than was thought of at that time, any 5 66 ON THE CLASSIFICATION OF EUCALYPTS. mistakes arising from the abnormal state of the hark may be rectified. To the passage already quoted I added, " As regards the fixing of species and of ascertaining the amount of variation to which some are liable, other principles must be applied. Some species, indeed, are marked by the double operculum, some by winged seeds, and others by the colour of their stamens ; but the shape, cells, valves, &c, of the seed-vessels present very important notes of distinction and deserve the most attentive study. Hence I believe that these considerations, when taken in connection with the cortical group to which the respective species belong, will be found most efficacious in settling many difficulties." Since 1860, Baron Mueller has made wonderful progress in the description of new species and in illustrating their peculiar properties, but I still think that if any further improvement is to be made in the matter of classification, it must be by the study of their fruits. To collect the fruits of all known Eucalypts, and to form groups on the basis I have suggested, would be the work of time and might need almost a specialist ; but if it be true, as the Baron is fond of saying, that not only in religion but in the study of the vegetable kingdom, species are known by their fruits, it may reasonably be expected that to the cortical and anthereal systems, a carpological one may yet be added, which will dissipate the obscurity which still rests on the true characters of some species, and render the study of Eucalyptus as practicable as that of any other genus. Some of our great naturalists have been so impressed with the importance of the fruit and its seed, as * constituting the crown and end of the whole nature and vitality of plants/' that they have not hesitated to regard them as superior to the other parts in dignity; and probably, if the fruits of all our Eucalypts could be procured and arranged systematically according to their variations, additional light would be thrown on the matter of classification. Baron F. von Mueller has already hinted at this in his l£ucalyptographiaf and should he be spared to take a comprehensive view of the whole genus (including the species of those Eucalypts which at present are but partially known), he would add, if it were possible, to the world-wide reputation he has already acquired. 67 THE LAND MOLLUSCAN FAUNA OF BRITISH NEW GUINEA. By C. Hedley, F.L.S., Corr. Mem. (Plates ix. -xi I. and XII. bis.) To naturalists generally the " Land of the Bird of Paradise " has ever been a source of interest, but to Australian students such a land, whose past history is intimately bound up with that of our own continent, should be especially attractive. Many archaic forms doubtless survive in that vast unknown region whose moun- tains, the loftiest in Australasia, possess every climate from the cold zone above the tree line to the tropical jungles of the littoral. Twenty years ago the coast of British New Guinea was a blank on the map, being less known than that of any country outside the Polar regions, and to-day the interior is almost entirely unexplored. What scanty information we possess concerning its fauna and flora is, therefore, of recent date. The first fruits of the conchological harvest were gathered by the naturalists of H.M.S. "Rattlesnake," who visited the Louisiades in 1849-50, and described by Forbes in an appendix to the account of that voyage. Sir W. Macleay, in 1875, touched at Yule Island in the " Chevert," in which neigh- bourhood many new species were obtained by his staff, descriptions of which by Brazier will be found in the earlier volumes of this Society's Proceedings. During the same and following years D'Albettis amassed, both on Yule Island and the Fly River, a fine collection of mollusca which were subsequently treated of by Tapparone-Canefri (Annali del Museo Civico di Genova, xix.). A trader and collector, Mr. A. Goldie, procured many shells during various excursions along the coast and in the interior, most of which went to the British Museum, and were described by Smith in the Annals and Magazine of Natural History. In 1889 a 68 THE LAND MOLLUSCAN FAUNA OF BRITISH NEW GUINEA, collection was made by Sir W. Macgregor's party in the Louisiades ; this was presented to the British Museum and was also described by Smith. British New Guinea comprises the south-eastern quarter of Papua with the adjacent reefs and islands, except those falling within the Queensland boundary, between the meridians of 141° and 155° of E. longitude, and the parallels of 8° and 12° of S. latitude. Though these political boundaries do not form the natural limits of the fauna, it will be more convenient to restrict ourselves to the consideration of the mollusca of the British province. For while the collections made in foreign colonies are described by foreign writers in a foreign language, and the types deposited in more or less inaccessible museums, the specimens obtained in the British area are naturally referred to British or Australian naturalists. Information regarding this fauna is so scattered through various publications that I believe that I have consulted the convenience of future inquirers by adding to the results of my own researches a summary of the labours of my predecessors. For an opportunity of investigating this interesting region T am indebted to Sir William Macgregor, M.D., K.C.M.G., Adminis- trator of British New Guinea, whose guest I was from May to August, 1890, and under whose auspices I was enabled to visit the St. Joseph River,* Milne Bay, &c. I take this occasion to record my thanks both to his Honor and to the gentlemen of his staff who so often and so kindly assisted me in my scientific pursuits. Part of the material dealt with in this communication I collected personally, part was spoil of the Fly River expedition of the previous year, part was obtained for me under the directions of Sir William by Messrs. Kowald and Belford in the Louisiade, Trobriand, and Woodlark Archipelagos, and for part I am indebted to Messrs. Masters and Brazier, of the Macleay and * Only the latest maps show the St. Joseph River, which rises under Mt. Yule and flows into Hall Sound. BY C. HEDLEY. 69 Australian Museums respectively. To Mr. Brazier I am particu- larly obliged for much information, assistance in determining species, and for the loan of notes, papers, and specimens. The land shells of the province exhibit four rather distinct geographical divisions : — (a) The alpine fauna, whose sole known member is Rhytida ylobosa. Judging from the flora of these altitudes, as studied by Baron von Mueller (Trans. Roy. Soc. Vic. i. pt. 2, p. 1), the mollusca will probably exhibit affinities with those of Tasmania or Victoria. Cystopelta and Paryphanta are forms whose discovery may be anticipated. (b) Secondly, that region lying between Port Moresby and the Fly River. Typical of this area are Hadra broadbenti, Geotroclius taylorianus, and Helicina coxeni. From this fauna the tropical mollusca of Queensland were perhaps derived, the colonists migrating across the dry bed of Torres Straits. Proceeding along the coast eastwards from Hula and Aroma to Orangerie Bay, we pass through a district quite unknown. (c) A third province commences at South Cape Island in the west and includes all the eastern extremity of New Guinea with the outiying islands of Loggia, Samarai, Sarabai, Seidea, and Basilaki, or as they were formerly called Heath, Dinner, Hayter, Basilisk, and Moresby. I believe that the north-east coast will fall within this province whose typical members are Hadra rehsei, Nanina Jmnsteini, and Geotrochus brmneriensis. (d) The fourth fauna inhabits the Louisiade, the Dentie- casteaux,* the Trobriand, and the Woodlark Archipelagos. Charac- teristic forms are the Geotrochi allied to louisiadensis, and the gigantic Pupinellse allied to grandis. Of some species, Nanina divisa, Chloritis leei, and Helicina insularum for example, each island appears to possess a form, generally a variation peculiar to it. Many species have, through the blunders of unscientific collectors, been ascribed to the Dentrecasteaux Islands. I have * The spelling of this name here adopted is not the version usually accepted but that of the official account of Dentrecasteaux's Voyages. 70 THE LAND MOLLUSCAN FAUNA OF BRITISH NEW GUINEA, myself collected G. rollsianus and P. brazierce upon Fergusson Island, and these, with the ubiquitous L. vitreum, are the only land shells yet known as indigenous to the group. These two characteristic forms would indicate that the fauna of these magnificent mountain islands will prove to be related rather to that of the distant Louisiades than to that of the nearer mainland. 1. OXYTES HERCULES, n.Sp. (Plate ix., figs. 1-2.) Shell narrowly perforate, solid, large, orbicular, depressed, sharply keeled at the periphery ; colour, above brownish-yellow, darkening as the whorls increase, on the base chestnut radiately painted with brownish-yellow, these tints reside solely in the epidermis beneath which the shell is livid, peristome pink ; whorls 6 J, slowly and regularly increasing, above flattened ; sculpture, fiist three whorls nearly smooth showing minute granulations under the lens, on the outer whorls a few faint impressed spiral lines are decussated by coarse irregular oblique costse, between which are microscopic waved hair lines, at right angles to these are short straight indentations, on approaching the aperture the sculpture grows rougher and more uneven ; apex obtuse, apical whorls minute with no break in colour or form to indicate an embryonic shell ; suture impressed, deepening as it proceeds ; bise rounded, gently curving in to the umbilicus, faintly spirally and radiately striated ; epidermis glossy, scaling off readily in large flakes ; aperture not descending, oblique, angularly lunate, peristome thickened internally, the base of the columella thickened, reflected over and nearly covering the perforation, margins of the peristome connected by a thin white semi-transparent callus. Diam. maj. 66, min. 55, alt. 30 mm. Type in Queensland Museum. H a b i t a t. — Fly River (Macgregor); a single example. There is an unlocalised specimen in Dr. Cox's collection, and another in the Australian Museum, each measuring 62 : 48 : 29 mm. BY- C. HEDLEY. 71 This fine shell, the largest yet discovered in New Guinea, is, with the following species, closely allied to iV. dorice, T.-C, and probably to //. achilles, Braz. Unfortunately my specimens consist only of dead shells, and as Tapparone gives no anatomical characters, the generic position of the group remains a matter of conjecture. 2. 0. flyensis, n.sp. (Plate ix., figs. 3-4.) Shell hardly perforate, solid, large, orbicularly turbinate, acutely angled at the periphery, angle disappearing in the latter part of the last whorl ; colour shell white, a broad black band edged below with reddish-brown encircling the base beneath the periphery, epidermis olive-green through which the peripheral band is visible, peristome pink ; whorls 6, slowly and regularly increasing, above rather convex; sculpture, first three whorls nearly smooth, showing regular delicate oblique ribs under the lens, outer whorls with coarse irregular oblique striae, between which are microscopic waved hair lines, confusedly malleated, sculpture coarser on the last whorl ; apex obtuse, apical whorls minute, no definition of embryonic whorls ; suture impressed, deepening as it proceeds ; base rounded, umbilical region impressed, coarsely radiately striated ; epidermis glossy, deciduous ; aperture oblique, angularly lunate, peristome thickened and bent inwards, the base of the columella spread over almost all the umbilicus, margins not connected by a callus. Diam. maj. 60, min. 49, alt. 34 mm. T y p e in Queensland Museum. H a b i t a t. — Fly River (Macgregor) ; three dead shells. 3.* Nanina citrina, Linne, 1759. Illustrations. — Chem. Conch. Cab. ix. pi. 131, figs. 1170, 1172, 1173; Pfeiffer, Conch. Cab. 2nd ed. pi. 35, figs. 1, 2, 3 ; Voy. " Astrolable," Zool. ii.pl. 11, figs. 1, 2, 3, 4; Voy. " Uranie et Physicienne," Zool. pi. 67, figs. 2, 3 ; Ostas. Zool. n. pi. 6, * Species thus distinguished extend beyond the boundaries of British New Guinea. 72 THE LAND MOLLUSCAN FAUNA OF BRITISH NEW GUINEA, figs. 1-12, pi. 7; Reeve, Conch. Icon. vn. pi. 89, fig. 482a, b, c, d; Tryon, Man. Conch. (2), n. pi. 20, figs. 88-95; &o., &c. Descriptions. — Linne, Syst. Nat. ed. 10, p. 771 ; Mon. Hel. Yiv. i. p. 53; Voy. "Astrolable," Zool. n. p. 140; Voy. " Uranie et Physicienne," Zool. p. 471 ; Voy. "Coquille," Zool. II. p. 306; Ostas. Zool. II., p. 193; Lamarck, An. s. Vert. vi. pt. 2, p. 77 ; Tryon, Man. Conch. (2), n. p. 72 ; &c, &c. Anatomy. — Semper, Reis. Philipp. ill. p. 63, pi. 3, fig. 13a, b, pi. 6, fig. 30 ; Ann. Mus. Gen. xix. pi. 8, fig. 2. Type in Linnean Society's Museum, London. Habitat. — Douglas River (Bevan), Fly River (Froggatt), foot of Owen Stanley Range (Goldie). 4. N. hunsteini, E. A. Smith, 1887. Ulusn— Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (5), xix. pi. 15, figs. 6. Descrn— L.c. (5), xix. 416. Type in British Museum. Hab. — Not foot of Astrolabe and Owen Stanley Ranges (Goldie fide Smith), but Milne Bay (Hedley). Found upon the hills under rotten palm spathes. Animal measures 70 mm. from pedal horn to base of tentacles, tentacles 18 mm., pedal horn 6 mm. in length ; colour reddish-chestnut darkening into black, tentacles black ; mantle margin when fully extended reaching in front over the proximal third of the neck, on the right side down to the pedal line, right shell lobe triangular covering the apex of the shell, and reaching past it to the ultimate whorl, left shell lobe narrow, tongue-shaped, stretching along the last whorl for 1 2 mm. ; tentacles tapering from contiguous bases ; pedal line well marked ; upper surface of tail impressed deeply with a central furrow, whence the surface slopes upwards to an acute keel on either side thence descending perpendicularly to the margin of the foot; horn slender, smooth, as is also the adjoining portion of the tail, incessantly waved from side to side ; mucous gland excavated into the tail above two lobes. BY C. IIEDLEY. 73 5. N. fraudulenta, E. A. Smith, 1887. Descr11- — Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (5), xix. 417. Type in British Museum. Hab. — Foot of Astrolabe Range (Goldie fide Smith) 1 6. N. cairni, E. A. Smith, 1887. Illusn- — Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (5), xix. pi. 15, fig. 5. Descr11— L.c. (5), xix. 417. Type in British Museum. Hab. — Foot of Astrolabe and Owen Stanley Ranges (Goldie fide Smith). 7. N. exilis, Muller, 1774 (?) Ill us11— Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (5), xix. pi. 15, fig. 13. Descr11— L.c. (5), xix. 418. Specimens I gathered near Aipiana resemble Smith's figure. 8. N. divisa, Forbes, 1852. Illusn- — Voy. "Rattlesnake," n. pi. 2, figs. 5 a-b ; Reeve, Conch. Icon. vn. pi. 205, fig. 1450 ; Tryon, Man. Conch. (2), n. pi. 13, fig. 70. Descr11- — Mon. Hel. Viv. in. p. 77; Voy. "Rattlesnake," II. Append, p. 376 ; Tryon, Man. Conch. (2), n. 39. T y p e in British Museum. Hab. — Sudest Island, Louisiades (Forbes, Kowald and Belford). var. inclinata, Pfeiffer, 1863. 1 11 us"-— Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (6), iv. pi. 13, fig. 16. Descr11— P.Z.S. 1863, p. 526 ; Mon. Hel. Viv. v. p. 129. Type in British Museum. H a b. — St. Aignan or Misima (Thomson, Kowald and Belford). 74 THE LAND MOLLUSCAN FAUNA OF BRITISH NEW GUINEA, var. rosseliana, Smith, 1889. 1 11 us11— Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (6), iv. pi. 13, fig. 15. Descr11 — L.c. (6), iv. 200. Type in British Museum. Hab. — Rossel Island (Thomson). var. minor, var. no v. Resembling the type in outline but smaller and lighter in colour. Diam. maj. 22, min. 19, alt. 11 mm. Type in Queensland Museum. Hab.— Mita, Milne Bay (Hedley). var. woodlarkensis, var. no v. More globose than type, much inflated around the umbilicus. Diam. maj. 31, min. 27, alt. 17 mm. Type in Queensland Museum. Hab. — Woodlark Island (Kowald and Belford) ; one specimen. 9. N. orbiculum, Tapparone-Canefri, 1883. Illus11-— Ann. Mus. Gen. xix. pi. 5, figs. 16, 17, 18. Descr11-— L.c. p. 204. Anat. — L.c. xix. pi. 7, fig. 7. Type in Genoa Museum. Hab. — Fly and Katow Rivers (D'Albertis). 10. N. bruijni, Tapparone-Canefri, 1883. Illus"— Ann. Mus. Gen. xix. pi. 5, figs. 13, 14, 15. Descr11— L.c. p. 206. Type in Genoa Museum. Hab. — Fly and Katow Rivers (D'Albertis). BY C. HEDLEV. 75 11. Conulus starkei, Brazier, 1876. (Plate ix., fig. 5.) Descr11 — P.L.S.N.S.W. (1), I. 103; Ann. Mus. Gen. xix. p. 98. Type in Macleay Museum. H a b. —Yule Island (Brazier) ; in scrub on the hills behind the village of Maiva, in scrub on Mission Hill, beach just above high tide mark Port Moresby, beach ditto Mita, Milne Bay (Hedley). Mr. Brazier's type specimen is here figured by kind permission of Mr. Masters. The following extract from my note-book refers to a Mita specimen : — Animal translucent ; when extended foot not reaching to posterior margin of shell, tail keeled and diagonally grooved, terminating in a mucous pore, surmounted by a small horn ; foot margined with a pedal line ; tentacles short, cylindrical, bases separate. This species should be compared with such forms as subrugosa, Garrett, from Fiji. 12. C. maino, Brazier, 1876. (Plate ix., fig. 6). D e s c rn— P.L.S.KS.W. (1), i. 101 ; Ann. Mus. Gen. xix. p. 97 T y p e in Macleay Museum. Hab. — Yule Island (Brazier). Figured from the type. 13. Microcystina sappho, Brazier, 1876. (Plate ix., fig. 7.) Descr11— P.L.S.N.S.W. (1), i. 100; Ann. Mus. Gen. xix. p. 95. Type in Macleay Museum. Hab. — Yule Island (Brazier); Maiva and Mission Hill, in company with C. starkei (Hedley). Figured from a Maivan specimen. 76 THE LAND MOLLUSC AN FAUNA OP BRITISH NEW GUINEA, 14. M. CALCARATA, n.sp. (Plate ix., fig. 8, and PI. x., fig. 9.) Shell small, subdiscoidal, perforate, thin, translucent ; colour dark chestnut, apical whorls straw-coloured ; whorls 4 J, rounded, slowly increasing ; sculpture, to the unassisted eye the surface is smooth and glossy, but the microscope shows extremely fine radiating waved hair lines ; spire scarcely elevated, embryonic whorls 2, distinct ; suture channelled, margined beneath by a heavy opaque callus ; base flattened, umbilicus narrow triangular, circum-umbilical region funnel-shaped ; aperture not descending, vertical, ovate lunate, peristome straight, thin, columellar margin thickened and produced into a callous spur overhanging the umbilicus, callus on body whorl thin and microscopically granulated. Diana, maj. 2-J-, min. 1^, alt. 1 mm. Type in Queensland Museum. Hah. — Associated with C. starkei and P. pedicula under sticks and stones, near the beach, 200 yards west of Mita village, Milne Bay (Hedley). I have here accepted the value given to the badly defined section of Microcystina by Tryon (Man. Conch. (2), n. 124.) These Papuan species are probably allied to the Fijian forms there enumerated. 15. Helicarion visi, n.sp. (Plate x., fig. 13.) Shell depressed, thin, brittle, glossy, transparent ; colour pale yellow ; whorls 3J, rather rapidly increasing, rounded at the periphery ; sculpture fine incremental striae ; suture margined, impressed, base imperforate, impressed in the centre, swollen around it ; aperture diagonal, ovate lunate, peristome thin, simple, margins joined by a slight callus, columellar margin reflected. Diam. maj. 8, min. 7, alt. 4 mm. Type in Queensland Museum. Hab. — Basilaki Island; six examples under sticks and stones in the jungle (Hedley). BY C. HEDLEY. 77 The length of the largest spirit specimen, from muzzle to mucous pore, was 20 mm., the tail extending posteriorly half that distance from the visceral hump. General colour light yellow, upper surface of tail, mantle lobes, neck, and tentacles bluish-gray. Tail sub- keeled, scarcely diminishing in height posteriorly, suddenly increasing at caudal extremity and terminating abruptly, bearing a well-developed mucous pore above the pedal groove ; a dorsal central groove runs the length of the tail distributing oblique branches which reach the pedal groove. The mantle is divided into left and right triangular shell lobes and two neck lappets. From the lips a well-defined pedal line extends to the mucous pore, from the pulmonary orifice and from a corresponding position on the left side another groove runs to the lips. The jaw is that of a typical Relicarion, smooth, lunate, with inferior median limb. In the odontophore the rows of teeth curve slowly backwards from the rachidian, which has a slender ovate median cusp and two small accessory cusps, the laterals develop only the distal cusp, and their main cusp is longer and broader than that of the rachidian ; after being repeated for twelve rows this type is succeeded by 20 small unicuspidate marginals. This species, the first of its genus recorded from New Guinea, is dedicated to C. W. de Vis, Esq., M. A., Director of the Queensland Museum, as a slight token of the author's regard and gratitude for numberless kind actions. 16. H. musgravei, n.sp. (Plate x., fig. 14.) Shell globose, thin, brittle, transparent ; pale yellow ; whorls 3-J, rounded ; suture impressed, margined, sculpture minute incre- mental strise ; base imperforate, impressed in the centre, swollen around it ; aperture oblique ovate lunate, lip thin, simple, margins connected by a slight callus, columellar margin reflected. Diam. maj. 6, min. 5, alt. 4 mm. T y p e in Queensland Museum. 78 THE LAND MOLLUSCAN FAUNA OF BRITISH NEW GUINEA, Hab. — Doura (Hedley). Named after the Hon. A. Musgrave, of British New Guinea. 17. |Thalassia annula, Brazier, 1876. (Plate x., fig. 10.) Desc rn— P.L.S.N.S. W. ( 1), 1. 100 ; Ann. Mus. Gen, xix. p. 94. Type in Macleay Museum. H ab. — Village of Mowatta, mouth of Katow River (Brazier). Figured from type. Doubtful, — T. rustica, Pfr., supposed by Mr. Petterd to exist near Port Moresby (vide Journ. of Conch, i. p. 396 ; Ann. Mus. Gen. xxiv. p. 125 bis.). 18. -j-Trochomorpha planorbis, Lesson, 1830. IHusn._Yoy. "Coquille," Moll. pi. 13, figs. 4, 4', 4"; Pfeiffer, Conch. Cab. 2 ed. Helix, ii, pi. 129, figs. 16, 17 ; Mousson, Land Sussw. Moll. Java, pi. 2, fig. 9 ; Martens, Ostas. Zool. pi. 13, figs. 4, 5, 6, 7 i Tryon, Man. Conch. (2), m. pi. 16, figs. 78-82 ; &c, &c. Descr11— Pfeiffer, Mon. Hel. Viv. i. p. 122 ; Voy. "Coquille," Zool. ii. p. 312; Tryon, Man. Conch. (2), in. 82 ; &c, &c. T y p e in Museum of the Jardin cles Plantes. H a b. — Fly River (D'Albertis, Froggatt) ; Katow River (D'Albertis). 19. T. lomonti, Brazier, 1876. 1 11 us11-— Ann. Mus. Gen. xix. pi. 2, figs. 5, 6, 7 ; Tryon, Man. Conch. (2), in. pi. 15, figs. 50, 51, 52. Descr11— P.L.S.N.S. W. (1), i, 101; Ann. Mus. Gen. xix. p. 91 ; Tryon, Man, Conch. (2), in. p. 82. A n at. —Ann. Mus. Gen. pi. 6, fig. 2, pi. 8, fig. 3, pi. 9, fig. 4. Type in Macleay Museum. Hab. — Yule Island (Brazier, D'Albertis.) BY C. HEDLEY. 79 20. T. nigrans, E. A. Smith, 1889. Illusn— Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (6), iv. pi. 13, figs. 9, 10, 11. D e s c r" — L.c. p. 200. T y p e in British Museum. Hab. — Rossel Island (Thomson, Belford and Kowald). var. cornea, var.nov. Smaller than type, horn-coloured. Diam. maj. 16, min. 14, alt. 6 mm. Type in Queensland Museum. Hab. — Sudest Island (Kowald and Belford) ; one specimen. 21. Ochthephila albertisi, Brazier, 1876. (Plate x., fig. 11.) Descr11— P.L.S.KS.W. (1), I. 104; Ann. Mus. Gen. xix. p. 183. Type in Macleay Museum. H a b. — Yule Island (Brazier). Figured from the type. The generic position of this species is doubtful. 22. Charopa texta, n.sp. (Plate x., fig. 12.) Shell depressed turbinate, thin, perforate, glistening ; colour reddish-corneous ; whorls 4 J, rounded, flattened beneath the suture ; sculpture strong sinuate oblique radiating ribs, of which the last whorl possesses about 60, in each interstice and parallel to the ribs are 4 or 5 fine raised hair lines, decussating these secondary costse and of the same calibre are raised spiral lines, which are most prominent on the spire and base ; epidermis possessing a silky sheen ; suture deeply impressed ; apex not prominent, embryonic whorls 1J, shining, nearly smooth, but faintly repeating the adult sculpture ; umbilicus narrow, deep, spiral ; base rounded ; aperture oblique, roundly lunate, peristome >, 80 THE LAND MOLLUSCAN FAUNA OP BRITISH NEW GUINEA, straight, sharp, columellar margin reflected. Diam. maj. 6, min. 5, alt. 4 ram. Type in Queensland Museum. Hab. — Mission Hill, Upper St. Joseph River (Hedley) ; two living specimens occurred to me under fallen timber in dense jungle. 23. Rhytida globosa, Hedley, 1890. (Plate x., figs. 15-16.) Descr"' — Annual Report of British New Guinea, 1888-89, p. 65. Shell depressed-globose, thin, translucent, perforate, very glossy ; whorls 4^, the earlier flattened, the later rounded, rather rapidly increasing, the last a little expanded, not descending at the aperture ; colour reddish-chestnut above, lighter beneath, first three whorls bleached nearly white ; sculpture almost effaced on the body whorl, where nearly obsolete spiral impressed lines cross the faint irregular growth lines, the earlier whorls exhibit fine close oblique stria? cut by fine spiral grooves, a pitted (not striated) surface is offered by the first whorl and a-half, which seem embryonic ; suture impressed, slightly crenulated, bordered beneath by a narrow white band, which is in turn edged by a black line ; aperture ovate, oblique, peristome simple above, slightly reflected below ; interior bluish-white, probably iridescent when fresh, columellar wall overlaid by a thin deposit ; umbilicus narrow, partially hidden by the reflected peristome at its j unction with the base ; base a little inflated. Diam. maj. 17, min. 14, alt. 10 mm. T y p e in Queensland Museum. Hab. — Mt. Victoria, the culminating point (13,000 ft.) of the Owen Stanley Range (Macgregor). Near a village on the south shore of Milne Bay whose name I do not know, but which may be identified by its position directly south of Mita, I found, in company H. rehsei, C. Jiorridus, and 0. brazierij a shell differing from but closely resembling Patula BY C. HEDLEY. 81 fabrefacta, Pease. I cannot venture to describe the species from my single dead and bleached specimen, but can only record the existence in New Guinea of a group hitherto regarded as peculiar to the Eastern Pacific. 24. Cristigibba rhodomphala, Tapparone-Canefri, 1883. Illusn- — Ann. Mus. Gen. xix. pi. 4, figs. 12, 13. Descr11- — L.c. xix. p. 176. Type in Genoa Museum, var. alpha. H a b. — Fly River (D'Albertis, Froggatt) ; Douglas River (Bevan) ; Mission Hill (Hedley). 25. C. plagiocheila, Tapparone-Canefri, 1883. II 1 u sn— Ann. Mus. Gen. xix. pi. 5, figs. 4, 5, 6, 7. Descr11 — L.c. xix. p. 174. Anat. — L.c. xix. pi. 7, fig. 6. T y p e in Genoa Museum. Hab.— Fly and Katow Rivers (D'Albertis). 26. C. dominula, Tapparone-Canefri, 1883. Illus11-— Ann. Mus. Gen. xix. pi. 4, figs. 8, 9, 10, 11. Descr11- — L.c. xix. p. 178. Anat. — L.c. xix. pi. 7, fig. 4, pi. 9, figs. 5, 14. Type in Genoa Museum, vars. alpha, beta, delta. Hab. — Fly and Katow Rivers (D'Albertis) ; Douglas River (Bevan). 27. C. deaniana, Ford, 1890. Descr11-— Proc. Acad. Sci. Phil. 1890, p. 188. Type in Phil. Acad. Museum. Hab. — British New Guinea (Denton). 6 82 THE LAND MOLLUSCAN FAUNA OF BRITISH NEW GUINEA 28. C. MACGREGORI, ll.Sp. (Plate x.5 tigs. 17-19.) Shell uuibilicated, discoidal, thin, translucent j colour reddish- brown above, lighter beneath, peristome bright lilac, interior of shell subnacreous, iridescent, gleaming bluish-white ; whorls 4J, rounded, the earlier gradually the last rapidly increasing, last descending considerably and gradually at the aperture and furnished with the gibbosity characteristic of the genus ; sculpture oblique flat-topped costse whose shallow interstices contain two or three fine radiating striae, both costaa and strise are crossed by minute spiral grooves ; apical whorls sunken, smooth ; suture deeply impressed ; aperture diagonal, lunate, peristome widely expanded above, reflected below, margins approaching, connected by a thin transparent callus, columellar margin expanded over a quarter of the umbilicus ; the latter narrow, deep, showing every revolution of the spire, margin abruptly rounded. Diarn. maj. 28, min. 21, alt. 12 mm. T y p e in Queensland Museum. Hab. — Village of Aipiana, St. Joseph River (Hedley). Dead shells were seen in abundance, animals were purchased from the natives. Dedicated to Sir William Macgregor, M.D., K.C.M.G., whose zeal for science has greatly increased the world's knowledge of the Papuan fauna and flora. Recorded from the province in error. C. corniculum, Hombr. et Jacq. Vide Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (5), xi. 190, and Ann. Mus. Gen. xix. p. 179. C. dentoni, Ford, 1890. Vide Proc. Acad. Phil. 1889, p. 138 j " The Nautilus," m. p. 17, 2 woodcuts. Mr. Brazier assures me that this species is identical with (H.) tuckeri. Pfr., Queensland specimens of which frequently possess a BY C. HEDLEY. 83 continuous peristome, on which feature Ford bases his distinction. Before his death in New Guinea, Professor Denton visited Northern Queensland, where no doubt he collected Ford's specimens. 29. Chloritis dinodeomorpha, Tapparone-Canefri, 1883. 1 11 us11-— Ann. Mus. Gen. xix. pi. 4, figs. 4, 5, 6, 7. Descr11- — L.c. xix. p. 168. An at.— L.c. xix. pi. 7, fig. 5, pi. 9, figs. 2, 15. T y p e in Genoa Museum. Hab.- Fly Kiver (D'Albertis, Froggatt) ; Mission Hill, St. Joseph River (Hedley). 30. C. leei, Cox, 1873. Ill us11-— P.Z.S. 1873, pi. 48, figs. 5, 5a. Descrn-L.c. 1873, p. 565; Mon. Hel. Viv. vn. p. 395; Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (6), iv. 201. Type in Australian Museum. H a b. — St. Aignan (Thomson^c/e Smith, Kowald and Belford). var. woodlarhensis, var.nov. Smaller than type, lip dark purple, umbilicus nearly hidden by the reflection of the columella. Diam. maj. 25, pain. 20, alt. 18 mm. Hab. — Woodlark Island (Kowald and Belford). var. sudestensis, var.nov. Larger and more globose than type, lighter in colour, and umbilicus less overhung by the reflection of the columella. Diam. maj. 34, min. 25, alt. 26 mm. H a b. — Sudest Island (Kowald and Belford). var. imjmensis, var.nov. More elevated than type. Diam. maj. 33, min. 25, alt. 26 mm. H a b. — Mita, Milne Bay, and Mr. Kissack's selection near Samarai (Hedley). 84 THE LAND MOLLUSCAN FAUNA OF BRITISH NEW GUINEA, How far these insular forms may be permanent my material is too scanty to satisfactorily decide. 31. C. subcorpulentus, E. A. Smith, 1889. Illus11— Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (6), iv. pi. 13, fig. 14. Descr11— L.c. p. 201. Type in British Museum. H a b. — Rossel Island (Thomson). In the jungle near Doura I found living with H. musgravei, a new species of Chloritis allied to the Queensland yorteri. My specimens of it were accidentally crushed before reaching Australia.* 32. j-Hadra rehsei, von Martens, 1883. S y n o n y m — gerrardi, Smith, 1883. Illus11-— Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (5), xix. pi. 15, fig. 14. Descr11'— Jahrb. Malak. Gesell. 1883, p. 83 • Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (5), xi. 192 ; l.c. (5), xix. 418. Type(?) Hab. — Not Dentrecasteaux Islands (Goldie fide Smith), nor Dinner Island (Smithurst fide Brazier), but south shore of Milne Bay (Hedley). 33. H. beatricis, Tapparone-Canefri, 1883. Illus13- — Ann. Mus. Gen. xix. pi. 4. fig. 14. Descr11- — L.c. xix. p. 163. Anat. — L.c. xix. pi. 8, fig. 16. Type in Genoa Museum. H a b.— Fly River (D'Albertis, Froggatt). 34. H. hixoni, Brazier, 1877. Illus11-— Ann. Mus. Gen. xix. pi. 5, fig. 22 ; Tryon, Man. (2) vi. pi. 25, fig. 91. Descr11— P.L.S.N.S.W. (1), n. 120; Ann. Mus. Gen. xix. p. 187 ; Tryon, Man. (2) vi. p. 177. * Since this has been in type a description of this species as C. chloritoides Pilsbry, has reached me. BY C. HEDLEY. 85 T y p e in Coll. Hobson. Hab. — Seven miles inland from Hall Sound (Hixon fids Brazier). 35. H. broadbenti, Brazier, 1877. Hlusn— Ann. Mus. Gen. xix. pi. 5, fig. 21 ; Tryon, Man. (2) vi. pi. 25, fig. 100. Descr11— P.L.S.N.S.W. (1), n. 25; Ann. Mus. Gen. xix. p. 188 ; Tryon, Man. (2) vi. p. 176. Type in Queensland Museum. Hab. — Not Dentrecasteaux Islands (Goldie fide Smith), but Laloki River, near Port Moresby (Broadbent) ; village of Najabui (D'Albertis) ; St. Joseph River (Heclley). Mr. Brazier has kindly furnished me with the following descrip- tion : — 36. " Helix bevani, Brazier, n.sp. (Plate xi., figs. 22-23.) " Shell umbilicate, depressed, sharply carinated at the periphery, thin, obliquely striated, reddish-brown with a dark nearly black narrow line at the centre, epidermis yellowish-brown ; spire slightly elevated ; apex dark pink ; suture moderately impressed ; whorls 41 very slightly convex, last largest in front ; umbilicus narrow, shallow ; base flattened, striae finer than upper surface ; aperture hatchet-shaped ; peristome black, slightly expanded and reflected, right margin at the upper part thin ; columellar margin broadly expanded and reflected over the umbilicus. Diam. maj. 45, min. 35, alt. 18 mm. ; height of aperture 12, breadth 21 mm. "Type in Australian Museum. " Hab. — Douglas River, British New Guinea (Be van). " This fine species is allied to Helix Goldei, Braz. ; a single dead specimen in a good state of preservation was found by Mr. Theodore F. Bevan, F.R.G.S., during his exploration of British New Guinea in 1887." 86 THE LAND MOLLUSCAN FAUNA OF BRITISH NEW GUINEA, 37. Geotrochus oxystoma, E. A. Smith, 1883. (Plate x., fig. 20, and PL xi., fig. 21.) Syn. — goldiei, Brazier. Descrn-- Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (5), xi. 191 ; P.L.S.N.S.W. (1), ix. 804. Type in British Museum. Hab. — Not Dentrecasteaux Islands (Golclie fide Smith), but foot of Astrolabe Range (Goldie) and Doura, Galley Reach (Hedley). By adopting Geotrochus as a generic title the necessity is obviated of discarding Smith's name, since oxystoma is not pre- occupied in Geotrochus, though, as Brazier points out, it is in Helix. The figures which illustrate, though they hardly adorn, p. 173 of Stone's " Ten Months in New Guinea," are intended, I believe, to represent this species. 38. G. elisus, n.sp. (Plate xi., figs. 24-25.) Shell umbilicate, thin, discoidal, carinate ; colour pale straw, with two narrow reddish spiral bands, the superior midway between the suture and the periphery, the inferior encircling the base at a third of the distance from the keel to the umbilicus, the carina is sometimes edged above and below by similar bands, peristome white ; whorls 4J, increasing regularly until the final whorl, which in its latter half contracts a little, the earlier whorls slightly convex, the latter flat ; sculpture close, irregular oblique striations above and below, crossed by a few faint impressed lines in the neighbourhood of the keel ; apex obtuse, the embryonic shell apparently constituting the first revolution ; suture impressed above, becoming linear as it proceeds, margined above by the keel of the preceding whorl ; base flattened at the periphery, slightly swollen within ; umbilicus narrow, deep, exhibiting the volutions; aperture almost horizontal, abruptly and deeply descending, peristome thin, widely reflected throughout its circumference, pinched at the junction of the carina, margins closely approaching, BY C. HEDLEY. 87 connected by a transparent callus. Diam. maj. 29, min. 24, alt. 10 mm. The Macleay Museum contains four dead shells of this species, which appear to resemble G. 2^elechy stoma, Tapp.-Can., purchased from Mr. Goldie, who collected them in British New Guinea. 39. G. taylorianus, Adams and Reeve, 1851. Syn. — yulensis, Brazier, 1876; strabo, Brazier, 1876; katau- ensis, Tapparone-Canefri, 1883 ; roseolabiatus, Smith, 1887. IHusn__Voy. "Samarang," Zool. pi. 15; 2a, 2b; Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (5), xix. pi. 15, figs. 1, la, 2; Reeve, Conch. Icon. vii. pi. 96, No. 524, a, b; P.L.S.N.S.W. (2), n. pi. 21, figs. 5, 6 ; Ann. Mus. Gen. xix. pi. 3, figs. 1, 2, 3. jy esc rn-— "Samarang", Zool. p. 59 ; RL.S.N.S.W. (1), I. 106 ; Ann. Mus. Gen. xix. p. 123, 125; Journ. of Conch, vi. p. 76; Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (5), xix. 421, &c. An at. — Ann. Mus. Gen. xix. pi. 6, figs. 1, 3; pi. 8, fig. 11. Type in British Museum. H a b. — Yule Island and Katow River (Brazier and D'Albertis) ; St. Joseph River (Hedley) ; Fly River (Froggatt) ; Maclachie Point, Krema district, foot of the Albert Range of mountains (Goldie). An examination of a large series of shells in the possession of Mr. Brazier induces me to consider G. taylorianus as a most variable form. The following prominent varieties are linked each to each by intermediate graduations : — (a) yulensis ; smaller than type, mottled with oblique irregular black dashes, which by transmitted light appear as trans- lucent spaces. (Yule Island, J.B.) (b) katauensis ; encircled by black spiral bands. (Maclachie Point, Goldie.) (c) strabo ; a monochrome form with no clear mottled spaces ; approaches nearest to taylorianus. (Maclachie Point, Goldie.) 88 THE LAND MOLLUSCAN FAUNA OF BRITISH NEW GUINEA, (d) roseolabiatus ; with a black band at the suture and the peri- phery. (Maclachie Point, Goldie.) This form is confined to western British New Guinea and the eastern localities quoted by Smith ; South Cape and Dentre- casteaux Islands are to be discredited. The history of the original specimen appears to have been lost. Since, before G. taylorianus was described, H.M.S. "Fly" was the only European vessel that visited the territory inhabited by this species, I conjecture that the type was procured in May, 1845, by Jukes or MacGillivray during her voyage to this coast. 40. G. tapparonei, E. A. Smith, 1883. (Plate xi., fig. 26.) Syn. — hunsteini, Brazier, MSS. Descr"-— Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (5), xi. 190; P.L.S.N.S.W. (1), ix. 805. Type in British Museum. Hab. — Not Dentrecasteaux Islands (Goldie fide Smith), but found by C. Hunstein fifty miles inland from Port Moresby, north of the Astrolabe Range, near the head of the Laloki Biver. This and taylorianus approach the Australian G. macgillivrayi. 41. G. zeno, Brazier, 1876. (Plate xi., fig. 27.) Descrn— P.L.S.N.S.W. (1), i. 107, (1), ix. 805; Ann. Mus. Gen. xix. p. 154. Type in Macleay Museum. H a b. — Hall Sound (Brazier), between Rigo and Kappakappa (Hedley). var. latiaxis, Smith, 1887. Illus11-— Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (5), xix. pi. 15, fig. 7 ; Tryon, Man. Conch. (2), vi. pi. 17, fig. 16. BY C. HEDLEY. 89 Descr11— Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (5), xix. 420 ; I.e. (5), xi. 191. Type in British Museum. Hab. — Foot of Astrolabe and Owen Stanley Range (Goldie). 42. G. diomedes, Brazier, 1878. Ill us11— Ann. Mus. Gen. xix. pi. 3, fig. 12. Descr11- P.L.S.N.S.W. (1), n. 121; Ann. Mus. Gen. xix. 122. Type in Australian Museum. H a b. — Not Brumer Island (Brazier), but Coutances Island * (Broadbent fide Brazier) ; and therefore not a member of the Louisiade fauna, as stated in Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (6), vn. 135. A dead shell, too worn to be described, but evidently new, and related to the two last species, was collected by Sir W. Macgregor daring his expedition to the Fly River in 1890. 43. |G. brumeriensis, Forbes, 1852. (Plate xi., fig. 29.) Illusn— Voy. "Rattlesnake," Appen. pi. 2, fig. 1, a, b ; Reeve, Conch. Icon. vn. pi. 205, fig. 1448; Tryon, Man. (2), vi. pi. 12, figs. 41, 42, 43. Descr11-— Voy. "Rattlesnake," n. p. 375; Mon. He]. Viv. in. p. 189 ; Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (5), xix. 419. Type in British Museum. Hab. — Brumer Island (Forbes); Millport Harbour, Amazon Bay (Goldie fide Brazier) ; Bently and Milne Bays, South Cape, Samarai, Loggia and Basilaki Islands (Hedley). var. albolabriSj var. nov. Lip entirely white. Type in Queensland Museum. H a b. — Mita, Milne Bay. * Coutances Island is situated in 148° 10' E. long., 10° 15' S. lat. 90 THE LAND MOLLUSCAN FAUNA OF BRITISH NEW GUINEA, G. brumeriensis inhabits heavy-limbed trees, preferring those with whitish bark, like Hibiscus tiliaceus and Artocarpits incisus. In its favourite perch, on the under side of the larger boughs, its resemblance to a knot renders it difficult to detect. Animal 60 mm. in total length. Shell placed posteriorly. Tentacles slender, tapering, 15 mm. long when fully expanded, bases four mm. apart. Tail flat, pointed. Tentacles jet black ; head and neck ornamented by narrow white longitudinal tubercles on a black ground ; foot everywhere bordered above by a narrow band of intense black, above which is an ill-defined zone of greyish white merging above into black ; sole of foot black at edges, whitish within ; mantle yellowish-white. Mucus unusually dense like that of the arboreal Limaces. Egg small, soft, white, oblong. 44. G. louisiadensis, Forbes, 1852. Illus11, — Voy. "Rattlesnake," Appen. pi. 1, figs. 8a; b; Reeve, Conch. Icon. vn. pi. 205, fig. 1449. Descrn- Yoy. "Rattlesnake," Appen. p. 376; Mon. Hel. Viv. in. p. 174. T y p e in British Museum. H a b. — Sudest Island, Louisiades (Forbes, Kowald and Belford). 45. G. MILLICENTiE, Cox, 1871. Illus11-— P.Z.S. 1871, pi. 34, figs. 2-2a. Descrn--L.c. p. 323 : I.e. 1873, p. 566. Type in the Cox Collection. H a b. — Louisiades (Cox). This is intermediate between louisiadensis and rollsianits, and is probably entitled to rank as a distinct species. The exact island inhabited by it is still unknown. 46. G. rollsianus, E. A. Smith, 1887. Illusn— Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (5), xix. pi. 15, fig. 3. Descr11— L.c. (5). xix. 423. BY C. HEDLEY. 91 Type in British Museum. Hab. — Not South Cape Island (Rolls), but Seymour Bay, Fergusson Island (Hedley). As Rolls and Goldie landed in Seymour Bay, I have no doubt that they collected the type exactly where I found the species several years afterwards. I make the above correction with the more confidence since I have searched South Cape in vain for it. It is interesting to note that both G. rollsianus and P. brazierve, which I also gathered at Seymour Bay, find their allies among the distant Louisiades and not with the molluscs of the nearer mainland. Animal slender ; colour entirely white in one specimen, bluish- white in another ; tentacles long, slender, tapering, bases wide apart. Observed crawling upon the trunks of trees. 47. G. albocarinatus, E. A. Smith, 1887. Iliusn— Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (5), xix. pi. 15, fig. 12. Descr11-— L.c. p. 422 ; I.e. (6) vn. 137. Type in British Museum. H a b. — Woodlark Island (Dr. Rabe fide Brazier) ; another recorded but probably erroneous locality is South Cape Island (Goldie). 48. G. thomsoni, E. A. Smith, 1889. Illus11-— Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (6), iv. pi. 13, figs. 12, 13. Descr11-— L.c. (6), iv. 202. Type in British Museum. var. a. H a b. — St. Aignan, Louisiades (Thomson. Kowald and Belford). 49. G. woodlarkianus, Souverbie, 1863. 1 1 1 u sn- — Journ. de Conch, xi. pi. 5, fig. 2. Descrn— L.c. pp. 76 and 172; Mon. Hel. Viv. v. p. 271 ; Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (6), vn. 137. Type in Bordeaux Museum. 92 THE LAND MOLLUSC AN FAUNA OF BRITISH NEW GUINEA, Hab. — Woodlark Island (French Missionaries, Kowald and Belford, Dr. Rabe fide Brazier) ; Normanby Island (Dr. Rabe), the latter a doubtful locality. 50. G. TROBRIANDENSIS, n.Sp. (Plate xi., fig. 28.) Shell imperforate, trochiform, thin, translucent, keeled at the periphery, keel becoming obsolete latterly ; colour white, encircled by seven chestnut bands, four above and three below the periphery, these bands are very variable, each or all may disappear or coa- lesce, when absent a translucent band marks the site, the bands fade away on the penultimate whorl, occasionally as in allied species opaque alternate with translucent dashes radiating from the suture, peristome from the insertion of the right margin to the centre of the base an intense black ; whorls 4J, convex, last con- tracted ; sculpture, obliquely finely striated and finely granulated ; apex obtuse, embryonic whorls distinct, 1 J ; suture impressed ; base slightly convex ; aperture oblique, scarcely descending, peri- stome expanded and reflected, right margin sinuate, columellar margin straight bearing above a small tubercle, margins connected by a thin, transparent, microscopically granulated callus. Diam. maj. 24, min. 18, alt. 16 mm. Type in Queensland Museum. Hab. — Trobriand Islands (Kowald and Belford); on trees ; abundant. The local representative of the G. louisiadensis group. 51. G. taumantias, Tapparone-Canefri, 1883. 1 11 us11— Ann. Mus. Gen. xix. pi. 3, figs. 13, 14. Descr"- — L.c. p. 141. Anat. — L.c. pi. 6, fig. 4, pi. 9, figs. 16, 18. T y p e in Genoa Museum. vars. alpha and beta. BY C. HEDLEY. 93 Hab.— Katow River (D'Albertis) j Fly Eiver (D'Albertis, Froggatt, Macgregor). var. cingulatus, var.nov. Yellowish-white encircled by a single brown peripheral band margined beneath by an opaque white line. T y p e in Queensland Museum. Hab. — Village of Aipiana, St. Joseph Eiver (Hedley). 52. G. tomasinellianus, Tapparone-Canefri, 1883. Illusn— Ann. Mus. Gen. xix. pi. 4, fig. 1, pi. 5, fig. 1. Descr11-— L.c. p. 148. Anat.— L.c. p. 7, fig. 3, pi. 8, figs. 6, 12. Type in Genoa Museum, var. alpha. Hab.— Fly Eiver (D'Albertis, Froggatt) ; 400 miles up the Fly (Macgregor) ; Katow Eiver (D'Albertis). var. azonatus, var.nov. Bandless, entirely yellow. Type in Australian Museum. Hab. — Douglas River (Bevan). 53. G ridibundus, Tapparone-Canefri, 1883. Illus11-— Ann. Mus. Gen. xix. pi. 3, figs. 10, 11. Descr11- — L.c. p. 142. Anat. — L.c. pi. 6, fig. 5, pi. 8, fig. 17. T y p e in Genoa Museum. Hab.— Fly River (D'Albertis). 54. G. meditatus, Tapparone-Canefri, 1883. Illus11- — Ann. Mus. Gen. xix. pi. 3, fig. 15. Descr11, — L.c. p. 144. 94 THE LAND MOLLUSCAN FAUNA OF BRITISH NEW GUINEA, An at. — L.c. pi. 6, fig. 6. T y p e in Genoa Museum. Hab. — Katow River (D'Albertis). 55. G. gestroi, Tapparone-Canefri, 1883. 1 1 1 u s11— Ann. Mus. Gen. xix. pi. 4, fig. 3, pi. 5, fig. 3. Descrn— L.c. p. 150. Anat.-L.c. pi. 7, fig. 2, pi. 8, figs. 5, 14. Type in Genoa Museum, var. alpha. Hab.— Fly River (D'Albertis). 56. G. siculus, Brazier, 1876. Descr11— P.L.S.N.S.W. (1), I. 106; Ann. Mus. Gen. xix. p. 153. Type in Macleay Museum. H a b. — Katow River (Brazier). Mr. Brazier informs me that this species resembles the Solomon Island shells ambrosia, Angas, and me?idana, Angas, the latter particularly in coloration. 57. G. braziers, Brazier, 1876. 1 1 1 u s11 — Ann. Mus. Gen. xix. pi. 4, fig. 2, pi. 5, fig. 2. Descrn— P.L.S.N.S.W. (1), I. 107; Ann. Mus. Gen. xix. p. 152. An at.— L.c. xix. pi. 7, fig. 1, pi. 8, figs. 7, 13. T y p e in Macleay Museum. Hab. — Yule Island (Brazier) ; St. Joseph, Doura (Hedley). 58. G. lacteolatus, E. A. Smith, 1887. Illus11-— Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (5), xix. pi. 15, fig. 9. Descrn— L.c. (5), xix. 420. Type in British Museum. Hab.— Foot of Owen Stanley Range (Goldie fide Brazier). BY C. HEDLEY. 95 59. G. gurgusti, Cox, 1880. I Hub*— P.L.S.N.S.W. (1), iv. pi. 16, fig. 1 ; I.e. (2), n. pi. 21, figs. 3, 4. Descr11— l.c. (1), iv. 114. Type in Australian Museum. Hab. — Rossel Island, Louisiades (Hovell). 60. G. chapmani, Cox, 1880. Syn. — coraliolabris, Smith, 1887. Illus*-- P.L.S.N.S.W. (1), iv. pi. 16, fig. 2 ; I.e. (2), n. pi. 21, figs. 10, 11 ; Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (5), xix., pi. 15, fig. 4 ; Tryon, Man. (2), vi. pi. 17, fig. 13. Descr11-— P.L.S.N.S.W. (1), iv. 115; Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (5), xi. 419 ; I.e. (6), iv. 201. Type in Australian Museum. Hab. — Rossel Island, Louisiades (Hovell, Thomson). 61. G. canovari, Tapparone-Canefri, 1883. Illus11— Ann. Mus. Gen. xix. pi. 3, fig. 6. Descr11- — L.c. xix. p. 131. Type in Genoa Museum. Hab. — Fly River (D'Albertis) ; Observation Point, Fly River (Froggatt). 62. G. boyeri, Fischer and Bernardi, 1857. Illus11- — Journ. de Conch, v. pi. 9, figs. 8, 9. Descr11-— L.c. v. p. 297 ; Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (6), vn. 137 ; Mon. Hel. Viv. i v. p. 201. Type in collection of Journ. de Conch. H a b. — Not Admiralty Island (F. & B.), nor Louisiades (Angas fide Pfeiffer), but Woocllark Island (Dr. Rabe fide Brazier, Kowald and Bel ford). 96 THE LAND MOLLUSCAN FAUNA OF BRITISH NEW GUINEA, 63. fG. dampieri, Angas, 1869. Illus11-— P.Z.S. 1869, pi. 2, figs. 6 ; 1885, pi. 36, fig. 5. Descrn--L.c. 1869, p. 47 ; Mon. Hel. Viv. vn. p. 310. Type (?). H a b. — Louisiade Islands (Angas) 1. No definite locality in the Louisiades is known for this shell, and since a variety is recorded from the Solomons by Smith (P.Z.S. 1885, p. 592), it is most probable that the type was derived from thence. Recorded from the province in error. G. (?) coniformis, Ferusac. Jahrb. deutsche mal. Gesell. 1880, p. 15. Louisiade Archipelago (Kobelt, I.e.). G. horderi, Sowerby. P.Z.S. 1889, pi. 56, fig. 1, p. 577. May belong to this province ; but the author neglects to say where or by whom it was collected. 64. COCHLOSTYLA PAPUENSIS, n.Sp. (Plate xii., fig. 30.) Shell globosely conical, imperforate, solid ; colour, the hydro- phanous epidermis when wet or oiled is of a rich chocolate colour ; when dry, a pale yellowish-brown crossed by numerous narrow spiral brown lines ; deprived of the epidermis the shell is a pale yellow, with a brown sub-sutural band, first two whorls purple- blue, interior of shell lustrous pale blue, peristome brown ; whorls 5J, convex, regularly increasing, last f ths of total length ; sculp- ture, entire shell finely obliquely striated and encircled by microscopic close regular raised lines ; apex obtuse, embryonic whorls 1 J ; suture impressed, margined ; aperture oblique, ovate lunate, peristome slightly reflected, a thin semi-transparent callus BY C. HEDLEY. 97 extends over the axis and curves up to the insertion of the right margin. Alt. 55, breadth 38 mm. The Macleay Museum possesses several examples of this species, purchased from Mr. Goldie, who collected them in British New- Guinea. Considerable difference in size and form exists between these specimens, none of which are in a good state of preservation. One old and worn shell exhibits on the inner side of the columella a tubercle 10 mm. long and 2 mm. wide. Whether this be a distinct species, the adult form, or merely a variety of the species described above, requires further material to decide. 65. Calycia isseliana, Tapparone-Canefri, 1883. Ill us11- — Ann. Mus. Gen. xix. p. 101, figs, b, c. Desc r"" — L.c. Type in Genoa Museum. Hab.— Katow River (D'Albertis). The systematic position of this mollusc is uncertain. 66. -j-Bulimus macleayi, Brazier, 1876. S y n. — beddomei, Brazier, MSS. Illus11-— Ann. Mus. Gen. xix. pi. 2, figs. 16, 17. Descr"-— P.L.S.N.S.W. (1), i. 108; l.c. (1), iv. 395 ; Ann. Mus. Gen. xix. p. 104 ; Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Australia, v. p. 50. Type in Macleay Museum. H a b. — Yule Island (Brazier, D'Albertis). This species ranges south to North Queensland and west to Port Darwin. 67. Partula similaris, Hartman, 1886. Illusu— Proc. Acad. N.S. Phil. 1886, pi. 2, fig. 1. Descr11-— L.c. p. 30. Type.-(?) Hab. — Woodlark Island (Brazier). 7 OS THE LAND MOLLUSCAH FAUNA or BRITISH NF.w GUINEA, 58, T. woopi.akiuana, Hartman, 1886. Illus"-— Proc Acad, N.s. tdiil. 188(6, pi. 2, fig. 8, Desor11— L.C, p. 33. Typo-v\ Bab. — WootHark Islam! (Brazier). After examining the figures and descriptions of those two species, l am enable to graep any specific distinction between them. Specimens collected at the Woodlarks by Messrs. Kowald ami Belford during the cruise of the " Merrie England " in 1890 are referable to both or either forms. 09. P. OCCIDENTALIS, n.sp. (Plate xii., tig. 31.) Shell dextral, ovate elongate, thin ami translucent ; colour (t) ; whorls 5, rounded, last a little tlat toned below the suture ; sculp- ture everywhere encircled by close sharply impressed spiral lines. which are decussated by oblique irregular lines of growth, at the intersection the former are sometimes distorted by the latter ; spire slender, elongate, a quarter of total length ; apex dome- shaped, half of first whorl embryonic ; suture impressed ; umbilicus small, deep, compressed] aperture roundly ovate, scarcely oblique, lip moderately reflected and expanded, margins of the peristome connected by a thick callus. Length 19, breadth 10. length of aperture 9, breadth (> mm. ; length 17, breadth 10, length of aperture 9, breadth 7 mm. Type in Queensland Museum. Hab. — On the ground under bushes upon Samarai Island 1 collected two dead shells of this species. The two Partulw described by Lesson have, as Tapparone remarks, a doubtful claim to Papuan soil, and, omitting these, the above species is the first described from New Guinea proper. 70. tSn-.NooYKA SUBULA, Pfeitt'er, 1839. S y u. — jiouwi, Gould. 1846] tuckrri, Pfr. 1846] octonc D'Orb, 1^11 ;j . Adams, 1846 ; . Oox, 1864 ; upolensis, BY C. HEDLEY. 99 Mousson, 1865 ; panayensis, Pfeiffer, 1846 ; diaphana, Gassies, 1859 ; souverbiana, Gassies, 1863 ; artensis, Gassies, 1866 ; novemgyrata, Mousson, 1870 ; gyrata, Mousson, 1885. II lusn— Conch. Icon. pi. 68, sp 481, pi. 14, No. 76; Mon. Austr. L. Shells, pi. 13, fig. 9 ; Gould, Expl. Exped. Shells, fig. 87 Phil. Is. Land Moll. ill. pi. 8, figs. 14, 15 ; Martens, Ostas. Zool. ii. pi. 22, fig. 8 ; Faune Nouv. Caled. pt. 1, pi. 2, fig. 5 ; Journ. de Conch. 1863, pi. xiv. fig. 6; &c, &c. D e s c rn— Wiegm. Arch. i. 352; Moll. Cub. i. 177; P.Z.S. 1846, p. 30, 1887, p. 185 ; Mon. Hel. Viv. n. p. 158 ; Mon. Austr. L. Shells, p. 69 ; Proc. Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist. n. p. 35, 191 ; Journ. de Conch. 1859, p. 370 ; Faune Nouv. Caled. pt. 1, p. 52 ; &c, &c. Anat— Reis. Phil. Land Moll. ill. pi. XL figs. 17, 21. Type in British Museum. Hab. — St. Joseph River, Port Moresby, Samarai, and Milne Bay (Hedley). It is remarkable that this common and ubiquitous mollusc has not been previously recorded from the New Guinea mainland. 71. Tornatellina terestris, Brazier, 1876. Descr"- P.L.8.N.S.W. (1), I. 109; Ann. Mus. Gen. xix. p. 102. Type in Macleay Museum. H a b. — Yule Island (Brazier). 72. fPuPA pedicula, Shuttle-worth, 1852. Syn. — artensis, Montronzier, 1859; nitens, Pease, 1860; nacca, Gould, 1862 ; hyalina, Zelebor, 1868; macdonnelli, Brazier, 1875; recondita, Tapparone-Canefri, 1883 ; samoensis, Schmeltz, MSS. Illus11, — Journ. de Conch, vn. pi. 8, fig. 4; Faune Nouv. Caled. pt. 1, pi. 6, fig. 21; P.Z.S. 1874, pi. 83, figs. 22, 23; Ann. Mus. Gen. xix. pi. 2, figs. 3, 4. 100 THE LAND MOLLUSCAN FAUNA OF BRITISH NEW GUINEA, Descr11— Bern. Mittheil. 1852, p. 296; Mon. Hel. Viv. ill. p. 557, VI. pp. 329, 330, 335 ; Journ. de Conch, vn. p. 288 ; Faune Nouv. Caled. pt. 1, p. 54 ; P.Z.S. 1860, p. 439, 1874, p. 669, 1887, p. 188 ; Proc. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist. vm. p. 280 j Otia Conch, p. 237 ; Quart. Journ. of Conch. 1877, p. 5; Ann. Mus. Gen. xix. p. 106. Type-(?). H a b. — Mita, Milne Bay, Samarai and Loggia Islands (Hedley). 73. fSucciNEA simplex, Pfeiffer, 1854. (Plate xii., fig. 32.) Descr11-— P.Z.S. 1854, p. 123, 1885, p. 595 ; Mon. Hel. Viv. iv. p. 813. Type in British Museum. A species of Succinea occurs in abundance upon the stems of taro leaves in the hill gardens above Mita village, Milne Bay, speci- mens of which answer fairly well to the description Pfeiffer gives of S. simplex. Being unable to compare my specimens with a figure or authentic named examples, I refer them to the Solomon Island species with some hesitation. 74. jTruncatella valida, Pfeiffer, 1846. Syn. — vitiana, Gould, 1847; vitiacea, Mousson, 1865; con- spicua, Bronn. Ill us11-— Kuster, Conch. Cab. ed. 2, pi. 2, fig. 7, 8, 19, 20, 21, 23 ; Cox, Mon. Austr. L. Shells, pi. 20, figs. 21, 21a, 21b. Descr11— Zeitschr. Malak. 1846, p. 182; Mon. Auric. I. p. 184; Conch. Cab. p. 11 ; Proc. Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist, n. p. 208; P.Z.S. 1887, p. 299; &c. &c. Type in British Museum. Hab. — Port Moresby, Milne Bay, Samarai (Hedley). 75. fT. ceylanica. Pfeiffer, 1856. Syn. — teres. Pfr. 1856; semicostata, Montrouzier, 1862; cerea, Gassies ; nitida, Gassies. BY C. HEDLEY. 101 Illus11 — Mon. Austr. L. Shells, pi. 15, figs. 9, 9a, 9b; Journ. de Conch. 1862, pi. 9, fig. 10; Faune Nouv. Caled. pi. 8, fig. 2. Descr11— P.Z.S. 1856, p. 336; 1887,300; Mon. Auric. I. pp. 186, 188; Mon. Austr. L. Shells, p. 92; Journ. de Conch. 1862, p. 243 ; Faune Nouv. Caled. p. 73 ; &c, &c. Type in British Museum. Hab. — Port Moresby (Heclley). The Truncatellre are characteristic of an assemblage of forms which may be termed the land littoral fauna, other members being Stenogyra tuckeri, Pujm pedicula, Pythia scarabwus, and perhaps, Conulus starkei, and C. russelli. This littoral fauna always inhabits, but is not invariably confined to, the neighbour- hood of the sea beaches. The smallest islands which possess any life at all are usually stocked by these forms, which appear to range from Ceylon in the west to the Sandwich Islands in the east, and to be limited north and south by the tropics. Within these bounds they are associated with many widely different fauna?. 76. Omphalotropis brazieri, n.sp. (Plate xil, fig. 33.) Shell acutely ovate ; colour corneous; whorls. 5, convex, gradu- ally increasing ; sculpture, regular oblique striae, last whorl encircled at the periphery by a strong keel ; suture impressed ; spire conical, a quarter of total length, apex acute ; base flattened ; umbilicus small, angled at the margin ; aperture oblique, sub- circular, angled above, peristome double, callus on body whorl thin. Operculum not observed. Length 5, breadth 3 mm. Type in Queensland Museum. Hab. — South shore of Milne Bay and Basilaki Island (Hedley) ; one example collected at each locality. 77. 0. protracta, n.sp. (Plate xii., fig. 34.) Shell elevated conical, thin, turreted, glossy ; colour dark corneous; whorls 6, gradually increasing, rounded, rather flattened 102 THE LAND MOLLUSCAN FAUNA OF BRITISH NEW GUINEA, beneath the suture, la.st angled at the periphery ; sculpture faint oblique striae ; suture impressed ; spire produced, one-third of total length ; base rounded ; umbilicus ample, funnel-shaped, angled at the margin ; aperture vertical, subcircular, angled above, peristome slightly thickened and scarcely reflected, callus on the body whorl thin. Operculum not observed. Length 3^ breadth 2 mm. Type in Queensland Museum. H a b. — Mission Hill, Upper St. Joseph River (Hedley) ; two examples under fallen timber in dense jungle. 78. Bellardiella minor, n.sp. (Plate xii., fig. 35.) Shell imperforate, oblong ; colour ^ ; whorls 6, penultimate and antepenultimate bulging above the suture, last rather flattened on the periphery and more so on the base ; spire inclined to the right, Ipss than half of total length ; apex acute, first two whorls devoid of sculpture appearing embryonic ; sculpture, close oblique, sharp, thread-like riblets ; suture impressed ; aperture circular, peristome thick, expanded and briefly reflected, body-whorl overlaid with a thick callus, upper canal obsolete, lower one converted into a closed circum-umbilical tube, whose orifice is, when adult, quite outside the peristome, when immature the tube communicates with the adjacent whorl by a narrow slit, whose position is later marked by a scar. Length 14, breadth 9, diam. of aperture 4 mm. Type in Queensland Museum. Hab. — Mission Hill, near the village of Ngauauni, upon the upper waters of the St. Joseph ; I found several dead specimens in a banana garden. The arrangement of the lateral canal resembles that of Puirinella minor and P. macgregori. 79. Pupinella macgregori, E. A. Smith, 1889. Illus11-— Ann. Mag Nat. Hist. (6), iv. pi. 13, fig. 1, 2. Descrn--L.c. (6), iv. 205. BY C. HEDLEY. 103 Type in British Museum. Hab. — Rossel Island, Louisiacles (Thomson, Kowalcl and Belford). Tlie Louisiade Pupinellse appear to fall into three natural groups : (a) comprising P. macgregori and P. minor, in which the lateral canal is produced into a tube around the umbilical region ; (b) containing P. grandis, P. angasi, P. smithi, P. moulinsiana, and P. rosseliana, in which the canal merely notches the columellar margin, the five in the order named being a graduated series whose notch is completely cut, half cut, and scarcely indented ; they form an easy transition to (c) P. brazierce, in which the notch is absent. 80. P. minor, E. A. Smith, 1889. Illus11— Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (6), iv. pi. 13, figs. 7, 8. Descru--L.c, (6), iv. 205. T y p e in British Museum. H a b. — Rossel Island (Thomson, Kowald and Belford). The single specimen, the second known to science, collected by the latter is in a good state of preservation. The colour is a dark red ; the sculpture differs remarkably from that of its allies, their coarse malleations being entirely absent, instead are developed close, raised, oblique, sinuate hair lines. The lip and callus are, under the lens, delicately granulated. 81. P. grandis, Forbes, 1852. 8 y n.— forbesi, Pfeiffer, 1852. 1 1 1 u sn- — Voy. "Rattlesnake," Append, pi. 2, figs. 10, a, b, c, d ; Pfeiffer, Conch. Cab. ed. 2, pi. 31,. figs. 19, 20; Conch. Icon. Pupinidse, fig. 4. Desc rn — Voy. " Rattlesnake," n. p. 380 ; Mon. Pneu. Viv. I. p. 140. Type in British Museum. Hab. — Sudest Island (Forbes, Kowald and Belford). 104 THE LAND MOLLUSCAN FAUNA OF BRITISH NEW GUINEA, 82. P. angasi, Brazier, 1875. Syn. — louisiadensis, Smith, 1889. Illusu— Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (6), iv. pi. 13, figs. 3, 4. Descr11— P.L.S.N.S.W. (1), i. 5; Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (6), iv. 204, and (6), vn. 135. Type in British Museum. Hab. — Rossel Island (Thomson). 83. P. smithi, Brazier, 1891. Syn. — angasi, H. Adams, 1875; grandis var. minor, Cox, 1873. Illus11-— P.Z.S. 1875, pi. 45, figs. 2, 2a. Descr11-— Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (6), vn. 136 ; P.Z.S. 1873, p. 567 ; I.e. 1875, p. 389 ; Mon. Pneu. Viv. suppl. 3, p. 412. Type in British Museum. Hab. — Louisiade Archipelago (Adams, &c). The volume containing Adams' diagnosis of angasi, No. 2, bears the date October 1st, 1875, whereas Brazier's description of angasi, No. 1, appeared in the first twenty pages of these Proceedings, which were printed separately and published May, 1875, giving the Australian naturalist the priority of publi- cation by four months. Until the present year, all authors who have written upon Papuan conchology appear to have overlooked Brazier's account. 84. P. moulinsiana, Fischer and Bernadi, 1857. S y n. — intermedia, Angas, MSS. ; leucostoma, Montrouzier, 1857. Illus11- — Journ. de Conch, v. pi. 9, figs. 6, 7 ; Thes. Conch, in. pi. 265, fig. 36. Descr11, — Journ. de Conch, v. 299; xix. 183; Essai sur la Faune de Woodlark, 136 ; Mon. Pneu. Viv. n. 93 ; P.Z.S. 1871, 586. BY C. HEDLEY. 105 Type in collection of the Journ. de Conch. Hab. — Woodlark Island (Montrouzier). 85. P. rosseliana, E. A. Smith, 1889. Ill us11— Ann Mag. Nat. Hist. (6), iv. pi. 13, figs. 5, 6, 6a. Descr11- L.c. (6), iv. 205. Type in British Museum. Hab. — Rossel Island (Thomson, Kowald and Belford). 86. P. braziers, E. A. Smith, 1887. Syn. — typica, Brazier, MSS. Ill us11-— Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (5), xix. pi. 15, fig. 15. Descr11— L.c. (5), xix. 424, and (6), vn. 136. Type in British Museum. Hab. — Seymour Bay, Fergusson Island (Goldie, Hedley) ; Cape Pierson, Normanby Island (Dr. Rabe^cfe Brazier). Found alive on the ground, under logs of wood. var. aignanensis, var.no v. Larger and more widely umbilicated than the type. Length 28 mm. Type in Queensland Museum. Hab. — St. Aignan, Louisiades (Kowald and Belford); one dead specimen. 87. P. ckossei, Brazier, 1877. Ill us11— Ann. Mus. Gen. xix. pi. 10, figs. 18, 19. Descr11— P.L.S.N.S.W. (1), i. HI; Ann. Mus. Gen. xix. 267. Type in Macleay Museum. H a b. — Yule Island (Brazier). I am indebted to Mr. John Brazier, F.L.S., C.M.Z.S., for the following description : — 106 THF. LAND H0LLU9CAN FAUNA OF BRITISH NEW GUINFA. vv •• r rAPPARONSi, Brasier, n.sp. Hate xi i.. tig. 56.) Shell shortly rimato. oblong-o\ ate, rather solid, regularly and obliquely tinely striate, light brown ; spire gradually tapering towards the rather pointed apex] whorls o. four upper convex, the fifth slightly flattened on the side of the mouth, the last much narrower; aperture vertical, circular; peristome whitish, thieke .aded and reflected, with two channels : one very small, narrow, and deep at the insertion of the light margin, the second shallow and surroundbd with thick callus between the arcuate body-margin and the 'eft or eolumellar. Length of largest specimen JL8, breadth S ; length of smallest specimen 14, breadth 7 mm. ••Type in Australian Museum, •• llab. — Fly River. British New Guinea (Froggatt). •• Pwo specimens — one living, the other dead — of this very rare species were collected by Mr. \V. \Y. Froggatt when he went in the Geographical Society > Expedition of 1885" to the Fly River. •• Some dead and worn specimens of this St - . .es « ere found vS g I.. M. O'Albortis on the Fly River ; they are men- tioned by Dr, Q L'apparone-Canetri in his valuable paper on the • Fauna tfalaoologioa Delia Nuova Guinea,' l>Sc. p. 268. I take great pleasure in naming the species after my Valued friend and correspondent, Dr. C Bapparoni Canefri." Sib PUPINA OVAUS, n.sp. (Plate xii.. tig. 37.^ Shell ovate-oblong, smooth and extremely glossy ; colour reddish-horn; whorls ' . - g shortly ovate, total length ; apex obtuse ; suture margined by a callus, faintly impressed ; aperture subvertical, circa deep and narrow, parietal lamella a stout rib curving from one canal to the other, columella tlat, widely dilated, deeply notched BY C. HEDLEY. 107 by the lateral canal, peristome thickened slightly and reflected. Length 8, breadth 6 mm. Type in Queensland Museum. Hab. — Mita, Milne Bay (Hedley) ; six specimens, under logs in dense jungle on hillsides; rare. 90. P. gibba, n.sp. (Plate xii., fig. 38.) Shell minute, oblong, smooth and extremely glossy ; colour pale corneous ; whorls 5, last convex, rather flattened below the suture, penultimate gibbose, tumid ; spire J of total length ; apex obtuse ; suture margined by a callus, impressed ; aperture sub- vertical, circular, anterior canal distinct, lateral, a narrow cleft across the peristome developing outside the lip, a circular orifice, parietal lamella obscure, peristome slightly thickened and reflected. Length 4; breadth 2 mm. Type in Queensland Museum. Hab. — Mission Hill, Ngauauni, Upper St. Joseph River (Hedley) ; four specimens under logs in jungle upon the hillside. 91. DlPLOMMATINA SYMMETRICA, n.sp. (Plate xii., fig. 39.) Shell dextral, rimate, elongate, ovate, turreted, thin, trans- lucent; colour reddish-corneous; whorls 7, rounded, increasing regularly as far as the antepenultimate, which equals its successor in breadth ; sculpture, closely obliquely ribbed by thin white erect lamellse, not continuous, projecting at the shoulder, minutely spirally striated between the ribs ; suture deeply impressed ; apex obtuse; aperture subvertical, circular, columellar margin straight, bearing a moderate-sized internal tubercle, peristome double, greatly expanded round its entire margin, forming a broad callus upon the penultimate whorl. Alt. 3-^, breadth ljmm. Type in Queensland Museum. 108 THE LAND MOLLUSCAN FAUNA OF BRITISH NEW GUINEA, tflOhVUD rv»M.wi. Hab — Basilaki (formerly called Moresby) Island (Hedley) ; found abundantly upon decaying leaves of Pandanus upon a steep hill side. 92, Cyclotropis papuensis, Tapparone-Canefri, 1883. Hlusn._Ann. Mus. Gen. xix. pi. 10, figs. 22, 23. Desc rn— L.c. xix. p. 279. Type in Genoa Museum. Hab.— Fly River (D'Albertis). 93. Cyclotus poirieri, Tapparone-Canefri, 1883. 1 1 1 u sn— Ann. Mus. Gen. xix. pi. 10, figs. 6, 7. Descrn— L.c. xix. 254. Type in Genoa Museum. Hab.— Fly River (D'Albertis). 94. C. tristis, Tapparone-Canefri, 1883. Illusn— Ann. Mus. Gen. xix. pi. 10, figs. 4, 5. Descrn- — L.c. xix. 255. Type in Genoa Museum. H a b.— Fly River (D'Albertis, Froggatt). 95. C. horridus, n.sp. (Plate xii. bis, fig. 40.) Shell depressed, turbinate, widely and perspectively umbilicated; colour fulvous ; whorls 5, rapidly increasing, rounded, last des- cending at the aperture ; suture deeply impressed ; apex acute ; sculpture, numerous close regular fine spiral lyrae, crossed by longi- tudinal lines of small stiff epidermal bristles ; aperture scarcely oblique, rounded, subangled above, peristome continuous, thickened, straight. Operculum externally concave, white, calcareous, sub- circular, 5-whorled, whorls margined within by a deep furrow. Diam. maj. 9, min. 7, alt. 7 mm. T y p e in Queensland Museum. BY C. HEDLEY. 109 H a b. — Milne Bay, Mita and South shore (Hedley) ; twelve dead and immature specimens, in jungle under logs. The best preserved but immature specimen which furnished the figure had not attained the adult peristome. 96. C. kowaldi, n.sp. (Plate xii. bis, fig. 41.) Shell turbinate, openly umbilicated ; colour fulvous, faintly radiately painted with dark brown ; whorls 5^, rounded, obscurely bicarinate ; suture channelled ; apex mammillate ; sculpture, the body whorl is encircled by about 15 lyrse, two of which, one at and one above the periphery, attain more prominence developing into keels, within the umbilical funnel the lyrse are closer, smaller and more numerous, the lyrse are decussated by costse at the junction of which an epidermal bristle is generally developed ; peristome in the individual observed thin and therefore probably juvenile. Operculum not received. Diam. maj. 9, min. 7, alt. 6 mm. Type in Queensland Museum. Hab. — Sudest Island, Louisiades (Kowald and Belford) ; one specimen. 97. C. belfordi, n.sp. (Plate xn. bis, fig. 42.) Shell trochiform, narrowly umbilicated ; colour fulvous-brown ; whorls 4 J (juv. ?), acutely carinated ; suture channelled ; apex mammillate ; sculpture, spiral lyrse decussating radiate costse, the acute carina of the periphery bearing a single row of long bristles, peristome sharp (juvenile ?). Operculum wanting. Diam. maj. 4J, min. 4, alt. 4 j- mm. Type in Queensland Museum. Hab. — Mita, Milne Bay (Hedley) ; two specimens. I describe these Cycloti from imperfect material with some hesitation ; none have been before recorded from this neighbour- hood, and I trust that their marked characteristics will enable 110 THE LAND MOLLUSCAN FAUNA OF BRITISH NEW GUINEA, subsequent observers to recognise them. The two latter species are named after Messrs. Charles Kowald and George Belford whose collections have been so frequently referred to in preceding pages. 98. f Leptopoma vitreum, Lesson, 1830. Syn. — hiteurn, Quoy and Gaimard, 1832; nitidum, Sowerby, 1843. Illus"-— Yoy. "Coquille," Moll. pi. 13, figs. 6, 6vj Yoy. « Astrolabe," Moll. pi. 12, figs. 11, 12, 13, 14; Sow. Thes. Conch. I. pi. 29, figs. 225, 226, 227 ; Reeve, Conch. Syst. pi. 183, fig. 2 ; Reeve, Conch. Icon. xn. pi. 3, fig. 15a, b, pi. 6, fig. 32; Chem. Conch. Cab. ed. 2, pi. 16, figs. 10, 16, 17, 18 ; Adams, Gen. Moll, pi. 85, figs. 7, 7a, 7b , Chenu, Man. Conch, figs. 3602, 3603 ; Cox, Aust. L. Shells, pi. 16, figs. 2, 2a, 3; Tryon, Struct. Syst. Conch, ii. pi. 76, figs. 3, 4. Descr11-— Yoy. " Coquille," Zool. n. 346; Yoy. "Astrolabe," Zool. ii. 180 ; P.Z.S. 1843, p. 60 ; Lamk. An. s. Yert. 2 ed. vm. 367 ; Mon. Pneu. Yiv. I. 101 ; Cox, Mon. Aust. L. Shells, p. 98, &c, &c. Ana t. — Ann. Mus. Gen. xix. pi. 9, figs. 7, 8. Type in Jardin des Plantes Museum. Hab. — Yule (D'Albertis), South Cape (Smithurst), Fergusson (Hedley), Woodlark, Trobriand, and Sudest Islands (Kowald and Belford). 99. L. gianelli, Tapparone-Canefri, 1887. Illusn — Ann. Mus. Gen. xxiv. pi. 2, figs. 10, 11. Descr11-— L.c. xxiv. 183. Type in Genoa Museum. var. alpha, T.-C. Hab.— Fly River (D'Albertis, Froggatt). BY C. HEDLEY. Ill 100. L. parvum, n.sp. (Plate xn. bis, fig. 43.) Shell small, narrowly perforate, globosely turbinate, thin, translucent ; colour light corneous, apex pink ; whorls 5, rounded ; sculpture, upon the body whorl, 15 minute raised spiral lines, 10 above the periphery and 5 below, which latter are confined to the outer half of the base, penultimate whorls encircled by 10 such lines, everywhere microscopically obliquely striated ; apex acute ; suture impressed ; aperture subcircular, peristome almost continuous, slightly expanded and reflected, operculum not observed. Length 6, breadth 5 mm. Type in Queensland Museum. Hab. — Milne Bay (Hedley) ; one dead specimen. I overlooked this species until my return to Australia, when I discovered a solitary shell in a bottle filled and closed in Milne Bay. I was in the habit of daily purchasing by the handful shells, beetles, and other small fry from the natives, and I con- elude that I received this shell unnoticed among other things. Recorded from the province in error. L. venustulum, Tapp.-Can. Vide Ann. Mus. Gen. xix. 263, and xxiv. 185. 101. Helicina coxeni, Brazier, 1876. Illus"-— Ann. Mus. Gen. xix. pi. 9, figs. 12, 13 j p. 275, fig. g. Descrn— P.L.S.N.S.W. (1), i. Ill; Ann. Mus. Gen. xix. p. 274. Type in Macleay Museum. H a b. — Yule Island (Brazier, D'Albertis) ; Pvigo, Port Moresby and Maiva (Hedley). 112 THE LAND MOLLUSCAN FAUNA OF BRITISH NEW GUINEA, 102. H. dentoni, Pilsbry, 1890. Descr"-- Proc. Acad. Philad, 1890, p. 186. Type in Phil. Acad. Museum. Hab. — British New Guinea (Denton). 103. H. solitaria, E. A. Smith, 1887. Illus11 — Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (5), xix. pi. 15, fig. 10. D e s c r11 — L.c. (5), xix. 425. Type in British Museum. H a b. — Foot of Astrolabe Range (Goldie) ? 104. H. fischeriana, Montrouzier, 1863. Syn. — novo-guineensis, Smith, 1887 ; congener, Smith, 1889. Illusn- — Journ. de Conch, xi. pi. 5, fig. 3; Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (5), xix. pi. 15, figs. 11, 11a; l.c. (6), iv. pi. 13, fig. 17. D e s c rn-— Journ. de Conch, xi. 76, 171; Mon. Pneu. Viv. in. 241 ; Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (5), xix. 425 ; l.c. (6), iv. 203. Type in Bordeaux Museum. H a b. — Woodlark Island (Montrouzier, Kowald and Belford) ; St. Aignan (Thomson) ; Rossel (Kowald and Belford) ; foot of Owen Stanley Range (Smith). A large series collected by Messrs. Kowald and Belford at the original locality, and an examination of duplicates of Smith's types in the possession of Mr. Brazier, form the material upon which the above synonomy is based. The locality of Owen Stanley seems to me more than doubtful ; the species is probably confined to the eastern archipelagos. The radiate painting is rarely absent, and with the coarser lyrse serves to define this variable form from its equally variable kin inhabiting the same islands. 105. H. stanleyi, Forbes, 1852. Illus11, — Voy. "Rattlesnake," Append, pi. 3, figs. 4a, b. Descrn— L.c. 381 : Mon. Pneu. Viv. i. 401. BY C. HEDLEY. 113 Type in British Museum. Hal). — Duchateau Islets, Louisiade Archipelago (Forbes). 106. H. insularum, n.sp. (Plate xn. bis, fig. 44.) Shell depressedly trochiform, sharply keeled ; colour light yellow, usually unicolorous, occasionally with a spiral chestnut band above the periphery, occupying the central third of the space between the keel and the suture, more rarely the band broadens till the keel and a sutural thread alone remain yellow ; whorls 4 h, flattened ; suture linear ; apex acute ; sculpture, 9 spiral lyrse above the periphery and 20 below it crossed by close incremental striae ; basal callus well defined, malleated, centre of base smooth ; aperture subvertical, lunate, within the basal margin containing a thread-like rib which retreats to the columella, peristome everywhere expanded. Diam. maj. 14, min 11, alt. 10 mm. Type in Queensland Museum. Hab. — Suclest Island, Louisiades (Kowald and Belford); abundant. var. sinus, var.no v. (Plate xn. bis, fig. 45.) Much smaller than type, six lyrse above, sixteen below the periphery. Diam. maj. 8, min. 7, alt. 5 mm. Hab. — Village of Mita, Milne Bay, and village of Polatona, Bently Bay (Hedley) ; abundant, found crawling upon shrubs and trees. var. muruensis, var.nov. Diam. maj. 10, min. 8, alt. 6 mm. Hab. — Murua or Woodlark Island (Kowald and Belford); abundant. var. trobriandensis, var.nov. Diam. maj. 11, min. 9, alt. 8 mm. Hab. — Trobriand Islands (Kowald and Belford); eight specimens. V 114 THE LAND MOLLUSCAN FAUNA OF BRITISH NEW GUINEA, var. rosselensis, var.nov. Whorls more convex, colour rose with apex and callus yellow. Diam. maj. 9, min. 8, alt. 7 mm. H a b. — Rossel Island (Kowald and Belford) ; abundant. This species is evidently a dominant form, and may be expected under one of its aspects from any island in the Louisiades and neighbouring archipelagos. Var. sinus is almost entitled to specific rank ; it makes a distinct advance towards II. stanleyi, and in another direction var. ?'ossel- ensis approaches H. woodlarkensis. 107. H. woodlarkensis, E. A. Smith, 1891. (Plate xii. bis, fig. 46.) Descr"— Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist (6), VII. 138. Type in British Museum. H a b. — Woodlark Island (Dr. Rabe fide Brazier, Kowald and Belford). On the visit of the " Merrie England" in 1890, Messrs. Kowald and Belford collected 35 specimens, which are coloured white, yellow, purple-brown or rose, never banded, apical whorls invariably a bright lemon yellow. My figure is drawn from a specimen of the parcel sent to Smith, kindly lent by Mr. Brazier. 108. H. louisiadensis, Eorbes, 1852. II lus11- — Voy. " Rattlesnake," Append, pi. 3, figs. 5a, b ; Sow. Thes. Conch, iv. pi. 275, figs. 349, 350 ; Conch. Icon. xix. pi. 29, figs. 257a, b. Descr11-— Voy. "Rattlesnake," n. p. 382; Mon. Pneu. Viv. i. p. 385. Type in British Museum. Hab. — Round Island, Coral Haven, Louisiades (Forbes); Milne Bay and Basil aki Island (Hedley). The mainland examples are rather larger and more depressed than the shells described by Forbes. BY C. HEDLEY. 115 109. H. maino, Brazier, 1876. (Plate xii. Us, fig. 47.) Descr11— P.L.S.N.S.W. (1), i. 112; Ann. Mus. Gen. xix. 276, xxiv. p. 188. Type in Macleay Museum. Hab. — Village of Mowatta, Katow River (Brazier). Drawn from the type by the kind permission of Mr. Masters, Curator, Macleay Museum. " Maino " signifies " peace " in the local dialect. 110. H. MULTICORONATA, ll.sp. (Plate xii. bis, fig. 48.) Shell minute, globosely conical ; colour dull yellow ; whorls 4^-, rounded, slightly turretecl ; sculpture, upon the last whorl a fine thread-like keel at the periphery, the space between that and the suture divided by three similar keels, the earlier whorls exhibit only the three upper keels, each keel bears minute, erect, epidermal bristles, which give the shell a somewhat coronated appearance under the lens ; base rounded, faintly concentrically and longi- tudinally striated; callus smooth, semi-transparent; aperture vertical, semi-lunate, red within, lip slightly expanded. Diam. maj. 4, min. 3 J, alt. 4 mm. T y p e in Queensland Museum. Hab. — Village of Mita, Milne Bay (Hedley) ; one specimen. Doubtful. — H. leucostoma, Tapparone-Canefri (Ann. Mus. Gen. xix. p. 277, fig. h), may belong to this province, but the locality is not defined by the author. (Anatomical Supplement to follow.) Figs. 1, 2. Figs. 3,4. Fig. 5. Fit?. 6. Fig. 7. Fig. 8. EXPLANATION OF PLATES. Plate ix. — Oxytes hercules, Hedley. — 0. Jlyensis, Hedley. — Conulus starkei, Brazier. Magnified. — C. maino, Brazier. Magnified. — Microcystina sapjyho, Brazier. Magnified. — M. calcarata, Hedley. Magnified. Fig. 9. Fig. 10. Fig. 11. Fig. 12. Fig. 13. Fig. 14. Figs. 15, 16. 116 THE LAND MOLLUSCAN FAUNA OF BRITISH NEW GUINEA. EXPLANATION OF PLATES (continued). Plate x. — M. calcarata, Hedley. Magnified. — Thalassia annul a, Brazier. — Ochthephila albertisi, Brazier. — Charopa texta, Hedley. Magnified. — Helicarion visi, Hedley. — H. musgravei, Hedley. — Rhytida globosa, Hedley. Figs. 17, 18, 19. — Cristigibba macgregori, Hedley. Fig. 20. — Geotrochus oxystoma, Smith. Plate xi. — Geotrochus oxystoma, Smith. — G. bevani, Brazier. — G. elisus, Hedley. — G. tapparonei, Smith, — G. zeno, Brazier. — G. trobriandensis, Hedley. — G. brumeriensis, Forbes. Plate xii. — Cochlostyla papuensis, Hedley. — Partula occidentalis, Hedley. — Succinea simplex, PfeifFer. — Omphalotropis brazieri, Hedley. Magnified. — 0. protracta, Hedley. Magnified. — Bellardiella minor, Hedley. Magnified. — Pnpinella tapparonei, Brazier. Magnified. — Pupina ovalis, Hedley. Magnified. — P. gibba, Hedley. Magnified. — Diplommatina symmetrica, Hedley. Magnified. Plate xii. bis. — Cyclotus horridus, Hedley. Magnified. — C. howaldi, Hedley. Magnified. — C. belfordi, Hedley. Magnified. — Leptopoma parvum, Hedley. Magnified. — Helicina insidarum, Hedley. — ,, ,, var. sinus. Magnified. — H. woodlarkensis, Smith. Magnified. — H. maino, Brazier. Magnified. — H. multicoronata, Hedley. Magnified. Fig. 21. Figs, 22, 23. Figs. , 24, 25. Fig. 26. Fig. 27. Fig. 28. Fig. 29. Fig. 30. Fig. 31. Fig. 32. Fig. 33. Fig. 34. Fig. 35. Fig. 36. Fig. 37. Fig. 38. Fig. 39. Fig. 40. Fig. 41. Fig. 42. Fig. 43. Fig. 44. Fig. 45. Fig. 46. Fig. 47. Fig. 48. 117 ON THE TRAIL OF AN EXTINCT BIRD. By C. W. De Vis, M.A., Corr. Mem. The function of the wing in birds is in kind almost uniform, though, in exercise it varies greatly. It is therefore probable that any variation observable in the form or relative dimensions of a constituent bone of the wing (the ulna, for example) has been brought about solely by the habitudes of the bird, or those of its ancestors, in the use of the power of flight. The extent of the variation so produced will be comparatively limited : inconspicuous, indeed, by the side of the results of diverse adaptation acting on the corresponding segment of the mammalian fore-limb. We are thus prepared to find the ulna maintaining in birds a general sameness of character. If we compare it with the humerus its uniformity is but accentuated: and naturally so since its surface is less subjected to the moulding agency of muscular origin and insertion than is that of the proximal segment of the lever, the recipient of the muscles moving the whole, and the purveyor of others which give motion to the distal segments. These con- siderations may serve to account for the fact that the differentia- tions of the ulna have been found too insignificant to be discussed by comparative osteology ; and undoubtedly the bone is not that part of the bird's skeleton which throws most light on its general economy, yet it may be that it is not altogether impossible to find in the fossil ulna of a bird some guidance to the systematic place which should be assigned to the organization of which it formed a part. In the following attempt to do so the characters which have appeared to be available are the proportions of the bone discovered in its relative length and thickness, its curvature, the number, size and disposition of the tubercles corresponding to the secondary remiges, the shape of the shaft at its distal end, and the conforma- tion of the articulating surfaces and parts adjacent to them. 118 ON THE TRAIL OF AN EXTINCT BIRD, Proportions : The ulna being in correlation with the rest of the wing bones, and, in conjunction with them, determining to some extent the shape of the complete organ, and this again being in relation with the volant activity of the bird, we might expect to be able to recognise a correspondence between the proportion of the bone and the bird's habits of flight ; and in certain groups, as the petrels, swifts, and eagles, whose livelihood depends on continuous exertion of wing-power, we find that such a relation does exist. In the soaring birds there is a notable slenderness of the ulna, accompanying an elongation and narrowness of the wing, which we may conceive to be necessary to sustained buoyancy upon and rapid evolution in moving air ; and had adaptation persisted in being the sole factor in the formation of the wing the task of placing an unknown bird amongst its kindred, as determined by their powers of flight, would have been compara- tively easy. But it is clear that teleology may be at fault. A similar tenuity of the ulna is found in birds whose flight is not habitually sustained, though on occasion it may be long and rapid — for example, in storks, swans, and pelicans; nay even in others, as the giant kingfisher, whose wings serve only for short and laboured flight. Looking round for a solution of the difficulty, and seeing the prevalence of long necks in the birds last mentioned, we are for a moment tempted to abandon adaptation as a cause and suppose their long ulnas to be due to correlation of growth ; but even this somewhat violent assumption would be illegitimate, seeing that plovers and sandpipers, with long ulnas, have short necks, while most ducks have, with long necks, short ulnas. The only plausible explanation seems to be offered by heredity. Though forbidden to account for the long ulnas of many existing birds by attributing them to adaptive modifications, we are permitted to conceive that they have been handed down from ancestral forms whose modes of flight required them, and retained by the prepotency of heredity over adaptation. If it be said that heredity as thus used is a convenient harbour of refuge for ignorance, be it so until we know better. BY C. W. DE VIS. 119 To acquire a definite notion of the extent to which the bird ulna varies in its proportions, the writer has prepared a tabular statement of the extreme length and minimum breadth of the bone from measurements of it in ninety-eight representatives of the larger sections of Australian birds ; and from the measures of length and breadth has by the use of the formula, transverse xlOO, longitudinal derived an index which may be called the ulnar index. By this proportions may be conveniently estimated, slenderness increasing as the index diminishes. The lengthiness of the entire table prohibits its introduction here ; a summary may, however, be given if accompanied by the warning that in some families the indices are derived from one or two species only. Table of Ulnar FalconidsB Strigidse .„. Corvidaa ... Paradiseidee Oriolidse ... Campophagiclse Menu rid ae Ptilonorhynchidse .. Cuculidae Alcedinida? Caprimulgidse Coraciadse Psittaci Columbae Megapodidse OtidicUe ... Rallidae ... Charadriidse Ardeidse ... Anatidse... Pelecanid ee Steganopodes Podicipitidse Indices in Birds. 3-6 to 5-37 4-05 — 4-64 6-15 — 6-25 6-11 - 7-94 6-74 — 7-6 5-39 — 7-55 8-36 — 8-75 6-62 — 6-85 3-9 — 7-53 3-8 — 4-7 6-43 — — 5-2 — — 4-94 — 8-6 5-50 — 9-33 5-4 — 10 51 2-96 — 3-14 4-92 — 8-28 3 65 — 5-91 2-81 — 4-67 3-73 — 7-46 3-4 — 5-16 3-24 — 3-58 3-69 — 4-69 120 ON THE TRAIL OF AN EXTINCT BIRD, The fossil ulna which has led to these measurements is in its greatest diameter 47*5 mm.; in its smallest, 3'5mm.; it has con- sequently an index of 7*38. Proceeding to compare it with those of recent birds, we may at once exclude from further consideration those which have a greatest index below 7*38, or a smallest index above it. Nine families will then remain, the Paradiseidce, Oriolidce, Gampo- pliagidce, Cucididce, Psittaci, Columbce, Megap>odidaz, and Anatidce. Form of Shaft: The ulnar shaft in birds assumes towards its distal end four modifications of form, which may be distinguished as cylindrical, subcylindrical, compressed, and trihedral. It is compressed in the Paradiseidce and Cuculidce ; subtrihedral in the Megapodidce ; cylindrical in the Psittaci. In the remaining five families, and in the fossil, it is subcylindrical, the cylinder being flattened on the dorsal surface. Curvature of Shaft : To afford space for the interosseous bodies and tendons of the long flexors and extensors the avine ulnar curves outwards, the curvature varying considerably in degree and location. In the majority of birds the curvature is almost confined to the proximal half or third of the shaft, which becomes straight, or nearly so, for the rest of its length ; in others the shaft is curved throughout, its contour forming a continuous and almost symmetrical arch. The Gampophagidce, Oriolidce, Paradi- seidce, Rallidce, and the larger Anatidce conform to the general rule. The fossil ulna, on the other hand, is regularly arched, as it is in the pigeons and ducks, and the bird represented by it probably belonged to one or other of these last groups. Remigial processes ; Arranged in a single or double row along the bone, but generally more or less indistinct at either end, these outgrowths present themselves in much diversity of size and number, the latter in correspondence with the length of the bone, the former exhibiting no such correspondence, but being, on the contrary, frequently greater, though not unfrequently nearly obsolete, in the shorter winged birds. The contrast here indicated is exemplified by the pigeons and ducks, and it enables us to make a final selection in our determination of the fossil. BY C. W. DE VIS. 121 The regularly arched ulnas found among the clucks have remigial tubercles which are either small and low, or evanescent. The pigeons have them constantly, and sometimes in pronounced development. In Lopholaimus antarcticus they are almost as large relatively to the size of the bone as in Menura, in which they attain a greater size than in any other bird known to the writer. In the fossil ulna they are as distinct as in Lopholaimus, although the bone itself is much more slender than the ulna of that pigeon. It is amongst the pigeons, therefore, that we must place our extinct bird. It remains to ascertain its position among the genera of the Columbas. It cannot be a Leucosarcia, for the ulnar index in that genus is much too high — namely, 9*33. On the other hand, Lopholaimus, with an index ranging from 6 '43 to 6*57, Goura with a range from 5*50 to 5"71. Myristicivora with an index of 6*8, and Megaloprepia with one of 6*64 may be excluded for the opposite reason. The middle terms are Macropygia, having an index of 7*85 to 8*05, Erythrauchen (index 7*79 to 8), and Chalcophaps (index 7*18 to 7*79), which last might include the fossil, with an index of 7*38. But though in proportions it is at one with Chalcophaps, on a close comparison of its arthral surfaces with those of the genera referred to it is in them found to resemble more nearly Megaloprepia and Erythrauchen. Finally, a glance at the size of the remigial tubercles of the fossil gives decision to the opinion, already half formed, that it belonged to a genus of pigeons distinct from all three. The name suggested for the supposed genus, Lithophaps, is, of course, pro- visional, since it connotes distinctive features which J I may, when we know more of the skeleton, be found to coexist with characters assimilating it to some known genus ; it merely records a seemingly reasonable judg- ment on the scanty evidence before us. The characters of the genus so far known are those of the ulna. Ulna stout, index 7*38, subcylindrical, continously arched, with a single row of eight strong remigial tubercles ; arthral surfaces nearly as in Megaloprepia. 122 ON THE TRAIL OF AN EXTINCT BIRD. The species may be distinguished as L. ulnaris, with characters as yet undistinguishable from those of the genus. Hob : Darling Downs, in deposits of the Nototherian period. Collected by Mr. H. Hurst, in the neighbourhood of Warwick. 123 NOTE ON AN EXTINCT EAGLE. By C. W. De Vis, M.A., Cork. Mem. In company with Lithophaps ulnaris, Mr. Hurst found a femur of an eagle which is irreconcilable with any genus known to the w liter. But, in the "Proceedings of the Royal Society of Queens- land" (Vol. vi., p. 161), a humerus of an eagle has been noticed by him under the name of Uroaetus brachialis. The bird was there referred provisionally to the extant genus as being in accord with it so far as one extremity of a long bone could bear witness. It has now become more than doubtful whether its association with Uroaetus can be maintained. If we are not prepared to consider it more probable that two species of eagles existed in practically the same habitat than that the two bones in question belonged to the same bird, and of this there is nothing valid to be shown to the contrary, then the specific name brachialis must be placed under a new genus, for the femur is quite distinct from those of recent genera. For this probable genus the name Tapliaetus is suggested in allusion to its appearance among the disentombed remains of its contemporaries. Restoring the condylar region, which is wanting, this bone is of the same length as that of the male sea-eagle, Haliastur leuco- gaster, and 1\ mm. shorter than in a female wedge-tailed eagle, U. audax. The femoral index 9*4 separates it alike from the hawks and kites, with a much lower,^and from Baza which has for a hawk the exceptionally high one of 10 -4 ; it likewise excludes Haliaetus, which has the highest observed in the Falconidse, 1088, but agrees fairly well with that of Uroaetus, Nisaetus, Haliastur, and Pandion ; the last named genus is, however, put out of court by the want of a pneumatic foramen adjacent to the trochanterian ridge, an abnormality not presented by the fossil. From the other [24 NOTE ON an i:\ i [NOT BAGLB, genera it differs as follows ; The "neck " being Longer the proxi- mal end »>t" the shaft is in oonsequenoe notably broader the Deck itself is also broader in the opposite direction between the head ami the trochanter, The entoanconal surface of the upper pari of the shaft as tar as the extensor cruris ridge is muoh flattened, and between the head and the pneumatic foramen becomes eon- oave. The pneumatic foramen is remark- ably small, about half its oustomary Bize in leoent genera, and is partially conoealed by a. defleotion of the sharp edge of the trc* ohanterian ridge. When the bone rests on its outer side the flattening iA' the anoonal surface proximally and ^^ the palmar dis- tally brings into prominence the pectineal ridge, which thus forms a high and sharp inner margin; this ridge is continuous from the entepioondyle to within a short distanoe from the head, where it ends in a distinct tubercle representing a third trochanter, a feature rarely occurring in the femora oi lards. The extensor cruris ridge desoends much further on the anoonal Burface than in existing genera o( the family. On the palmar surface the linea aspera commencing low down as a faint ridge enlarges into a well marked eminence opposite the interval between the end <^' the pectineal ridge and the medullary orifioe, sending off b short branch towards the latter, and continuing its main course upwards with a Btrong ourve towards the palmar end o( the musoular area oi the trochanter, The pit above the entepioondyle absent in llal'utctus and llaliastur is in the fossil situated in the mouth of the groove between the condyle and epioondyle. The characters of the genUS are for the present but the leading characters of the femur. UY 0, w. DE 719. 125 Femur stout (index ciro. 9*4), proximal f N.S.W., on insects injurious to drugs, one of them probably the sumo species of moth as was exhibited by Mr. Froggatt at the Society's meeting in March, 1890, the insects shown having pupated in a tin of cayenne pepper. Mr. Fletcher exhibited for Mr. J. "I I. Rose two living specimens of an inland species of frog (Chiroleptes platycephalus, Gthr.), obtained near Walgett, previously only recorded from Bourkeand Dandaloo, N.S.W. It is nocturnal in its habits and an expert burrower, Mr. Rose reporting that he has never met with it above; ground during the daytime. 126 NOTES AND EXHIBITS. Mr. A. Sidney Olliff exhibited specimens of the cottony-cushion or fluted scale (leery a purchem, Mask.) and a number of larvae and perfect insects of Vedalia cardinalis, Muls., the predatory lady-bird that was introduced into California last year by the United States Department of Agriculture for the purpose of keeping the former insect, which had been the cause of great loss to orange-growers, in check. The lady-birds had been kindly forwarded to him from Auckland, N.Z., by Mr. T. F. Cheeseman, the Curator of the Auckland Museum, who states that the species is at present (March 16th) engaged in clearing off a colony of Icerya on a hedge of Kangaroo Acacia not far from his house. Mr. Olliff said that Mr. A. Koebele states in his official report on his mission to Australia ("Report of a Trip to Australia to investigate the Natural Enemies of the Fluted Scale": Washington, 1890), that he had obtained the Vedalia at Adelaide and Mannum in South Australia, and in Melbourne, and Sydney; but it was a remarkable fact that the insect was not known to our most active workers at the Coleoptera, and that it was not represented in any well-known Australian collection. As the Icerya was very common in many places near Sydney, Mr. Olliff hoped that members would keep a look out for Vedalia cardinalis with a view to reporting its occurrence to the Society. It was, he thought, a matter for regret that we had not a more definite knowledge of an insect whose introduction into the Californian orange orchards, under the auspices of the U. S. Division of Entomology, was likely to prove a land-mark in the history of applied entomology.* * Specimens of Vedalia cardinalis were afterwards found by Mr. Olliff in a collection of Sydney insects obtained by Mr. A. Lea, as reported at the following meeting of the Society {vide Abstract for April 29th, 1891). — Ed. P.LS.N.S.W.(2nfiSei i Voi v. H-J.ABaron. /ftfi. P.L.5.N.S.W.(2"dSer.)VoL.VI. PI III. "'- HJ.AB.~- P.LS.N.S.W.(2nd5er.)VcL.VI ■ - £M • ■ i ;- ^pftr;f? xr*&# ,':V*.'' \$& • tw litfi. P.L5.N.S.W.(2ndSer.)VoL.VI gr on. I ith. P.LS.N.S.W.(2ndSer.)VoL.VI. P1VU1. -'• 15&I* m t i-$: lu I H.JJ.Baron /irn. PL.S.N.S.W.(2nd SeriVoL.VI Pl.K. ,- C.Hed/ey- de/.ad nat HJJ.B3ron.J1m PLS.NS.W(2ndSer.)Vol.VI :\ - .■■"- 10 0M 14- '%%}-; 13 Stf .«£*■ ,- .-^ «??& *< "b*. L + 42 •H 44 /X v + V: 7 + \. -■• ey dzl ad nai H LA. Baron iith. 127 WEDNESDAY, 29th APRIL, 1891. The President, Professor Haswell, M,A., D.Sc, in the Chair. Messrs. George Ellis, C. A. Chesney, and Rainbow were intro- duced as visitors. Mr. C. Hedley, F.L.S., who retires from the position of Corres- ponding Member in consequence of taking up his residence in Sydney, was duly elected an Ordinary Member of the Society. DONATIONS. "Agricultural Gazette of N.S.W." Vol. ii., Part 2 (Feb., 1891). From the Director of Agriculture. "Bulletin de la Societe d'Etude des Sciences Naturelles de Reims." ire Annee, No. 1 (Jan., 1891). From the Society. " Catalogue of the Australian Birds in the Australian Museum. Part iii., Psittaci;" "Records of the Australian Museum." Vol. i., No. 6. From the Trustees. " Perak Government Gazette." Vol. iv., Nos. 4-6 (Feb.-March, 1891). From the Government Secretary. " Zoologischer Anzeiger." xiv. Jahrg. Nos. 356-358 (Feb.- March, 1891). From the Editor. " Johns Hopkins University Circulars." Vol. x., Nos. 85 and 86 (Feb. and March, 1891). From the University. 128 DONATIONS. " Journal of Comparative Medicine and Veterinary Archives." Vol. xii., Nos. 2 and 3 (Feb. and March, 1891). From the Editor. Pamphlet entitled " Insect-larva (Cecidomyia sp.) eating Rust on Wheat and Flax." By N. A. Cobb and A. S. Olliff. From Dr. Cobb. " Bulletin of the Department of Agriculture, Brisbane." No. 7 (Botany, No. ii., March, 1891). From the Colonial Botanist. "Journal of the Royal Microscopical Society, 1891." Parti. (Feb.). From the Society. "Transactions of the Entomological Society of London, 1890." Part v. (Feb., 1891). From the Society. "Pharmaceutical Journal of Australasia." n.s., Vol. iv., Parts 3 and 4 (March and April, 1891). From the Editor. " Australasian Journal of Pharmacy." Vol. vi., No. 63 (March, 1891). From the Editor. " Bulletin de la Societe Beige de Microscopic" xviime Annee, No. 4 (Jan., 1891). From the Society. " Iconography of Australian Salsolaceous Plants. Decades i.-vi. By Baron von Mueller, K.C.M.C, F.R.S." From the Fremier oj Victoria, through the Librarian, Public Library, Melbourne. " Memoires de l'Academie Imperiale des Sciences de St. Peters- bourg." viime Serie, T. xxxvii., Nos. 11-13; T. xxxviii., No. 1. From the Society. " Oefver3igt af Finska Vetenskaps-Societetens Forhandlingar." T. xxxi. (1888-89); "Bidrag till Kannedom af Finlands Natur och Folk." Haftet xlviii. (1889). From the Society. " Christiania Videnskabs-Selskabs Forhandlinger, 1889." From the Society. "Nova Acta cler Ksl. Leop.-Carol. Deutschen Akademie der Naturforscher." Bd. xlix., No. 4 ; Bd. Ii., No. 1 ; Bd. lii., No. 4 ; Bd. liv., Nos. 1, 3, and 4 ; Bd. Iv. No. 1 : " Leopoldina." xxv. Heft (1889). From the Society. DONATIONS. 129 " Comptes Rendus des Seances de l'Academie des Sciences de Paris." T. cxii., Nos. 3-5 (1891). From the Academy. " United States National Museum. Bulletin." No. 32 (1887). From the Director. " Memoirs of the Boston Society of Natural History." Vol. iv., Nos. 1-9 (1886-90); "Proceedings." Vol. xxiv., Parts 3 and 4 ( 1 889-90). From the Society. "United States Department of Agriculture ; Division of Orni- thology and Mammalogy — North American Fauna." Nos. 3 and 4 (1890). From the Department. " Bulletin of the Scientific Laboratories of Denison University." Vol. v. (1890). From the Editor. "Journal of the Cincinnati Society of Natural History." Vol, xiii., No. 3 (Oct., 1890). From the Society. " Calif ornian Academy of Science — Occasional Papers." Nos. i. and ii. (1890). From the Academy. "Gesellschaft fur Erdkunde zu Berlin — Verhandlimgen." Bd. xiii.-xv., xvi., Nos. 1-8 (1886-89), xviii., No. 1 (1891); " Zeit- schrift." Bd. xxi.-xxiii., xxiv., Nos. 1-4 (1886-89), xxvi., No. 1 (1891). From the Society. "Zoological Society of London — Abstracts of Proceedings." Feb. 17th and March 3rd, 1891. From the Society. "Bureau of Agriculture, South Australia — Journal." Vol. ill, No. 9 (April, 1891). From the Secretary. "Proceedings of the .Royal Society of Victoria." n.s., Vol. ii. (1889). From the Society. " Achter Jahresbericht des naturwissensch.Verein zu Osnabriick" (1889 and 1890). From the Society. " Katalog der Vogelsammlung im Museum der Senckenbergis- chen naturforschenden Gesellschaft in Frankfurt am Main. Von E. Hartert (1891)." From the Society. 130 DONATIONS. Pamphlet entitled "North Italian Bryozoa." By A. W. Waters, F.G.S. From the Author. "United States Geological Survey — Ninth Annual Report (1887-88);" "Bulletin." Nos. 58-61, 63, 64, and 66 (1890); "Mineral Resources for 1888;" "Monographs: Vol. i.— Lake Bonneville. By G. C. Gilbert (1890)." From the Director. " Koniglieh-Bohmische Gesell. der Wissenschaften in Prag. — Abhandlungen der mathemat.-naturwissenschaft. Classe." vii. Folge, 3Bd. (1889-90); "Jahresbericht, 1889;" "Sitzungsberichte." Jahrg. 1889, ii. Bd. ; Jahrg. 1890, i. Bd. : "Uhlonosne Utvary v Tasmanii. Napsal Prof. Dr. O. Feistmantel (1890)." From the Society. " Nederlandsche Entomologische Vereeniging. — Tijdschrift." xxxiii. Deel, Afl. 1 and 2 (1889-90). From the Society. " Royal Society of N.S.W. — Journal and Proceedings." Vol. xxiv., Part 2 (1890). From the Society. " Naturwissenschaftl. Verein des Reg.-Bez. Frankfurt — Monat- liche Mittheilungen." viii. Jahrg., Nos. 8-11 (1890-91) : "Socie- tatum Litters." iv. Jahrg. Nos. 10-12 ; v. Jahrg. No. 1 (1890-91). From the Society. "American Naturalist." Vol. xxv , No. 289 (Jan. 1891). From the Editors. Pamphlet entitled " Supplement to the Catalogue of Nests and Eggs of Birds found breeding in Australia and Tasmania." By A. J. North. From the Author. 131 PAPERS KKAI). ON THE OCCURRENCE OF BARITE (BARYTES) IN THE BAWKESBURY SANDSTONE NEAR SYDNEY. Ky ii i:mcv (i. Smith, Laboratory Assistant, Technological Muskum, Syonky. (Com/nvunioaited by ■/. II. Maiden^ F.L.S., &c.t Curator <>f the Museum,) Uninteresting ;>« the Hawkesbury sandstone around Sydney is generally considered to be, especially from ;i collector's point of view, and although the inducement to search for either metallic or Hon metallic minerals is not great, yet sometimes one Is rewarded for a diligent search among the cracks and crannii old or recent excavations. In a quarry not far from Cook's River, five miles west from Sydney, and adjoining the Tllawarra road in the borough of Marrickville, I recently found Barytes in very perfect and pure crystals. They have a vitreous lustre, which on the most perfect crystals is very brilliant; it was their sparkling, in the sun that first drew my attention to them. They are in many instances as transparent as glass, and crystallise for the most part in modified tables of the; right rectangular pyramid, the domes being cut off by the basal pinakoids. In many crystals the faces of the right rhombic prism are, distinct ; the symbols for the majority of the most perfect crystals are, therefore : — co P + P Go + P cx> + OP. The pinakoids OoPoo and a,Pa> being occasionally, although seldom, developed. The faces of the right rhombic prism are extended upon the macro-diagonal axi«, and in a few larger- crystals the extension has continued to the almost extinction of tin; macro-domes. The purest and best formed crystals are of small size, but some measure J inch on the macro-diagonal, though these larger crystals are not so pure nor so transparent ; their thickness is j\. inch. 132 THE OCCURRENCE OF BARITE IN THE HAWKESBURY SANDSTONE. The purest crystals were taken for qualitative analysis j just a trace of calcium was found, not a trace of strontium, no acid but sulphuric, the crystals consisting almost entirely of sulphate of barium. To remove any adhering ferric oxide or other accidental impurity they were boiled with dilute acid before fusion. An exhaustive quantitative analysis would have been of little value, as it was impossible to separate the crystals from the grains of sand adhering to them ; but two determinations were made to discover, if possible, in what proportion the sulphate of calcium was present. In the first -4478 gram. S04 was obtained ; this if combined entirely with barium would give 1*0861 gram. Ba S04 ; the bases were dissolved and precipitated by sulphuric acid and 1*0876 gram, obtained; this does not allow for any calcium, and as the second determination gave almost identical results, we may consider, allowing for slight errors, that the pure transparent crystals are Ba S04, the calcium being present in very minute quantities. Ba = 136*84; S = 32. ; 0 = 16. It is in the conglomerate, which consists of boulders of shale and ironstone cemented together with hardened sand, that the barytes is found. The conglomerate overlies the upper solid rock, and is also found beneath the same bed, a distance of 10 or 12 feet separating the two. Shale is found embedded in the solid rock, but the barytes does not appear to exist there, although it is found both in the upper and lower conglomerates. The shale contains much mica. I have not succeeded in obtaining the barytes in any large quantity, the conglomerate not being of large extent, although there is no reason to suppose that it is restricted to that deposit, and perhaps now that its presence in the immediate neighbourhood of Sydney has been ascertained, larger quantities may be found. In the many crystals examined no new faces were seen, there- fore further description is not required. The best specimens have been placed in the Technological Museum Collection. 133 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN ECONOMIC BOTANY— No. II. By J. H. Maiden, F.L.S., &c., Curator of the Technological Museum. FOODS. Adansonia Gregorii, F.v.M. N.O. Malvaceae. The "Bottle- tree "* of N. W. Australia. From Mr. J. Pentecost, who spent some months in the Kimberley district, I learnt the following particulars in regard to these singular trees. Two or three were usually seen at a time, with a long interval. The fruits are rather larger than an emu egg (one in my possession has its diameters six and four inches respectively). The blacks, and Europeans too, chew the slightly acidulous pith or pulp. The seeds embedded in this pithy pulp taste like hazel nuts, and are a favourite food of the blacks. So valuable are these trees to them that they never notch the trunks nor injure the trees in any way in their pursuit of the fruit, as they do in the case of other trees. Cocos nucifera, Linn. N.O. Palmae. " Coco-nut " This is a tree specially protected by enactments of the Queens- land Parliament in the interests, chiefly, of the aboriginals and Polynesians. Legislation of this kind is so rare in the colonies that I have gathered some information in regard to this particular instance. Mr. Lewis Bernays, F.L.S., Clerk of the Parliaments, Brisbane, kindly informed me that the Acts referred to are the Pearl-shell and Beche-de-mer Fishery Act of 1881, and also its Amendment Act of 1886. Through his kindness in forwarding * For a fine plate, and excellent description of this tree, see J. R. Jackson in The Student, July, 1868. 134: NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN ECONOMIC BOTANY, me copies of both Acts I am able to quote clause 1 3 of the Amend- ing Act, which is as follows : — "Any person who cuts down or injures a coco-nut tree, or other tree bearing edible fruit, or any tree of the kind known as Galophyllum inophyllum .... shall be liable to a penalty not exceeding ,£10." I wrote to the Hon. John Douglas, C.M.G., Government Resident, Thursday Island, asking what was the effect of this legislation, and he courteously supplied the following informa- tion:— "Coco-nut trees are, I think I may say, religiously respected. We have not many matured trees in this immediate neighbourhood, though there are plenty in the islands in the Straits. A good many have lately been planted, and some of them are doing pretty well, but there are a good many failures. The Ccdophyllwm 'nwpJn/Jlum, of which there are very few specimens, is not likely to be touched by ruthless hands" (July, 1890). Sterculia diversifolia, G. Don. N.O. Sterculiacese. A " Kurrajong." It has been recorded, many years ago, by Macarthur and others, that this tree possesses an edible root, but I give the following more detailed information. The tree seems hardly, if at all, known in the Candelo district by the above name, but it is well known as the " Yam-tree," on account of the large yam-like root the tree possesses, at all events in the young state ; these are locally known as yams, and they were at one time sought after by the aborigi- nals for food. In the case of some small trees, less than one inch in diameter, which were dug up for planting, they had yams from eight to twelve inches long, and two or three in diameter, weighing several pounds. They have been got eight to ten pounds in weight, and are not despised by Europeans. The outside skin or bark of these yams can be easily removed, and looks like the skin of a radish. The inside is beautifully white, a little sweetish in taste, but otherwise rather insipid. I cannot learn whether the aborigi- nals used to eat them raw or subject them to some process of cooking. BY .J. II. MAIDEN. I 35 Eucalyptus Gunwii, J look,/. N.O. Myrtaceee. For an exhaustive research on this manna, tee "The Carbc* hydrates of marina from E. Gunnii and of Eucalyptus Honey." By F. W. Passmore, I'h.l). (Pharm. Jowrn. [3], xxi. 717). Perhaps on account of the rain, there was so much manna on the Monaro last year, that if there were any sale for it it would represent a large sum annually for the district. Under large trees of E. Gunnii the ground is often literally covered, on the high lands above Cooma, and on the plains where both E. OwnfilU and E. viminalis occur there is a great deal more. A family of children could gather a targe quantity in a day, so that, if there were any sale for it, manna-collecting could become a useful minor industry during the summer months. Although last year it was particularly abundant, large quantities are obtainable every year. From actual observation, the production of manna does not seem to be affected by either wet or dry weather, although of course the first shower of rain washes away all that has been formed since the previous shower. Se8eli Harveyanum, F.v.M. N.O. Umbclliferac. The "seed" of this fragrant plant is used in the Snowy Mountains as a substitute for caraways, and is locally known as " Anise." The seeds do not, however, resemble anise, particularly in flavour, but they are most like Indian fennel (Fceniculum Vlllgare, Gsertn.) in general appearance and perhaps in flavour, of all umbelliferous seeds which enter into commerce. The root, also, is aromatic. The plant is rather plentiful in the locality indicated, above 5000 feet, although it also occurs as low as from 3000-3500 feet. STOCK POISONS. Bulbine bulbosa, Haw. N.O. Liliaceae. " Native Onion." This plant is recorded as poisonous to stock in Queensland and South Australia. Two years ago it was sent to me from near 136 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN ECONOMIC BOTANY, Penrith, in this colony, with the report that it had poisoned cows in a paddock in which there was but little grass owing to the dry weather, and I was informed that horses either would not touch it or that it appeared to have no effect on them. I am aware that this is contrary to Queensland experience. Nicotiana suaveolens, Lehn. N.O. Solanacea?. " Native Tobacco." So many contradictory statements have been made in regard to the poisonous nature to stock, or the reverse, of this plant, that specific evidence is now necessary to settle the point once for all. In the Journal Bureau Agric. S.A., Aug., 1890, it is stated that the plant has killed a number of cattle and pigs at Mannum, Terowie, and other parts of South Australia. The percentage of nicotine in the plant at various stages has never been ascertained, so far as I am aware ; meantime we are ignorant as to the extent of its poisonous nature. Cassia sp. N.O. Leguminosse. I have received some leaves (too fragmentary for determination), of a Cassia from the Wilcannia district, with the report that they cause purging in cattle and horses after eating only a small quantity. The leaves of various species of this genus form, as is well known, the sennas of commerce ; it would be interesting to chemically examine any of our purgative native sennas. ESSENTIAL OILS. Eucalyptus cneorifolia, DC. N.O. Myrtaceae. This is another Eucalypt which has been made to yield its oil for commercial purposes during the past twelve months. Messrs. W. Cumming & Co., of Adelaide, have established works at Kangaroo Island, South Australia, and have produced an article of high quality. It is different to any other Eucalyptus oil I have examined in that it has a secondary odour reminding one of dill or caraways. BY J. H. MAIDEN. 137 Santalum cygnorum, Miq. (Syn. Fusanus spicatus, R.Br.). Sandalwood oil from Western Australia. It does not appear to be easy to obtain full particulars of the com- merce in sandalwood and its products, which form no insignificant item in the trade of the western colony. My interest in the matter has been re-awakened by observing in the Sydney newspapers of September last a telegram from Perth, W.A., to the effect that " The newly-established Distillery Company, a short distance from Albany, shipped the first instalment of 20 cases of sandalwood oil to England." The resinous-smelling West Australian sandalwood (pronounced by Schimmel & Co. to be quite unsuitable to European requirements) goes to Singapore and China, to be burned as incense in Buddhist temples, and, doubtless, Malays and Chinese have exploited Western Australian sandalwood for centuries. Western Australia exported in 1889 to Singapore and China 4470 tons, of the value of £33,525. As to the oil, I have received no reply from the Distillery Company in respect to it, nor have I observed any account of its reception in the London and Continental markets.'*' SUBSTANCE REPUTED MEDICINAL. Verbena officinalis. Linn. N.O. VerbenaceaB. I have received this plant from the north-west of this colony with an iutimation that it is employed by the blacks in venereal complaints. TIMBERS. I give brief notes on the following timbers, which have not, so far as I am aware, been previously described. * Since the above was written I have obtained, by the roundabout way of London and Leipzig (Chemist and Druggist, and Schimmel and Co.), a few particulars concerning this oil. Its specific gravity is variously stated at "953 and *962 ; its odour as " much more fragrant than the Madras kind " and " sharp." Its colour is pale straw. 138 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN ECONOMIC BOTANY, Acacia penninervis, Sieb. " Mountain Hickory." Although this tree is so abundant in the south, its timber does not appear to have come into general use, but an expert in the Bombala district considers it excellent, being very durable and very tough, on which account he prefers it to anything else for axe and tool-handles. It is said that the timber can almost be bent double upon itself. Trees obtained from high stony ridges are usually sound. The timber is flesh-coloured, has a pretty figure, and very little sap-wood. It is not easy to dress. Acacia tetragonophylla, F.v.M. A " Dead finish." Timber very hard, heavy, tough, and close-grained. Its prevailing colour is reddish-brown, and it has pinkish stripes. It is well adapted for small turnery and cabinet work, but it is hard to work. When fresh it smells like violets. An interior species. Ackama Muelleri, Benth. (Syn. Weinmannia paniculosa, F.v.M.). N.O. Saxifragese. A " Corkwood." A timber likely to prove of value. It is hardly to be distin- guished from that of Eucryphia Moorei. When fresh it is drab with a purplish cast, close in the grain, tough, and dresses with facility. In the uplands in the county of Gloucester and further north it is plentiful, and in places it is not unfrequently found three feet in diameter. Callicoma serratifolia, Andr. N.O. Saxifragese. Sometimes called " Coach wood " in the Braid wood district. It is close in the grain, and works remarkably well to a nice smooth surface. It has no figure to speak of, and is of a pinkish colour. It is used sometimes for wheelwrights' work, but is never of sufficient diameter for large work. The young saplings used to be split and used for basket-making. Hakea saligna, R.Br. N.O. Proteaceae. "Foley Wood." The tree and its wood go under this name over a considerable area in the extreme south-east of the colony. It is a flesh-coloured, BY J. H. MAIDEN. 139 little-figured, free-working timber, and though apt to rend in drying, repays attention to seasoning. A Mr. Foley, who, up to the time of his death a few years ago, was a road-maintenance man in the Bombala district, used to make pick, hammer, and axe- handles of this wood, which acquired considerable local reputation and were readily purchased. This is the origin of the local name, and it is an interesting example of the way plant names have been often given in this country. Lomatia Fraseri, R.Br. N.O. Proteacese. " Lancewood." Used for similar purposes to the preceding, — a timber which it much resembles. It is close in texture, has a pretty oak grain, and is of a very pale pink colour. It is difficult to plane. Pomaderris cinerea, Benth. N.O. Rhamnaceae. Tough, close in the grain, dresses up fairly well, but is inclined to warp and split. It is moderately heavy, and the heartwood has a pleasing brown colour. It is hardly known, and appears to be never used. It is probably useful for tool-handles. Southern districts. MISCELLANEOUS. Mr. C. Hedley informs me that the natives of Northern Queensland, when hotly pursued, have often escaped from their enemies in the following manner. They break off the leaf-stalk of a water-lily, disappear in the waters of a lagoon or river, and breathe by means of this porous leaf-stalk, which extends from their mouths to the surface of the water. They have been known thus to remain concealed in water for half an hour. During President Carnot's tour in Corsica in 1889, it was related in the newspapers that a Frenchman had escaped from brigands by means of a similar expedient ; he used a hollow reed, and made the state- ment that he had been under the surface of a certain lake four hours. 140 THE OCCURRENCE OP A GUM IN ECHINOCARPUS AUSTRALIS, ON THE OCCURRENCE OF A GUM IN ECHINOCARPUS (SLOANEA) AUSTRALIS, BENTH. By J. H. Maiden, F.L.S., &c. This fine tree, usually known as " Maiden's blush " on account of the colour of its timber, belongs to the Natural Order Tiliace?e, closely allied, of course, to the Sterculiaceje and Malvaceae, many of whose species yield gums. The Tiliacese are also all more or less mucilaginous, but I cannot trace the record of a gum having been found on a plant, whether endemic in Australia or not, belonging to this Natural Order. Various Tiliaceous trees have their mucilaginous inner barks utilized in India as demulcents, and doubtless in other parts of the world, while that of an African species (Grewia mollis) is stated by Barter to be used in soups, because of its mucilaginous character.* The discovery of gum on Echinocarpus australis by Mr. Bauerlen, collector for the Technological Museum, is therefore of interest. It was obtained from an old tree about 60 feet high and 3 feet in diameter. The tree was somewhat injured by fire, but appeared otherwise sound. Some younger trees close by, though not having gum on to collect, showed signs that there had been some formerly. The old tree also showed places where the gum had been dissolved or washed away. The gum reminds one irresistibly of ox-horn. It contracts on drying, forming transverse cracks, at which it breaks with a bright conchoidal fracture. It cuts like horn. It is tough and tasteless * Masters in Oliver's Flora of Tropical Africa. BY J. H. MAIDEN. 141 under the teeth. It swells up in cold water to many times its original bulk, the outer portion becoming so transparent that it is difficult to distinguish it in the liquid, the inner portion remaining translucent and whitish. When pressed between the fingers the soaked gum does not feel gelatinous, although slightly adhesive. In water it does not dissolve entirely on continued boiling, the liquid becoming slightly cloudy, with small filmy particles floating about in it. On acidifying with hydrochloric acid, the cloudiness and the particles alike disappear. The whole of the gum is pre- cipitated when alcohol is added to this acidified solution. If this precipitate be then filtered off, the greater part is soluble in water. The undissolved portion is soluble in potash of *1 per cent., but not in acidified solutions. If the potash solution be acidified with either acetic or hydrochloric acid, a glairy mass results. It is instructive to compare this gum with Tragacanth and Sterculia gum.* This gum agrees with Tragacanth in regard to the points given in the table at p. 384 (oj>. cit.), with the following exceptions : — It does not entirely dissolve on prolonged boiling; forms a granular jelly like Sterculia gum on treatment with cold water, while Tragacanth forms a smooth viscid mass under similar circum- stances ; contains no starch. It agrees with Tragacanth on the following points : — A yellowish colour with alkalis on heating; formation of the substance denoted by Giraud as pectic acid.f (I have in another place J commented on the unsatisfactory position of these so-called pectic bodies.) Conclusion. — Echinocarpus gum appears to occupy an inter- mediate position between Sterculia gum and Tragacanth, with greater resemblance to the latter. The specific gravity of the gum is 1*481. * See my paper, " Sterculia Gum ; its similarities and dissimilarities to Tragacanth," Pharm. Journ. (3), xx. 381. + Pharm. Journ. (3), v. 766. X Chem. and Drugg. of Austral. , Feb., 1890. 142 THE OCCURRENCE OF A GUM IN ECHINOCARPUS AUSTRALIS Its composition may be stated as follows : — Soluble in cold water (arabin) 12*05 Soluble in -1% soda (metarabin) ; yields arabin on precipitation with alcohol 39*8 Vegetable mucilage of Dragendorff; in- soluble in *1% acid, -1% soda solution, but soluble in potash solution 20*91 Water 1873 Ash* 4-486 95-976 Composition of the Ash. Soluble in water : — Potassium sulphate Insoluble portion : — Calcium carbonatef 3-769' Magnesium carbonate *281 Alumina trace Ferric oxide tracer Total •436 4-05 4-486 * Placed in percentage composition for convenience. t Probably originally existing as oxalate, as calcium oxalate was found in the original gum. 143 ONYX AND DIPELTIS : NEW NEMATODE GENERA, WITH A NOTE ON DORYLAIMU3. By N. A. Cobb. I. Fixation and Preservation of Cojupressed Objects. Many sub-microscopic objects require to be compressed in order to give the best results at the final microscopical examination, and it is well known that compression cannot be accomplished conveniently (if at all) after hardening. To illustrate by an example: the sub-cylindrical larva? of dipterous insects if examined fresh are best seen in a compressorium, but much histological detail is thus seen with difficulty, or escapes observation altogether. If, however, it were possible to fix, stain and mount the larva while compressed, a distinct advantage would be gained. To describe a simple way of doing this is the object of these preliminary lines. The object, say a dipterous larva or a rotifer or a tardigrade or nematode, is compressed between two small coverglasses of the same size. The amount of compression must be regulated by means of two hairs, or better by two pieces of spun glass, placed parallel to each other between the coverglasses. It will be found that hairs from the head, eyebrows, and backs of the hands are of different diameters, and a preliminary experiment will indicate which it is best to use. Having laid the animal, together with two hairs or bits of spun glass, on one of the covers in a drop of water which is too small to entirely fill the space between the covers 10 144 ONYX AND DIPELTIS, when they are finally placed together, lay the other cover on. The animal is compressed, and is unable to move. It will be found convenient to have laid the first cover on a minute drop of water on a glass object slide ; by this means it will be held firmly in place on the slide, and the second cover can be laid squarely on ; furthermore, after the second cover is adjusted the slide can be placed on the stage of a microscope and the animal then examined to see if its position is the correct one, and, if not, the fault can be rectified by sliding the upper cover slightly on the lower. Supposing the object to be now correctly compressed and arranged, the next step is to fix the covers in place. This is done by moving the two covers to the edge of the slide by means of a needle and touching first one side of the pair and then the other side with the wick of a wax taper or candle which has been just now extinguished. The melted wax from the wick serves to cement the covers together, and they may be afterwards handled with considerable impunity. It will be remembered that directions were given to use less water than would fill the space between the covers ; that was a precaution necessary to bringing both covers into close contact with the hairs that were placed between them, thus securing the requisite amount of compression, and also necessary to securing a firm cementing action of the wax. If there is space between the covers at the edge unfilled by the water, the wax enters it, and if melted wax is then also painted in small quantity on the adjacent outside edge of the covers, a firm union results. Allow the covers thus united to lie until all or nearly all the water between them has evaporated. They will then present the appearance illustrated in the adjacent figure. Of course a small amount of water will sometimes remain imme- diately about the compressed animal, and this is often desirable. FlGG^TEr?em"tSVto: H now the animal could be fixed, stained gether with wax at a a, an(j mounted without beino- allowed to change and having compressed » » between them an object its attitude, a result often highly desirable BY N. A. COBB. 145 would be attained. To do this, proceed as follows: — Take an elongated piece of quill or other similar elastic non-metallic sub- stance and make in it two cuts as shown at Fig 2 a,b. It will be Fig. 2.— Two Views of a Piece of Quill, split and opened so as to form a compressorium. Fig. 3.— Two Round Coyer- glasses, cemented to- gether and placed in a quill compressorium. found that the piece of quill can then be opened and converted into a compressing machine. The covers are to be placed in this com- pressorium as shown in Fig. 3. Of course the compressorium of quill should be stiff enough to firmly hold the covers in place, but should be no stiffer than will serve this purpose well. Our compressed animal is now ready for treatment, and may be handled like any other object. The quill will hold the covers firmly in place, even if the paraffin should become dissolved or melted. If no substance is to be used that will dissolve or melt the paraffin, then of course the compressorium of quill is unnecessary, as for instance when only cold solutions of glycerine are to be used and the object is to be mounted in glycerine. If, however, one wishes to fix in hot sublimate or to proceed at once to alcohols or other liquids that would have a loosening or solvent action on the paraffin, then of course the quill compressorium (or a different cement) is necessary. To fix the object, take hold of the quill and place one edge of the covers in the fixing fluid ; the fluid runs in by capillary attraction, and fixation takes place. The fixiug fluid may be replaced by fresh fluid or can be washed out by the use of blotting paper in the ordinary way, i.e., place one edge of the covers in the fluid it is desired to draw in and place fresh blotting paper in contact with the opposite edge of the covers. 146 ONYX AND DIPELTIS, An excellent way is to make the whole apparatus represented in Fig. 3 so small that it can be readily introduced into the object box of a differentiator. When the object returns from the differentiator the compressorium is carefully removed and the object will be found not to adhere to the covers, providing they were originally clean. It would be difficult to exceed the perfection of objects thus treated. The covers should not lie horizontal in the differentiator, otherwise the time occupied in treatment will be lengthened owing to the difficulty with which the fluids will enter the space between them. II. The New Genus Onyx. In the worms constituting the genus Onyx the structure of the head and neck is very characteristic, but at the same time the kinship with the genus Dorylaimus is at once evident. It will be presently seen, however, that the two genera are very distinct from each other. As one would expect from the foregoing remark the pharynx in Onyx is armed with a spear. As in Dorylaimus, so here, the spear is axial and attached to the dorsal side of the pharynx. The uncertainty with regard to the length of the spear is how- ever lessened in Onyx by the presence of a distinct pharyngeal swelling or bulb, which is, as far as length is concerned, nearly co-extensive with the spear. This pharyngeal bulb is an elongated- ellipsoidal, muscular swelling, several times wider than the spear which it encloses ; its function is by longitudinal contraction to protrude the spear. This latter organ is stout and tipped with a characteristic horny structure, from which the genus takes its name. As seen under the microscope, this tip presents itself as an inverted V-shaped, or more properly sagittate, body having an opalescent appearance. It is not quite symmetrical, for the ventral barb is uniformly slightly longer than the dorsal. I hardly need remark that this description refers to the view usually obtained, that is to say, the profile or lateral view, and that this body is in reality a hollow cone. The ring so constantly present in the throat of Dorylaimus is paralleled in Onyx by a three-fold growth from the walls of the anterior part of the pharynx, whose BY N. A. COBB. 147 function is the same as that of the ring in Dorylaimus, namely, to serve as a guide and support to the spear. Because of its affinity for carmine this threefold structure is usually conspicuous in specimens treated with that reagent. That portion of the oesophagus lying behind the pharyngeal bulb reminds one forcibly of the corresponding part in Dorylaimus, the narrow anterior half being surrounded near the middle of the neck by the nerve-ring, and joined to a stouter, nearly cylindrical, muscular posterior half, two-thirds as wide as the body. Before describing the head it is necessary to premise that the cuticula is finely striated. The stria? in the single known species appear like plain transverse lines '8^ apart, so that the total number in the cuticula of an adult worm is calculated at about twenty-seven thousand. The nearly cylindrical neck terminates anteriorly in a rounded head, which bears, far forward, two large and conspicuous spiral lateral organs. These commonly lie opposite to, or a little in front of, the cap of the spear. The striatums of the cuticula cease on the head to be transverse. One Fig. 4.— Lateral View of the Head of Onyx perfectcs, with the mouth open and displaying lips. The pharyngeal bulb and its contained spear are clearly shown, as is one of the spiral lateral organs, and the spear-guide. The left hand side of the figure is dorsal, x 400. Fig. 5.— Lateral View of the Head of Onyx perfectus, with the mouth closed. The head of the spear is --shown just behind the spiral lateral organ. Under the cap of the spear are two developing caps for future use, showing neatly the manner of dentition. The guides for the spear are partially hidden by the spiral organ. The right hand side of the figure is dorsal, x 400. may observe them passing circularly around the lateral organs and on some parts of the head they are arranged longitudinally. This 143 ONYX AND DIPELTIS, latter fact harmonizes with the manner in which the cuticula at the head expands to allow of the protrusion of the lips, which are ordinarily so far withdrawn that only the tips of their papillse are visible. The peculiar action of the cuticula on the head may be compared to the opening and shutting of an inverted umbrella. When the lips and other mouth-parts are withdrawn, the cuticula is drawn together and disposes itself in longitudinal folds. When the mouth parts are thrust forth, and they can be thrust forth to a remarkable extent (see Figs. 4 and 5), the cuticula unfolds to permit the action, and the stria? become less visible. I am not altogether clear about the muscles by means of which the foregoing movements are accomplished. It is possible that the mouth may be closed by an orbicular muscle or even by the elasticity of the cuticle. Threads, doubtless muscular, pass obliquely backward from the pharyngeal bulb and attach them- selves to the body wall. These elements, if muscular, are of course retractile in function. The pharyngeal bulb is also supplied with internal threads, also contractile, which if followed in the direction of the lips are found to pass obliquely outward. These filaments serve to protrude the spear. The action of the various organs of the head and neck during the process of feeding may, therefore, be thus described. The lips are thrust forth and applied to the organism whose juices are to be sucked. This operation is facilitated by the papillse which act as feelers and perhaps also by other mouth parts acting as clutching organs. When the lips have been thus applied, they are made to adhere by suction exerted in the muscular posterior portion of the oesophagus. The spear is next brought into play, an operation effected by the muscles inside the pharynx which act against the close adhesion of the lips as a resistance. Thus the spear is made to glide forward through its guide and to pierce the surface held by the lips. When the surface has been pierced, the liquid food beneath it is made accessible and is sucked in and swallowed by means of the large muscular posterior oesophageal swelling. This method of using the spear is somewhat unique. In Dorylaimus, with which Onyx will naturally be compared as a BY N. A. COBB. 149 related genus, the manner of using the spear is quite different. The differences will be most clearly apprehended if their considera- tion be preceded by a short discussion of the mechanics of the Nematode spear taken in a general sense. The office of the spear is to puncture membranes which enclose the food-materials of its possessor — in most cases the walls of cells. For this operation it is necessary to have an opposing pull or inertia greater than the force which moves the spear forward. The inertia of the animal is not a sufficient reaction because of its small size and consequent lightness ; therefore we find, for the production of a pull, in all cases where a spear is present, well-developed lips and a powerful sucking apparatus in the shape of a highly muscular portion of the oesophagus specially adapted to producing a partial vacuum. The lips are applied, suction is then exerted, and the mouth is thus made to firmly adhere to the membrane to be pierced. This force of suction is the mechanical " base of operations " for the action of the spear, and the pull of the suction must be greater than the force required to thrust the spear forward, otherwise the lips will let go their hold before the spear can accomplish its work. In all the genera possessed of a spear, the action of the lips in obtaining a purchase is much the same, and in this respect, therefore, Onyx cannot be said to present marked peculiarities. When we come, however, to the manner in which the spear is thrust forward, we find marked differences, and Onyx presents one of the most marked types. The most emphatic morphological expression of the difference existing between Onyx and its con- geners is the possession by the former of a distinct muscular pharyngeal bulb. There is no such bulb in any known species of Tylenchus, Aphelenchus, Dorylaimus, or other spear-carrying genus. In Tylenchus the spear is believed to be moved backward and forward by means of muscles attached to the three chitinous bulbs which constitute its posterior extremity. I believe, however, that no such muscles have been observed in Dorylaimus; in fact the spear in this genus appears to me often to be moved forward, not so much by muscles attached to itself as by muscles attached solely 150 ONYX AND DIPELTIS, to the walls of the body, the facts being as follows. The species of Dorylaimus, as they ordinarily come under observation, present a rather low lip region, offering anteriorly no very remarkable peculiarities. An examination of the figures given by various authors of various species of Dorylaimus soon discovers a peculiar loop-like appear- ance apparently inside the head just behind the base of the lips. I say apparently, for these loops, which are visible in whatever position the animal be viewed, are in reality the optical expression of an infolding of the skin, — exactly such an infolding as occurs in the skin of a turtle's neck when the head is drawn partly within the cara- pace. The extended condition of the head of Dorylaimus latus* an unpublished Australian species, are Fig. 6.— Extended condition of the Head of Dory- laimus latus. That por- tion beyond the line marking a transverse constriction can be re- tracted within the skin of the posterior part. The spear is slightly protruded, and the ring- through which it slides is clearly shown, x 450. Dorylaimus latus, n. sp. •4 8-5 25* '52' „ - 1-75 to 2-5 mm. The trans- it 3"o 45 4*6 2"5 parent skin of this interesting species is destitute of hairs and is possessed of a distinct, finely striated sub-cnticula in which are to be seen the struc- tures denominated " pores " by Bastian. The pores did not seem to me to perforate the outer cuticula. The neck is conoid to somewhat behind the expanded lip-region, where it becomes convex-conoid. Each of the six lips is, as usual, supplied with two papillae. I could observe neither eyes nor lateral organs, unless, indeed, the latter be the external openings of the glands which I believed to be discernible in the anterior part of the neck when the head was protruded. Under those circumstances these organs, each longer than the head, lay as far behind the fold in the cuticula as the latter was behind the lips. Each appeared like a unicellular gland with a short neck, indistinct ampulla and short chitinous lateral (?) outlet. The pharynx and spear are normal. The oesophagus expands suddenly near the middle, the anterior part being only one-fourth as wide as the neck, while the posterior part is twice that width. The brownish-green intestine is two-thirds as wide as the body, and is set off from the oesophagus by a distinct constriction ; the intestine is composed of large cells filled with small granules. The pre-rectal portion of the intestine is twice as long as the adjacent body diameter, its anterior end being less distinctly marked BY N. A. COBB. 151 represented in the accompanying cuts. The manner in which this peculiar arrangement is made of service to the animal may be thus reasoned out. The head having been thrust out and the lips having obtained a purchase, the spear is moved forward by con- tracting the length of the body by means of muscles attached to the body wall inside the head. This contraction results in an infolding of the skin of the head. This reasoning is exactly in harmony with the usual position of the spear in Dorylaimus, for it is well known to be situated well forward, being in fact often normally a little exserted. Attention might also be called to the sinuous condition of the narrow anterior portion of the oesophagus as being also in harmony with the above view. The apparent disproportion between the length of the neck and that of the oesophagus might be thus explained. We return now to Onyx. Passing from the oesophagus the food enters the intestine through a narrow cardia. The connection between the oesophagus and the intestine is unusually small, the diameter at the cardiac collum being not more than a sixth as great as that of the base of the neck. The thick wall of the intestine is built of a single layer of large cells, which are of such a size that half-a-dozen side by side make up a circumference. The width of the intestine where it is the sole occupant of the internal cavity is not far from four-fifths as great as the width of off than its posterior. The distinct lateral fields are of a lively brown colour and appear to terminate posteriorly in pores near the rounded terminus of the tail. Anteriorly they become narrower and apparently cease altogether in the neighbourhood of the nerve-ring. This latter is oblique and as wide as the oesophagus at the point encircled. The short tail is conical to the blunt terminus and is traversed transversely by distinct anal muscles. To the indistinct vulva succeeds a vagina Supplied with a chitinous lining and the usual glands. The reflexed portions of the ovaries are narrow and filled with double rows of developing ova, and extend as far back as the vulva. The eggs are one-half as wide as the body and two to three times as long as wide, and are deposited before segmentation begins. The male is unknown. Hab. Roots and stems of grass, Sydney, Australia, at all seasons. 152 ONYX AND DIPELTIS, the body. The rectum is of the usual form. There is no pre- rectal portion as in Dorylaimus. The female sexual apparatus is double and symmetrical, each ovary being reflexed. The vagina is well developed, and is to h supplied with a chitinous lining and the usual vaginal glands. The male sexual apparatus is double and commonly directed forward Fig. 7.— Profile View of the Vulva of Onyx perfectis. the chitinous vagina throughout its extent, but SOme- is shown dark, and two unicellular . . glands are shown light, x 225. times having the ends or the tes- ticles reflexed. The ductus ejaculatorius extends along that portion of the belly occupied by the row of accessory organs, and appears to be composed of a double row of cells much flattened in the direction of the axis of the body. The free extremity of each testicle is filled with from fifty to one hundred elongated structures arranged radially, but directed obliquely towards the axis of the organ. These bodies are granular and stain in carmine. They increase rapidly in size posteriorly and become the mother- cells of the spermatozoa, which they appear to do by a conden- sation of the granular matter contained in them into a distinct nucleus. The flattened mother-cells are packed in two or three rows after the manner of a string of dried figs, but begin so soon to break up that it is often impossible to count more than twenty of them. The spermatozoa resulting from the breaking up of the mother-cells are distinctly nucleated, spheroidal, granular bodies whose diameter is one-fifth to one-fourth as great as that of the testicle. There are two spicula, and they are supplied with accessory pieces. On the ventral line a single row of preanal accessory organs is found, coextensive with the ductus ejaculatorius. Caudal glands are found in both sexes. The posterior part of the tail, or terminus, is larger than usual, conical and destitute of strise. In another journal* I have called attention to the existence of striae in the cuticula of two species of Dorylaimus, and ventured * Jenaische Zeitschrift fur Naturwissenschaft. xxiii. Bd. BY N. A. COBB. 153 the remark that other species if carefully examined would perhaps prove to be also striated. Since making those observations I have continued the impression under which they were written, by the discovery of stria? in a number of other species of Dorylaimus. These stride are generally most clearly visible near the posterior extremity of the animal. The occurrence of spiral markings on the head of Onyx, and of fine transverse stria? in its cuticula, coupled with the general resemblance to Dorylaimus, when taken in conjunction with the observation of fiue stria? on many species of the latter genus and obscure spiral markings on two species, obviously give a new character to the group of Nematodes of which Onyx and Dorylaimus are representatives, and suggest new phylogenetic probabilities. The worms belonging to the genus Onyx are readily recognised by the cylindrical neck and peculiar head. The single species now first described is called on account of the perfection of its development Onyx perfectus, n.sp. 27 T>\ ^'l '^ °Hr94 mm- The cuticula is traversed by twenty-seven thousand transverse stria? and bears throughout the length of the body very slender and rather long hairs These latter are, as usual, longer and more numerous near the head, where their length is about half as great as that of the diameter of the body. When the mouth is closed the anterior extremity is hemispherically rounded. The conspicuous lateral markings are so curved that the right hand one appears as a left-handed spiral passing through about 450° of angular space, and the left hand one as a corresponding right-handed spiral When the worm is placed in profile the spirals appear to be one-half as wide as the pharyngeal bulb, the latter being itself one-half as wide as the head. There are no eyes. When the mouth is closed the summits of the twelve pointed papillae with which the lips are armed may be seen crowded together at the small orifice. When the mouth-parts are thrust forward, the points of the papilla? become separated from each other and then sometimes have the appearance commonly presented by the lips and papilla? of 154 ONYX AND DIPELTIS, Chromadora. The pharyngeal bulb is about one-fourth, the posterior or cardiac bulb about two-fifths, and the intermediate canal about one-third as long as the neck. While the cylindroid cardiac swelling is three-fourths as wide as the neck, the pharyngeal swelling is only one-half and the intermediate canal only one-third as wide as the neck. The slightly oblique nerve- ring has about the same width as the oesophageal canal it surrounds, and is accompanied by the usual groups of nerve-cells. The tail is slightly convex-conoid to the large conical terminus, which begins with a slight expansion. The widest portion of the terminus is one-third as wide as the base of the tail The caudal glands are situated in the anterior part of the tail, and are three in number. The reflexed portion of the Fig. 8.— i, The Male of Onyx perfec- m t L tus(x40); ii, in, iv and v, the tail ovaries reach one-third the distance end, head, accessor y organs and anal region, respectively, of the to the vulva. same worm, more highly magnified now n».c mi (ii, x 750 ; in, x 225 ; iv, x 900 ; v, £_ h — »'8 =» »«» 2-l mm. The tail of x 175). In the anterior part of i . 2'8 2'9 3 3 3-3 3- the oesophagus is shown, surrounded the male closely resembles that 01 by the nerve-ring (white); following ,, » i ,i i tzt -i • the oesophagus is the intestine, the the female, the only difference being view of which is interrupted near r -, , , £ the middle of the body by the an arcuate iorm and the presence ot testicles (drawn lighter). an inconspicuous, low, broad, ventral, bristle-bearing papilla near the middle. The ventral series of twenty to twenty-eight equi-distant accessory organs lies imme- diately in front of the anus and occupies a distance a little more than twice as great as the length of the tail. The linear spicula, two-thirds as long as the tail, are cimetar-shaped, being of quite uniform diameter. They are rather strongly and uniformly arcuate in the distal four-fifths. The proximae are cephaloid by unusually great expansion. The thin accessory pieces are one- third as long as the spicula. BY N. A. COBB. 155 This species is common in the Bay of Naples, living in sand in situations occupied by Amphioxus lanceolatus. The absence of lar^e marine alsre in its habitat leads me to surmise that it is a carnivorous species. III. The New Genus Dipeltis. Nearly thirty years ago Eberth described in his " Untersuchungen liber Nematoden," under the name of Enoplus cirrhatus, a peculiar marine Nematode whose like has not since been observed. I am interested, therefore, to find in my Ceylon collection a similar worm which enables me to confirm Bastian's statement that Eberth's species mentioned above was not an Enoplus, The observations I have made on the Ceylon species, coupled with observations on a new species taken in the Mediterranean, lead to the establishment of the new genus Dipeltis. The characteristics of this new genus are not numerous, but they are well marked. The head was described by Eberth as bearing on either side a peculiar oval plate. These " plates " are in reality an hitherto unknown form of the lateral organs. Each is an ellipsoidal structure nearly as wide as the head and having a thickened margin. Being rather more pointed anteriorly than posteriorly and extending to the very base of the lips, they give to the head of the worm when seen in profile a peculiar eel-like or fish-like appearance. In other par- ticulars Dipeltis is in nowise very remarkable. The cuticula, which may or may not bear conspicuous hairs, is very finely striated. The mouth was said by Eberth to be furnished with three papilla?. It appears to me, however, that these " papillae " are rather to be denominated lips. One of them seems to be more pointed than the others —to be, in fact, spear- like. The oesophagus is simply conoid. The ventrally arcuate tail is supplied with caudal glands. Ocelli are present in some species. 156 ONYX AND DIPELTIS, 1. Dipeltis minor, n.sp. Female unknown. r?) 2-3 "s a* 9i-9 r'26 mm- ^he ciiticLila, bears no conspicuous hairs. The neck is conoid to near the slightly oblique nerve-ring, becoming thence more and more decidedly convex-conoid until it at last becomes rather suddenly almost acute at the mouth. The length of the ellipsoidal lateral organs is one-fifth as great as the distance between the mouth and the nerve-ring, and they are about one-half as wide as long. Their thickened margins present a double contour. Posteriorly the oesophagus becomes three- fifths as wide as the neck. The portion of the alimentary canal immediately behind the distinct cardiac collum is usually pressed to one side by the large ventral gland, which is two-thirds as wide as the body and twice as long as wide. The position of the porus is unknown to me. The simple, arcuate, linear spicula are of nearly uniform size throughout and are about as long as the anal diameter. An accessory piece less than half as long as the spicula is seen to curve inward and backward from the anus. The tail is conoid to the convex conical terminus, which is one-third as wide as the base of the tail and is supplied with an outlet for the caudal glands similar to that commonly seen in species of Chromadora. Hah. The single male specimen seen was taken from sand on the coast of Ceylon in the month of March. 2. Dipeltis cirrhatus, Eb. * 9;7 y * 9£5gj*mp. The cuti- cula is said to be smooth. Submedian rows of conspicuous hairs occur near the head, extending from the anterior extremity as far back as the two eye spots. These latter are situated half way between the nerve-ring and the mouth. The neck is conoid to near the head, where it becomes convex-conoid. The mouth is said to be surrounded by three papillae. The conoid oesophagus is on the average one-third as wide as the neck. The cardiac collum, shallow but distinct, marks off the beginning of an intestine which is two-fifths as wide as the body. The rectum would seem to be longer than the anal diameter. The conoid tail is ventrally arcuate and ends in a distinct outlet for the caudal glands. BY N, A. COBB 157 The two equal, strongly arcuate, acute, linear spicula, which are a little longer than the anal diameter, terminate proximately in a distinct expansion, and are supported by a single accessory piece one-third as loug, situated behind them and curving backward. Hab. Mediterranean Sea. I have not seen this species. 3. Dipeltis typicus, n. sp. -6~r? i4 2- 'i-0r9mm- is the formula for the only female seen. The sexual organs were undeveloped, and their character and the position of the sexual opening remain unknown. The cuticula is traversed by about one thousand eight hundred and fifty transverse striae so fine and obscure as to escape notice with ordinary powers. The head is armed with stout arcuate hairs arranged in four submedian rows of about a dozen hairs each. These rows extend backward to the region of the eye spots. The complex oval-shaped lateral organs are somewhat longer than the head is wide and one-half as wide as long. The mouth cavity is very small, and seems to be armed with a minute labial spear. The oeso- phagus is at first only one-fourth as wide as the neck, but as it passes backward it gradually increases in diameter and becomes at last, that is to say somewhat behind the oblique nerve-ring, one-half as wide as the neck. The intestine is about three- fourths as wide as the body. The rectum "is only two-thirds as long as the anal diameter. The conoid tail is ventrally arcuate and ends in a conical outlet for the three caudal glands. The large unicellular ventral gland lies as far behind the cardiac collum Fig. 9.— i. The Male ok Dipeltis TYPICUS (x40); ii, in, and iv, the anal region, head and tail end, respectively, of the same worm, more highly magnified (n, x 3fi0 ; in, x 450 ; iv, x 350). i, shows, in the upper part, the oesophagus surrounded by the uorve-ring (white- and the unicellular excre- tory organ and its duct (hoth hlack) ; near the middle of the hody the two (?) testicles (light). 158 ONYX AND DIPELTIS. as the latter is behind the head ; it is two-thirds as wide as the body and fully twice as long as wide, and inasmuch as the poms is situated just behind the mouth (-7) empties its excretion through an unusually long duct. This duct ends in a distinct ampulla, which is connected with the exterior by the usual chitinous tube, here, however, of unusually great length. -6?) i'-4 T-5 "*2-"(?> 9i'62'mm> ^is formula is based on the measure- ments of a single adult male. The tail is more strongly arcuate than that of the female. There are apparently two testicles arranged symmetrically, the anterior end of the foremost lying near the middle of the body. The ductus ejaculatorius is one-fourth as wide as the body, and is composed of two rows of cells. The two equal, strongly arcuate, linear, acute spicula compass an arc of 180°. Their proximse are hardly cephaloid. They are somewhat longer than the anal diameter, and are supported in action by a single accessory piece one-half as long and furnished with a backward- pointing process. Hab. Coral-bank, Secca della Gajola, Bay of Naples, at a depth of thirty-five metres. 159 IN CONFIRMATION OF THE GENUS OWENIA SO-CALLED. By C. W. De Vis, M.A., Corr. Mem. (Plate xiii.) Some two years ago a few fossil bones were sent to me from the town of Warwick, Queensland. Unimportant in themselves they begot the hope that others would follow, but the hope proved futile, as no one on the spot was sufficiently interested in such matters to look for more. As it seemed important to ascertain whether the neighbourhood were indeed fossiliferous, Mr. H. Hurst was commissioned in August last to repair to the district and institute a careful search. This he did. The first fruits of an otherwise scanty ingathering were a Diprotodon skull in fragments, and the greater part of a large mandible in fairly sound condition. The latter at once met with a hearty recognition; its incisors and premolars were those of the genus to which the name Owenia had been assigned. The discovery of a second species of the genus is opportune, inasmuch as it establishes a validity which has been denied, and offers for reconsideration a name which is undeniably liable to extinction. Suggested by a strong desire to commemorate, in even so feeble a fashion, the labours of the first interpreter of the marsupiate fossils of Australia, the name was proposed in spite of its declared preoccupation in sundry genera of recent inverte- brates. The hope was cherished that since its appropriation to an extinct mammalian genus would cause little or no inconvenience, it might be allowed to pass current. But sentiment will evidently 11 160 IN CONFIRMATION OF THE GENUS OWENIA SO-CALLED, not avail to excuse an offence against the letter of a law of nomen- clature should an objector choose to exact the penalty. Conse- quently, the writer, brought to a sense of duty by a palaeontological friend of well known judgment who happened to be in Brisbane when the fossil was received, now begs permission to withdraw the name Owenia and substitute for it the modification Euowenia. Characters : — Dentition i ^-, c $, ^4 j-, m f. Incisors conical, diverging, curving outwards and downwards, the ° °' ° upwards ' lower receiving the upper upon and between them, the posterior upper incisor subrudimentary. Premolars subtriangular, unilobate, with posterior talon and incomplete external cingulum. Molars of the normal form in the Nototheriidce. Nasals narrow, short, not covering the narial aperture anteriorly. Jugals slender. Naso-frontal region as in Nototherium (nee Zygomaturus) and Diprotodon, not greatly depressed. The almost complete reduction of the upper incisors to a single functionary pair, and the strong curvature of both upper and lower incisors are good generic characters. The newly acquired mandible, for which a suitable name may be Euowenia robusta, indicates a species far removed from identity with E. grata, mihi. This will be best seen from the following statement. Mandibular characters of the two species : — Habit weak ; symphysial gradient steep ; inferior contour angular; mesially rather concave ; incisors rotund grata. Habit robust ; symphysial gradient low ; inferior contour parabolic ; incisors compressed robusta. The fossil consists of the inferior moiety of the articulating limb with the dentary limb of the left side in natural conjunction with the anterior half of the dentary limb of the right side, all the teeth of the parts preserved being in place except m3 of the left side, which has been destroyed by a recent fracture of the jaw. BY C. W. DE VIS. 161 The mandible has been bequeathed by an individual well stricken in years. The symphysis is 194 mm. in length; its upper surface descends caudad at an angle of 20°, in strong contrast with its precipitous descent in E. (/rata. Beneath the posterior end of the symphysis, on either side of its central line, is a deep excavation, confluent with its fellow posteriorly but separated from it anteriorly by a broad backwardly projecting spine, which gives a reniform shape to the excavation as a whole. The posterior half of the diastema is compressed ; its edge ascends from the premolar forwards and about the middle of the diastema parts from that of the anterior half and curves downwards and forwards upon the outer surface of the incisive socket, but no tubercle is developed upon it as in E. grata. The anterior half of the diastema becomes less and less compressed as it approaches the incisive outlet. The dentary limb posteriorly is low, thick, and convex ; at m4 it has a height of 90 mm., with a thickness of 67 mm. Beneath the anterior grinders its outer surface becomes concave to a notable degree, but resumes its convexity in front of the anterior dental foramen, which is large and placed, as to its posterior margin, in the vertical of the anterior fang of the premolar. The articulating limb presents only the lower part of the masseteric fossa; this is, for a Nototheroid, rather deep, and has its surface corrugated by ridges and furrows which have a roughly concentric course near the base of the fossa, above it an irregular converging course towards the base. On the inner side the post-molar ledge behind the last molar rises into a strong abutment against the base of the tooth ; this tapers off and subsides before reaching the angle of the ledge. The angle is well marked, and from it a broad low ridge runs upwards and backwards to the posterior dental foramen, which is large and is placed further from the angle of the ledge than this is from the last molar. The channel between the raised margin of the ledge and the coronoid process is contracted; the hinder surface of w4 is level with the basal edge of the coronoid process. The inferior- contour of the mandible would be a regular parabolic curve but for a slight emargination beneath the anterior dental foramen. 162 IN CONFIRMATION OP THE GENUS OWENIA SO-CALLED, The large incisors are separated at the base by a space of 15 mm. They are in shape compressed twisted cones, diverging strongly outwards with a double curve which brings their trenchant apices nearly parallel with the axial line of the jaw. The surface of wear describes a convoluted curve from the middle of the outer upper edge to the inner face of the extreme tip and thence downwards upon the anterior surface of the tooth j the surface of wear is much larger on the right tooth than on the left. The apex of the tooth is unguiform, a shape conferred upon it by the coat of enamel investing the outer surface of the tooth. The general shape of the premolar is triangular with the trans- verse and longitudinal diameters in the ratio 1 : 1*4. Wear has exposed an irregular field of dentine on the lobe and a larger one of crescentic shape on the talon ; these are separated by their respec- tive margins of enamel and these again by the remains of the depression which in the younger tooth separates the talon from the lobe. From the middle of the outer surface of the crown a pro- jecting fold or cingulum runs along the posterior half to the end of the talon ; the fore end of the crown is not reached by the worn surface above, showing that in the unworn tooth the lobe had a backward curve. Of the molars there is little to be said ; they present nothing which would compel us to distinguish the mandible from that of a Nototherium. The premolar and first molar of the right side are, like the incisors, much more reduced by attrition than those of the opposite side, and the greatest amount of reduction has taken place on the inner side of their crowns, a circumstance which reminds us of a somewhat similar condition of things in E. grata. In a large number of mandibles of Nototherium and Diprotodon a similar detrition of the inner sides of the anterior cheek-teeth does not once occur. Dimensions. Total length from tip of incisor to base of condylar process 450mm. Height atm4 90 Transverse diameter at ra4 67 BY C. W. DE VIS. 163 Length of molar series with premolar 174 Length of premolar 14 Breadth of premolar 10 Length of m4 48 Breadth of m4 30 Length of incisor, upper edge 47 Breadth of incisor, longitudinal, at upper margin of outlet 34 Breadth of incisor, transverse 22 Length of symphysis 194 Judging by the general facies and by the molars only, and allowing for changes wrought by age and differences possibly contingent upon sex, the Nototherium jaw, with which the present one might readily be identified, is that named by Owen Noto- therium victorice. So great is the resemblance between them that the writer long hesitated to think them distinct. Possibly they are not so, but after much pondering he has come to the conclusion that he would not be justified in assuming an identity for which, in the absence of the necessary tests, there is no positive warrant. Still it would be by no means surprising to find that the essential characters of N. victorice, at present unknown, associate it with Euowenia. The family name Nototheriidce has been imposed by the talented author of the British Museum Catalogue of Fossil Mammals, Vol. V., upon the single genus Nototherium as understood by Owen, and in a larger sense that name is admissible, nay inevitable. For the genus Diprotodon Mr. Lyddeker writes as a higher term Dipro- todontidce. This proposal to erect Diprotodon into the type of a distinct family must be ascribed to the unfortunate confusion perpetuated between Nototherium and Zygomaturus. Compared immediately with Zygomaturus, Diprotodon stands indeed suffi- ciently far aloof to be invested with family rank, but when Noto- therium in its true characters is placed in position between the two, Diprotodon seems to be nothing more than a member of the Nototheriidce. However that may be, the term Diprotodontidce is 164 IN CONFIRMATION OF THE GENUS OWENIA SO-CALLED. unfortunate, in fact altogether objectionable. In its exclusive sense it can only be properly applied to the wombats, in its looser signification it cannot be accepted as the name of a division of the Diprotodontia simply because it involves a contradiction ; it inferentially secludes within the limits of a genus attributes which the term Diprotodontia predicates of the whole suborder to which the genus belongs. The infelicity of the selection of Diprotodon as a generic name would only be accentuated by raising a modifica- tion of it into the name of a higher generalisation. The Nothotheriidce include the genera Notoiherium, Diprotodon, Euowenia, Zygomatarus, and probably Sthenomerus, but of the last named genus the dentition is insufficiently known. Proba- bility is also in favour of Scapamodon proving to belong to this family. Characters of the Nototheriidce. Dentition / 25p, C %t P {, M J. Posterior upper incisors small. Premolars, except in Zygo- maturus, subtriangular, single-cusped, with a posterior talon. Molars transversely bilobed, the upper without longitudinal ridges, talons antero-posteriorly narrow, Scapula long, narrow. Ilia greatly expanded. Limbs gressorial, approximately equal ; their proximal bones elongate, simple. Foot broad. Tail short, tapering. Synopsis of genera : — Incisors § — Upper premolars subtriangular, unicuspid ; cranial habit and length of muzzle moderate. Crowns of first incisors contiguous or slightly diverging, the lower incisors proclivous. Posterior upper incisors on the edge of the jaw ; cusp of premolar with a shallow posterior cleft Nototherium. BY C. W. DE VIS. 165 Posterior upper incisors near midline of jaw ; cusp of premolar with a deep lateral cleft Diprotodon. Upper premolars oval, tuberculated ; cranial habit very massive, with short expanded muzzle Zygomaturus. Incisors \ — Crowns of first incisors above and below widely diverging, with a similar strong double curvature ; Euoivenia. Supplementary Note : In a collection of fossils received since the foregoing remarks were remitted, a second example of E. robusta very opportunely occurs. It exemplifies the state of the teeth and jaw at an early stage of adult life. At this period the following unessential differences are noticeable : — The corrugations of the ectocrotaphyte fossa are much less pronounced, the curva- ture, descending from the edge of the diastema, commences further forward, and the surface of wear on the incisor is not so extensive. In all other respects it is identical with the type. In the same collection is an isolated incisor and a fragment of jaw containing a premolar and first true molar, much worn. 166 NOTES AND EXHIBITS. Mr. Maiden exhibited a number of vegetable products — fruits, seeds, gums, essential oils, and timbers — in illustration of his papers. Also specimens of a number of interesting indigenous (N.S.W.) plants including Palmeria scandens, F.v.M., from Bulli ; Calllcarpa pedunculated, R.Br., and Alchornea ilicifolia, F.v.M., from the Richmond River; Telopea oreades, F.v.M., and Persoonia chamcepeuce, Lh., from the southern portion of the colony. Mr. T. W. Edgeworth David exhibited, on behalf of Mr. J. E. Carne, F.G.S., Mineralogist to the Department of Mines, Sydney, a specimen of precious opal from the White Cliffs about fifty miles northerly from Wilcannia. Precious opal and common opal have lately been discovered in this locality in a formation corresponding to the Desert Sandstone of Queensland. The opal occurs dissemi- nated as an infiltrated cement throughout the mass of the sand- stone in places, and also replacing the calcareous material of fossils. It also occurs in cracks in the sandstone and in fossil wood, which is somewhat plentifully distributed throughout the sandstone, and occasionally replaces part of the original woody tissues of the silicified trees. Mr. A. Sidney Olliff stated that he had recently had an oppor- tunity of examining a collection of Coccinellidce gathered by Mr. A. M. Lea, among which he had found specimens of the lady-bird, Vedalia cardinalis, obtained at Mossman's Bay, near Sydney. This capture is interesting from the fact that the species has not previously been observed by our local collectors. Mr. Olliff also showed, under the microscope, specimens of larvae and females of Phylloxera vastatrix, the vine pest ; and he remarked that, so far, he had not yet been able to find either specimens of the leaf-form of the pest, or reliable records of its having been observed in New South Wales. NOTES AND EXHIBITS. 167 Mr. Whitelegge exhibited a set of herbarium specimens of British species of the genus Equisetum. Also, under the micro- scope, specimens of the Peridinium, to the presence of which the recent discoloration of the waters of the harbour has been due ; also specimens of several other species of allied organisms, includ- ing a second species of Peridinium, Prorocentrum micans, Ehr., Gymnodinium sjrirale, Bergh, and Glenodinium sp. Dr. Cobb exhibited an inexpensive dissecting microscope of simple construction, made by one of the clerks in the Agricultural Department, Sydney. Also, under the microscope, examples of the Nematodes described in his paper. Also, two examples of fungi, one a species of Phallus from the adjoining garden, the other the bird's-nest fungus, Cyaihus, from soil near a pumpkin vine ; and coloured drawings of a number of other Australian fungi which he had recently met with. Mr. Fletcher exhibited three specimens of terrestrial Nemer- tines (Geonemertes sp.) — one from the Richmond River, N.S.W. (collected by Mr. R. Helms), the others from Tasmania (collected by Mr. C. Hedley). The Tasmanian forms seem to diner in colour and pattern from the Victorian specimens recorded by Dr. Dendy and Professor Spencer, Mr. Hedley describing them while alive as " black at the oral extremity for about a quarter of an inch, the rest of the body dull white." The New South Wales specimen may, perhaps, belong to the same species as those noted by Dendy, the colour being brownish-orange, except for a lateral band on each side. If G. chalicophora, Graff, like G. palaensis, Semper, has six eyespots, in two groups of three each, then the specimens exhibited to-night, in which more than six eyespots are present, are not to be identified with the former, which is supposed to have been brought with palms from Australia to the palmhouse at Frankfurt Zoological Gardens. Also, a male specimen of Peripatus leuckarti, Sang., (the only male out of a total of five specimens obtained on the Blue Moun- tains), which presents the exceptionally remarkable character of possessing a pair of papillae — the only pair present, — on the ventral surface of the first par of legs. 168 NOTES AND EXHIBITS. Also, fruits of Sechium edule, Swartz, a West Indian member of the natural order Curcurbitacece, which has been successfully acclimatised in Queensland for some years past. From a specimen forwarded from Queensland to Sir William Macleay a nourishing plant has been raised, which is now bearing freely in Sir William's garden, the specimen exhibited being from the plant in question. Also, a living specimen of Chiroleptes australis, Gray, forwarded from Herberton, Queensland, by Mr. F. Christian. This species of frog inhabits the northern half of the continent, and has not been recorded on the east coast from further south than the Clarence Kiver. 169 WEDNESDAY, 27th MAY, 1891. The President, Professor Haswell, M.A., D.Sc, in the Chair. Mr. A. Meston of Queensland was introduced as a visitor. Mr. Fred Turner, F.R.H.S., Department of Agriculture, Sydney, The Right Rev. Dr. Camidge, Bishop of Bathurst, N.S.W., The Rev. J. G. Buggy, Kempsey, N.S.W., and Mr. C. A. Chesney, C.E., Randwick, were elected Members of the Society. The Chairman called the attention of the meeting to a circular, copies of which were laid on the table, recently received from the Department of Agriculture of N.S.W., offering national prizes among other things for the best Australian Pathological, Entomo- logical, and Botanical collections submitted to the Department. DONATIONS. "Transactions of the Canadian Institute." Vol. i., No. 1. From the Society. " Bulletin of the Museum of Comparative Zoology at Harvard College." Vol. xx., No. 8 (Jan., 1891). From the Curator. " Annales de la Societe Entomologique de France." 6e Serie, T. ix. (1889). From the Society. 1 70 DONATIONS. "Bulletin de la Societe d'Etudes Scientifiques d'Angers." Nouvelle Serie, T. xviii. (1888). From the Society. " Bulletin de la Societe Zoologique de France pour l'Annee 1891.'' T. xvi., Nos. 1 and 2. From the Society. "Bulletin de la Societe Royale de Geographie d'Anvers." T. xv., 2me Fasc. From the Society. " Memoires du Comite Geologique, St. Petersbourg." Vol. iv., No. 2, Vol. v., Nos. 1 and 5, Vol. viii., No. 2, Vol. x., No. 1 (1890) ; " Bulletins." Vol. ix., Nos. 7 and 8 (1890). De la part du Comite. " Transactions of the Cambridge Philosophical Society." Vol. xv.5 Part 1; "Proceedings." Vol. vii., Part 3 (1890). From the Society. "Zoological Society of London. — Abstracts," March 17, and April 7, 1891. From the Society. "Agricultural Gazette of N.S.W." Vol. ii., Part 3 (March, 1891). From the Director of Agriculture. " Natuurkundig Tijdschrift voor Nederlandsche-Indie, uitge- geven door de Koninklijke Natuurkunclige Vereeniging in N.-I." Deel 1. (1890). From the Society. " Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria." n.s., Vol. iii. (1890;; "Transactions." Vol. ii., Part 1 (1890). From the Society. "Perak Government Gazette." Vol. iv., No. 7 (March 26, 1891). From the Government Secretary. "Report on the Ulooloo Goldfield " (1887); "Report on the Journey from Warrina to Musgrave Ranges" (1890); "Report of Geological Examination of Country in the neighbourhood of Alice Springs" (1890); "A Record of the Mines of South Aus- tralia " (1890) ; " Geological Map of South Australia exclusive of the Northern Territory." From II. Y. L. Brown, Esq., F.G.S., Government Geologist of South Australia. DONATIONS. 171 " Bulletin de la Societe Imperiale des Naturalistes de Moscou." Annee 1890, No. 3; "Beilage zuni Bulletin." iime Serie, T. iv. ( 1 890). From the Society. "Transactions of the Entomological Society of London for 1891." Part i. From the Society. "The Victorian Naturalist." Vol. viii., No. 1. (May, 1891). From the Field Naturalists' Club of Victoria. 11 Twenty-seventh Annual Report of the Zoological and Acclima- tisation Society of Victoria (1890)." From the Society. " Transactions of the Victorian Branch of the Royal Geo- graphical Society of Australasia." Vol. viii., Part 2 (March, 1891). From C. Hedley, Esq., F.L.S. 11 Proceedings and Transactions of the Queensland Branch of the Royal Geographical Society of Australasia." Vol. vi., Part 1 (1890-91). From the Society. "Department of Agriculture, Brisbane. — Bulletin." No. 8 (Feb., 1891). From the Under-Secretary. Pamphlet entitled " Comparative Methods of Digestion, Circu- lation, and Respiration in Fishes, Amphibia, and Mammals." By J. B. Wilson, M.A., F.L.S. From the Author. " Bulletin de la Societe Linneene de Normandie." 4e Serie, Vol. iii. (1888-89). From the Society. "Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal." Vol. Iii. (1883), Part ii., Title-page, &c, and PI. i., ix., and x. ; "Proceedings, 1891." No. 1 (January); "Annual Address to the Society" (Feb., 1891). From the Society. Pamphlet entitled " Descriptions of two new Butterflies and nine Hawk-moths (Sphingidaa) found in Queensland." By Dr. T. P. Lucas. From the Author. " President's Address delivered to the Royal Society of N.S.W." (May 6, 1891). By A. Leibius, Ph.D., M.A., F.C.S. From the Author. 172 DONATIONS. " Zoologischer Anzeiger." xiv. Jahrg., No. 360 (6th April, 1891). From the Editor. "New Zealand Journal of Science." Vol. i. (n.s.), No. 3 (May, 1891). From the Publishers. " Australasian Journal of Pharmacy." Vol. vi., No. 65 (May, 1891). From the Editor. " Proceedings of the United States National Museum." Vol. xiii., Nos. 829-833 and 838 (1891). From the Museum. " United States Department of Agriculture — Division of Ento- mology. Bulletin." No. 7 (1890) ;« Insect Life." Vol.iii., No. 6 (March, 1891). From the Secretary of Agriculture. " Bulletin of the American Museum of Natural History." Vol. iii., pp. 195-210. From the Museum. "Annual Report and Prospectus of the Stawell School of Mines, 1891." From the Director. "The Pharmaceutical Journal of Australasia." n.s., Vol. iv., No. 5 (May, 1891). From the Publisher. 173 PAPERS READ. A CONTRIBUTION TO THE GEOLOGY AND PETRO- GRAPHY OF BATHURST, NEW SOUTH WALES. By J. Milne Curran, F G.S. (Plates xiv.-xviil) CONTENTS, i. — Introduction. ii. — Area dealt with. hi. — Previous observers, iv. — General Geology. v. — Formations represented . vi. — Minerals of Bathurst. vil— Rocks of Bathurst. A. Igneous Rocks B. Sedimentary Rocks- C. Altered Rocks viii. — The Sedimentary Rocks, ix.— The Igneous Rocks. Granite Basalt x. — Economic Geology xi.— Other points of interest, xil— Conclusion. Plutonic — Acidic. Volcanic — Basic. Arenaceous. Argillaceous. Calcareous. Hornfels. Schists. Knotenschiefer. a. In the field. b. Origin of. c. Microscopic examination. d. Chemical composition. a. In the field. b. Microscopic examination. c. Chemical composition. 174 ON THE GEOLOGY AND PETROGRAPHY OF BATHURST, N.S.W., i. Introduction. The material embodied in the following paper, is the result of observations, made at intervals, during the last ten years. A residence of some eight years in Bathurst gave me special facilities to study the geology of the district. During that time I have carefully examined some 180 square miles of country, taking the City of Bathurst as a centre. Although I am conscious the paper deals with nothing that may be regarded by geologists as novel or striking, for all that, it may be acceptable to place on record my observations on a district on which very little has hitherto been written. The present contribution will, I hope, be merely an introduction to the geology of a portion of the country that presents rare facilities for the study of many of the great questions connected with the nature of metamorphism, and the phenomena presented by altered strata in the regions of eruptive rocks. The hand-specimens which accompany this paper will help to make clear descriptions of rocks of uncertain affinities. The micro-photographs of rock-slices, on Plate xiv., will also help to illustrate the structure of the basalts. This is all the more useful in the present unsettled state of penological nomenclature. As there is a growing tendency among penologists to follow Professor Rosenbusch's classification of the eruptive rocks, I have, as far as possible, referred the Bathurst rocks to his system. There are many interesting questions immediately connected with the geology of Bathurst not touched on in this paper. The contact area, for instance, that forms a fringe of metamorphic rock around the central boss of granite, would demand more knowledge and experience in the refinements of modern petro- graphic methods than I can lay claim to. In fact I have stu- diously avoided, or merely pointed out, debatable questions. But, having described what almost all geologists are agreed on, the way is clear in the future to deal with the more obscure, but possibly the more interesting, problems that may be studied in and around Bathurst. In dealing with the microscopic structure of the basalts BY THE REV. J. MILNE CURRAN. 175 and granites I have received much kind assistance from our leading petrologist — A. W. Howitt, Esq., F.G.S., now Under Secretary for Mines, Melbourne. ii. Area dealt with. I propose to deal with the geology of the country immediately around Bathurst. Every reference contained in this paper deals with localities or sections that are included in a circle having a radius of ten miles, taking Bathurst as a centre. A few interesting features outside these limits will be referred to when presenting points of interest known to me. These may serve as a guide to future students. The stretch of country forming, for the most part, the well- known Bathurst " plains " is, in reality, part of a plateau, on an average about 2350 feet above sea level. Bathurst Railway Station is 2153 feet above sea level, and the highest point of the Bald Hills is some 630 feet above this datum. The extreme diffe- rence in level between any two points in the district referred to may be taken as 740 feet. iii. Previous Observers. The first reference I can find to the geology of Bathurst is contained in Captain Wilkes' " Narrative of the United States Exploring Expedition," Vol. n. p. 259.* In this work reference is merely made to the fact that the plains of Bathurst were at no distant date an inland lake. Mr. Stutchbury, who was appointed Geological Surveyor in 1850, made frequent reference to the Bathurst district in his reports to the Colonial Secretary. , The only reference of his to the country immediately around the City of Bathurst that I can find is contained in a report, dated " Belabula Rivulet, Carcoar, County Bathurst, April 12th, 1851." * Narrative of the United States Exploring Expedition during the years 1838-1842, by Charles Wilkes, Commander ; Philadelphia, 1812. 12 176 ON THE GEOLOGY AND PETROGRAPHY OF BATHURST, N.S.W., Speaking of the country on the Western Road, between Junc- tion Hill and Bathurst, he says,* "The rounded blocks, which when free upon the surface, appear to be immense boulders, or erratic blocks, are not such, but large glandular or globular masses, often connected by veins, and evidently intruded subsequently ; these may be seen in many places in the road-side sections, imbedded in coarse granite, traversed by quartz veins in all directions. " The foot of the hill is composed of disintegrated granite} forming a loose sand. About one mile east of the river the granite is overlaid by clay slate, ' killas.' Granite, with fragmentary trap-rock, appears to form the whole of the country to Macquarie and Bathurst plains ; the plains are alluvium, and, judging from the debris in the water-runs, most probably investing granite. " Lead mines were reported as occurring at Brucedale, near Peel, about eight miles from Bathurst, a little eastward of north, the residence of Mr. W. Suttor ; the road then contains much micaceous sand and quartz pebbles. " On descending the last hill, about two miles from the house, blocks of decomposing granite are occasionally observed ; upon crossing the creek it is found, in place upon a ridge running nearly east and west, associated with mica slate, much disturbed, passing into clay slate ; the dip of the clay slate is west north west. " To the eastward of south, half a mile from Mr. Suttor's house, a mine has been opened, in which the following varieties of ore have been found : — " Sulphuret of lead, with arsenical pyrites. " Green phosphate of lead, in veins in the clay slate. " Arsenio-phosphate of lead, and " Argentiferous sulphuret of lead. " The cross lodes make their way west north west through clay slate, the angle of dip being 50°. * Geological Survey Papers, laid upon the Council Table by the Colonial Secretary and ordered by the Council to be printed ; 2nd December, 1851. BY THE REV. J. MILNE CURRAN. 177 "The mines, as at present exhibited, do not promise to be remunerative ; the ore appears to be sporadic rather than in regular lodes. " On the eastern side of the creek there are numerous fragments of grit stone, containing impressions and casts of Spirifirse, evidently belonging to the coal measure ; these must have been transported some distance." In a paper by the Rev. W. B. Clarke on the Transmutation of Rocks in Australasia, read to the Philosophical Society of New- South Wales in May, 1865, mention is made of metamorphic rocks near Bathurst. Says Mr. Clarke, " One of the most remark- able changes I have ever noticed in the neighbourhood of granite occurs a little south of Bathurst. . . slates are converted into mica schist and griesen, and limestone is changed into saccharoidal marble."* In 1867, the Rev. W. B. Clarke, M.A., F.R.S., published the first edition of his " Sedimentary Formations." He refers to the " existence of gneissoid strata and of schists, of very ancient aspect, at Cow Flat, near Bathurst."! In his annual report for the year 1878, Mr. C. S. Wilkinson, F.G.S., Government Geologist, refers as follows to the geology of Bathurst : — " Immediately north of the village of Perth, near Bathurst, are some table-topped hills — the Bald Hills — capped with basalt. The basalt rests on a very siliceous, tertiary pebble conglomerate, which, in turn, rests on granite. ... I believe that this basalt is an outlier, or remnant, of the basaltic stream which, in pliocene times, flowed down the Campbell's River valley from near Swatch field. The basalt is, in places, columnar, and on the Bald Hills this columnar structure is splendidly shown, the * Trans. Phil. Soc. New South Wales, 1862-1865 ; Sydney, Reading and Wellbank, 1866, p. 267. t Remarks on the Sedimentary Formations of New South Wales, by Rev. W. B. Clarke, M.A., F.R.S. (fourth edition) ; Sydney, Thomas Richards, Government Printer, 1878. 178 ON THE GEOLOGY AND PETROGRAPHY OP BATHURST, N.S.W. five and six-sided columns being of considerable length and well- formed ; sometimes they are curved in a remarkable manner."* In the annual report of the geological surveyor in chargef , for the year 1879 (p. 214), we find Mr. Wilkinson again making a short reference to Bathurst as follows : — " Following the road from Bathurst to Hill End the first eight miles is over granite, then silurian schists to Wyagdon, then granite again for one mile and a half to near Wattle Flat." The Department of Mines issued a volume in 1882, entitled " Mineral Products of New South Wales." On p. 39 of this work, Mr. Wilkinson says : — " Near Bathurst upper silurian rocks have been considerably metamorphosed, the sandstones passing into quartzites, slates into gneiss and hornblendic schists, and the coral- line limestone into crystalline marbles in which nearly every trace of fossils has been obliterated." Finally, Mr. W. J. Clunies Ross, B.Sc, read a paper, before the Melbourne meeting of the Australian Association, on the Plutonic and Metamorphic Rocks of Bathurst, New South Wales. Up to the date of writing it has not appeared in print, so that I am unable to refer to the paper in a more detailed manner. iv. General Geology. Taking a general view of the district round Bathurst, we have presented to us a central mass of granite, forming the floor, and partly the sides, of a great valley. Higher up the sides silurian rocks rest on the granite. On the floor of this valley a great sheet of recent alluvium shingle and clay deposit is spread, and through these latter deposits the Macquarie has eroded its present bed. A chain of basalt-capped hills rises prominently above the granite floor, forming a line generally parallel to the present river. * Annual Report of the Department of Mines, New South Wales, for the year 187S ; Sydney, the Government Printer, 187i>. t Annual Report of the Department of Mines, New South Wales, for the vear 1S79 ; Sydney, the Government Printer, 18S0. BY THE REV. J. MILNE CURRAN. 179 An aureole of altered rocks separates the granite from the Silurian slates, phyllites or limestones. In short, we have a great saucer- like depression, the edges of which are silurian rocks ; below these there is a belt of hornfels, or metamorphic rocks, and, finally, granite with recent superficial deposits fills the floor of the valley. Through this valley, as stated already, rising abruptly from the general level, there ruDS a line of basalt, burying an old river-bed of pliocene age. The granite, from its first appearance to the east, to the boundary of the silurian rocks on the Bathurst-Orange Road, measures some thirty miles across. From the contact rocks on the Winburnclale Creek, to the junction of the slate and granite, south of Batburst, the distance is some eighteen miles, that is 540 square miles. But, allowing for a very irregular line of junction and the small patches of basalt, I take the granite area to measure, at a very moderate estimate, about 460 square miles. In this area the lowest rocks — granites and hornfels — are the more recent, as will be made clear in another section of this paper. Surface Geology. This granite country presents a surface of gently undulating hills and ridges with broad valleys. Except in cuttings in creeks, or on the river-banks, the granite hardly ever shows on the surface, and when it does it is so decomposed as to disintegrate readily and rapidly. As is usual with granite, the decay commences in the felspar grains, thus setting free the other constituents — quartz, hornblende, and biotite. The depth to which decomposition extends varies much ; sometimes to a few feet, and sometimes, in cases that came under my notice, to a depth of 70 feet. The " rolling downs " character of the granite country contrasts strongly with the surface appearances of the surrounding slate. The hills in the slate country show the bed rock freely in escarpments and bars parallel to the strike. The vegetation, moreover, assumes a noticeable change on passing from the granite to the slate country. The accompanying photographs show in an admirable way the difference in weathering in granite and in slate country. Fig. 1 180 ON THE GEOLOGY AND PETROGRAPHY OF BATHURST, N.S.W., shows the channel of the Macquarie in typical granite rocks. A short distance down stream (Fig. 2) the river passes into silurian slates, dipping at a high angle. The same sharp contrast extends through the country, as a whole, and may be studied to advantage in the hills about Cow Flat to the south of Bathurst, and in the Winburnclale Creek, some seven miles to the north of the same town. Immediately round Bathurst the granite is overlain by detrital deposits, varying in age from pliocene to the most recent, or now in process of formation. This applies especially to the strip of country, including that on which Bathurst stands, between the chain of the Bald Hills and the Macquarie River. Deep water- courses have cut through these deposits, exposing beds of allu- vium from two to fifteen feet in thickness, or decomposed granite in some instances to a depth of thirty feet. That these erosions have been effected rapidly, that is within the past fifty years, can be readily proved. Some of the old settlers recollect a time when many of these creeks were shallow water channels. Roots of, comparatively speaking, young trees may oftentimes be seen stretching from one wall of these gullies to the opposite one, showing that the very beginning of the erosion must have taken place at a time when the trees were fairly grown. It is impossible not to be struck with the resemblance, in miniature, that some of these creeks with their vertical walls bear to the canons of Colorado. The photographs exhibited, taken about one and a half miles to the south-west, illustrate these features very clearly. The exact locality lies between the racecourse and the slopes of the Bald Hills. The oldest of these detrital deposits are, undoubtedly, those that flank the Bald Hills, and the more recent are those that form terraces to the present river. Further on we shall see that the line of basalt that crowns the ridges of the Bald Hills marks the course of the one-time bed of the Macquarie. From the time it occupied this position, the river has, at various intervals eroded channels over the whole country between the Bald Hills and the opposite slopes of the valley. In this way are accounted for, the beds of shingle, gravel, and detrital matter that conceal the granite. Large deposits of shingle and water-worn BY THE REV. J. MILNE CURRAN. 181 material, marking the position of ancient river beds, may be studied at Kelso, near the Railway Gates ; near the Church of England grounds ; on the slopes to the right of Kelso-Peel Road, about two miles from Kelso ; on the gravel-topped hills between All Saints' College and the General Cemetery ; near St. Stanislaus College, and generally on the ridges between the Vale Creek and the Macquarie. v. Table of formations represented around Bathurst. < H « Pn Most recent or now in process of forming . . . ' PostJPliocene Volcanic. Pliocene Lower Pliocene A. Deposits of loam, clay, sand9 gravels and decomposed granites. B. Gravels and shingle beds, at various levels, between the basalt and the present river bed. C. Basalt flow, capping hills. D. Clays, sand, gravels, and conglomerates forming " leads " under basalt. E. Silicified conglomerates older than "leads." MESOZOIC ROCKS.— Not represented. d ' Igneous and Meta- f F. Granites. i— i o morphic ... ... G. Hornfels rock, gneissic o 1 schists, spotted schists, mica * schists and marbles. < Silurian c H. Clay slates, phyllites, lime- £* 1 stones. 1S2 ON THE GEOLOGY AND PETROGRAPHY OF BATHURST, N.S.W., vi. Minerals of Bathukst, Before dealing with the formations and the rocks in detail, it may be well to enumerate the minerals and rocks I have found in the district. Minerals. 1. Calcite. 15. Sphene. 2. Apatite. 16. Galena. 3. Quartz. 17. Green phosphate of lead. 4. Garnet. 18. Arsenio-phosphate of lead, 5. Olivine. 19. Limonite. 6. Topaz. 20. Mispickel. 7. Prehnite. 21. Pyrites (iron). 8. Felspar. 22. Magnetite. a. Orthoclase. 23. Copper (native). b. Plagioclase, Oligoclase. 24. Malachite. c. Albite. 25. Copper pyrites. 9. Augite. 26. Grey ore. 10. Hornblende. 27. Azurite. 11. Actinolite. 28. Argentiferous galena. 12. Muscovite. 29. Gold. 13. Biotite. 30. Diamond. 14. Kaolin. 31. Manganese (black oxide). Note. — The following are also reported from Glanmire : — Rhodonite (Annual Report Dept. Mines, N.S.W., 1885, p. 141), manganese ores, and baryta (Annual Report Dept. Mines, N.S.W., 1884, p. 161). 1. Calcite. — Calcite is found in veins in the limestones on the Cow Flat Road, about four miles south of the village of Perth. It also forms veins in fissures in the granite. This seems an unusual occurrence, and only two instances came under my notice. It was rather plentiful in a joint or fissure, cut through in the large well of the water-works, Bathurst. There is little doubt but that it is a secondary mineral, formed from the decomposition of some lime felspar. BY THE REV. J. MILNE CURRAN. 183 2. Apatite. — Apatite occurs as microscopic needle-shaped bodies in the quartz and felspar crystals of granite. It is very conspicuous in some slices. 3. Quartz. — Quartz is very abundant in the district, and is found as veins in the slate rocks adjoining the granite, from a few- inches up to some feet in thickness. It may be easily studied in the slate hills about Peel, eleven miles north of Bathurst, and over the country five miles south of Perth. There are large quantities of water-worn quartz on the various terraces that the river has left in eroding its way from the level of the Bald Hills to it present bed. It is almost unnecessary to refer to it as a constituent of the granite. In fine, a very pure form of silica is found, as silicified wood, in drifts that have been denuded of a covering of basalt. 4. Garnet. — Garnet, the exact species not determined, occurs in the liver sand, and when sand or gravel is washed for gold some garnets are always found. It occurs also as inclusions in the felspars of the granite. 5. Olivine. — This mineral is only known as a constituent of the basalt ; it rarely attains macroscopic dimensions, but under the microscope it is found in crystals, relatively so large as to give the basalt a micro-porphyritic structure ; this is well shown in the rock-slices, Plate xiv. In polished slabs of basalt it can be detected as specks, somewhat darker than the matrix, and easily acted on by warm hydrochloric acid. Infusible before the blowpipe ; com- pletely soluble in hydrochloric acid ; olive-green in colour ; colour- less by transmitted light. 6. Topaz. — Commonly found with the gem sand washed from the alluvial deposits in searching for gold. I have only met with small stones. 7. Prehnite. — A pale green to almost colourless and translucent mineral was found, associated with calcite, filling a fissure in partly decomposed granite at the water-works. I am indebted for my specimen to Mr. W. J. Clunies Ross, B.Sc. It answered as follows to the tests applied — Streak : colourless, Hardness : 6, 184 ON THE GEOLOGY AND PETROGRAPHY OP BATHURST, N.S.W., Fracture : even but brittle. Heated in the closed tube, gave off a little water. Dissolves completely in hydrochloric acid. Contains silica, alumina and lime ; proportions not determined. Before the blow-pipe intumesces to a porous mass. This mineral I take to be prehnite. 8. Felspar. — Orthoclase occurs as a leading constituent in the Bathurst granite. Near White Rock, and other places, it occurs in a porphyritic granite as crystals from half an inch to two inches long. Under the microscope it is more cloudy than plagioclase, which sometimes accompanies it. In most old rocks, when examined in thin slices, orthoclase usually appears more or less impure, on account of foreign substances and cleavage planes that exist in it. In this respect Bathurst orthoclase follows the general rule. No analysis of this mineral has been made, so far as I am aware ; but from the intense colours, afforded by Szabo's methods, I am inclined to think the percentage of potash is high. Typical orthoclase contains silica 64*6, alumina 18*5, potash 16*9. Plagioclase. — It is rare to find a thin section of Bathurst granite entirely free from plagioclase, but there is no predominance of this mineral anywhere in the district over the monoclinic felspar, by which the granites might pass locally into quartz diorites. About four years ago I sent some slices to Mr. A. W. Howitt, then of Sale, and he determined that the triclinic felspar of the Bathurst granite was, in all probability, oligoclase. Triclinic felspars, as one should certainly expect, are abundantly developed as microscopic lath-shaped bodies in the basaltic rocks. Any slice of the Bathurst basalt will show this clearly. See PI. xiv. Albite. — Mr. Howitt detected this felspar in some micro-slices I submitted to him in 1886. It occurred as minute veins in ortho- clase, placed approximately in the direction of the ortho axis. 9. Augite. — This monoclinic pyroxene is known only as a micro- porphyritic constituent of the basalts. Sections, approximately parallel to the clinopinacoid, are readily obtainable. It also occurs as minute grains in the ground mass of the basalts. Its BY THE REV. J. MILNE CURRAN. 185 abundance in this relation can be ascertained by treating a rock- slice with acid so as to separate the soluble olivine and magnetite. 10. Hornblende. — Is found as a macroscopic mineral in the granite ; crystals vary in size, the largest I have noticed measuring from one-sixteenth to one-eighth of an inch along the vertical axis. 11. Actinolite. — Found to the south of Bathurst, forming veins in quartz. Most of my specimens come from Cow Flat. It formed fibrous, radiated masses of dark green colour, easily fusible before the blow-pipe. After fusion it becomes strongly magnetic. Specific gravity 3 -5. 12. Muscovite. — Muscovite, or common mica, is found as an accessory mineral in the Bathurst granites. Towards the edges of the granite mass it often entirely replaces the black mica so characteristic of the typical Bathurst granite. Muscovite occurs in considerable quantities in the river sands. When fresh it is usually colourless, when slightly decomposed it appears as a rich yellow, and an opaque golden hue is very common. It also is found in the sands of almost every creek in the district. 13. Biotite. — Black, magnesia, iron mica occurs as small, partly formed crystals and scales, disseminated through the granite, but occasionally, particularly near the edges of the granite rocks, large plates can be detected. By transmitted light it sometimes appears of a deep green colour. After long heating it decomposes in sulphuric acid. Fusible without much difficulty. Plates, corre- sponding to basal sections, are easily picked out in decomposing granites. The dark colour of the granite is due to the exceedingly large proportion it contains of biotite and hornblende. 14. Kaolin. — Kaolin, of various degrees of purity, can be found both as decomposed granite in situ, and in small beds of trans- ported material. A pure white kaolin was found on the Bald Hills, a little to the right of the line of section A B marked on the map. When washed free from particles of quartz it formed a tolerably pure kaolin, but the percentage of iron was too high for a marketable article. 186 ON THE GEOLOGY AND PETROGRAPHY OF BATHURST, N.S.W., 15. Sphene. — The sands, resulting from the decomposition of the granites, are full of magnetic ironstone and titaniferous iron. This material is so plentiful that after floods it will be found deposited as black sand in the creeks to the south of Bathurst and about Kelso. Mr. A. W. Howitt first drew my attention to it in the micro rock-slices. I have since detected wedge-shaped crystals, of a deep brown colour showing dark borders with transmitted light, in slices of granite from near Mt. Stewart. The titaniferous ironsand may be collected in large quantities by passing a magnet through the dry sand in any of the creeks within the granite area. In this sand I have frequently detected titanium by fusing the mineral with bisulphate of potash until decomposed. The fused mass is then warmed in water in just sufficient quantity to dissolve the soluble material. A few drops of nitric acid are added to the filtrate, and the latter diluted with six or seven times its bulk of water and boiled. Titanic acid separates as a white powder. The powder can be further tested before the blow-pipe in a bead of microcosmic salt. 16. Galena. — Is known to occur in veins and lodes in connection with quartz reefs. So far as observed, it is unknown in granite rocks, but is found at, or near, the junction of the slate and granite, both to the north and south of the granite formation. A typical occurrence of this mineral may be studied near the residence of Mr. Suttor at Mt. Grosvenor, Peel. As has been found in other parts cf the world, the galena here contains variable amounts of silver. It is not found in such large quantities as to make it profitable as a lead ore. The silver assays are always low, the highest not exceeding 20 oz. per ton of ore. 17. Phosphate of Lead. — Occurs sparingly as an incrustation on decomposed galena ore on the Grosvenor Estate, near Peel. 1 have never detected the arsenical variety of this mineral referred to by Mr. Stutchbury, ante p. 176. 19. Limonite. — Limonite is found as veins filling cracks or joints in the granite. It is clearly in these instances a secondary BY THE REV. J. MILNE CURRAN. 187 product. It is met with in the excavations at the water-works, and also in a tunnel driven to test the wash in the Bald Hills. Thin layers of this mineral may sometimes be noticed in dried-up water-holes, near the decomposed basalts in the Bald Hills. Clayey ironstones are also found as a cementing material, binding quartz pebbles together, forming post-pliocene river drifts. Peculiar pea- shaped concretions of ironstone are often met with in deposits formed from decomposing basalts. 20. Mispickel. — Arsenio-pyrites or mispickel is tolerably abun- dant in the schistose and slate country along the southern granitic boundary. It occurs both massive and crystallized. This mineral was found in a well, associated with iron pyrites, on Mr. Butler's selection near Green Swamp, on the Kelso-Hockley B-oad. 21. Iron pyrites. — Is very plentiful in the slate country about Bathurst. A very notable occurrence was discovered in a shaft put down by Mr. J. Wilde on Butler's farm, to the south of Perth. The crystals were mostly cubes, and formed the greater part of the rock. Microscopic crystals of pyrites are very common in some of the slates about Cow Flat. I have also noticed yellow iron pyrites in micro-slices of granite from a railway cutting beyond George's Plains ; also in slices of the same rock from the base of Mount Pleasant. It can easily be recognised in microscopic sections by reflected light, the bright yellow of the pyrites being clearly seen. 22. Magnetite. — This is only known as a microscopic constituent of basalt. It will be referred to, in detail, in dealing with the microscopic structure of the basalts. 23-28. Copper Minerals. — It has been already remarked that the metalliferous minerals are confined to the zone of contact rocks. It is in these rocks that native copper, malachite, copper pyrites, grey ore, and azurite have been discovered. I have found native copper in hornfels rock at Duramana, on Kelly's farm. Malachite occurs sparingly at Cow Flat, south of Bathurst. In the specimens I examined it seemed to result from some alteration of azurite or blue carbonate of copper. In keeping with this fact 188 ON THE GEOLOGY AND PETROGRAPHY OF BATHURST, N.S.W., I have often noticed fibrous green malachite as pseuclornorphs after azurite at the Cobar copper mines. Grey copper ore is recorded, on good authority, as occurring in the Cow Flat copper mines. These mines are now closed. 29. Gold. — Gold is found in the drifts of the Macquarie, and, more or less abundantly in the shingle beds forming river terraces back to the pliocene " leads." The fact that gold is found in water courses cutting through decomposed granite rocks, such as in those creeks on the common near Bathurst, is thought by some to prove that the gold has been shed from a granitic matrix. While admitting that, in some instances, gold may be derived from a granitic rock,* yet, in our case, it is unnecessary to fall back on any such supposition. I venture to account for the presence of the alluvial gold in this way. The Bald Hills are some 600 feet above the Bathurst Plains. On their summits there rests a layer of basalts covering pliocene drift. This drift has been proved by tunnelling to carry gold. At some points the basalt and underlying drift have been entirely removed by denudations, while along their whole length the margins of the drift have been eroded. The detrital matter, with its auriferous deposit thus obtained, has been spread out between the hills and the river, during all that period that the river has been cutting its way from its old position to its present level. The gold now obtainable in the granite creeks is, in fact, a re-distributed pliocene lead. The character of the gold confirms this theory. It is not possible to distinguish the gold washed from the creeks from some flakes found in the highest drifts. In the creeks referred to the precious metal was never found in quantities sufficient to pay for its recovery. 30. Diamonds. — Although I have not seen a diamond from any of the drifts round Bathurst, it may be well to refer to the fact * For an interesting article on gold in granite, see Clarke's " Southern Gold-fields : Researches in the Southern Gold-fields of New South Wales, by the Rev. W. B. Clarke, M.A., F.G.S. ;" Sydney, Reading & Wellbank, 1860. BY THE REV. J. MILNE CURRAN. 189 that the Rev. W. B. Clarke records four diamonds as coming from the bed of the Macquarie, near Suttor's Bar. None have been discovered of late years. vii. Rocks of Bathurst. In enumerating the rocks of Bathurst, 1 think it well to define the terms used in describing the igneous rocks. It makes little matter what system of nomenclature one follows, provided always that the terms are clearly understood. Throughout this paper the rock names will be made use of in the sense here indicated. ROCKS OF BATHURST. Igneous Division. A. Plutonic Acidic Rocks. 1. Amphibole granite. 2. Granulite. 3. Aplite. 4. Graphic granite. 5. Greisen. 6. Porphyritic granite. 7. Felsite. B. Volcanic Basic Rocks. Basalt. Sedimentary Rocks. A. Argillaceous. 1. Clays. 2. Slate. B. Arenaceous. 1. Sands. 2. Sandstone. C. Calcareous. Limestone. 3. Conglomerate. 1. Hornfels. Altered Rocks. 2. Schists. 3. Nodular schists. 190 ON THE GEOLOGY AND PETROGRAPHY OF BATHURST, N.S.W., vii. Igneous Division. a. Plutonic Acidic Rocks. 1. Amphibole granite. — A crystalline, granular rock, composed of quartz + orthoclase + plagioclase + hornblende.* This corre- sponds to the granulite a amphibole of Fouque and Levy. These authors, in the splendid work just referred to, define granulite as consisting of black mica, oligoclase, orthoclase, quartz and horn- blende. Granulite a amphibole merely differs from this rock in the total or partial substitution of hornblende for black mica.f 2. Granitite. — A crystalline, granular rock, consisting of quartz + orthoclase + plagioclase -f magnesian mica. This agrees with granitite of Fouque and Levy. 3. Aplite. — A granular compound of potash felspar (orthoclase or microcline) and quartz, with muscovite mica as an accessory. 4. Graphic granite. — This variety of aplite, in which the quartz laminae form figures bearing a fancied resemblance to Hebrew letters, is sometimes found as water-worn fragments about Poor Man's Hollow and at Perth. 5. Greisen. — Thin veins of a rock, composed of quartz and mica, may be found near the boundaries of the granite and slate country. 6. Porphyritic granite. — In very many parts of the district the felspar crystals of the granite are so large and well-developed, being frequently two and three inches in length, as to entitle the rock to be called porphyritic granite. 7. Felsite. — An intimate, granular-crystalline admixture of orthoclase and quartz. Common in the drifts. * Rosenbusch, Mikroskopische Physiographie der Massigen Gesteine, p. 29 ; Zweite Auflage. \ Mincnilogie Micro-graphique Roches Eruptives Francaises, pp. 156, 160. BY THE REV. J. MILNE CURRAN. 191 b. Volcanic Basic Rocks. Basalt. — An intimate dark blue or black compound of augite, labradorite and olivine, with some glassy matter. Magnetite and ilmenite are generally present as well. The Bathurst basalt is micro-porphyritic in structure, and, according to Mohl's classifica- tion, our rock is a plagioclase basalt. Boricky would call it a felspar-basalt. Rosenbusch makes basalt include all neo- volcanic rocks of basic composition, which essentially contain plagioclase and augite. Olivine, this author does not consider as an essential constituent. As regards structure, this basalt falls under Division 4 in Rosenbusch's classification, and is, therefore, termed hypo-crystalline porphyritic* vii. Sedimentary Rocks. Argillaceous Bocks. 1. Clays. — Composed of hydrous silicate of alumina. The Bathurst clays contain mixtures of sand and iron oxides in various proportions. 2. Slate. — Indurated clay, sometimes fissile in planes forming an angle with the bedding, but more often fissile in the direction of the bedding. Arenaceous Group, 1. Sand. — Chemical composition, silica. Mineral components, quartz or flint, Beds of sand are common in many of the more recent formations. 2. Sandstone. — The shingle of the drifts consists of siliceous sandstones to a very great extent ; pure quartz and felspar pebbles, however, predominate. 3 Conglomerates. — This rock consists of rounded pebbles of quartz, sandstone, slate and jasperoid rock, cemented either by siliceous or ferruginous matter. As stated on p. 181, we have two conglomerates, similar in composition but different in age, near Bathurst. * Rosenbusch, Mikroskopische Physiographie der Massigen Gesteine, p. 728 ; Zweite Auflage. 13 192 ON THE GEOLOGY AND PETROGRAPHY OF BATHURST, N.S.W., Calcareous Bocks. Limestones. — Chemical composition, carbonate of lime. Some of the crystalline limestones, of a clear white colour, from Cow Flat, are good examples of this rock. At the limekilns, some 18 miles north of Bathurst, there are very considerable beds of lime- stone. Some are white, but, in most instances, they are blue or grey, from the fact that the last remnants of organic life have not been destroyed. Altered Rocks. 1. Hornfels. — A black or bluish-black rock, close-grained and heavy, with blebs of a milk-blue quartz. In hand specimens this rock might be taken for a fine-grained gneiss or an altered schist. Study of the rock, in situ, shows it in every variety, from massive and holo-crystalline to schistose. 2. Nodular Schist (Knotenschiefer). — Schists in which small, rounded concretions are present, and which stand out like knots on the planes of foliation. Splendid examples of this rock may be found in a creek by the roadside on the Bathurst- Peel Road. The exact locality is at a point where a small bridge or culvert on the main road crosses a tributary of the Winburndale Creek, near the foot of a steep hill, about 7 miles from Bathurst. 3. Schistose Rocks. — The schistose rocks about Bathurst might be described as clay-slates in which layers of mica have been developed and exhibiting distinct foliation. A typical mica schist is an aggregate of quartz and mica only. Hand specimens can be found about Bathurst that cannot readily be distinguished from typical mica schists. But, as a rule, the rocks that I have noticed might be described as felspathic, mica schists, in fact a transition rock, or a variety between the normal type and a gneissic schist. They are abundantly developed about Cow Flat and in the country round the upper Winburndale Rivulet to the north-west of Bathurst. viii. Sedimentary Formations. Upper Silurian. — The slates, gneissic schists, and limestones near Bathurst, have been regarded by all our geologists as of BY THE REV. J. MILNE CURRAN. 103 upper silurian age.* The lithological characters of the rocks suggest, almost at first sight, that the slates and limestones are similar in age to well known silurian formations. Very few fossils have been discovered, and all those that have been described point to the same conclusion. De Koninck mentions Slromatopora striatellaj from the Limekilns 1 6 miles north of Bathurst. Recently I have collected specimens of the same fossil from the same place. De Koninck also mentions Favosites fibrosa from this locality. J A short time ago I noticed well preserved examples of the silurian coral, Phillipsastrcea, near the Benglen Caves Limekilns. Mr. Etheridge, jun., palaeontologist to the Australian Museum, to whom I submitted my specimens, informed me that the Phillips- astraea is a new species. § The fossil evidence stands thus : — COLLECTED BY. IDENTIFIED BY. Petraia sp. ... ... Suttor. ... Mines Department. || Stromatopora striatella ... \ ' ... De Koninck. ( Curran. Favosites fibrosa ... ... J ' ... De Koninck. ( Curran. Phillipsastrcea sp. ... Curran. ... Etheridge, jun. * Wilkinson, Notes on the Geology of N. S, Wales, p. 39 of Mineral Products of N. S. Wales ; Sydney, Government Printer, 1882. + Recherches sur les Fossiles Paleozoi'ques de La Nouvelle-Galles du Sud , p. 10. J Fossiles Paleozolques, p. 22. § Mr. Etheridge considers the Phillipsastrcea a new species. He proposes to describe it at an early date as P. Gurrani. Regarding this coral, he writes, under date 12th February, 1S91 : — " Phillipsastrcea. — This is a very interesting coral and does not appear to be identical with any of the European or American species, so far as the works of reference at my disposal will enable me to judge. P. Gurrani is peculiar in the absence of all trace of a columellarian tubercle, and the central area'or calici being entirely tabulate- vesicular, on to which the septa do not pass. De Koninck records P. Verneuilii, Ed. & H., as a New South Wales species, but speaks, in his description, of the corallum as composed of superimposed layers, and possessing a thin columella. Neither of these features are present in your specimen." || Annual Report of the Department of Mines, New South Wales, for the year 1881, Appendix H. p. 148 ; Sydney, Government Printer, 1S82. 194 ON THE GEOLOGY AND PETROGRAPHY OF BATHURST, N.S.W. These are silurian in type. There can be no question that the fossiliferous limestones are interbedclecl with the phyllites and slates ; so the whole formation may be unhesitatingly accepted as silurian in age. There is still additional evi- dence pointing in the same direction. Resting unconformably on the slates are to be found in places a series of sandstones and grits containing the well known brachiopods Spirifer disjunctus and Rhynchonella pleurodon. These Devonian rocks are in turn overlaid by carboniferous beds. These succes- sions can be studied well by examining the country to the east of the Bathurst-Limekilns Road, on the upper reaches of the Winburndale, and generally, from the spurs of the Winburn- dale Mountains, in the same neighbourhood, across to the Lime- kilns. To sum up, we have evidence from the fossils enumerated, as well as stratigraphical and lithological proofs, of the position of the slate formations in the geological series. When one approaches Bathurst, from any side, it will be noticed that as the granite region is approached the slates show signs of disturbance. They become more fissile in character, and faults are frequently developed. Contorted strata, principally slate, are to be seen in every creek or favourable cutting. Good examples of this occur about Peel, and an exceptionally good contorted section is exposed in a road cutting on the right of George's Plains and Cow Flat Road. Travelling still towards the granite, glistening plates of mica become apparent on splitting the rock, showing a new phase of crystallization. Further on, the mica becomes more plentiful, so much so as to be recognisable as alternating layers along which the rock easily cleaves. While still nearer the granite the now schistose rock exhibits a peculiar puckered and wavy surface with a satiny sheen. Then dark spots make their appearance, and knots, ovoid and round, stand out on the weathered planes. These spots vary in size from a pin's head to a pea. In this we have an excellent example of the interesting metamorphic slate known as Knotenschiefer. Finally, a mass of rock is met with of a dark blue colour, with no traces of schistosity in any direction, forming a typical hornfels. This interesting succession of zones BY THE REV. J. MILNE CURRAN. 195 of contact metamorphism can 09 followed in a line clue north from Mr. Coombe's residence, Glanmire. Spotted schists and hornfels can be followed by travelling up the creek (a tributary of the Winburndale) from the culvert referred to on p. 192. The hornfels will be found exposed between the head of the creek and the road. Hornfels rock, in many interesting varieties, can be collected too at Duramana, where it is used for road purposes. Good outcrops of the same rock are easily accessible in a road cutting on the Orange Road, near the " Rocks," as well as on the Rockley Road, south of Perth, and on the Blayney Road, near the granite boundary. The aureole of metamorphic rock around the granite may be divided into three zones, but, from the very nature of the case, it is evident that no hard and fast line can be drawn between these belts. The zones may be distinguished as — 1. Zone of micaceous clay slate. 2. Zone of knotted slate, often mica slate (Knotenglimmer- schiefer). 3. Zone of hornfels rock. It will of course be understood that these zones of rock do not follow each other in due succession at every point. That this should be so would suppose denudation to have excavated the river valley equally on all sides — a manifest impossibility. As a matter of fact knotted and altered slates may be found at times nearer the central granite mass than hornfels rock. But this difficulty is easily explained by assuming an underlying mass of granite not yet exposed, or by noticing that sometimes the granite dips away under the slate rock at a low angle and further on comes once more to the surface. Relative Age of the Sedimentary Rocks. — Silurian slate is the oldest rock around Bathurst. At first sight this may seem rather puzzling. The position and structure of these slates show them to be sedimentary in origin. But we have abundant proof that they were laid down, consolidated, and crushed into great folds long before the granite was erupted. Of course we might suppose the 196 ON THE GEOLOGY AND PETROGRAPHY OF BATHURST, N.S.W., granite to be the result of extreme metamorphism, as possibly some granites are, but in studying the geologj'- of Bathurst one soon abandons all hope of maintaining such an origin for the granitic mass as a whole. This will be dealt with further on. Wherever I have studied good junctions I always noticed that the slates are cut off suddenly by the granite, and in no instance have I ever seen a slate rock resting on a granitic floor in a way that would suggest it was originally laid doivn there. Indeed, no idea can now be formed of what may have been the character of the old sea-bed on which the sediments were first deposited. No trace or vestige of it remains. The granite behaves in every respect as a rock that was erupted into overlying slates, and is, therefore, the newer. Slate, then, we take to be the most ancient formation. Next in age come the granites. The overlying Devonian rocks are, of course, more recent than either. From the character of the material forming the great bulk of the slates, we can surmise that the rocks were formed on a deep sea-bottom. The margins of any sea-bed would naturally be made up of coarser material. Rocks, corresponding to these deposits, are abundantly represented. The lines of limestone had an origin not unlike the coral reefs of our own day. The proximity of lime- stone to conglomerates points to the presence of a shallow sea or sea-beach. The old silurian ocean had its lines of coast, and there must have been a continent at no great distance off, the wearing down of which supplied the material to form the rocks we are discussing. In what direction did this continent lie 1 What was the nature of its rocks 1 Has it disappeared to its very foundations 1 These are questions, full of interest as they are to the geologist, to which no satisfactory replies can be given. The onlv formations resting on the granites and slates are the drifts- These are all of tertiary and post-tertiary age. Between these two widely separated formations there exists an immense interval, regarding which the rocks of Bathurst contribute nothing to our knowledge. It is difficult to think that no other rocks, Devonian, Carboniferous, or Jurassic, ever existed above where BY THE REV. J. MILNE CURRAN. 197 Bathurst now stands. Evidence is accumulating to show that the Devonian rocks, found both to the east and west of Bathurst, once formed a great anticlinal fold over the granite. This, probably, formed an island in Carboniferous and Jurassic seas. But all direct proof is missing and practically nothing is known of the physical surroundings of this district from Devonian to Jurassic rimes. The most tenable opinion is that we had dry land here- abouts when the Carboniferous formations to the north and west were being deposited. This means that rivers from Bathurst mountains flowed into Carboniferous and probably Mesozoic seas, and that our hills were old when many parts of Europe and Asia were still under water. The drifts referred to are all alluvial, marine deposits being quite unknown. Every drift about Bathurst owes its origin to the present river. The oldest deposit is some 540 feet above the present bed, so that the amount of eroded matter is very consider- able. By joining the basalt hills marked F, A, H, K, on the accompanying map (PI. xvni.), the bed of the old pliocene river may be approximately traced. These basalt hills were, there is no doubt, once continuous, and the gaps now present are the result of subaerial denudation. The history of the changes, since the days when the Macquarie flowed through this channel nearly 600 feet above its present level, is shortly this. The river was the main drainage line of the country, therefore, the lowest depression within the water-shed. Active volcanoes were pouring out floods of lava about Swatchfield and Orange. One of these streams of liquid rock flowed down and filled up the valley of the Macquarie. The river waters were thus displaced and forced to erode for them- selves a new channel. The granite proved more yielding than the compact basalt, so that while the basalt remains the granite has been subjected to every agent of denudation. In effecting this we can with much reason suppose the river to have been a far greater stream that it is now. Volcanic eruptions are always attended with atmospheric disturbance and heavy rains ; moreover, the rainfall was undoubtedly greater. Then the rock was, in all 198 ON THE GEOLOGY AND PETROGRAPHY OF BATHURST, N.S.VV,, probability, suffering from la maladie du granite so noticeable now.* A glance at section i, PI. xvi. will show some of the various posi- tions of the river from its oldest bed to its present course. The remnants of old channels on the slopes between the river and the Bald Hills vary in age. The oldest drift we know to be Pliocene. The newest is now forming, and the most we can do is to point out that the drifts cover intervals from the Pliocene to this day. ix. Igneous Rocks. Granite — In the field. — There is no lack of outcrops of granite, even within the limits of the sketch map appended. Wherever the granites show on the surface they are decomposed. This is so constant a character that it may be taken for granted that the whole surface of the granite is undergoing rapid decomposition, as stated in a former part of this paper. In sinking wells, ten and twenty feet of decomposed rock are frequently met with. All along the river valley wherever the rock crops out it is invariably decomposed. Indeed, Bathurst affords a good instance of the sickening of granite referred to by Dolomieu. Even when the minerals of the rock hold firmly together, their slices, cut from surface specimens, show cloudy felspars and incipient kaolin ization. For microscopical purposes the best locality to procure chips for micro-slices is at the waterworks, where a deep shaft has been put down, and among the broken boulders on the northern slopes of Mt. Pleasant. Granite is exposed up the river to O'Connell's Plains, and along the railway line to Locksley. Between Locksley and Brewongle some interesting junctions may be noted, one in particular at a bridge crossing the line between the two stations. Following the * The disintegration of granite is a striking feature of large districts in Auvergne, especially in the neighbourhood of Clermont. This decay was called by Dolomieu "la maladie du granite." The phenomenon may, without doubt, be ascribed to the continual disengagement of carbonic acid gas from numerous fissures. Lyell's Principles of Geology, 11th edition, Vol. I. p. 409. BY THE REV. J. MILNE CUREAN. 199 line west, good junctions of the Silurian rock and granite can be seen a little to the Bathurst side of Newbridge Station. Decom- posed granite is exposed in a cutting on the river bank at the foot of George Street, near the railway gates, Kelso, near the rifle butts, at Rankin's Bridge, in the railway cuttings between Bathurst and Brewongle, and in almost any of the creeks on the slopes of the Bald Hills. Following the river down, junctions of slate and granite rocks will be found in the neighbourhood of the " Forge," some sixteen miles from Bathurst. The change from the granite to the slate country is very marked in this vicinity. The granite rocks are worn into smooth boulders, reminding one of the roches moutonnees produced by ice action, while the slate shows jutting points and pinnacles that conform more or less to the strike of the slate. Boulders of a hard, undecom posed granite are to be found on the railway line beyond Wimbledon. Porphyritic granite is common, but limited in quantity, in each locality. There are some good specimens near the river crossing on the road to White Rock. A rather noticeable feature in the Bathurst granite is the inclusions that are by no means rare. These vary from a few inches to many yards in length. The prevailing tint of the granite is a light bluish-grey. The inclusions are always dark coloured. When examined minutely they are found to consist of the same material as the body of the granite in a finer state of division. These inclusions contain a considerable amount of titanic or magnetic iron. When the rock is powdered a magnet will separate it readily. If the Bathurst granite is of metamorphic origin, then the inclusions may represent fragments of the original parent rock that have withstood metamorphism. On the other hand, they might represent fragments of slate caught up by the molten granite. After studying a great many of these inclusions, I find it hard to believe that they are the result of any chemical or selective influences in the cooling mass. I rather incline to the view that they are mechanical. Some of the inclusions consist entirely of black mica, felspar and quartz. There is no sharp line separating the one from the other. 200 ON THE GEOLOGY AND PETROGRAPHY OF BATHURST, N.S.W., In weathering, the granite gives rise to a rather poor and barren soil. Fortunately, soils resulting from either granites or sand- stones are seldom found alone. Everywhere there is spread about a certain amount of alluvium from the old river beds. And over large tracts traces of a rich soil, resulting from the decomposition of basalts, can be detected. Origin of the Granite. — There is a growing belief in the meta- morphic origin of many granites. The Bathurst granite, being limited in extent and easily accessible to its boundaries, presented special facilities to study its origin. It is now a common position for geologists to hold that, although in many and perhaps most instances, granite is an intrusive rock of plutonic origin, yet granites do occur which are the result of extreme metamorphism. Examples are eagerly sought for to show that granite can be pro- duced by the metamorphism of sedimentary materials in situ. At the very outset I may state that although I am tolerably familiar with the line of junction between the slates and granites, I have never met with one instance of a gradual change by which granite could be said to melt away on all sides into the surrounding strata, or in which an undoubted granite shades off, by gradations, into a rock of clastic origin. In studying the origin of the granite, the boundaries and junction lines will naturally afford interesting material. Are these boundaries marked by a hard and fast line 1 Does the granite mass behave like an eruptive rock 1 Does it alter the rocks it touches ? Does it thrust dykes and veins into the rocks around, or do the many square miles of granite melt away, by insensible gradations, into slates and phyllites ? Wherever I have observed contacts, the line of junction has been hard and fast. The granite does thrust out veins into the slates near it, and, without doubt, it alters clay slates to hornfels. The granite is, therefore, in a sense intrusive, but this does not exclude the view that it may have been, for all that, derived from pre-existing sediments. I will now describe a few instances that will maintain my position as to the intrusive nature of the granite, and then consider the probabilities of its being derived from pre- existing seclimentaries. BY THE REV. J. MILNE CURRAN. 201 A junction of granites and Silurian rock can be well seen near the bridge over the Winburndale Creek, on the Bathurst-Peel Road, a few hundred yards up stream. Two rocks are noticeable, one of flesh-coloured granite, which is very marked in its contrast with the other, a massive, compact, bluish rock — a hornfels or altere 1 slate. The granite is mainly binary with striugs and nests of translucent quartz. There are occasional flakes of black mica, and layers of white mica are sometimes developed along the joints. The flesh-coloured porphyritic granite sends veins of varying thickness into the hornfels. One vein, not above an inch in thickness, is shot in a right line into the altered slate for fully 20 yards ; see PI. xv. tig. 5. In the same locality I noticed a granitic vein springing from the main mass of granite and entering the hornfels as a dyke about a foot thick. A short distance away it is narrowed down to five inches, at the same time bending round to form a right angle with the first direction and then continuing in a right line in its new course. Smaller veins connect the two arms at the angle. A diagram of this interesting intrusion will be found on PI. xv. fig. 6. A little further along the same road, in the direction of Bathurst, a tributary of the Winburndale is crossed. It is dry at most seasons of the year. By following up this creek, a variety of rocks will be met with, indicating that the junction of the slate and granite is not far off. Near the culvert, in fact under it, splendid samples of " spotted slate " can be found with a general strike to the north-west. I will narrate, in the order they are met with, some of the varieties of rocks that may be studied here, following the creek up from the road. 1. Some three hundred yards from the culvert there is a vein of felspathic rock, containing blebs of translucent quartz, silvery mica, and quartz veins. This is some three feet in thickness, and contains inclusions of a schistose hornfels. 2. Slate, dipping north-east at a high angle. 202 ON THE GEOLOGY AND PETROGRAPHY OF BATHURST, N.S.W., 3. A granitic dyke, with inclusions of a schistose hornfels. The general direction conforms to that of the slate. It consists of felspar, quartz and white mica. Besides the mica distributed through the rock, there occur nests of the same mineral, oftentimes with the mica contorted and broken. 4. Spotted slate, with occasional thin veins of quartz. 5. A dyke of granite, with large felspars and white mica. There are layers of white mica on every joint. 6. Slate. 7. Coarse granite, with parallel jointings. 8. Spotted slate. 9. Granite vein, some six yards wide, in places almost as fine- grained as a felsite. The rock is rendered porphyritic in places by nests of silvery mica and felspar. There are also thin veins of quartz. 10. A thick belt of spotted slate, nearly two hundred yards wide, with occasional thin veins of quartz. 11. A vein of granite, with black mica. So far, although we are approaching the main granitic mass, neither black mica nor hornblende has yet been developed. 12. Boulders of porphyritic granite, with dark fine-grained inclusions. 13. Beyond these last named rocks there are few exposures of the bed rock, but some hundred yards further on the typical Bathurst granite is met with, containing both hornblende and black mica. The succession here detailed points out that the actual junction between the older and newer rocks is a wavy line with sharp and deep bends. In one place the granite runs into the slate in dykes and veins, while between these there are left jutting points and arms of the old rock standing between walls of granite. Junctions of a similar nature are described by Mr. A. W. Howitt in his able paper on the Diorites and Granites of Swift's Creek.* * Transactions of the Royal Society of Victoria, Vol. xvi. pp. 11-87. BY THE REV. J. MILNE CURRAN. 203 Near Newbridge, the junction of the igneous and sedimentary- rocks presents the same features. In a cutting on the Bathurst side of the railway station bars of igneous and slate rocks can be studied in actual contact. The boundary-line between the two is still sharp, and no evidence can be found of a slate merging into a granite. On the contrary, examples can be found where the intrusion of the granite in a liquid or pasty condition, but evidently under great pressure, has bent and crushed, and pushed on one side, the easily yielding slates. In cases where the granite does alter the rock with which it is in contact, the alteration consists in the development of a rock not in any way resembling a granite. Where the alteration is most complete, a hornfels is the result, and where incipient alteration is noticeable, a close examination reveals merely a rearrangement of old minerals and the introduction of only one new one. Between Locksley and Brewongle, on the railway line, a good example is exposed of the alteration produced by the intrusion of granite. Near a high level bridge, between these two stations, a mass of granite will be found lying partly to one side and partly under a micaceous and schistose rock. The granite sends veins into the overlying beds. This upper rock, as stated, is of a schistose character, and it will be noticed that the planes of schistosity are parallel to the mass of the intrusive rock. In this instance the schistose planes are horizontal, which gives the rock a bedded appearance. But in other parts of the district, notably on the Hockley Road, south of Peel, where a foliated or schistose structure is developed, the foliation planes are vertical. This inclines one to the view that an envelope of foliated rock once surrounded the granite mass, so that when a portion of the original sediments remain above the granite the schistose structure will be horizontal, but when they are seen forming a vertical boundary to the intruded granite the planes of schistosity will be vertical. In connection with this peculiar structural development, it may be mentioned that a schistose structure can be induced in wax and mixtures of oxide of iron and pipeclay by pressure,* and that, in these instances, the * See Tyndall's " Fragments of Science," Vol. I. p. 366. 204 ON THE GEOLOGY AND PETROGRAPHY OF BATHURST, N.S.W., planes of the laniinse are found to arrange themselves in rudely- parallel planes perpendicular to the lines of pressure. Whatever may be the explanation, we have here at Bathurst a foliated or schistose structure developed in sedimentary rocks when in contact with an intrusive granite. When a fragment of these ancient sediments is found above, and resting on, the granite, the foliated structure lies horizontally, and when found adjoining the granite mass, the folia stand vertically. A diagram showing the intrusive veins at Locksley will be found on PI. xv. fig. 1. The sketches were made some eight years ago, when the face of the cutting was fresh. I examined the same section a few months ago, and although the rocks have disintegrated a little and vegetation is beginning to take hold there, the intrusive veins can be easily studied. With the evidence of these sections before us, we are now in a position to enquire into the origin of the granite. Everything that we know points to the one conclusion, that the Bathurst granite is intrusive. The granite alters rocks with which it comes in contact. It sends tongues, veins and dykes into the adjoining rocks. Nowhere can we trace a gradual change from a sediment to a rock granitic in structure. The proximity of granite has converted phyllites into hornfels. It has caused a rearrangement of old minerals in the sedimentary strata, and caused the development of one new mineral in abundance, namely, mica. But this is all. Nothing approaching a granite can be found resulting from any metamorphic process, and in no one section have I ever discovered anything like a change from a clastic to a holo-crystalline rock, granitic in composition. When I first examined the rocks around Bathurst the prevailing impression left on my mind was that the granite melted away by insensible gradations into the surrounding rocks. A more minute examination rendered this position untenable; but it will be interesting if we can yet discover a granite truly metamorphic in origin. There can be no difficulty, as far as chemical composition of some slates goes, in believing that the constituents of a slate BY THE REV. J. MILNE CURRAN. 205 rock may be rearranged so as to give rise to a rock that may not be distinguished from granite. The evidence advanced in support of the metamorphic origin of many granites broke down when the rocks were subjected to the test of microscopical examination. But there are still cases where all the refinements of modern geology have been employed without shaking the conclusion that some granites, at least, and certainly some crystalline schists, can be produced by the metamorphism of rocks in situ* There is little doubt, then, but that the granite was intruded into Silurian rocks after their folding and elevation. Possibly the granitic intrusion formed an anticlinal, and lifted the sediments yet higher. Silurian rocks once occupied the place now taken by the granite. Were the former rocks simply lifted or thrust aside, or were they absorbed by the molten or plastic granite % Lifted, I should say. There is little proof to show in support of this view, but it is an impression left after a study of the whole district. I have no doubt at all but that portions of the Silurian rocks were absorbed by the granite in its intrusion. When we examine the outer edges of the granite, we find that for a short distance from the contact it differs from the typical rock. There is, for instance, an absence of hornblende, the mica is in nests, and the minerals, generally, are not arranged as in a normal granite. Quartz, instead of filling up the spaces left by the other constituents, is found in grains and blebs through a much larger body of felspar. All this might be accounted for by the more rapid cooling of the margins of any intrusive rock. But I consider it as the result of the absorption of a certain amount of the pre-existing phyllites. In this connection I would like to draw attention to some views on the origin of crystalline rocks as set forth in the volume of the International Geological Congress for 1888.f In a paper on the " Archaean Geology of the Region N.W. of Lake Superior," Dr. A. C. Lawson points out that the archaean * See Green's " Physical Geography," Chapter ix., second edition. + Congres G^ologique International 4me Session — Londres, 1888. Etudes sur les Schistes Cristallins. 206 ON THE GEOLOGY AND PETROGRAPHY OP BATHURST, N.S.W., rocks of that region can be resolved into two great divisions. The lower composed of rocks which but for their foliation are regarded as of plutonic igneous origin. Resting on these is a mass of stratiform rocks, partly detrital, partly volcanic. These latter, or upper series, were certainly not laid down on the lower. The old floor on which they were deposited has disappeared ; and again, Dr. Lawson points out that the lower series could not have been the crust from which the detritus for forming the upper rocks was derived. " There is but one way of reconciling these statements. It is a simple conception, and one well in accordance with established geological truth, that certain portions of the earth's crust upon which strata are accumulating may sink gradually. Now, that portion of it upon which the upper archean was accumulating, to a thick- ness of several miles, may be conceived to have been depressed, either by reason of the superincumbent weight or from other causes, till it came within a zone of a sort of fusion compatible with the conditions of such depths. This fusion gives us the magma which is implied in the conception of the laurentian gneisses, granites, and syenites, being of plutonic igneous origin."* Vancouver Island furnishes another example that may throw some light on the origin of the Bathurst granite. Dr. Gr. M. Dawson has described the relations of granites to triassic beds in Vancouver and the adjacent coasts. Triassic beds are frequently found in contact with, or resting upon, granite rocks. They were not, however, deposited on a granitic floor, as the granites are evidently of a later date. " The circumstances attending the line of junction of the granites with the rocks of the Vancouver (triassic) series have been carefully examined at a great number of points. The granites near this line are usually charged with innumerable darker fragments of the Vancouver series, which, when in the immediate vicinity of the parent rock, are angular and clearly marked, but at a greater distance become rounded and blurred in outline, and might then be mistaken for concretionary * Congres Geologique International, Londres, 1889 ; pp. 75, 76. BY THE REV. J. MILNE CURRAN. 207 masses in the granite, into the substance of which they have been in process of being absorbed. The width of the belt characterized by these fragments is very variable, and where the plane of the present surface cuts that of the junction of the two classes of rocks at an acute angle — as is often the case — it is considerable, frequently exceeding half a mile. . . . The only explanation which appears to satisfactorily account for the appearances met with, is, that we have at the surface a plane which was at one time so deeply buried in the earth's crust that the rocks beneath it had become subject to granitic fusion or alteration."* The bearing of these extracts on the geology of Bathurst is obvious. Here we have Silurian rocks resting on a granite. There must have been a solid floor on which they were deposited. The granite on which they rest was certainly not the pre-existing base- ment. And it is extremely improbable that granitic rocks formed the crust from which the sediments were derived. Thus far the conditions are very similar; and it is hard to resist the conclusion that when the original floor of the Silurian was being absorbed in the granitic magma, some of the Silurian rocks suffered a like fate. The Devonian and Carboniferous formations are now estimated, by Mr. C. S. Wilkinson,! to measure 20,000 feet in thickness. "With two miles of strata resting on our Silurian rocks, we can see the possibility of the lowest series being brought within a zone of fusion, which would furnish the required magma, and make the Bathurst granite, in a sense, at once metamorphic and intrusive. We have abundant proof, as shown above, that the granite is intrusive in character. It is quite another question to decide whether the material that forms the granite was drawn from a deep-seated source, or whether it is the result of the profound metamorphism of a previously existing sediment. * Annual Report of the Geological Survey of Canada, 1887 ; Report B., pp. 11-13. t See " Notes on the Geology of New South Wales," by C. S. Wilkinson, F.G.S., contained in "Mineral Products of New South Wales;" Sydney, the Government Printer, 1887. 14 208 ON THE GEOLOGY AND PETROGRAPHY OP BATHURST, N.S.W., I am not in possession at the present time of sufficient material to deal with this question, but, as a first step towards a solution of the problem, I may state that there is abundant reason for believing that the granite exposed about Bathurst is but a small portion of a very large mass that underlies the palaeozoic rocks on all sides. In keeping with this view, we find that the granite is exposed for a much greater distance up and down the river than across the valley. The lowest rock for miles around is probably granite, and the Bathurst rock shows merely where the overlying beds have been denuded. Microscopic Examination of the Granite. — I have made some twenty-five slices of the granite for microscopic examination. Nearly all the minerals of the rock can be seen macroscopically, particularly in polished specimens. Certainly there are fine-grained varieties, but the average Bathurst granite is coarse-grained. Crystals of black hornblende are not unusual of 9 mm. in length. Glistening faces of felspars, 16mm. long, are frequently found. In polished specimens the silica and felspars appear in about equal quantity, or perhaps with felspars slightly in excess. The minerals proved to be present by a microscopic examination are : — Essential Minerals. Accessory Minerals. Quartz. Muscovite. Felspar. Apatite. Hornblende. Sphene. Biotite. Garnet. Magnetite. Calcite. Quartz. — Under the microscope, in plain parallel light, the quartz is easily distinguished from all other minerals by its water- clear appearance, the absence of inclusions, and its fresh, unaltered aspect. It is found tilling up the spaces left by the other consti- tuents. Under higher powers, inclusions will be noticed, but not in such quantity as to lessen the contrast between the clear quartz and the cloudy felspars. The hair-like lines that cut through the quartz in every direction fall under the heading of trichitcs, described by various observers. These trichitea can be noticed I5Y THE REV. J. MILNE CUUKAN. 209 striking in every direction through the clear quartz. A power of one hundred diameters shows them in great abundance. They branch, Bometiraes meet at a point, fifteen or twenty diverge Prow one point, and sometimes opaque blebs are found at various points along their length, <>r, more often, at the end. I can offer no explanation as to their real nature. Cavities are abundant in the quartz. They can be detected in every slice. I have noticed one spontaneously moving bubble. Besides the trichites and bubbles, tubes oan be seen in the silica with a power of fifty diameters, They are evidently tracks left in the plastic; mass by moving bubbles of gas. Examined in polarized light, with crossed Nicols, the quart/ displays the usual gorgeous bioad sheets and bands of colour, one colour imperceptibly shading into another. In very thin slices it appears a dull blue-grey. The great abundance of cavities in the silica of all the slices is explained by (he fact that the quartz was the last mineral to crystallize. When rocks that have cooled from an igneous magma are studied, it is often noted, as we should expect, that the most fusible mineral was the last to crystallize. But it is found that this does not apply to granitic rocks. Every student, knows that quart/, is commonly called infusible, while the felspars are considered fusible in various degrees. In the con- solidation of granite from an igneous fluid or paste, felspar was the first to crystallize;, while tin? more infusible quartz filled up the interspaces and was the last to solidify. Our granite is no exception to the rule, for the silica occurs in an amorphous stale, enclosing tin; other minerals as in all true granites. This is explained by supposing that the original plasticity was induced in some other way than by what- we understand as Avy igneous fusion. The fluid inclusions prove the presence of water and various salts. Tin; quartz, being the last to harden, took in any fluid residue and, from its enduring nature, retained it. A notable feature of the quartzes, under the microscope, is the presence of microscopi<- dust, which seems to have accumulated on the out ide surfaces of the quartz granules. -10 ON" T1IK QSOLOGV AND PKTROG&APH? OK 15ATHURST, N.S.W., The proportion in which the minerals occur, as revealed by the microscope, may be expressed as follows, felspar being the com- monest : — 1. Orthoclase ; -. Silica ; 3, Triclinic felspars ; 4. Bio- tite ; o. Hornblende ; 6, Magnetite ; 7. White mica. -pars. — With crossed Nicols, the felspars can be readily divided into orthoclase and into felspars with distinct triclinic striatums. The orthoclase occurs in sub-crystalline patches, and, in most slides, is the more plentiful of the two. In its general appearance the orthoclase is always cloudy, even in the thinnest sections. The cloudiness and opacity of the orthoclase is a constant character in all the slices 1 have cut. I attribute this peculiar dimness to pores and fractures that no doubt hasten incipient kaolinir.ation. This structure has, no doubt, a great deal to do with the " sickening of the rock" before referred to. Indeed, anyone accustomed to micro-petrographieal work, would, on account of these characters, at once decide that the rock was not of an enduring character. lime Felspars. — The banded appearance, so characteristic of the triclinic felspars, is at once noticeable under crossed Nicols in every slice. The amount of plagioclase relative to the orthoclase varies much. The plagioclase is often in excess, and sometimes the two felspars seem equal in quantity. I sent a few slices of this rock to Mr. A. W. Howitt. our leading Australian petrologist, and he decided, from the structure of the crystals and from their obscuration angles, that the felspar was oligoelase. Sections are not uncommon with the tine bands of colour crossing at an angle of 90°. This felspar contains inclusions of other minerals that had ervstallized before itself. Maguetite is a common inclusion, as well as corroded crystals and plates of hornblende. Ilornblend''. — Every slice will show hornblende more or less plentifully under the microscope. The crystals are generally much corroded, showing that they were formed long before the felspars. A few examples show the exact prismatic hornbleude. Most of the sections, however, are in zones other than the prismatic, and show only one set of cleavage Hues. In thin sections it appears BY THE REV. J. MILNE CUBRAH. 211 of a deep brown colour, and sometimes of a rich sap green. Nearly every slice has a favourable section on which the angle, formed by an axis of elasticity and a crystallographic axis, can be measured. Sometimes it is not easy to distinguish between hornblende and biotite in slices of the Bathurst granite. For the information of students who may make use of these notes, I may just indicate the difference. The micas, including of course biotite, show no sensible dichroism in sections parallel to the base. In sections across the cleavage the biotites will show very strong dichroism on rotating the lower Nicol prism. Hornblende is also dichroic, but a few sections can usually be found on the slice parallel, or nearly parallel, to the base ; these will show two sets of cleavage. Sections of hornblende, parallel to the vertical axis, show but one set of cleavage lines, and in this resemble mica. But the cleavage planes of the hornblende are generally coarse, or seldom so close as those in mica. Mica, too, has usually a more ragged look than hornblende, and the ends of the lamina? have a frayed-out appear- ance. Finally, unless the section be cut exactly parallel to the orthopinacoid, hornblende does not extinguish when the cleavage lines are parallel to a diagonal of the Nicols. Between crossed Nicol prisms all sections of biotite will be black when the cleavage corresponds with the plane of vibration of either Nicol, since the cleavage corresponds with an axis of elasticity. With horn- blende this is not the case, and, in the larger number of its sections, the point of maximum darkness will be obtained when the cleavage makes a certain, though not great, angle with the plane of the light. Biotite. — Biotite is common in all the slices. It appears as irregular plates, with parallel striae, corresponding to the cleavage on sections, parallel to the vertical axis. The absorption exhibited by rotating the polarizing prism under the section is very marke J. Sometimes flakes show of a light brown colour, without any cleavage lines, exhibiting no dichroism. These I take to be biotites cut parallel to the basal planes or cleavage. They resemble, in every respect, flakes or plates cleaved from biotites and mounted separately for comparison. 212 ON THE GEOLOGY AND PETROGRAPHY OF BATHURST, N.S.W., Muscovite. — Muscovite is, comparatively speaking, rare. Mr. A. W. Howitt first pointed out its presence to me. It is common enough in the aplite and kindred rocks on the borders of the granite country. But in the main body of the granite it has been, up to the present, detected only under the microscope. Magnetite is readily recognised in every slice by its remaining opaque in the thinnest sections, and by its peculiar lustre in reflected light. Sphene is another rare constituent. It appears in clear brownish-red granules. Sometimes wedge-shaped crystals can be seen with dark or almost opaque edges. I have selected four fairly typical slides from my rock slices, and I will give a short description of their microscopic characters. 1. (Slice 48). The general appearance of this slice under the miscroscope is that of a holo-crystalline rock. Some of the micas and hornblende show ci'ystalline faces, but the quartz and felspars are, for the most part, allotriomorphic. With crossed Nicols, a considerable quantity of plagioclase becomes visible, but it is altogether subordinate in amount to the orthoclase. The quartz occurs in broad plates, filling up the interspaces between the other minerals, and showing in polarized light the customary brilliant colours. Glass cavities and fluid cavities are very abundant in the quartz. Fluid cavities, with bubbles of gas, can be readily found with a magnifying power of about seventy -five diameters. By using i immersion lens, cavities containing spontaneously moving bubbles can be detected. The Bathurst granite affords abundant material for studying this wonderful phenomenon. The slide I am describing contains many good examples of spontaneously moving bubbles. Some of these bubbles move round the cavities slowly, reminding one of the movements of a rotifer in search of food. Others are stationary until the slice is slightly heated, when the bubbles are seized with a sort of trembling motion and suddenly start off travelling round the cavity. I have noticed many in which the movements are so rapid that it is difficult for the eye to follow them in their course. In this slice brown dichroic mica is abundant. It becomes almost dark in some positions as the BY THE REV. J. MILNE CURRAN. 213 polarizer is rotated. There are also a few crystals of hornblende, which is also strongly dichroic ; but, as has been already explained in a former portion of this paper, there is little danger of con- founding the two minerals. The orthoclase felspar is cloudy, appearing of a snowy white by reflected light. The hornblendes contain some bright green patches of decomposition matter. 2. (Slice 38). This slide contains a hornblende crystal 4*6 mm. along its vertical axis. The largest patch of quartz is 2 mm. by 1*8 mm. Triclinic felspars are present showing a beautiful banded structure under crossed Nicols. The quartz is clear and limpid, containing few inclusions other than the fluid cavities. The hornblende and biotite are the only minerals showing traces of boundary planes. 3. (Slice 34). The minerals present are quartz, biotite, felspar, orthoclase, and triclinic felspar. Fluid cavities are very plentiful in the quartz, numbers coming into the focus of the glass as the different planes are reached by the fine adjustment. The felspars are in places almost impellucid. A few crystals of magnetite are included in a flake of biotite. 4. (Slice 37). Under the microscope some finely striated, clear brown mica is seen. Even in the thinnest section it is strongly dichroic. When the cleavage lines are parallel to the plane of vibration of the light, the sections are black or very dark brown. A few crystals of apatite are enclosed in the quartz and biotite. A reddish-brown wedge-shaped sphene will be noticed on the margin of the slice. The biotite alters to a leek-green material that often preserves the dichroic character, but the cleavage lines are lost. The felspars as is usual are impure and cloudy, and the quartz beautifully pellucid. The hair-like microlites, to which reference has been already made, are abundant. Triclinic felspar is present, but not so plentiful as orthoclase. Chemical comjyosition of the Granite. Specific gravity at 18-5° C 2-85-2-93 1 am indebted to Mr. Mingaye, F.C.S., of the Geological Survey Laboratory, for the following analysis of the granite. The 214 ON THE GEOLOGY AND PETROGRAPHY OF BATHURST, N.S.W., specimen submitted for analysis was fairly typical of the general character of the rock : — Hornblende-biotite-granite. Silica 66-69 Alumina 17*03 Ferric oxide 3- 15 Ferrous ditto *69 Manganous ditto trace Lime (Ca O) 1'82 Magnesia (Mg O) 2-50 Potash (K2 O) 6-26 Soda (Na2 0) 1-21 Phosphoric acid trace Sulphuric anhydride trace Titanic acid trace Moisture -48 99-83 Comparing the above with well-known granites, it will be seen that the Bathurst rock contains about 10 per cent, less silica than the normal type of West of England granite, while it is richer than the average granite in alumina and potash. Basalt. The basalts have been defined as dark-coloured lavas of basic composition and high specific gravity, representing the extrusive or volcanic type of the gabbros and dolerites. Dr. Geikie limits the term basalt to the contemporaneous lavas of basic composition.* They consist of a compact or finely granular ground-mass, through which crystals of plagioclase, augite and olivine are scattered. Again, some authors use the terms dolerite, anamesite and basaltf for rocks which, chemically identical and all holo-crystalline, differ * British Petrography, by J. J. Harris Teall, M.A. ; London, 1888, p. 193. t Professor J. G. Bonney — Anniversary Address to the Geological Society, London ; Quarterly Journal Geological Society, Vol. xli. p. 70. BY THE REV. J. MILNE CURRAN. 215 in the coarseness and fineness of their grains, so that the last term is applied to a rock which either may be holo-crystalline or may retain a glassy base. It would be convenient, then, to restrict the term dolerite to the holo-crystalline variety, using the epithet coarse-grained or fine-grained as the case may be ; to apply the name anamesite to the hemi-crystalline varieties ; and to include in the term basalt all that retain a glassy base. The Bathurst rock I shall refer to under the name of basalt simply. It is not as fine-grained as the typical anamesite, nor as coarse-grained as a dolerite, and the amount of glass in the base is variable. I would describe the Bathurst basalt as a blue-black, compact, apparently homogeneous rock, that breaks with a splintery ana conchoidal fracture, and in which the component minerals can be studied only with the microscope, unless occa- sionally scattered porphyritically through the mass. It occurs as a contemporaneous flow and consists essentially of triclinic felspar, augite, olivine and magnetite, with small portions of an unindi- vidualised glassy base.* Zirkel, in studying the basalts of the fortieth parallel of North America, separated the felspar-bearing basaltic rocks into four distinct groups. f The Bathurst rocks would naturally fall into the group which he describes as "possessing a microscopically very fine-grained, totally crystalline aggregation of crippled microlites, largely felspar and augite, which serve as a ground-mass, in which micro-porphyritical and macro-porphyritical larger crystals of felspar and olivine, with occasional augites are distinctly and sharply embedded." Add magnetite and occasional patches of a glassy base, and the above description answers fairly well for the Bathurst rock. Of course, in speaking of basalts generally, we would call our rock a felspar * The fact of its being a contemporaneous flow does not affect the classi- fication. I agree with the English geologists who refuse to accept the geological age of a rock as a character on which its nomenclature ought to be based. See Judd, "On the Tertiary Gabbros," &c, of Scotland, Q.J.G.S., Vol. xlii. p. 60. f Zirkel, Microscopical Petrography of the Fortieth Parallel ; United States Geological Exploration, p. 253. 216 ON THE GEOLOGY AND PETROGRAPHY OF BATHURST. N.S.W., basalt, which would distinguish it at once from the leucite basalts that are known to occur at Harden, Byrock, and Cobar. Com- pared with the basalts immediately around, those of Orange and Carcoar for instance, the Bathurst rock is distinctive enough. This is most easily detected in preparing thin slices for the micro- scope. Long before the slice is sufficiently thin, the Orange basalt is seen, by transmitted light, to consist of a felted mass of plagio- clase, with augites and olivines for the most part wedged between. The Bathurst slice on the contrary will show micro-porphyritic minerals in a holo-crystalline base with an abundance of magnetite and drop-like grains of augite. Basalts of this type are not uncommon in Europe and America. The resemblance extends even to such minute details as the serpen tinization of the olivines, and the sharp well-marked features of the iron oxides. Zirkel's remark, relative to the American basalt, applies well to this Australian example. " It is worth while," he says, " to pause and remark that in these widely remote quarters of the globe the product of the solidification of a molten mass, although exposed to many casualties, has nevertheless maintained a surprisingly close identity of microscopical composition."* Basalt in the Field. — A glance at the map accompanying this paper will show the exteut of the basalt. It marks the course of an old river valley. At the outside it is not more than 150 to 200 feet in thickness where it lies deepest. It can be studied well at the quarries on the Bald Hills, where stone is obtained for road purposes. Perth railway station is very convenient to the hill marked F. Here the basalt forms one of those table-topped hills which, in the western district, are invariably recognised, even from a distance, as ba sal tic. The road from Perth to Evans' Plains crosses a saddle in the hills. On this road sections of decomposed granite are exposed, where the weathering of the rock can be noted. About half way up the hill water-worn pebbles will be found, increasing as we ascend. These have weathered out from the drift that lies between the granite and basalt. As soon as no * Zirkel, I.e. p. 233. BY THE REV. J. MILNE CURRAN. 217 more water-worn pebbles can be found, it may be taken for granted that the highest point of the drift and the lowest point of the basalt have been reached. The weathered surfaces of the rock on the hill tops show no evidence of the prismatic structure under- neath. This prismatic structure may be seen in the quarries referred to. They are situated on the line A — B. The columns are utilised in their natural state for kerb stones. They break in some directions with a conchoidal fracture, while in other directions the stone can be broken in parallel flakes. From Perth the basalt may be followed without a break to the point marked L. Here there is an isolated hill with a basaltic cap, known as the Pinnacle. The table-topped hill overlooking Evans' Plains is the next remnant of the once continuous sheet. Then there is a long break to Mt. Pleasant, near Mr. Stewart's residence. Perth and Mt. Pleasant are the extreme points of the basaltic flow around Bathurst. Of course these points were not the original limits of the basalt plateaux. Allusion has been already made to the source of this basalt. Mr. Wilkinson pointed out that the stream came down from the neighbourhood of Swatch field. Possibly a microscopic examination of the Swatchfielcl basalts could throw light on this question. It is certain, however, that no volcanic " neck " or traces of a crater exist within a radius of ten miles of Bathurst. Very little has been done to expose the drifts under the basalt, so that some idea may be gathered as to the nature of the old valley. Along some points, where the basalt has been entirely worn away, there is an abundance of silicified wood strewn about the surface. This, no doubt, has been derived from the drift, and shows that the river valley flowed through a forest-clad region. At the present time the ridge of basalt forming the Bald Hills stands from 400 to 600 feet above the surrounding country. In the pre-volcanic days it was of course the lowest point. We have here, then, a splendid example of the effects of subaerial denuda- tion. The old mountains and valley have both disappeared, and the untiring hand of Nature has spread out the material of which they were composed over the great tertiary plains of the interior. In this connection I must draw attention to a fact oftentimes 218 ON THE GEOLOGY AND PETROGRAPHY OF BATHURST, N.S.W., overlooked when dealing with our geology. We are, for the most part, accustomed to consider the material removed by denudation as eventually carried to the sea. None of the material removed by denudation from around Bathurst in Tertiary times ever reached any sea. It was disposed of in the same way as is the vast amount of material brought down each year by the Macquarie. None of this material ever gets to the sea, but is deposited over the plains between Dubbo and the Darling. " The precipitous and rugged country about the Upper Macquarie, the chains of basalt capped hills in the Bathurst district, and all the surfaces which form the valley of the river down to Wellington, have been carved into their present shapes by the subaerial influences of air, frost, rain, and rivers. Near Dubbo we might draw the line which would show the limit of deposition, denudation and deposition being synchronous and co-equal. The basaltic hills referred to have their representatives at Dubbo, but with their summits barely on a level with the surrounding country."* Professor A. Geikie describes geological features very similar to our own in a paper on the "Tertiary Volcanic Rocks of the British Islands." Referring to the ridge of Eigg, he says : — " In Eigg a fragment of the river valley has been preserved solely because it has been sealed up under streams of vitreous lava which could better withstand the progress of waste. Thus the Scur of Eigg, like the fragments of the older basalt-plateaux of Auvergne, remains as a monument not only of volcanic eruptions, but of a former land surface, now effaced, and of the irresistible march of those slow and seemingly feeble agencies by which the denudation of a country is effected." It is very probable that a columnar structure is developed along the line of hills, but unfortunately there are no natural exposures of this interesting phenomenon. A large opening has been made nearly on the line of section A B, PI. xvi. Here the columns of basalt show well. Many are curved in a peculiar manner, but for the most part the columns are straight. Between the joints they vary in length from two to seven feet. The cup and socket * J. Milne Curran, " Notes on Geology of Dubbo." P. L. Soc. N.S.W. Vol. X. p. 170. BY THE REV. J. MILNE CURRAN. 219 structure so characteristic of the jointings in basalt is nowhere to be seen. The joints are planes, sometimes normal to the sides of the columns and sometimes forming small angles with them. As regards thickness, there is no uniformity in the columns. The average size might be taken as eighteen inches across. The weathering of these columns is rather noticeable. As the basalt decomposes it peels off in layers, and the centres of these films are fairly fresh. Plate xvn. shows this peculiar weathering. The columns are, for the most part, tetragons, pentagons, and hexagons. With regard to the relative frequency of the various kinds, the following may be taken as a fair estimate — tetragons 4 per cent., pentagons 20 per cent., hexagons 65 per cent. I made some measurements of the angles of the basaltic columns with these results : — Tetragons (sum = 360°) : (i.) a 93° (ii.) a — b 110 b — c 88 c — d 68 cl — (i.)a b c d e 359° Pentagons (sum = 540°) : -112° (ii.) a -121 b - 81 c -115 d ■ 95 e ■113c ■ 81 ■ 83 . 82 359c -133c ■118 -100 - 98c ■ 89 524c (iii.) a b -114c 130 ■ 80 •105 . 96 538c 525c 220 ON THE GEOLOGY AND PETROGRAPHY OF BATHURST, N.S.W., Hexagons (sum = 720°) : (i.) a 117° (ii.) a 113° b 132 b 133 c 118 c 111 d 120 d 111 e 123 e 123 f 107 f 124 717° 715° In hand specimens, the Bathurst basalt bears a strong resem- blance to the Rowley Regis basalt of Staffordshire. It is not unlike, in its texture, a basalt in my own collection from Madeira. It differs, however, from the basalt flows of the same age about Orange and Dubbo. It is commonly known as " blue metal," and I think that the Bathurst rocks have a decidedly bluer shade than the generality of western basalts. This peculiar blue-black is noticeable only on fractured surfaces, polished' surfaces being very dark or almost black. Microscopic Structure of the Basalt. — I have cut thirty slices of this basalt, collected at various points between Perth and Mt. Pleasant. Five slices were cut from rocks from the high hill overlooking Perth. Ten slices were made from the columnar basalt in the quarries already referred to, and were taken from an average depth of fifteen feet from the surface. A few slices were collected from the hill known as the Pinnacle, and the remaining number from Mt. Pleasant. Under the microscope there is no essential difference between any of the slides. In fact there is not even a structural difference between the slices from the most widely separated localities. In grinding down the sections, the first mineral to show is olivine. While the section is still comparatively thick, the micro- porphyritic crystals of olivine are seen as clear spots in the, as yet, opaque slice. The next mineral, recognisable is invariably the augite, and as the section thins down the plexus or network of the tiny felspars becomes visible. As the section grows thinner, the BY THE REV. J. MILNE CURRAN. 221 base resolves itself into tiny globules of olivine, augite and felspar. In this ground-mass augite is much more abundant than would be supposed at first sight. In every slice black grains of magnetite are plentiful, and remain opaque in the thinnest sections. It is usually well preserved and shows no signs of decomposition. It was the first mineral to separate from the glassy magma, and is the only primary constituent ever enclosed in the olivines. Broadly speaking, the structure is decidedly micro-porphyritic. A " streaming of the felspars " is a very characteristic structure at once recognised under the microscope. It is hardly pronounced enough, however, to be termed a fluxion structure. The lath- shaped plagioclases are often seen sweeping round the larger olivines aud augites, pointing, without doubt, to movements in the molten magma. This structure is shown on PI. xiv. figs. 4 and 5. The abundance of black magnetite which remains opaque even in the thinnest slices is the next feature to attract attention. From Professor Judd's researches, I could conclude from this feature alone that the rock cooled at or near the surface. As Professor Judcl remarks,* in most deeply-seated rocks the iron oxides enter into complete combination with the silicates, and in other cases there is a progressive increase in the quantity of magnetite which is separated according to the proximity to the surface at which consolidation has taken place. Magnetite was one of the first minerals to separate from the magma. It is the only mineral ever included in the olivine, but its enclosure in this mineral is a very common occurrence. The large olivine crystal on PI. xiv. fig. 4, shows a cube of magnetite. The felspars, too, it will be noticed, seem for the most part per- fectly fresh and unaltered. These plagioclases exhibit parallel twin-striation in polarized light, a feature common to rocks of this sort throughout the globe. The olivines are abundant in every slice, showing, as is usual, that peculiar ground glass surface which helps to identify it. * Q.J.G.S., Vol. xlii., p. 88. 222 OX THE GEOLOGY AND PETROGRAPHY OF P.ATIIURST, N.S.W., Olivine is of course no longer regarded an essential constituent of basalt, but it occurs in such remarkably tine crystals in these rocks that their presence distinguish it at once from all Aus- tralian basalts with which T am acquainted. By taking a micro- photograph and cutting out the portions representing the olivines, the percentage of olivine can be calculated. With the porphyritic crystals this is easily done, but in estimating the granular olivines of the base a large margin for error must be allowed. The applica- tion of this method is common with penologists, and was originally devised by Dr. Sorby.* I have cut several micro-photographs in this way with fairly even results for the average structure of the rock. Porphyritic olivine ... ... ... 13 percent. ,, augite ... ... 9 per cent. This comparatively large percentage of olivine would bring the rock under Rosenbusch's class of olivine-basalt.f Besides the large crystals of olivine there is the granular olivine which with augite and felspar form the base. Under a magnifying power of 100 diameters a micro-photograph can be got of this granular base, from which the parts representing olivine can be cut. My experiences gave me 23 to 29 as the per- centage of this mineral in the base. A glance at the micro-photographs appended will show the presence of porphyritic augites. But there is also a very large amount of augites in the micro-granular ground-mass. The quantity of augite is easily shown by treating the slice (after first getting a micro-photograph) with warm hydrochloric acid. After four hours' digestion, the magnetite, serpentinous matters and olivine dissolve, and the felspars and augite only remain ; olivine and magnetite being soluble in HC1., while the augite and plagioclase are scarcely affected. * J. J. H. Teall, " Penological Notes on some North of England Dykes." Q.J.G.S.,Vol. xl., p. 21G. t H. Rosenbusch, Micro-Physiographie der Massigen Gesteine, Zweite Auflage, p. 733. BY THE REV. J. MILNE CURRAN. 223 Another reaction that renders the olivine of the ground-mass distinct enough from the augite is effected by treating the slice with warm HCL, until on gently drying the olivines gelatinize slightly, when they can be stained by fuchsin. The olivines will then stand out in marked contrast to the augites. In many of the slides patches of an isotropic glass can easily be detected, particularly with the help of the quartz plate. The glass often seems of a light wine-red colour by transmitted light. I notice that prolonged treatment with acid has no appreciable effect on this substance. The glass is, therefore, not of a tachylytic nature, but more acid in character. From what has already been said it will be gathered that there are two generations of olivine, augite and felspars in tbe Bathurst basalts. This is quite in keeping with the observations that have been made on similar rocks in the Old World. In the peridotites it is common to find olivine in the ground-mass and the same mineral as porphyritic crystals. In many dolerites labradorite and augite form the principal ingredients of a ground-mass in which the same minerals occur porphyritically* I have met with no explanation altogether satisfactory of this common condition of igneous rocks. In the paper just referred to Dr. Bonney remarks that although an explanation of these anomalies does not seem hopeful, we may bear in mind that the temperature of consolida- tion for a mineral out of a magma is not necessarily identical with that of the isolated mineral, as one substance acts as a flux on another. As throwing some light upon this interesting question of the separation of minerals from a molten magma, the following extract from a paper by Professor Judd applies to our own rocks. " In some instances the mechanically injured condition of the crystals and other appearances strongly suggest their actual trans- port from below in the midst of the materials of the surrounding ground-mass. But in others the porphyritic crystals exhibit zoned structures and other characters not found, perhaps, in the deeper- * See Professor T. G. Bonney, Q.J.G.S., Vol. xn., p. 79. 15 224 ON THE GEOLOGY AND PETROGRAPHY OF BATHUKST, N.S.W., seated rocks of the class in the same area. May we not in these cases explain the phenomena in the way suggested by M. Michel- Levy by the consolidation having taken place at two different periods? It is not difficult to imagine conditions which would bring about such a result. If, for example, a mass of igneous materials were in a liquid state at a great depth from the surface, the conditions might be favourable to the separation of a felspar of a given composition from the magma. The continued abstrac- tion of certain elements from the base would alter the composition of the surrounding magma, and this would modify slightly the conditions causing the successively formed zones 'of the crystal to vary slightly in composition. But if a fissure were formed above such a molten mass, then the pressure upon it would be greatly and suddenly relieved, even though no actual movement occurred in the deeper-seated portion. Under the entirely new conditions thus originated, the magma surrounding the zoned crystals already formed might be induced to crystallise in a totally different manner, the order of the separation of the minerals and the forms and relations of their several crystals being determined by these new conditions." As some of the minerals in the basalt present features worth noticing, I may refer to the characters they present when seen under the microscope. Olivine. — The porphyritic crystals of olivine are so abundant that, with very few slides, sections may be found in various zones sufficient to study its leading optical properties. I have noticed sections close to basal planes, and sections approximately parallel to the macropinacoid, so as to show an interference figure in con- vergent polarized light. Sections roughly showing the form of an elongated hexagon are plentiful. The peculiar ground glass surfaces, due to its high refractive index, are very pronounced. In fairly thin slices the mineral shows a very faint yellow-brown colour. But the most remarkable feature in the olivine is the fact that it is the first mineral in the rock to fall a victim to alteration. Every large crystal shows serpentinous lines of BY THE REV. J. MILNE CURRAN. 22o decomposition. I have not met with an instance where the alteration is complete. The green serpentinous matter follows the cracks and cleavage lines and gradually eats its way across the intervening spaces. The micro-photographs on PL xiv. figs. 2 and 4 show this change clearly enough. The edges of the olivines are sharply defined and show little or no signs of corrosion. The form of the crystals does not seem affected in any way by the surrounding minerals, so that, to use a term of Rosenbusch's, they are for the most part idiomorphic. Inclusions of magnetite are common, as well as patches of a semi- devitrified glassy base. It is more than probable that some of the large olivines were formed at a depth and floated up before the pecond generation of olivines consolidated. On PI. xiv. fig. 1 will be noticed a crystal of olivine that was broken along a central line ; one half is seen in the micro-photograph, and the other half is found on another part of the slide. Augite. — The augite in the Bathurst basalt is not penetrated by the felspars, so as to give rise to an ophitic structure. But the consolidation of the augites must have been subsequent to that of the felspars. The augite is sometimes to be seen partly moulded around the ends of the laths of plagioclase. An example is shown on PL xiv. fig. 5. Here a large zoned augite is seen partially penetrated by a felspar as if the latter was forcibly carried against the augite when the pyroxene was still in a plastic condition. On slide 41 an augite will be found with well defined edges. It shows a figure in convergent polarized light. Faint traces of cleavage lines seemingly parallel to the prism can be detected, so that it is evidently a basal section. The same slide shows some good examples of zoned and twinned augites. On slide 46 a fine example can be found of a porphyritic augite sliced in the clinopinacoidal plane. The crystal is partially penetrated by a felspar, and with inclined Nicols shows the well known hour-glass structure often noticed in augites. Felspar. — Mr. A. W. Howitt made some measurements of the felspars in this basalt, and noted that, as all the obscuration angles 226 ON THE GEOLOGY AND PETROGRAPHY OF BATHURST, N.S.W., measure 20° in the zone OP coPgo, the felspars were not more basic than andesine. For the present it will be sufficient to describe the felspar, whether andesine or labradorite, as plagio- clase. Twin crystals are very common in every slice. Sometimes broad cruciform twins are seen, one good example of which may be noted on slide 41. Magnetite. — T have never isolated the black crystalline bodies which I have provisionally named magnetite. On being analysed they may prove to be ilmenite or titaniferous magnetite. By drawing a magnet through detrital matter, near the basalt, large quantities of a magnetic iron can be collected. This gives a strong reaction for titanium. I have not been able to decide whether this may not be derived from the adjoining granite. The magnetite in the basalt I take to be a primary constituent. It is invariably sound and undecomposed. It can be noticed enclosed in clear augites and olivines. I have noticed secondary magnetite in other basalts, but in that case the olivine and some of the augite had disappeared, and the iron of the ferro-magnesian minerals was represented by the magnetite. The augites in our rock are beautifully clear, and no olivines are wholly decomposed. I have selected three slices as fairly representing the microscopic character of the whole basalt. I will describe their general structure. 1. (Slide 45). The micro-porphyritic structure of this slide is just visible to the unaided eye. Under the microscope large olivine crystals are seen, set in a paste or granular base of magne- tite, augite and felspar microlites. The olivine crystals are beauti- fully clear, magnetite and blebs of glass being the only inclusions. The olivines are better preserved than it most slices, showing very little signs of serpentinization. The streaming of the felspars is very characteristic. One large olivine has evidently moved when the paste was partially set, as it is seen to have pushed on either side a collection of felspars. Besides the lath-shaped felspars, broad rectangular plagioclases of another species probably are represented. The magnetite crystals seem disposed to gather around the edges of the augites and olivines. BY THE REV. J. MILNE CURRAN. 227 2. (Slide 48). Large twins of augite can be detected without the use of the microscope, their yellowish-brown colour contrasting with the other almost colourless minerals of the slice. Under the microscope the greater number of the lath-shaped felspars show incomplete terminations. A few small olivines are seen altered completely to a light green serpentine. Many other patches of a like green secondary product, that show no definite boundaries, originated in the same way. All the magnetite seems a primary constituent. A few large augites show lines of uncertain inclusions just inside their boundaries and parallel to the outer edges of the crystal. With inclined Nicols, faint traces of zones can be detected. There is very little glassy matter. 3. (Slide 9). Under the microscope, shows the general structure of the Bathurst basalt. Porphyritic crystals of augite, olivine and plagioclase, set in a much finer ground mass of the same minerals, with cubes of magnetite abundantly developed. The felspars flow round the augites, but are not seen to penetrate them, so there is no arrangement approaching to the ophitic structure. Patches of a light red isotropic body are seen set in the dark hemi-crystalline base. It is probably glass. The large compound augite has some inclusions of the same material. The augite contains well marked cubes of magnetite as inclusions. The olivines are seen cracked in directions evidently independent of the cleavage lines. They are also somewhat corroded along their outer edges. The microscopic structure of the basalt is so uniform along its length in the field that the above descriptions may be taken as fairly typical of the whole. Chemical composition of the Basalt. Specific gravity at 18'5° C 2-63-2-75 Silica , 44-67 Alumina 21*38 Ferric oxide 2-82 Ferrous ditto 5-99 Lime (Ca 0) 10-24 228 ON THE GEOLOGY AND PETROGRAPHY OF BATHURST, N.S.W., Magnesia (Mg 0) 9-58 Potash (K3 0) 1-03 Soda (Na2 0) 270 Phosphoric anhydride -22 Sulphuric ditto trace Titanic acid trace Moisture -79 99-42 For this analysis I am indebted to Mr. J. Mingaye, F.C.S., Analyst to the Department of Mines. The chemical composition shows a basic rock quite in keeping with its microscopical characters. To facilitate the future study of the rocks of Bathurst, I now append a few remarks to point out the means of seeing the various features of interest in connection with the district. The passage from a granitic to a slate country, and the characters that accom- pany the change, can be observed in a morning's drive. By taking the Peel Road, via Kelso, tertiary drifts are seen on the right from Kelso to the trigonometrical station, at the first turn to the right. Granite country continues until the descent is begun to the valley of the Winburndale Creek. In this creek, and in a small tributary already referred to, contact rocks can be noted. When the village of Peel is reached the student finds himself in the midst of slate country. Take the road that leads back to Bathurst, via Duramana. Some worked out alluvial deposits can be examined on the creek. With a local guide then follow the road to Rankin's Bridge, via Kelly's farm and Duramana. About Kelly's farm hornfels rocks, semi-granites, and the weathering of granitic boulders can be studied. Getting on to the main road to Rankin's Bridge we are again in granite country ; outcrops of the rock are plentiful near the bridge. From the road near Seage's farms good views can be had of the sheets of the basalt away to the south, forming the Bald Hills at one extremity and Mount Pleasant at the other. BY THE REV. J. MILNE CURRAN. 229 On reaching Peel another route could have been taken. Beyond the village a road leads away to the right through Silurian slate country. This'road joins the Bathurst Limekilns read, which latter can be followed home. At the bridge crossing the Win- burndale, good casts of Brachiopods — Spirifer and Rhynchonella — can be found in the water-worn pebbles of the creek. These have been washed down from the Devonian sandstones that are exten- sively developed up the valley. A very good idea of the slate and schist country about Cow Flat can be gained by driving south through Perth, and following the Rockley Road to the top of the first range. Here contorted slate, clay slate and crystalline limestone crop out. A road through Cow Flat to George's Plains railway station leads away to the right. Along this latter road splendid examples of meta- morphosed rocks, slate country and quartz reefs can be seen. Basalt is best seen by ascending the Bald Hills at Perth, and then following a track that leads along the hill tops to Bathurst, via the basalt quarries and Poor Man's Hollow. A separate trip should be taken to study the drifts and basalt on the hill over Evans' Plains, and the same rocks at Mount Pleasant. The localities of the contact rocks have been already referred to in sufficient detail. x. Economic Geology. Gold. — There is little prospect of finding payable gold in quantity immediately round Bathurst. It is not probable that it has been derived from the granite. We therefore fall back on the only alternative that it has been drifted from a distance. And the nearest auriferous country whence it could have been derived is too far away to leave any hope of heavy deposits. Granite. — For building purposes the granite will hardly ever become a marketable commodity. Even at a depth the felspars are kaolinized and the whole rock suffers from incipient decom- position. True it will take a polish, but I have had an opportunity recently of examining a polished slab of Bathurst granite that had been exposed to the weather for eleven years. Already the laminae 230 ON THE GEOLOGY AND PETROGRAPHY OF BATHURST, N.S.W., of biotite were fraying out, and the large hornblendes were honey- combed and had quite lost every trace of polish. Disintegrated granite is used extensively about Bathurst for walks and gardens in the same way as gravel is used in other countries. Basalt. — The basalt is used extensively for road making, for which it is admirably suited. It is fortunate that there is so large a reserve of this useful rock in the vicinity of the town. It is sometimes used for building purposes. The basalt can be easily dressed with a hammer into rectangular blocks, and buildings in which it is used must be of an enduring nature. Its very dark colour is its only fault. It is as durable as any building stone need be. Some that has been in use for fifteen years shows no trace of weathering, being so dense and compact that not even a lichen had taken hold on its surface. Kaolin. — The deposits of kaolin have been frequently tested and condemned, chiefly on account of a rather high percentage of iron that they contain. When good fire-clay and kaolins are so easily procurable in the colony, it is hardly likely that the Bathurst article will prove of economic value. Copper. — The lodes of copper about Cow Flat were at one time extensively worked. Many who are familiar with the under- ground workings are of opinion that they will yet prove a source of wealth. The whole country about Cow Flat is highly favourable for mineral deposits. A belt of highly mineralized country runs from here along the granite boundaries. Large deposits of pyrites occur in highly metamorphosed slates. Very little has been done to test their value. To the north of Bathurst the country about Pe^l seems favour- able for auriferous reefs. Odd samples of copper-stained rocks are occasionally found in the metamorphic rocks round Duramina. These point to the occurrence of copper lodes not yet discovered. Clays. — Excellent clays for brick-making are found all along the alluvial flats. Where the alluvial material mingles with the decomposed basalts the bricks improve both in quality and colour. BY THE REV. J. MILNE CURRAN. 231 xi. Other Points of Interest. About eighteen miles to the north of Bathurst some very interesting geological country is easily accessible, particularly about the Limekilns and the Ben Glen caves, where good collec- tions of Silurian fossils can be made. At Blayney a finely typical example of the interesting rock diabase occurs. It will be found in a small quarry near the R.C. Church. To the naked eye it might pass for a diorite, but on slicing the rock it is seen to consist entirely of felspar, magnetite, and a monoclinic pyroxene, augite. The augites are porphyritic, and many of them beautifully zoned. At King's Plains, near B^ney, rich and extensive patches of gold bearing drift are known to occur, which have not been worked chiefly on account of the great body of water that has to be con- tended with. Gold also occurs here in a steatitic slate, which once contained large quantities of pyrites. The pv rites has altogether disappeared, but the rock is full of cubical cavities pointing to its former existence. I have in my own collection a monster twin pseudomorph of pyrites found here, in which the faces of the cube measure two and a half inches. About Carcoar some highly interesting gabbros are extensively developed. These are holo-crystalline rocks of coarse texture, consisting of pyroxene and felspar. In calling these rocks gabbro I follow Professor Jucld's classification in his paper on the gabbros of Scotland and Ireland.* At the Three Brothers Hills, between Bathurst and Blayney, an interesting basalt is found with a flaggy structure. I have not examined the locality, but I have seen slabs of basalt brought in from there varying in thickness from two inches to four. Steatite is found in a slaty condition about Rockley and Locksley. * Q.J.G.S., Vol. xlii., p. 61. 232 ON THE GEOLOGY AND PETROGRAPHY OF BATHURST, N.S.W., Wood opal, that polishes well, can be collected in some paddocks between the cemetery and Mount Pleasant. Good fire opals are known from Rocky Bridge Creek, where they occur in a decom- posed trachytic lava flow. Good coloured amethysts and rose quartz are frequently brought in from the country between O'Connell and Oberon. xn. Conclusion. 1. Getting results together we find that about Bathurst granitic rocks are extensively represented. 2. This granite area is surrounded by an aureole of metamorphic rocks. 3. There is no insensible gradation from a clastic to a holo- crystalline rock, from a sedimentary rock to a granite. 4. The granite is intrusive as regards the surrounding slate rocks. 5. Tins is not necessarily opposed to the view that part of the granite may have been formed by a whole or partial fusion of pre-existing sediments. Like the granites of Vancouver, the Bathurst granite is probably at once intrusive and, in a sense, metamorphic. 6. The silurian slates are the oldest rocks now represented in the district — older than the underlying granites. 7. The granite comes next in order of time. 8. The granite rocks underlying the slates are not the floor on which the slate rocks were originally laid down. 9. This floor has entirely disappeared through sinking within a zone of fusion, or through being absorbed by an ascending molten magma. 10. Under the microscope the granite is a hornblende-biotite- granifce with a triclinic felspar. B\ in i: REV. J. mil Nic OURBAV, 2'.V.\ II. On a microscopic exaDiination the "blue metal" if found to be •« true olivine bftialtftnd an "!(l lava How that filled up an ancient river bed. 'I'll" point of eruption wan near Bwatohfield No dot i Id, pagee ••'•ii*l chapters of the geological record are mi but the foregoing is my reading of the bUtory of Batbur I m w lit i <•!! iii her rocke. EXPLANATION OP PLATES, Plate kiv. Reproduced frommiorophotographsol thin slices oi Bathurst baialti. Fig. I, xfiO, hIiowh the general structure of the basalt at Pinnae Ic Hill. To thr right two olivines are seen, traversed by lerpentinoui Lines of decomposition The lower olivine represent! one ball of a crystal, tin: other ball <>f erhiob floated away to a considerable distance. The lath shaped felspars show a tendency to stream round the larg< crystals. Pig 2 is a basalt from Mt. Pleasant, enlarged 60 diameters. A \n-.\y eharactei istio olivine occupies the right of the figure. The dark lines following the cracks are bright green decomposition products. Ontheothei sni<; oi the figure there is a large plagioclaie, containing some inclusions of the base. i [g :; Iiowh a thin slice of basalt iiotn tin- quarries at Bald Kills, enlarged 00 diameters. At tin: top oi this figure there is a portion ot s micro porphyritic olivine, and Home distance below a basal section <>f augifr 'JIm:m<: and other large crystals are set in a micro-crystalline ground mass The lath shaped felspars .show a decided flow. The magnetite is very abundant as block grains. Pig. 4, x 90 diameters Under this magnifying power magnetite shows clearly. The large olivine in the tipper portion of tin: figure shows inclusions of this mineral, "in: being a perfect cube. The other large crystal is an Idiomorpbic augite. Between these two i a streaming of the felspars is very noticeable It will be remarked that the felspai have Incomplete terminations ami sometimes bifurcate at either extremity. Pig. 5. In the lower left band portion of this figure a large augite is seen partially penetrated by two plagioi la ■>■ prisms. The smaller lath-shaped felspars flow round the augite in an Interesting manner. Magnetite is scattered through the slide. The two clear ipaoes at the top are olivines. The thin slices in Figs i ami 0 were ':nt, from basalt used for kerb-stones in Bathurst, and quarried on tin. Bald Hills a few miles south of the city. Plat* xv. Pig, I shows ;j, vein oi granite Intruding a much altered sedimentary rock. Between Brewongleand Locksleythi po ed 234 ON THE GEOLOGY AND PETROGRAPHY OF BATHURST, N.S.W. in a railway cutting. Fig. 2 shows an intrusive vein in Silurian slates, on the outer boundary of the granite, near Newbridge. Fig. 3 is a sketch of forking veins of binary granite, near Newbridge. Fig. 4 shows a younger and lighter- coloured granite penetrating a dark coloured rock of the same character. Figs. 5 and 6 show veins of granite cutting through altered sedimentary rocks. These were sketched in the Winburudale Creek, above the bridge on the Bathurst-Peel Road. Fig. 7 represents junctions between slates and granite. The line of junction is very sharp and well defined, and is exposed in a railway cutting on the Bathurst side of Newbridge railway station. Plate xvi. — The highest point of the basalt is about 600 feet above the river. The drift which is shown under the basalt was pierced by a tunnel. The relations of the rocks to the sections are drawn from notes made during the progress of the tunnelling works. Fig. 2 gives the relative positions of all the basalt around Bathurst. Some four miles of the ridges do not show in the sketch, as at the left of the section the chain of hills bends away south at right angles and so is hidden from view. The view is from the north. Plate xvii. — Prismatic basalt, Bald Hills. This quarry is very nearly on the line of section marked A B on the map. The weathering of the rock is shown. Large flakes of decomposed matter peel off the sides of the prisms. These flakes are from half an inch to one and a half inches in thickness, and often contain a core of undecomposed basalt. As work goes on it is probable that better columns will be exposed. Plate xviii. — Sketch map representing the boundaries of the basalt as accurately as is possible on this scale. It is easy to join the isolated patches and thus trace the former course of the river. 235 REMARKS ON POST-TERTIARY PHASCOLOMYIDM By C. W. De Vis, M.A., Cork. Mem. In furtherance of some future catalogue of the post-tertiary fossils of Queensland locally preserved, the wombat contents of the collection have in their turn undergone examination. From that scrutiny one rises with the impression that our recorded knowledge of the family is not in every respect as certain or, on the whole, quite as complete as it might be, and there ensues a desire to ask that one judgment delivered respecting them may be reconsidered, and one species added to their number. But before all things it is obli- gatory to declare that the task of determining the extinct species of Phascolomys could not have been undertaken at the antipodes prior to the publication of Mr. Lyddeker's Catalogue of Fossil Marsupials, followed by the Catalogue of Recent Marsupials placed in our hands by Mr. Thomas. To the labours of both these writers we in Australia are deeply indebted. But we may presume that neither of the authors would insist upon his determinations being- considered as in all cases final, for it must be that conclusions based on a comparatively small number of specimens, or upon descriptions alone, will undergo some modification. More especially is this to be expected in cases of opinion founded on a few cranial remains of the wombats that were. Naturalists will agree that if we neglect the " personal equation," observation may generally be taken to vary in value as the material observed varies in quantity, and on this account they will not mistake for an idle vaunt the statement that the collection of wombat fossils examined contains over two hundred specimens, exclusive of vertebra?, and so forms, it is believed, by far the largest series as yet gathered from that prolific field, the valley of the Condamine. 236 REMARKS ON POST-TERTIARY PHASCOLOMYID.E, To begin with a general conclusion, the opinion which I have previously ventured to express, namely, that the ossiferous deposits of the Darling Downs and those of the Wellington Caves are not upon the same palseontological horizon, receives support from the phascolomine peculiarities of their respective contents. So far as can be learned from the British and Queensland collections, the cave wombats, P. latifrons, krefftii, and curvirostris, were not in existence when the Queensland breccias and turbaries were laid down ; and, on the other hand, P. parvus and the species to be described in the sequel had disappeared before the Wellington caves received their contents. It would not be reasonable to accept in explanation of the apparent facts the supposition that they inhered in contemporaneous but diversely conditioned faunas. The habitats were too near to each other and persisted under geographical conditions too similar in kind, and on the whole too continuous one with another to leave any plausibility in the suggestion. But if the faunas were successive, as the alternative supposition must affirm, they denote the limits of a great interval of time, of a space sufficient to effect in this particular instance the extinction of two and the development of three species. The lapse of some considerable part of this interval has probably been notified to us by certain fossils which show that one of the associations characteristic of the Nototherian age, Ceratodus with a fresh water saurian, was still permanent in Southern Queensland when the denudation of the basalt had so far progressed as to cause the formation, in suitable positions, of deep beds of " black soil." Teeth of the fish and alligator with other vertebrate remains, (includinga piece of a chelonian carapace of great thickness identical with fragments from the Downs), all evidencing a first burial in situ, have been met with near Brisbane at a depth of 80 feet in a dark basaltic loam with celestine and other derivative minerals. These interesting fossils are deposited in the Queensland Museum. A second conclusion is that that no living species of wombat has come down to us from the age of the Condamine beds. This is an assertion which contradicts accepted evidence, and will, therefore, BY C. W. DE VIS. 237 have to be substantiated by further and, as it appears to me, more conclusive evidence. Assuming its truth for the moment we must accept the consequence, that the cave fauna, in which we are told there appears an existing species (P. latifrons), is partially of later origin. Phascolonus, Owen, is demonstrably a good genus, but the ground on which it has been separated, namely, by identification with Sceparnodon, a determination so improbable in itself that nothing short of direct proof should suffice to give it currency, appears to me quite inadequate, to say the least. Owen's suspicion that this great wombat in skull and teeth might one day show itself to be generically distinct from Phascolomys was a happy conception, but it is not by means of the teeth and skull exclu- sively that its differentiation may be proved. In each of the other known parts of its skeleton there are departures from normal phascolomine characters amply sufficient to determine the judgment in favour of its separation from Phascolomys. It is unnecessary to go into details to settle an undisputed question, but to anticipate an objection which might be taken to proofs derived from isolated bones in this and other cases on account of the uncertainty attaching to their determination, it may be permissible to state the process by which the identification of PhasColonus bones was , ascertained. While taking measurements of the bones of a Phascolomys platyrhinus for comparative purposes, it was observed that the width of the distal end of the humerus corresponded very closely with the length of the upper molar series, the millimetres being 5 4 '5 and 53*5 respectively. Naturally it seemed not impossible that a similar equation might obtain in an extinct species. To put the notion to the test search was made for a phascolomine humerus which should be in width about equal to the length of the series of upper cheek teeth in a P. gigas, namely, 105 mm. The bone was fortunately discovered and found to measure 104 mm. It was then assumed with some degree of confidence that twice the linear dimensions of P. platyrhinus might be 238 REMARKS ON POST -TERTIARY PHASCOLOMYID^E, adopted as a metrical guide to the recognition of any other Phascolonus bones in the collection, or conversely that any phascolomine bones found to yield the required measurement in two dimensions might, with the consent of other characters, be taken as belonging to the same animal as the skull ; and on this basis the identifications of the proximal end of a second humerus, two femurs, three tibias, a fibula, two scapulas, two ulnas, a radius, ischium, trapezium, trapezoides, astragalus, naviculare, calcaneum and cuboid, or characteristic parts of them, were successively established. It may be well to state distinctly that while these bones are unmistakably phascolomine they almost invariably present conspicuous marks of differentiation from Phascolomys— for examples, the bridge across the entepicondylar canal of the humerus does not subside at once into the shaft as in the pure wombats, recent and extinct, but is continued upwards as an elevated ridge, merging into the deltoid ridge above, and the astragalus has its rotular groove deeply sunken and all its ridges elevated, whereby it is easily discriminated from the smooth-surfaced bone of P. medins and its dwarfed copy in the recent P. platyrhinus. At the same time it must be observed that the extent of differentiation shown by these bones is by no means so great as that which we shall probably find to be correlated with the non-phascolomine incisors of Scepamodon. In addition to the above-named bones of the tarsus, there are in the collection several which show that although the animal was as a rule about twice the length of P. platyrhinus, it not unfre- quently exceeded that length by more than one-third. The astragalus referred to is 44 mm. in breadth, against 22 mm. in the living P. platyrhinus, but by its side is a second measuring 51*5, another 55*5, and still another 60 mm., yet no one of these can be specifically distinguished from the rest. The naviculare again is accompanied by two others, the respective lengths of the three being 41*5, 54, and 56. With the largest astragalus are associated its naviculare, calcaneum, and cuboid, and arranged with them are the four metatarsals, but these have been contributed by other feet. Of foot bones of this larger size there are in all sixteen BY C. W. DE VIS. 239 examples, or nearly a third of the whole number of cranial and appendicular bones of Phascolonus in the collection. Adverting to the smaller species — on the assumption that the liviug P. platyrhinus is identical with the fossil P. mitchelli, as it is said to be, the latter is the only recognizable species of its size as yet recorded from the Darling Downs. P. thomsoni, Ow., is an extremely doubtful species, uniquely represented, and dependent for its validity upon a single character, the backward extension of the symphysis, a character which varies with age and, in mandibles of P. mitchelli, shows its inconstancy thus : — in one example it extends to the fore lobe of m3, in four to the interval between m3 and m2, in five to the hind lobe of m2, and in four to the interval between m2 and m1. P. thomsoni should, therefore, be expunged from our lists. But whether it be so or not is of slight moment in a question of appeal to bones other than those of the head. A species which has left us but a single fragment of its jaw is not likely to have handed down other parts of its skeleton ; at any rate it is not entitled to priority of consideration over those whose cranial remains are numerous. We may, then, for the present proceed on the assumption aforesaid, namely, that there was but one wombat of the size of P. platyrhinus to remit its limb bones for study ; then as bones of a wombat of that size, showing the like dimensional correspondence with the teeth of P. mitchelli as that observed in the case of P. gigas, are extant, the question simply is, are they, as the identification requires, fossilised bones of P. platyrhinus. One answer alone is possible, they are not. If not, then either the numerous cranial and mandibular remains of platyrhine wombats referred to P. mitchelli in the Queensland Museum, and there constituting it the commonest species, belong to some undescribed species unknown in the British Museum, and not to the species also most numerously represented by such remains in the British Museum, or the identification is at fault. It is now incumbent upon me to show that these bones, which under the circumstances must necessarily be ascribed to mitchelli, are not bones of platyrhinus. They comprise two humeri, three femurs, a tibia, and two ulnas. 16 240 REMARKS ON POST-TERTIARY PHASCOLOMYIDiE, The humerus is seen at a glance to be much stouter, but as the condylar region of the more perfect specimen is wanting its rela- tive proportions cannot be ascertained with precision. With an approximate length of 124 mm., against 122 in platyrhinus, the width of the shaft at its proximal third is 3 mm., its antero- posterior thickness 2*5 mm. greater ; it is, therefore, 2*5 mm wider than in a recent bone of the same length ; at the proximal end the long diameter of the head and greater tuberosity is 2*5 mm., the short diameter across the head only 0*8 mm. greater ; in this region it is, therefore, relatively longer and of a different form. Although the head is but little larger antero-posteriorly, it is produced downwards upon the hinder surface of the shaft much more than in platyrhinus, more even than in lati/rons, and with a still more angular margin than in the latter species. The importance of this exaggeration of one of the features peculiar to lati/rons should be duly appreciated. The ectotuberosity, as to size, is in about the same proportion to that of the head as in platyrhinus, but it is smoother, more symmetrical in form, wants the triangular facet, and descends lower on the shaft ; the extent of its base on the thenal side is platyrhine rather than latifront. In the extension of the transverse diameter of the proximal end of the shaft we see, on the other hand, a second latifront character in excess. The lesser tuberosity resembles that of platyrhinus but is not so distinctly grooved off from the head, nor does it descend in a pointed form on the entothenal edge. The teretotriceps ridge is extremely short and in shape oval, very different both in form and extent to that of either of the living species ; midway between it and the head is a tuberiform ridglet, perhaps an outlier of the other. The pectoral ridge is an elevated line descending con- tinuously from the greater tuberosity, in other structural respects most nearly resembling that of platyrhinus, but differing in position as it marks off the inner third instead of the inner half of the shaft. The prominence and retroflexion of the angle of the deltoid ridge are intermediate in degree between those exhibited by platyrhinus and lati/rons. The deltoid and pectoral ridges do not converge distad, the surface between them is comparatively flat, and the BY C. W. DE VIS. 241 only representative of a predeltoid ridge is a low prominence just proximad of the middle of the long oblique margin joining the ends of the two ridges. The breadth of the delto-pectoral surface is 15 mm. against 12*5 in platyrhinus, wherein again we recognise an intermediate character. The triceps ridge on the anconal aspect of the shaft is still less developed than in platyrhinus. The absence of the supinator ridge and of the condyles precludes further comparison, but perhaps enough has been said to render it unnecessary. It may already appear that the bone, so far from representing P. platyrhinus, has several characters which suggest that, on the whole, P. mitchelli was less specialised than are the living species of which it was probably the common source. Of the femur the length and the least transverse diameter are respectively 168 and 17*5 mm., in P. platyrhinus they are 163 and 14-5, in P. latifrons 141 and 17 ; platyrhinus it would seem has retained length and lost thickness, latifrons has lost length and retained thickness. The breadth of the distal end (39 mm.), the transverse diameter of the head (36*5), and its antero-posterior diameter (26) are all greater than in either of the continental species living. As in the humerus, so in the femur, the head descends considerably lower and overhangs the shaft to a greater extent than in existing forms. The lesser trochanter is relatively larger in all its dimensions ; the rough-surfaced excavation in front of its distal extension is much broader and deeper but has no sunken pit at its proximal end ; the subtrochanterian ridge is more exactly reproduced in platyrhinus than in latifrons. Between the summits of the two trochanters the distance is 47-5 mm. against 44 in living species, consequently the neck is proportionately broader. The inner condyle is 36 mm. in its antero-posterior dimension, that of platyrhinus being ljut 31, and its superiority in height over the outer condyle is, therefore, more conspicuous ; the outer condyle is more distinctly grooved off from a rather broader ectepicondyle ; the intercondylar notch is wider, the anterior limit of its surface better defined, its whole surface comparatively smooth ; a convexity of the surface near its posterior end forms a low transverse bar between the condyles. Of the deep pit seen in 242 REMARKS ON POST-TERTIARY PHASCOLOMYID.E, the shaft at the base of the outer condyle of platijrhinus there is no trace in the fossil. Two forms of tibia present themselves, one (with three examples) much less unlike that of P. platyrhinus than the other, but, never- theless, to be preferred for reference to P. mitchelli, for though unexpectedly thin and angular it is much less so than its companion. With extremities no greater in size, the fossil of this form is in its total length distinctly (one-twelfth) greater than in recent bones. Compared with the humerus it must, therefore, be considered slender. In general shape it is like that of platyrldnus, but its shaft has a little stronger curve and a rather greater dilatation of its edge at the junction of the proximal and middle third of its length. The posterior surface of the shaft is broader and flatter and its edges, but especially the distal half of the inner edge, are sharply angular. The cavity for the outer condyle of the femur is, unlike that of platyrhinus, circular; the space between it and the procnemial tuberosity much more elevated, causing the articu- lating part of the head, when viewed laterally, to appear much longer ; the tuberosity is shorter, the inner edge of the entocondylar surface is not produced into a point adjacent to the facet for the head of the fibula, and the spine is both higher and sharper. At the distal end the anterior edge of the shaft is more compressed, the scaphoid moiety of the inner malleolus is narrower and more sharply grooved off from the rest of the malleolus. Perhaps no one of the several differences which have been noticed would be sufficient of itself to distinguish this tibia from others, but, taken together, the discrepancies between it and that of •platyrhinus are altogether prohibitory of specific identity between the two. Of this bone the collection contains one nearly perfect from the right side and two opposite halves from the left side. Until it can be shown that the fossils which have been brought forward are not really bones of P. mitchelli, that is until genuine bones of P. platyrhinus are found fossil on the Con dam in e, or until another species of extinct wombat to which they can more probably be referred becomes known, it may, I think, be accepted BY C. W. DE VIS. 243 as a proved fact that P. mitchelli is not synonymous with P. platyrhinus. Against this it will be urged that naturalists of approved sagacity and wide experience have seen reason to come to the opposite conclusion. That they have done so is not at all surprising. There is no difficulty in believing that there is, on the whole, sufficient resemblance in cranial and dental characters to lead observers who were compelled to trust to those characters alone to the decision they have announced. But it is questionable whether we ought to trust to them alone so implicitly as to pro- nounce an unreserved opinion in cases where material is scanty, specialization feeble and apt to be obscured by the accidents of burial, and where the question is between a living animal and a companion of extinct species. The present is not the first experience which has convinced me that such a course may lead to error. P. mitchelli is, however, not the only wombat of its size which found burial in the Darling Downs deposits, though the only one to which the bones already noticed could have belonged. There was a species distinguishable almost at a glance by the narrowness of its teeth, which are intermediate in breadth between those of P. parvus and P. mitchelli, though serially as long as or longer than in the latter species. As a marked reduction in the width of the teeth has not been noted in the descriptions of known species, and as the teeth in all the mandibles of P. mitchelli are appreciably the same in width, I must perforce regard this narrow-toothed wombat as a new species, for which the name angustidens may be appropriate. Mandibular characters : — Teeth narrow, in a relatively long series ; posterior molars oblique ; premolar large, subrectangular, with its long axis in the axis of the jaw ; symphysis rather short. The species is founded on four mandibular specimens, two of them from the same mandible. The more perfect of the latter shows the whole of the dentary limb from the incisor outlet to the base of the coronoid process with all the teeth except the incisor in place. The length of the molar series is 52-5 mm., in an 244 REMARKS ON POST-TERTIARY PHASCOLOMYID^E, average jaw of mitchelli it is 51 ; the width of m3 is 6*8 mm., against 7*8 in mitchelli, the difference of a millimetre throughout the series asserting itself plainly to the eye. The premolar is unusually large and unusually rectilinear in form ; the midline of its flat inner side is sharply impressed with a vertical groove, and its longitudinal axis is all but coincident with the longitudinal axis of the alveolar series. The lobes of m1 are as usual nearly at right angles to the line of teeth, those of m2 are distinctly oblique, of m3 more so, and of m4 still more so. The lower contour of the jaw is flatly arched, being rather the deepest in the middle and not less deep beneath p4 than under m4 — it approaches that of platyrhimis and differs much from that of mitchelli. The coronoid process is, at its base, more than usually exserted from the side of the jaw, is thick and massive, and has on its anterior edge a peculiar character, a series of short, strong, oblique ridges. The symphysis in this mandible extends only to the middle of m l , but its condition shows that anchylosis with its fellow had hardly begun, and that, consequently, its shortness is attributable to its youth, notwithstanding that m4 is worn down to smooth surfaces. The depth of the jaw opposite m1 is 38, that of P. platyrhinus being 32-5. The associated limb is but a fragment with the four true molars in place and affords no further information. The third example is a right dentary limb, containing m1, m2, m3, and half of m4, the teeth being equally narrow and oblique posteriorly. The symphysis in this example extends to the hinder lobe of m2. The fourth subject is similar to the last, but contains only m1, m2, and m3. The symphysis is indistinct, but appears to have extended to the fore lobe of m1. The teeth are similar in width and obliquity. Fortunately the existence of this species is affirmed by other than mandibular testimony. Inferring from the narrowness of its teeth that angustidens, though equal in size to mitchelli, was more delicate in structure, I refer to it a nearly perfect humerus and a tibia which convey the same impression. The humerus differs generally from that of mitchelli in its comparative slenderness, and, BY C. W. DE VIS. 245 indeed, exceeds in this respect that of platyrhinus ; it is 124*5 mm. long, and would be of exactly the same length as in platyrhinus but for an elongation of the ectotuberosity ; both the breadth of the proximal end and the length of the condyles are as they are in the living species, the teretotriceps ridge is of the same extent and form. The head is a little and the great tuberosity much narrower, the latter is altogether different in shape from that of mitchelli and platyrhinus both, it rises high above the level of the head as an obtusely pointed backwardly inclined peak separated from the neck by a low transverse ridge. The facet on its posterior aspect is larger than in platyrhinus but less defined, and in the middle of its length it is more deeply impressed. The lesser tuberosity is, on the other hand, much less elevated, and is more distinctly connected with the greater by the tumid edge of the anterior surface of the shaft. On this aspect the greater tuberosity is much less convex than in other species. The pectoral ridge is not quite so distinctly continuous with the greater tuberosity as in P. mitchelli, but it is higher and at its distal end forms a larger and better denned tubercle. As in P. mitchelli the deltoid ridge terminates in a retroflected angle, but one of greater expansion. The prominence on the long oblique edge joining the ends of the two ridges is much larger and sharper, and from it a thread-like ridge, a rudimentary predeltoid, runs proximad for a few millimetres. The breadth of the shaft at its proximal third is 22J mm. ; at this point it is but 12*8 in antero-posterior thickness against 14*5 in platyrhinus and 17*5 in mitchelli. The length of the shaft from the convex edge between the tuberosities to the end of the pectoral ridge is 61*5 mm., in platyrhinus it is 59, and in mitchelli 55. As in mitchelli, the posterior limit of the head descends low and angularly upon the shaft, overhanging it more than in the stouter bone. The ridge for the humeral head of the triceps is wanting, or it may be represented by a very small prominence near the edge of the shaft. The anconal and coronal pits of the distal end have a large foramen in common. The condyles are narrow antero-posteriorly, the intercondylar rotular surface remarkably so. The outer condyle is almost perfectly globose. 246 REMARKS ON POST-TERTIARY PHASCOLOMYID.E. The tibia, like the humerus, is unusually thin and angular. It its within two millimetres of the same length as that of platyrhinus^ but in general form it most resembles that of latifrons, the curve of the shaft and more especially the dilatation of its anterior edge between the proximal and middle thirds being rather pronounced. The concave area beneath the popliteal notch is deeply excavated. The proximal end of the hinder side of the shaft is broader, the distal end of this surface narrower than in platyrhinus and its edges are sharper, as, indeed, are most of the edges of the bone. The distal articulation is reniform in shape, not, as usual, rhom- boid ; the articulating surface for the astragalus is elongated posteriorly, and is more distinct from the shaft than in platy- rhinus ; the inner malleolus is longer, and its scaphoid facet com- paratively small. In short, a wombat tibia could hardly present more specific differences from the tibias of mitchelli and platy- rhinus than does this bone. We have thus two species of PJiascolomys of co-equal size repre- sented by limb bones as well as dental remains from the Darling Downs. Not one of these bones can, without violence to common sense, be identified with bones of platyrhinus. It would be absurd to deny that any of them belong to the common species of the period, P. mitchelli. The inference is irresistible that P. mitchelli and P. platyrhinus are distinct species. It is a conclusion which is supported by a fine series of mandibles of P. mitchelli in the Queensland collection. 247 DESCRIPTION OF A NEW MARINE SHELL. By C. Hedley and C. T. Musson. (Plate xix., figs. 1-3.) EULIMELLA MONILIFORME, n.Sp. Shell minute, thin, transparent, acicular, conical, with a small half turned over discoidal sinistral tip, whorls rounded, suture margined, deeply impressed ; sculpture fine longitudinal striae crossed by faint microscopic spiral scratches ; colour glossy white ; spire long, tapering slowly ; whorls, besides those of the embryo, 7, rounded, increasing slowly, last constituting two-thirds of total length ; mouth long, pear-shaped, rounded below and acute above ; inner lip thick, defined, straight, reflected anteriorly over a minute rimation ; outer lip sharp. Length 3, breadth 1 mm. The nearest ally of our new species appears to be E. laxa, Boog- Watson (Challenger Reports, Zoology, Vol. xv., p. 497, pi. 33, fig. 6), which it resembles in its rounded whorls and pear-shaped mouth, characters in which it differs from others of the genus. Some specimens have more swollen whorls than others ; possibly this is a sexual feature. We collected this shell in the brackish water of Manly Lagoon, near Sydney ; entangled in masses of flannel-weed (Sjyiroyyra) these tiny molluscs were seen in abun- dance. This lagoon is separated from the ocean by a narrow sandbank thrown across the mouth of a small stream ; during floods and storms this barrier is broken down and free communica- tion then exists between the pond and the sea. Type specimens have been deposited in the Australian Museum. 248 NOTES AND EXHIBITS. NOTES AND EXHIBITS. Mr. Hedley submitted the following " Note on the Ova of Helicarion robustus, Gould." " My attention was lately drawn by my observant friend Mr. Fletcher to the egg-capsules of Helicarion robustus, Gould. No account of these has appeared in print, and it may be advisable to place on record a short description. Near Sutherland railway station, a few miles south of Sydney, these ova were so plentiful the first week in April that scarcely a stone, log or other suitable shelter was raised without revealing one or more masses ot eggs. Mr. Fletcher tells me that he has noted their occurrence in previous years in the months of June (1887), January (1888) and April (1890), after rain. They are deposited either on the earth or adhering to the lower surface of the shelter, usually 12 to 20, and occasionally 40, in a bunch, each individual with the fluted hemi- sphere outwards. A single egg measures about 4 ram. major and 3 mm. minor axis ; soft, gelatinous, white when fresh laid, growing yellow as it matures, probably because the embryo is then showing through the semi-transparent wall, ovate, acuminate at one end, from the acuminate pole nine spiral ribs descend to the periphery, where they gradually vanish. The infant mollusc pierces the egg wall near the apex formed by the conjunction of the ribs, and on hatching possesses a shell of one and a-half whorls quite resembling the adult except in size." Mr. Maiden exhibited ripe fruits of Monstera deliciosa grown at North Sydney by Mr. J. Malbon Thompson, who believes that this is the first time that these fruits have fully ripened in Sydney. They were fifteen months in ripening after the fruit had set. Also, specimens of the " vegetable sponge," Luffa aegyptiaca, grown by Mr. James Hurst at Summer Hill ; and an abnormal growth of maize cobs, from Bathurst. NOTES AND EXHIBITS. 249 Mr. A. Sidney Olliff exhibited (1) two species of a small fly (Diplosis sppj, recently bred at the Department of Agriculture by Dr. Cobb and himself from larvae found feeding on rust (Puccinia) on peach and sunflowers ; (2) a drawing of a larva of one of these flies, illustrating the anatomy of the animal, and exhibiting the embryo and larva of an internal parasite, apparently belonging to the Hymenoptera ; and (3) specimens of a dipteron (Tachina sp.), a parasite of the plague locust, Pachytylus australis, Br., which is allied to the recently-discovered Masicera pachytylis Sk. Mr. P. N. Trebeck showed some insects collected at North Sydney. Mr. Henry Deane exhibited a fine specimen of Ophideres saliminia, Cr., from Casino, a moth which enlarges, by means of its auger-like proboscis, the holes made by fruit-flies, &c, in the rind of oranges and bananas. Mr. Deane also stated that last month, while travelling by night through the Big Scrub in the Richmond River District, his interest was aroused by the remarkable effect produced by luminous insects which abounded by the roadside. Specimens were secured and sent off in the hope that they would arrive in time to be exhibited at last month's meeting, but they came a day too late, and in the meanwhile have died. From their general resemblance to the larvae of Ceroplatus mastersi, Sk., which are also phosphorescent, Mr. Fletcher, who had seen the specimens forwarded, was of the opinion that these were very probably also dipterous larvae. Mr. David made some remarks on certain luminous organisms which he had observed in old coal mine workings in Illawarra, the identification of which it was hoped would not long be postponed. 250 WEDNESDAY, 24th JUNE, 1891. The President, Professor Haswell, M.A., D.Sc, in the Chair. donations. " Societe Botanique de Lyon. — Bulletin Trimestriel" (1889). No. 4. From the Society. " Verhandlungen der Gesellschaft fiir Erclkunde zu Berlin." Bd. xviii., Nos. 2 and 3 (1891). From the Society. " Bulletin de la Societe Beige de Microscopie." xviime Annee, No. 5 (1891). From the Society. "American Naturalist." Vol. xxv., Nos. 290 and 291 (Feb. and March, 1891). From the Editors. " Bulletin of the American Geographical Society." Vol. xxii., Supplement; Vol. xxiii., No. 1 (March, 1891). From the Society. " Zoologischer Anzeiger." xiv. Jahrg., Nos. 361-363 (April- May, 1891). From the Editor. "Journal of Comparative Medicine and Veterinary Archives." Vol. xii., Nos. 4 and 5 (April-May, 1891). From the Editor. "Journal of the Royal Microscopical Society, 1891." Part 2 (April). From the Society. " Perak Government Gazette." Index to Vol. iii. (Jan.-Dec, 1890), Vol. iv., Nos. 8-12 (April-May, 1891). From the Govern- ment Secretary. " Annalen des K. K. Naturhistorischen Hofmuseums, Wien." Band v., Nos. 1-4 (1890). From the Director. DONATIONS. 251 " Videnskabelige Meddelelser f ra den naturhistoriske Foreninw i Kjobenhavn for Aaret 1890." From the Society. "The Canadian Record of Science." Vol. iv., No. 5 (1891). From the Sot "Agricultural Gazette of N.S.W." Vol. ii., Part 4 (April, 1891). From the Director of Agriculture. " Report on the Chillagoe and Koorboora Mining Districts (1891)." By R. L. Jack, Government Geologist, Queensland. From the Author. " Department of Mines, Sydney — Palaeontology. No. 5 — A Monograph of the Carboniferous and Permo-Carboniferous Inver- tebrata of N.S.W. Part i.— Coelenterata." By R. Etheridge, Junr. From the Hon. the Minister for Mines. " Memoires et Publications cle la Societe des Sciences, des Arts and des Lettres du Hainaut." vme Serie. T. ii. and iii. (1889-90). From the Society. "Zoological Society of London — Abstract." April 21st, 1891. From the Society. " Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society of Edinburgh (1889-90)." Vol. x., Part 2. From the Society. ■ "Journal of the Bombay Natural History Society." Vol. v., No. 4 (1890). From the Society. " Reichenbachia. — Orchids illustrated and described." By F. Sander. Second Series. Vol. i. Part 4 ; " Stettiner Entomolo- gische Zeitung." 51 Jahrg., Nos. 7-12 (1890). From the Hon. Sir William Macleay, F.L.S., M.L.C. " Archives Neerlandaises des Sciences Exactes et Naturelles." T. xxv., lre Livraison. From the Dutch Society of Sciences at Haarlem. " Reports and Statistics of the Mining Department of Victoria for the quarter ended 31st March, 1891." From the Secretary for Mines. 252 DONATIONS. " Report of the Manchester Museum, Owens College, 1889-90." From tlie Keeper of the Museum. " Mitteilnngen des Vereins fur Erdkunde zu Leipzig, 1890." From the Society. "Australasian Journal of Pharmacy." Vol. vi., No. 66 (June, 1891). From the Editor. " The Pharmaceutical Journal of Australasia." Vol. iv., No. 6, (June, 1891). From the Editor. " Transactions of the Connecticut Academy of Arts and Sciences." Vol. viii., Part 1 (1890). From the Society. " Proceedings of the United States National Museum." Vol. xiii. (1891), Nos. 834, 835, 837, 839. From the Director. " Bulletin of the Museum of Comparative Zoology at Harvard College." Vol. xxi., No. 1. From the Curator. " United States Department of Agriculture — Division of Ento- mology—Bulletin," No. 24 (1891) • "Insect Life." Vol. iii., Nos. 7 and 8 (April, 1891). From the Secretary of Agriculture. " Zoological Society of Philadelphia — Nineteenth Annual Report." From the Society. " Geological Survey of Canada — Contributions to Canadian Palaeontology." Vol. iii. (4to), No. 1 (1891). From the Director. " Geological Survey of India — Memoirs." Vol. xxiv., Part 3 ; " Records." Vol. xxiv., Part 1. " Contents and Index of Vols. i.-xxi. of the Records (1868-87)." From the Director. " Journal of the College of Science, Imperial University of Japan." Vol. iv., Part 1. From the Director. "The Quarterly J ournal of the Geological Society." Vol. xlvii., Part 2(1891). From the Society. " Johns Hopkins University Circulars." Vol. x., Nos. 87 and 88 (April-May, 1891). From the University. 253 PAPERS READ. ANGOPHORA KINO. By J. H. Maiden, F.C.S., F.L.S. The importance of the genus Eucalyptus and the almost universal occurrence of kino in these trees has thrown the subject of kino in the closely related genus Angophora almost entirely into the shade. Although some species are very common and yield it abundantly, a prejudice might arise against Angophora kinos being officially recognised as substitutes for that of Pterocarpus, partly because an odour is inadmissible in this substance. If a use should be found for them, I believe the kinos of any of the species may be mixed without detriment, as they appear to have practically the same composition when gathered under similar circumstances. Angophoras are confined to the east coast of Australia ; they are five in number, four of them being found in New South Wales, while one, A. Woodsiana, is peculiar to Queensland. A. cordifolia is peculiar to New South Wales ; A. intermedia has the widest range, extending from Victoria to Queensland. A. lanceolata and A. subvelutina are found in Queensland as well as in New South Wales. They are all well known as "apple trees" (although some species have other names in addition). The timber yielded by various species of Angophora is often much deteriorated by " gum-veins " consisting of kino, which is usually disposed in thin concentric circles, but also in pockets. It is, nevertheless, useful for wheelwrights' purposes and for fuel. Angophora cordifolia, Cav., is a coast district tall shrub; I have not observed kino on it. Angophora subvelutina, F.v.M. This is a fair-sized tree ; kino has likewise not been recorded from this species, but this is doubt- less because attention has not been drawn to the matter. 254 ANGOPHORA KINO, Angophora Woodsiana, Bail., (Syn. Queensland Flora, Bailey) : "Often containing large quantities of liquid red gum (kino) in hollows of the timber like the bloodwood {Eucalyptus corymbosa, Sm.) " (Bailey) ; used by the settlers as a remedy in diarrhoea according to Dr. J. Bancroft. Angophora intermedia, DC. This is the species (and also A. lanceolata to a less extent) which yields a watery, slightly astrin- gent liquid when the trunk (particularly at swellings) is tapped. I have described this substance under the name of "liquid kino " in a paper, Proc. R. S. Victoria, 1889, p. 82. It is sometimes known as " cider," and it is worthy of note that some country people call all liquids obtained from our native trees " cider," whether they are drinkable or not. A. intermedia forms a fine tree, perhaps the handsomest of the genus. The bark is fibrous, hence the kino gets entangled in it and is frequently wasted. I describe four specimens of its kino, illustrating the variability of its appearance and composition. 1. From Colombo (Lyttelton), near Candelo, N.S.W., gathered in June. Height of tree 30-50 ft., diam. 2-4 ft. This kino had evidently exuded some time when collected. It is of a reddish-brown colour, and of a brittle nature. From this circumstance, the small masses in which it is obtained speedily lose their bright fresh appearance, assuming a colour very like that of ordinary dried currants. It forms a dull-looking powder of a pinkish-brown colour. Cold water acts slowly upon it, forming an orange-brown solution which may readily be decanted. The abundant residue (mainly consisting of Catechin) crumbles, forming a compact sediment of an Indian-red colour, and containing a quantity of woody matter. It is exceedingly tedious to extract the last portions of soluble matter. Except in regard to tints of filtrate and residue, all Angophora kinos behave in the way just described when treated with water, and yield, when treated with alcohol, a turbid liquid with a filtrate of an orange-brown colour. BY J. H. MAIDEN. 255 2. Bangley Creek, near Cambewarra, collected in March, from trees in diam. 1-2 ft. This is obviously a fresher sample than A. intermedia No. 1. It is so like A. lanceolata No. 2 as scarcely to be distinguished from it in bulk. In water its behaviour is similar to that of the preceding sample, but the solution is of a pale orange colour. 3. A second sample from Bangley Creek, Cambewarra, collected in April, from trees height 60-80 ft., diam. 1-3 ft. It is a very clean sample, is neither perfectly new nor very old, is in smallish pieces, and of a garnet colour. On account of its friability, it can be reduced to a light orange powder between the fingers without much difficulty. The kino in bulk has a slightly dulled appearance, although individual fragments break with a bright fracture. 4. From Eastwood, near Sydney, collected in April, from trees height 80 ft., diam. 2 ft. This sample much resembles No. 2. It is, however, decidedly darker in bulk, even inclining to liver-colour, and is somewhat opaque. It readily crushes between the fingers to a burnt sienna powder, slightly darker than the standard tint. It is evidently the oldest of the A. intermedia samples. To water it yields a rich orange-brown liquid when filtered. With alcohol the filtrate is of a dark orange-brown. Angophora lanceolata, Cav. " Red Gum," " Orange Gum," " Rusty Gum." In collecting kino from this tree it may be well to remind people that the smooth trunk might perhaps be mistaken by a careless observer for that of Eucalyptus maculata, but the two kinos cannot be confused even by a tyro. I submit notes on two kinos of this species. This kino is abundant, and readily gathered on account of the smoothness of the bark. The tree obtains its vernacular names owing to the kino stains on the pale-coloured stem. 17 256 ANG0PH0RA KINO, 1. From Botany, near Sydney, collected in March, trees 50 ft. high, and 1 to 2 feet in diameter. When freshly gathered this kino has a smell somewhat like sour wine, something resembling that of E. metadata but not so agreeable. As far as my experience goes it is quite characteristic. The two kinos possess other characteristics in common, one of which is the following. If they be digested in water, and the turbid liquid be treated with ether, two ethereal layers are formed, containing catechin in solution. This substance may readily be obtained by evaporation of the ether, and it possesses the characteristic odour of the kino from which it was obtained, the residue insoluble in ether being quite destitute of odour. The odoriferous principle (a volatile substance allied to cinnamene or styrol) is, however, so small that an hour's exposure of the ethereal extract to the atmosphere removes every trace of it. The present sample had freshly exuded, is exceedingly brittle, has a bright fracture, ruby with a tinge of brown ; colour of powder orange-brown. So brittle is it that the lumps and vessels con- taining it become readily coated with fine powder. In cold water it dissolves slowly, forming a liquid of the colour of brown sherry if left undisturbed. With alcohol it yields a pale orange-brown solution with a slightly muddy residue. 2. The Valley, Blue Mountains, N.S.W., collected in April, height 80-150 ft., cliam. 1-2 ft. The description of No. 1 will apply here with the following exceptions. In bulk it is hardly so red as No. 1, while its powder is of a dark buff colour. To cold water it behaves in the same way as No. 1 ; it is, however, less turbid and lighter in colour. With alcohol it yields a pale orange-brown solution. The following table shows the composition of the kinos described in this paper, and I may observe that Angophora kinos would (if Eucalypts) be placed in my "Turbid Group." BY J. H. MAIDEN. 257 ANGOPHORA KINO. INTERMEDIA. LANCEOLATA. No. 1. No. 2. No. 3. No. 4. No. 1. No. 2. Catechin and Tannic Acid 77-1 79 0 84-2 81-98 83 0 83-75 Aromatic substance, (?) Cinna- mene (Styrol) traces traces Ligneous matter and other im- purities 4-4 42 •6 •72 •4 •8 Moisture 168 147 15-1 16-6 16-5 15-35 Ash 17 21 •1 •7 •1 1 100-0 1000 100 0 10000 100-0 10000 Tannic Acid (Lowenthall 52-32 57-4 59-43 53-84 55-37 50 3 The catechin and tannic acid in these kinos were determined together by extraction with alcohol. The tannic acid was separately determined by LowenthaPs process, on an original aqueous solution, and the catechin estimated by difference. 258 THE INCISORS OP SCEPARNODON, THE INCISOKS OF SCEPARNODON. By C. W. De Vis, M.A., Corr. Mem. (Plate xxii.) The haze of ignorance still shrouding the origin of the teeth we call Sceparnodon would be lightly lifted if only we could opine with the author of Pt. 5 of the British Museum Catalogue of Fossil Mammals, that they grew in the upper jaw of Phascolonus. But even in the realm of the undemonstrable it would be well that an explanation to be projected thence should not wholly ignore the fact, intimated by Owen, that these teeth are not all the same teeth ; well, also, that it should not, in the act of associating them with any mammal whatever, raise a crop of difficulties for other explanations to eradicate. To a waiter on reliable means of judg- ment it has now become evident that any attempt to refer these teeth to an animal whose lower incisor is known must end in disaster. In other words, it is patent that the teeth in our collec- tions are not all, as they are assumed to be, upper incisors, but that they include the teeth from both jaws of the otherwise unknown animal. Though the assertion is a bold one, it is made with the diffidence which arises, not from any weakness in the evidence, but from the reflection that the means of distinguishing one tooth from the other has always been in view of keen and practised eyes yet has never been recognised. Turning to Plate 1 1 of the Philosophical Transactions of London for 1884, and com- paring fig. 5 with fig. 7, we observe that the length of the working surface in fig. 7, though diminished by the absence of somewhat BY C. W. DE VIS. 259 more than the cutting edge, is very much greater than, in fact nearly twice as great as, that of fig. 5. We are not at liberty to attribute so great a difference to the accidents of function in two individuals or to specific differentiation until we have failed to explain it by reference to any known rule applicable to the case, and such a rule we find maintained in the conditions of the working surfaces by all marsupial herbivores having procumbent incisors in the lower jaw; in these the long slope of the lower tooth working with reciprocating action across the comparatively vertical edge of the upper suffers abrasion to the extent of its motion. Seen in this light, the significance of the relative lengths of the surfaces of abrasion in the teeth figured becomes great, and it points to no other interpretation so likely to be correct as this, that they are due to the interaction of opposed teeth. The inferiority in the width of the tooth, which from this point of view is the upper, affords no ground of objection since this is simply a sign of immaturity ; the tooth is, as Owen rightly inferred from its shape, in course of growth. On the supposition then that this identification of the lower incisor is admissible, the long mid- rib on its concave side, in which its describer is disposed to see an indication of specific difference, becomes merely an item, but an important one, in its diagnosis. So far we have deduced all we can, and all that is really neces- sary, from the only figures of the teeth extant, and very probably it is not enough to make good our contention. But evidence in reserve shows, first, that the subject of fig. 5 is really an upper tooth ; secondly, that the characters presented by fig. 7, length of working surface, the longitudinal rib, even a peculiarity in the depression marked b are constant, and, therefore, as to this tooth, we shall have to choose between the probability of its being the lower tooth of S. ramsayi, and the improbability that it is from a 260 THE INCISORS OF SCEPARNODON, second species whose upper tooth is constantly abraded to an extra- ordinary degree, the lower tooth in both species being unknown. The Queensland Museum possesses a perfect adult incisor of large size (PL xxii. fig. 1) ; that this is, without shadow of doubt, an upper tooth is certified by the presence of the premaxillary bone which encases it to a distance of 41 mm. from its outlet, and re-appears distad as a smaller adherent portion from the root end of the socket. In passing it may be noted that the outer edge of the premaxilla, commencing near the outlet, folds over inwards and downwards, also that its inner edge (17 mm. in length) is smooth and entire, showing no sign of sutural union with its fellow, both features foreign to the near kindred of Phascolonus. The working surface of this tooth has the same general length as that in Owen's fig. 5, namely, 13-5 mm. The entire breadth of the tooth being 40 mm., or three-eighths greater than that of its younger type, we may gather that the working surface did not, on the whole, lengthen with age, a fact directly opposed to the assumption that the elongately worn teeth are from the same seat of growth, and at the same time rather discouraging than other- wise any suspicion that they may have belonged to another species. On the concave side of this tooth there is not the slightest trace of a median longitudinal ridge. Assuming for a moment that the subject of fig. 7 is a cast of a lower tooth, its breadth, 35 mm., is fairly proportionate to that from the upper jaw, 40 mm. The upper tooth being ascertained and its characters definable, we have to account for those Sceparnodon incisors which are not at all in accordance with it. And here the writer must take leave to confess that, until the last piece of evidence fell into his hands, he, relying on authority, failed to appreciate the differential characters of the teeth and casts under his own observation. His attention to the matter was aroused by the appearance of the BY C. W. DE VIS. 261 small tooth shown in PL xxii. fig. 2, a tooth in a much less advanced stage of growth than that of Owen's fig. 5, and so distinctly diffe- rent from the adult tooth now figured as to excite a doubt in his own mind as to their specific co-identity. The doubt vanished as soon as the relative extents of their working surfaces suggested community of causation between them and similar effects else- where. The length of this surface in the young tooth is 31 mm., more than twice its length in the adult upper tooth, but consider- ably less than in the adult lower tooth represented by Owen, fig. 7. Bat the breadth of the tooth itself at the fere end is but 16 mm. against 35 mm. in the type adult, so that its working surface is even longer in proportion to its width than in the adult state. The identity of this tooth with Owen's subject, fig. 7, is established by the presence of the longitudinal rib, and the constancy of this character again is deduced from a third appearance of it in Owen's fig. 2. Tn the depression b of fig. 7, and of PI. xxii. fig. 2, infra, we have a proof of equal persistency. One side of the abraded surface (the left) sends backwards, as is shown in the figures, a tapering tongue which ends in a point depressed in the outer edge of this face of the tooth, and more than half of the surface of wear on the inner side loses its smooth flat character posteriorly and becomes a coarsely roughened depression which in the young tooth is seen to be caused by the direct chopping impact of the sharp edge of the upper tooth on its surface, in which it has cut distinct notches. A similar depression, accompanying a lateral tongue of abraded surface on the opposite side, occurs in the immature upper tooth as figured by Owen, but the depression there is small, smooth and limited to the edge ; the surface, moreover, has no trace of incisive action behind the regular surface of wear. There are thus three features constantly present in these teeth which are absent from the others, and one of these features, an extended area of abrasion, is normal to the lower incisors of other marsupials. The differently conditioned teeth prove to be upper teeth. The plain 262 THE INCISORS OF SCEPARNODON. inference is that their companions are the corresponding lower teeth. The inference can only be evaded by attributing them to another species. To effect this we shall have to suppose either that we know only the upper teeth of one species and the lower of another, a supposition which its responsible originator will have to recom- mend by the doctrine of chances, or that the second species had abnormally long working surfaces on its upper incisors and corre- spondingly enormous elongations of those surfaces on the lower incisors. The probability of this condition of things it is hardly necessary to discuss. It must be concluded that both the upper and lower incisors of Scepamodon are known, and, consequently, that Scepamodon is not a synonym of Phascolonus. EXPLANATION OF PLATE xxn. Scepamodon ramsayi, Ow. Fig. 1. — Right upper incisor, adult. Fig. 2.— Right lower incisor, young. 263 CONTRIBUTIONS TO A MORE EXACT KNOWLEDGE OF THE GEOGRAPHICAL DISTRIBUTION OF AUSTRALIAN BATRACHIA. No. II. By J. J. Fletcher. In this second small contribution I am able to supply some supplementary details of interest, to record several additional collections from localities in New South Wales west of the Dividing Range — as well as two from Victoria ; and to give some interesting facts kindly communicated to me by two of our members, about the habits of several inland species which town residents rarely get the chance of observing in the natural haunts. Though the number of species (eighteen) previously recorded from the inland division of the colony is not increased, the particulars now given offer additional evidence of wide distribution. (i.) The Coastal Division of N.S. W. (East of the Dividing Range). (a bis). From Dunoon, Richmond River (collected by R. Helms). Hyla phyllochroa, Gthr. Hyla gracilenta, Ptrs. During a second visit to Dunoon, early in this year, Mr. R. Helms obtained and kindly forwarded to me alive one example of the former, and a number of specimens of the latter, both additions to the fauna of the district, and the second of them to New South Wales as well, the species having been previously recorded only from Queensland (N. E. Australia and Port Bowen by Peters ; Rockhampton, in B. M. Catalogue ; specimens obtained for the Macleay Museum by Mr. Froggatt at Cairns were exhibited at a Meeting of this Society in August, 1886). About the same time Mr. A. Sidney OllifF kindly handed over to me two specimens of 264 GEOGRAPHICAL DISTRIBUTION OF AUSTRALIAN JBATRACHIA, the same species from Grafton, collected and forwarded by the Right Rev. the Bishop of Grafton. H. gracilenta appears to be another example of species like Chiroleples australis and others whose stronghold according to present knowledge is Queensland, and which find their southern limit somewhere about the northern boundary of New South Wales. It is a very beautiful frog when alive ; the iris has an inner portion golden shading into a circumferential ring of bright coppery -red (visible sometimes even in spirit specimens) ; the body above green or yellowish-green ; in the males the throat, part of upper arm, shoulders, a line along the flanks bright yellow; the under surface of the body and limbs tinged with yellow ; the back of thighs purplish. The " white line on canthus rostralis, outer border of upper eyelid, and above the tympanum " of Mr. Boulenger's description is absent in my specimens. Mr. Helms says " this species may almost be called arboreal ; most of the specimens were found on the leaves of the -arrow-root plant ; during the day time they sit quite still with their eyes closed, probably asleep ; when kept in the dark they assume a much darker colour." I kept some specimens alive for some time in a vivarium along with specimens of //. ccerulea ; individuals of both species during the day time were invariably asleep, either perched on the leaves of an Arum, or adhering to the sides of the vivarium — to glass or wood indifferently. (d bis). From the Blue Mts. Hyla aicrea. Four specimens of this species were found by me last month near Springwood, the first time I have happened to meet with it on the Blue Mts. In the same locality in December last Mr. Sloane and myself found two couples of H. citropus in cop., in a little pool overshadowed by a fallen tree-trunk in a gully. This is the first time I have seen this species from anywhere on the Blue Mts., except Mt. Wilson. BY J. J. FLETCHER. 265 (ii.) The inland division of N.S. W. ( West of the Dividing Range). (m) From Goangra and Euroka, near Walgett on the Naraoi (collected by Messrs. A. Carson, and J. H. Rose). Limnodynastes salminii Ilyla ccerulea Chiroleptes platycephalus peronii Living specimens of all the above were exhibited at the Society's Meetings in February and March last. As I then pointed out, the stripes on the back which in spirit specimens of L. salminii are pink or rose-red were in the living animals of quite a different tint, a bright ochreous-yellow ; when put into spirit subsequently the colour soon changed, the glandular fold from the eye to the shoulder, and a patch on each upper arm also assuming the rosy tint, as well as part of the upper eyelids. Notaden also occurs in the Walgett district, but specimens did not happen to be procur- able at the time the others were forwarded. Mr. Rose has very kindly furnished me with the following particulars about this species. " Notaden be?i7ietiii, the * Catholic frog ' or, as I have heard it called, the 'Holy Cross toad' I first noticed in January, 1885, after a heavy fall of rain lasting ten days, off and on, and suc- ceeding a long and severe drought. I was living. at that time on the Merri Merri Creek, 36 miles from Coonamble. These toads were then very plentiful, and seemed to come out of the earth. I have seen them all over the plain country, both on black and sandy soil. Here at Euroka I have dug them out of a soft loamy flower bed in front of the house at a time when the earth was commencing to get dry; during comparatively dry periods they disappear, but reappear as soon as a few points of rain have fallen. I can safely say they were to be founds here at all times during the last twelve months, though at times during the hottest part of summer only under logs and in damp places. After a heavy fall of rain in summer they simply swarm. I should certainly incline to the opinion that it is always about if not too dry. I have seen it as far south as Forbes. Some that I have seen have 266 GEOGRAPHICAL DISTRIBUTION OF AUSTRALIAN BATRACHIA, been very much lighter in colour than others ; one could truth- fully have called them yellow. They hop along with short quick strokes ; and if teased or interfered with will stand up with bodies above the ground on all fours, and puffing themselves out to an absurd size will face their tormentor in a defiant manner." " I can verify the statement of your correspondent that Notaden is partial to ants, for I have repeatedly unearthed them, and fed them upon the wood-destroying white ants, which they ate in large quantities refusing however any that were dead. I also tried them with the carrion ants, giving them eggs, pupae, workers, and winged ones. The last- mentioned were soon disposed of, the eggs and pupse taken into the mouth and ejected, but the workers they refused to touch. I tried them with other food such as insects, grubs, &c, but did not observe them to eat any. Perhaps their partiality for white ants explains their being frequently plentiful about homesteads, deserted yards, and buildings." As further confirmation of the fact that Notaden preys upon ants, I may say that the bottle in which eleven living specimens were forwarded to me from Trangie, as noted below, by the Rev. J. M. Curran, F.Gr.S., contained on opening a noticeable quantity of undigested fragments of ants voided by the toads while in transit. Mr. Curran has also very kindly furnished me with the following observations : — " On two occasions recently I have noticed large numbers of 'Hervy's frog' (Notaden bennettii) on the Macquarie River, about four miles down stream from the locality known as the Macquarie Cataract. On each occasion there had been recent rather heavy rains. Before the rain no frogs were visible, but after a downpour of five hours the frogs appeared in thousands. On Monday, January 26th, 1891, I rode from the Macquarie to the Ewenmar Creek, and for some twelve miles of well-grassed country a dozen specimens could have been easily collected at any one place over the whole distance. Tuesday was fine, and on the return journey I did not see a single specimen. I noticed the same frogs plentiful in November, 1890, about BY J. J. FLETCHER. 267 Tenandra also after rain. The settlers say that it was just seven years before that the frogs were seen in such large numbers. I heard on good authority that the blacks used to use these frogs for food. I myself saw an old gin seemingly enjoy as a dainty morsel the muscular thighs of the frog, eating them quite raw with a little salt. They are called Hervy's frog from a fanciful resemblance of the pattern on the creature's back to the letter H, this being Mr. Hervy's sheep brand." Notaden when alive is a batrachian of quaint and striking appearance ; immersion in spirits, however, very soon produces a washed-out effect, the bright tints (yellow, red, and green) being entirely discharged or much bleached ; ordinary spirit specimens thus quite fail to suggest, or at least in the forcible manner which the examination of the living animal almost immediately . does, that Notaden is probably an example of " warning coloration " not unworthy to rank with Darwin's small Brazilian toad, or Belt's now historic little Nicaraguan frog. The dorsal surface presents a characteristic and very fairly constant pattern which, from the inspection only of spirit specimens, has been described as due to the presence of " a large cross-shaped blackish marking on the back " (Boulenger) : or, as Dr. Giinther puts it, " a very broad brownish band, marbled with black, along the middle of the back ; it bifurcates anteriorly on the head, leaving the forehead greenish, and emits a transverse bar on each side of the back behind the shoulder ": this constitutes the cross-pattern to which are due two of the local vernacular names by which the animal is known. In the lumbar region, however, as indicated in fig. 3 of PI. xxn. of the B. M. Catalogue (2nd edition), the median band emits another transverse band on each side, whence arises the H-pattern referred to in Mr. Curran's remarks, the H being thus placed transversely with regard to the animal's back. Inspection of the living animal at once renders it obvious that the characteristic pattern is not quite satisfactorily expressed in the quotations given above. Rather is it due to an arrangement of very dark (black) not very much raised glandular warts or papillae of several sizes, together with small isolated spots and patches of ferruginous or orange-red, 268 GEOGRAPHICAL DISTRIBUTION OF AUSTRALIAN BATRACHIA, and in places white spots, on a greenish background, the pattern being thrown up and emphasised by contrast with sundry symme- trically arranged insular areas free, or almost so, from papillae, and of a lighter tint, bright yellow or greenish-yellow. The largest warts for the most part outline the pattern, and border the insular patches ; there is little more than only an anterior edging of them in the posterior or lumbar limb of the H ; the others with the red spots and patches, and in the lumbar band and on the flanks white spots, are scattered over the surface so outlined ; f rom behind the eye downward and outward to the shoulder and along the sides and flanks on each side is another dark band, but with fewer, more scattered and still smaller papillae, some of them parti- coloured—black and white. Thus six areas wholly without warts, or occasionally with a large one here and there, are enclosed, and these, as mentioned above, are of a lighter and yellower tint : two of them are median, an anterior cruciform or dagger-shaped one between and behind the eyes, and a posterior coccygeal narrow band, these two representing the bifurcation of each end — a little extended — of the cross-bar of the IT : the others are in pairs, an anterior pair in front of, and a larger posterior pair behind, the anterior limb of the H. The outer surface of the arms and legs, especially the latter, are also spotted with red, and the back of the thighs with white on a dark ground. Looked at in the laboratory, for example in a white dish, Notaden is brightly coloured and conspicuously marked ; when placed on the grass of the lawn, however, the animal was very much less conspicuous, and as long as it kept still even a good observer unaware of its presence and unfamiliar with the animal might, I think, have passed close to it with- out noticing it. Nevertheless there seems little need to doubt that we have here a case not of 2^rotective, but of warning colora- tion. The former would probably have been amply provided for as in some green tree-frogs, by a more or less uniform livery of green or greenish-yellow, without the elaborate arrangement of coloured papillae, and specks, &c.f which is present ; neither are the grass-lands of the interior quite like well kept city lawns. BY J. J. FLETCHER. 269 Moreover, as implied in Dr. Giinther's name, " not only the skin of the paratoid region, but that of the entire hack is thickened by numerous glands ;" from these there exudes under certain circum- stances a copious yellow secretion ; Mr. Rose tells me that he has sometimes observed the exudation when handling the toads, and I noticed it in several specimens put into spirit, and also in a speci- men which had but recently died. On the supposition that, as in other toads in which such is known to be the case, the glandular secretion is acrid and renders the animal nauseous and inedible (except perhaps to blackfellows who would soon learn to avoid the integument of the part eaten), and taking into account also the animal's habit of puffing itself out when interfered with, and the conspicuous colour and remarkable character of the markings seen at close quarters, it is possible that not many experiments would be necessary to teach snakes, predaceous birds, or maybe some of the larger lizards to grasp the situation. Such an immunity from attack would also render intelligible the unusual habit — unknown as yet in the case of any other Australian frog — of appearing at times in great numbers in the open, and in the day time, without any attempt at concealment, as established on the independent evidence of capable observers. This point, however, I hope to be able to settle at no very distant date by actual .experiment. Of Chiroleptes platycephalic, Gthr., Mr. Rose says "this frog is also a bur rower ; I have found it in a well-formed hollow just large enough to contain the animal comfortably, about one foot underground. I have dug up some scores of them, but I never found any water in the cavities containing them (i.e. as Mr. Aitken says is to be found in the clay balls formed by certain frogs in tropical Australia in which they sojourn during droughts) ; neither is the surrounding earth particularly hard except just in a dry season ; just now (May) the walls of the cells are about as hard as potter's clay after the turning-table period, and before being dried. I send you a portion of one of the cavities which contained a specimen of Chiroleptes, and from the knife marks you will see that it was not particularly hard when first found." 270 GEOGRAPHICAL DISTRIBUTION OF AUSTRALIAN BATRACHIA, Mr. Rose kindly forwarded me two lots of living specimens in tins of earth, and I kept them also for some time in a vivarium with a layer of earth on the bottom sufficiently deep to allow them to burrow comfortably out of sight. On turning them out of the tins of earth in which they came they were found snugly ensconced in little chambers below the surface ; the soil being clayey it appeared to me as if after having reached the bottom of the tin the frogs, perhaps by puffing themselves out, and by turning themselves round and round, had succeeded in pushing back the earth, and by pressure in puddling the clay to some extent, so forming a little chamber with firm walls, a supposition to which the portion of the chamber sent me by Mr. Rose also lends support. Those kept for some time alive by me were, except for a short time in one solitary instance, not on view during the day time. Partly owing perhaps to nocturnal habits, and partly to burrowing habits, Mr. Rose tells me that he has rarely met with them above ground — once on a wet night, and once in the case of a specimen which fell into a box let into the ground from which it was unable to make its way out. Like Notaden it has the habit of puffing itself out when interfered with ; and a similar statement is applicable to a specimen of C. australis referred to below. In keeping with its retiring habits, C. rplatycerphalus is clad in sombre tints, which are not very seriously interfered with by the action of alcohol ; my specimens when alive might have been described as above of an olive-grey or greyish-brown much freckled with darker spots and blotches, but without any definite pattern ; beneath white, the throat of the male slightly and finely dotted with darker. This may perhaps be the species referred to in a letter to the Australasian of date August 2nd, 1890, as occurring on the Paroo, of which the writer says " all those that I saw were found not in, or very near, water, but at from 6-12 inches below the surface of the ground, each in a cavity just large enough to contain it, a great peculiarity being that for several inches all round the earth was caked as hard almost as a brick. Native name of Darling blacks ' cowari.'" BY J. J. FLETCHER. 271 Mr. Boulenger gives as a generic character of Chiroleptes "pupil vertical." In the six specimens of C. platycephalus already referred to, and in one of C. australis, from Herberton, Queensland — some of which were exhibited at the Meetings of this Society in March and April of this year — all examined alive and in a strong light, the pupil was certainly horizontal and not vertical. My determina- tion of the species may of course be incorrect, though taking the other characters into consideration I do not think so. No doubt most, if not all our frogs, under stress of droughts can or do betake themselves to burrowing when activating. This is the case for example with Pseudophryne bibronii, a feeble little toad, and one which is certainly not habitually a burrower. But Limnodynastes dorsalis, Notaden bennettii, Chiroleptes platycephalic and Heleioporus pictus are habitual burrowers. I have seen speci- mens of each of these species either actually burrow in earth, or go through the burrowing motions in a dish when I have had them under observation, in this case evidently a little surprised at the futility of their efforts; the hind legs in burrowing are moved outwards and downwards, either alternately or simultaneously, the shovel-shaped metatarsal tubercle evidently coming into play. All these species have the metatarsal tubercles of this character, the presence of which may I think be taken as prima facie evidence of the burro wing propensity of their possessor. I have not seen Limno- dynastes ornatus and Heleioporus albopunctatus alive, but from analogy these will also probably turn out to be burrowers. L. dorsalis, judging from the abundance of croakers, must be one of our most abundant Sydney frogs ; yet it is precisely one of the species of which under ordinary circumstances it is most difficult to procure specimens; a condition which is probably largely due to its nocturnal and burrowing habits. Once and only once I found a specimen under a stone ; the only other way in which I have obtained specimens about Sydney is by going into the water after them when breeding, individuals at such times often allowing themselves to be caught without much difficulty. On the other hand, except in very dry weather, L. tasmaniensis 18 272 GEOGRAPHICAL DISTRIBUTION OF AUSTRALIAN BATRACHIA, and L. peronii are generally obtainable without difficulty always in the cool months sheltering under logs and stones ; and I know of no reason whatever for supposing that with us they are at all addicted to burrowing otherwise than exceptionally and as a last resource for sestivating purposes. Mr. Rose tells me as follows : " I have taken some notice lately of L. salminii, and I cannot find that it burrows like Notaden and Chiroleptes; it finds its way under logs and pieces of bark, lying very close but not appearing to have made any attempt at excavation ; the same is true of the green frog (Hyla ccerulea)." (n) From Bearbong, Mundooran, on the Castlereagh (collected bv Messrs. W. L. Gipps, and G. Macguire, and forwarded to me by Mr. F. A. A. Skuse). Limnodynastes salminii Pseudophryne bibvonii tasmaniensis Hyla ccerulea Hyla rubella (one specimen, juv.) (o) From Trangie (collected by the Rev. J. Milne Curran, F.G.S.). Notaden bennettii. Eleven living specimens were exhibited at the Society's Meeting in December last. (p) From Kiacatoo Station, on the Lachlan 20 miles below Condobolin (collected by Mr. T. G. Sloane). Limnodynastes salminii Hyperolia marmorata tasmaniensis Crinia signifera Hyla peronii (q) From Emu Plains, Urana, about 18 miles from the Murrum- bidgee at Narrandera (collected by Mr. T. G. Sloane). Limnodynastes tasinaniensis Crinia signifera dorsalis Heleioporus pictus Hyperolia marmorata Hyla aurea BY J. J. FLETCHER. 273 Heleioporus pictus is not conspicuously coloured, resembling some specimens of L. dorsalis. The specimen sent me by Mr. Sloane when alive might be described as follows : — Pupil erect ; iris silvery or golden veined with black, the anterior half with a dark horizontal mark forming with the contracted pupil an incomplete cross (cf. the complete cross in Hyla peronii, as already pointed out by Dr. Giinther). Colour above pale olive with darker spots and patches, tolerably uniform but lighter on the flanks and limbs, and with a wash of bright yellow about the thighs and upper arms, a faint light vertebral line ; beneath blotched on each side of the throat [no dark streak from the tip of snout to the eye in this specimen]. Fingers free, toes fully webbed, the webbing extending to the tips of the digits ; [Mr. Boulenger says " toes two-thirds webbed ;" in my Mudgee specimen the toes might be said to be about two-thirds webbed, but I know this specimen was put into strong spirit, and I fancy the webbing is somewhat shrunk.] The specimen is a breeding male, 40 mm. long from snout to vent ; as in Limnodynastes there are two brownish rugosities on the inner side of the two inner digits of each hand ; inner metatarsal tubercles black. Mr. Sloane found the specimen lying very close in a small cavity, with only his back visible, under a log close to the edge of a swamp. We know so little of Victorian frogs [Professor McCoy has figured three more or less cosmopolitan species in Decade v. of the Prodromus of Victorian Zoology; and seven are recorded in Mr. Boulenger's Catalogue, or in the second of two supplementary lists] that no apology, I think, is needed for recording the two following collections. Crinia signifera does not appear to have been previously recorded, though judging from the presence of twelve specimens in Mr. Froggatt's collection, it would seem to be as common in Victoria as elsewhere. (a) From Benalla, Victoria (collected by Mr. T. G. Sloane). Limnodynastes dorsalis Crinia signifera Pseudophryne bibronii 274 GEOGRAPHICAL DISTRIBUTION OF AUSTRALIAN BATRACHIA. (b) From Ballarat, Victoria (collected by Mr. W. W. Froggatt). Limnodynastes tasmaniensis Crinia froggatti, Fl. Crinia signifera Pseudophryne bibronii Hyla ewingii This collection comprised sixty-two specimens, of which half were tree-frogs which I take to be the typical form of Hyla ewingii, that is to say, the form which is entirely devoid of large dark spots on the flanks, groin, or hinder sides of the thighs, a species recorded from Melbourne in the B. M. Catalogue. As the statements made by different authors as to the characters and distribution of H. ewingii disagree in several not unimportant points, I propose to offer some remarks on this subject on a future occasion. I may here remark that Mr. Froggatt brought me one Hyla alive because of its different appearance compared with the others. It is a beautiful little frog, light silvery bronze above, reminding one something of H. dentata, but with a bright green broad band down the back (and specks of green elsewhere), a not very well denned dark band commencing at about the level of the shoulder edging the green on each side, and another similar lateral band on the flanks soon disappearing. Whether this is H. ewingii or a variety of it, or whatever else it may be, I leave for further consideration. 275 DESCRIPTION OF A SUPPOSED NEW CYSTIGNATHOID FROG. By J. J. Fletcher. Crinia froggatti, sp.n. Vomerine teeth in two small groups behind the choanse. Snout rounded, as long as orbital diameter ; nostril equally distant from the eye and the tip of the snout ; interorbital space broader than the upper eyelid ; tympanum hidden. First linger hardly half as long as second ; toes not fringed ; subarticular tubercles indistinct ; an inner small metatarsal tubercle ; no tarsal fold. The tibio-tarsal articulation of the adpressed limb reaches nearly to the eye. Skin above with small scattered tubercles on the back ; beneath smooth except for a triangular space on the lower and hinder sides of the thighs on each side of the median line which is very granular. Colour (a) of spirit specimens : — greyish above with blackish spots ; a blackish band on each side from the tip of the snout through the eye to above the shoulder, frequently interrupted ; a blackish transverse patch between the eyes sending off posteriorly a little on either side of the median line a ragged slightly divergent narrow longitudinal stripe at length becoming broken up into spots, sometimes the whole stripe much broken up ; sides of body, and limbs a lighter grey spotted with blackish ; lower surfaces dirty white the belly and limbs marbled or spotted with blackish, in the males the lips and throat also, the concealed surfaces of the body (axillae, groin, front and hinder surface of thighs, inner surface of tibiae, and upper surface of tarsus) with carmine patches and spots on a black background : (b) of living specimens, the whole dorsal surface is a reddish- or purplish-brown obscuring the dark patch, bands and spots, disappearing more or less after immer- sion in spirit ; the sides of the body greyish-blue ; the lower surface pale blue marbled with blackish ; carmine spots and patches as above, not much affected by spirit. 276 DESCRIPTION OF A SUPPOSED NEW CYSTIGNATHOID FROG. Twelve specimens from snout to vent 18-26 mm. Hab. — Buninyong, and Gong Gong, near Ballarat, Victoria ; common under logs in valleys (W. W. Froggatt). The specimens from the two localities differ to some extent in the amount of the dark tint present on the ventral surface, five from Buninyong being much more spotted or marbled. This is a third species belonging to the section of the genus in which vomerine teeth are present, and it is in some respects inter- mediate in character between C. georgiana, D. & B., and C. victoriana, Blgr. It resembles the former in having carmine spots present, but differs in having the lower surface less granular, the tympanum quite hidden, the belly not immaculate, no tarsal fold, and but one metatarsal tubercle. On the other hand it is in many respects allied to C. victoriana, but differs from that species in not having the skin smooth above and below, as well as in pattern and colour. DESCRIPTION OF A NEW CONE FROM MAURITIUS. By John Brazier,. C.M.Z.S., F.L.S. Conus (Chelyconus) Worcesteri, n.sp. (Plate xix., fig. 4.) Shell turbinated, thick, ventricose round the upper part, smooth ; spire acuminated, apex sharp, with minute spiral striae below the suture ; ivory white beneath a dirty yellowish epidermis, variegated with four purple or pinkish-brown bands flowing down here and there in flexuous streaks or blotches, columella slightly twisted ; aperture white, lip thin. Long 48, diam. maj. 25, aperture long 39 mm. Hab. — Island of Mauritius (Mr. Robillard). The upper half of this very pretty Cone shows four flexuous purple or pinkish-brown blotches, near the base there are three, with the aperture uppermost four are to be seen, two above and two below. The type is in the collection of Mr. Worcester, of Frankston, Melbourne, Victoria. 277 ON QUEENSLAND AND OTHER AUSTRALIAN LEPI- DOPTERA, WITH DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES.* By Thomas P. Lucas, M.R.C.S.E., L.S.A., & L.R.C.P.Ed. I am indebted to Mr. G. Barnard, whose collection I had the pleasure of inspecting during a most pleasant visit, and to Mr. R. Turner for much of the information contained in this paper. By their assistance I have been able to describe forty-two, which I believe to be new species, and record localities for other rare species. Family SPHINGID.E. Sphinx Eremophil^e, Lucas, " Queenslander," April, 1891. As this species is so nearly allied to £. marmorata, and as the caterpillars were found feeding together by Mr. Barnard, I repeat the description here for comparison; the descriptions of both were first sent to this Society in July, 1890. gQ. 58-70 mm. Palpi grey. Antennae grey, reddish beneath. Head dark fuscous. Thorax fuscous, shoulders and epaulettes grey. Abdomen cinereous grey, with a dark brown line down the centre of dorsum, and deep dark brown angulated lateral lines ; base of segments rich fulvous brown, deep brown angular patches extend from sides to dorsum, between base of each centre segment and next segment. Forewings triangular, elongate, costa nearly straight, rounded toward apex, hindmargin obliquely rounded \ fulvous grey, with darker shadings and with darker fulvous broken bands, not always clearly defined ; 1st band in central * The following paper comprises the substance of two communications read before the Society in May and August, 1890, and now published by order of the Council. — Ed. 278 ON QUEENSLAND AND OTHER AUSTRALIAN LEPIDOPTERA, third of wing at J is shaded off toward base, and becomes diffused toward costa ; 2nd and 3rd bands rise from one stalk at J to J inner margin, which divides into two in a curve to J and ■§ costa, and in some cases splits into three or four bands on costa ; an interrupted ill-defined band rises at J inner margin, and unites with a darker band from § inner margin, at first outwardly, then inwardly, to f- costa ; a lighter brown space separates this from the next band, which runs nearly parallel from J inner margin to 5 costa ; cilia grey, brown at base and on veins. Hindwings grey-brown with shades of dark fulvous, darker toward hind- margin. Caterpillar slender, attenuated anteriorly ; blue grey, speckled with grey ; stomata red ; dorsal and lateral bands vermilion-red, in interrupted patches ; tail black. Found in large numbers by Mr. G. Barnard at the Dawson River, feeding on the Eremoj)hila Mitchelli, locally known as sandalwood. Sphinx marmorata, sp.nov. Q. 60 mm. Head grey, collar black. Palpi blackish-grey. Antennae brown. Thorax hairy, mottled grey and white. Abdo- men ochreous, dorsal and lateral lines black, lateral lines connected by dark black lines with base of each segment, and so forming a square figure in each segment, on either side of dorsum, or an oblong of ground colour, which gives a singular marbled appearance to the insect ; anal segment irrorated grey and white ; underside light grey. Forewings elongate, triangular, costa nearly straight, apex rounded, hindmargin obliquely rounded ; grey, irrorated with white near base, and with fuscous near costa : two oblique fuscous diffused lines from i inner margin to apex of costa, and from J inner margin to apex of hindmargin : veins beyond first line brown, four or five black arrow-shaped lines between veins ; cilia white with smoky-grey spots on veins. Hindwings light brown, light ochreous-grey at base : veins smoky-grey. Caterpillar attenuated anteriorly, glaucous-green, dorsal and lateral lines white, latter with tooth-like projections into each BY THOMAS P. LUCAS. 279 segment ; tail aunulated green and brown. Found in company with preceding by Mr. Barnard on Eremophila Mitchelli. Five caterpillars, only one of which matured to imago. Allied to *S'. Eremophilce, but easily distinguishable by marbled appearance of abdomen, and by darker colour and fuscous bands on wings. Duaringa, Queensland. Family ARCTIAD^E. Calligenia Pilcheri, sp.nov. (JQ. 17-19 mm. Head and palpi vermilion, collar marone-red. Antennae grey, vermilion at the base. Legs vermilion, grey on under side. Thorax deep marone-red, with anterior border behind collar ochreous-yellow, base of epaulettes yellow. Abdomen vermilion. Forewings elongate, strongly dilated, costa moderately arched, apex obtuse, hindmargin obliquely rounded ; deep marone- red, with ochreous-yellow spots ; an irregular square spot at i costa extends to ^ towards inner margin, costal half vermilion : between this and inner margin is a small dot posteriorly ; adjacent to it, from f of inner margin, an irregular row of six spots runs to just before apex of hind margin, but sixth spot does not touch hindmargin ; the inner margin of first spot is vermilion ; a con- spicuous spot at § costa ; two spots on hindmargin in a line with hindmarginal sub-apical spot : cilia marone-red tipped with vermilion. Hind wings with basal half vermilion, posterior half rich marone-red ; cilia marone tipped with pink. Rockhampton ; two specimens, caught by Mr. Pilcher. Calligenia melitaula, Meyr. ; Townsville (Mrs. Barnard). Asura(?) bisecta, sp.nov. (J. 18 mm. Head velvety-black, collar ochreous-yellow. Palpi ochreous-yellow. Antennae bipectinated, black. Thorax black with tip of epaulettes ochreous-yellow. Abdomen black, anal tuft ochreous-yellow. Forewings elongate, triangular, gently dilated, costa straight, hindmargin obliquely rounded ; ochreous-yellow ; 280 ON QUEENSLAND AND OTHER AUSTRALIAN LEPIDOPTERA black at base and with a black band bisecting the wing from base to hindinarginal band opposite ^ hindmargin, and with a dentate projection toward inner margin from middle : a broad black hind- marginal band : cilia grey. Hind wings ochreous-yellow, with broad black hindmarginal band, narrowed to a band of black hairs along inner margin, but more spread out at base ; cilia grey. I think this species will have to be made into another genus* but place it here provisionally. I caught one specimen while out with Mr. Barnard, who had not seen it before. Duaringa, Queensland ; in May. Family HYPSIDJE. Nyctemera secundiana, sp.nov. This species of Nyctemera was included in Meyrick's description of N. tertiana. I got specimens of both species and of N. crescens at Port Douglas, which I submitted to him. I believed with him at the time that both were varieties of one species, which he named new as N. tertiana. I now propose to separate the type as above from the type tertiana. In secundiana the spot between the eyes and the two spots on the collar are prominent and deep black ; in tertiana they are faintly represented or altogether absent. In secundiana the epaulettes are longer, better developed, and the black stripes more prominently shown. In secundiana the white blotch in the hind- wing is more a yellow-white and occupies less than one-third, extending from just before centre of wing with \ depth of wing hindmarginal border; in N. tertiana the whole of the hindwing is more a snow-white, with an angular black border along hind- margin and costa. X. secundiana is common at Brisbane, but though I have caught hundreds of N. arnica and N. secundiana, I never caught the form with the hindwing so broadly white, and to which I propose to restrict Meyrick's name tertiana, in Brisbane. Mr. Barnard takes N. secundiana but never tertiana at Rockhampton. BY THOMAS P. LUCAS. 281 Five species of Nyctemera run very closely. It will be interesting to obtain the history of caterpillars and food plants of all, to ascertain if they are non-interbreeding species, or if they are but climatic varieties. I may sum up the five as follows : — N. annnlata — very black, two small bars of dots in forewings, and one small dot in hindwings, white. New Zealand. ffi. arnica — broad bar of white divided by black veins in fore- wings, small round white spot in hindwings. Melbourne to Bris- bane. i\r. secundiana — broader bar of yellowish-white in forewing, much larger blotch in hind wing. Brisbane to Cooktown. N. tertiana — forewing as secundiana, hindwing § white with narrow black border. Mackay to Cooktown. .V. crescens — narrower white band in forewing; veins not black, in male a club-shaped white mark in middle third of wing, from base outward ; hindwings as in tertiana. Mackay to Cooktown. Family SYNTOMIDID.E. Hydrusa recedens, sp. nov. ^2- 1^-16 mm. Head orange, with a black mark between antennae. Antennae black. Thorax black, orange anteriorly, and with orange epaulettes. Abdomen iridescent, orange, with base of segments narrowly velvet black, apical segment orange, with broader black band at base, and fringe tipped with light smoky- grey Forewings black ; spots thinly scaled, light orange, and leaving the black ground colour only as bands or borders in three series ; first, a clavate spot nearly touching inner margin at \ to half-way across wing, and projecting toward base ; second series in the transverse middle third, nearly touching inner margin, but with a broad costal margin, divided by two lines into three, a sub- quadrate costal spot, a small central triangular spot, a broader triangular spot near inner margin ; third series in posterior third of wing, divided into three bar lines parallel to costa, costal one longer than the other two. Hindwings black; spots light orange; 282 ON QUEENSLAND AND OTHER AUSTRALIAN LEPIDOPTERA, first spot thickly scaled, occupies basal third of wing ; second spot in posterior third of wing almost touching costa. Duaringa (Mr. Barnard). Group BOMBYCINA, Family HEPIALID^E. Porina Kershawi, sp.nov. (J. 70-80, 9. 108 mm. Head and thorax ochreous-fuscous. Antenna? ochreous-fulvous. Abdomen ochreous-fulvous. Fore- wings elongate, costa slightly sinuous, hindniargin obliquely rounded in continuation with inner margin, light ochreous, with patches of fuscous and chains of creamy-white spots and dots edged with fuscous ; costa dark fuscous in basal half, lighter posteriorly ; a creamy-white longitudinal streak in disc from base to near hindniargin, along inner margin of vein 7 ; six rows of creamy-white spots, bordered with fuscous ; 1st as a single dot on costal border, and a dot and line on inner border of discal streak at 1 ; 2nd, dots and short bars from -J costa to § inner margin ; 3rd from costa at § ; 4th from costa immediately beyond, and 5th immediately beyond again ; all as necklaces of bead-like dots con- verge to a point in 2nd line near inner margin ; 6th line from just before apex of costa to junction of inner and hindniargin is doubled at apex and in middle third ; a sub-marginal row of dots of light ground colour bordered by a line of fuscous ; veins fuscous : cilia fuscous. Hind wings ochreous-fulvous ; veins browner fulvous ; cilia ochreous-fulvous. The 9 is larger, more of a drab tint, and less fulvous, but the markings are similar to those in (J. In some specimens the white bead dots are absent, in others they are only defined by the fuscous line rings. Elthani and neighbourhood of Melbourne. I have great pleasure in naming this species after the late Mr. David Kershaw, a young entomologist in Melbourne, from whom I received it, and who was cut oft' by a too early death from a zealous and useful career. BY THOMAS P. LUCAS. 283 Hectomanes fusca, sp.nov. (J. 18-20 mm. Head, antennae, thorax and abdomen fuscous, or fuscous-red. Forewings elongate, costa nearly straight, apex rounded, hindmargin rounded in continuation with inner margin, chocolate-brown or deep fuscous ; costa darker fuscous, with a few dark spots ; discal spot dark fuscous, almost black : cilia ochreous-fuscous. Hindwings smoky-fuscous ; cilia as fore- wings. £. 26-28 mm. Head, thorax and abdomen light drab or ochreous-brown. Forewings, hind border more obliquely rounded than in <£, grey-fuscous or dusty-drab — discal spot indistinct — a number of brownish dots, only seen with glass, give wing a dusted appearance. Hindwings coloured as forewings but without dots. Moe, Gippsland, 1000 feet. Much smaller than H. simulans, Walk., from which it differs in colour and in entire absence of any white mark in disc ; the forewings are broader than in that species. Hectomanes crocea, sp.nov. (J. 26-28 mm. Head and thorax mahogany-red. Antennas fuscous. Abdomen ochreous. Forewings with costa gently rounded, hindmargin rounded, continuous with inner margin, mahogany-red or saffron-red ; small black discal dot : cilia maho- gany-red. Hindwings ochreous-red or saffron-brown ; cilia as forewings. Q. 36-38 mm. Head and thorax a vermilion or brick-red. Abdomen ochreous. Forewings more a light vermilion-red, hind margin obliquely rounded to inner margin, discal spot smoke colour ; in some specimens a number of smoky-grey dots scattered over wing and extending along hind and half way along inner margin: cilia vermilion-red. Hindwings ochreous ; cilia vermilion red. Brisbane. The mahogany-red of the $ and vermilion-red of the £ distin- guish this as perhaps the most showy of the genus. 284 ON QUEENSLAND AND OTHER AUSTRALIAN LEPIDOPTERA, Hepialus Daphnandr^e, sp.nov. Q. 80 mm. Length of body 48 mm. Head green, eyes red. Thorax green. Abdomen anterior third red, posterior | green. Forewings broadly dilate, triangular, costa rounded towards apex, hind margin nearly straight ; green with purple-brown spots along the costa, most developed in middle third, numerous indistinct transverse bluish short lines or dots and forming a continuous dark line broken between veins, from J costa to h inner margin : veins deeper green ; small hindmarginal purple-brown spots between veins : cilia purplish-green. Hindwings with basal half and inner half vermilion-red, remainder of wing yellow-green ; cilia olive-green. From pupa on Daphnandra mierantha ; allied to H. Scotti, Scott. Brisbane. This specimen is, I believe, small ; other larvae were promising to be much larger. Hepialus hilaris, sp.nov. £. 58-62 mm., body 34 mm. Head green. Antennae red. Thorax ochreous-green, with dark green lines on dorsum and sides. Abdomen ochreous-green, with a long orange tuft on either side anteriorly. Forewings elongate sub-trianguiar, costa slightly sinuous, apex sub-falcate ; hindmargin rounded in continuance with inner margin, light pea-green, crossed through entire length by bead-like ring and banded lines of milky-blue and light glaucous-green, enclosing ground-colour spots and lines, giving a very pretty mottled appearance ; costa deep sea-green ; a row of creamy -silvered spots from opposite | costa, but not touching costa, to vein 2 opposite middle of inner margin ; a faint row of bead-like milky-blue rings from f costa to § inner margin, a lunulated dentate like colour line immediately beyond and another sub-marginal with lunules concave and opposite to these : cilia olive-green. Hindwings milky-blue : cilia olive-green. BY THOMAS P. LUCAS. 285 9- 75-90 mm., body 45 mm. Head and thorax green. Antennae red. Abdomen, anterior half red, posterior half green. Forewings pea-green, hindmargin very obliquely rounded ; costa dotted with short purplish-red bars and dots, and hind and inner margins bor- dered with purplish-red line, interrupted near apex by veins ; pea- green, and covered with narrow diffused rings of sea-green between veins, which, in contrast to the enclosed ground-green, gives the appearance of a tessellated pavement. This is more distinct and regular in posterior half, and is more irregular and faintly marked towards base. Two small discal spots of white, surrounded by purple-brown border lines, obliquely to each other at opposite § costa : cilia ochreous-purple. Hindwings salmon-pink, apex of wing and hindmargin light olive-green ; cilia olive-brown. Gippsland ; in stems of wattle and other trees ; allied to H. Scotti, Scott. Family LIPARID^. Teara togata, sp.nov. and Mitchell. Fig. 3. — A more or less perfect individual. Fig. 3a. — Portion of a cephalic shield. Fig. 3&. — A somewhat more perfect specimen than fig. 3, showing the long genal spines embracing the whole of the thorax, x 2. Fig. 3c. — A glabella showing small basal furrows, x 2. Fig. 3d. — A free cheek. Fig. 3e. — Another free cheek, x 2. 321 ON THE SYNONYMY OF HELIX (HADEAJ GULOSA, GOULD. By John Brazier, C.M.Z.S., F.L.S. The subject of this present contribution, Helix (Hadra) gidosa, Gould, was first obtained by me at Port Hacking and other places included in, and now known as, the National Park in 1859-1860; also between Cook's and George's Rivers, at places now called Kogarah, Rockdale, and Hurstville, then known as Gannon's Forest, and at Bulli Pass in 1864, 1865, 1866. Specimens were named and submitted in 1868 to Messrs. George French Angas and Henry Adams for identification, and were duly returned as identical with H. gulosa as defined by Gould in 1846. Gould's specimens were first obtained by Mr. J. Drayton, of the United States Exploring Expedition, in the Illawarra district in the year 1839, and were re-described by Pfeiffer in 1847 as H. coriaria from specimens reputed to have come from Ceylon. The shell was next characterised by Morelet in 1853, under the title H. morosa, as coming from Moreton Bay ; and in 1859 Pfeiffer, under the name of H. coriaria, originally described from Ceylon by himself, in 1847, recorded this species as occurring in Western Australia. Gould, in the Otia Conchologica in 1862, p. 243, suggests a new generic name, Badlstes, for his H. gulosa. In the same year this author also published an account of the occurrence of the species in Australia. In 1864 Dr. Cox re-described H. gulosa under two distinct specific designations, viz., II. Master si and 77. Scotti, the former regarded by him as an intermediate form between H. Grayi, Pfr., and H. Jervisensis, Quoy and Gaimard. Four years subsequently, 1868, Pfeiffer sinks H. gulosa as merely a synonym of H. Lessoni, disregarding Cox's supposed species. 322 ON THE SYNONYMY OP HELIX (HADRA) GULOSA, GOULD. Pfeifter, in the Nomenclator Heliceorum Viventium in 1881 drops the specific name gulosa as synonymic with Lessoni from Port Curtis and reinstates the species under the sub-generic title Bxdistes. Paetel, in his Catalog der Conchy lien-Sammlung, 1889, makes //. gulosa synonymic with Lessoni, Pfr. The latest published account of this species in question is that by Mr. H. A. Pilsbry, in Tryon's Manual Conchology (second series Pulmonata, vol. vi., 1890), where this author evidently is inclined to regard //. coriaria, H. Scotti, H. monacha, and //. morosa as merely varietal forms of the original H. gulosa, Gould. In the following paper I have enumerated a complete synonymy of H. gulosa, Gould ; and from the examination of a very large number of specimens, both living and dead, I cannot hesitate to confirm Pilsbry's surmise that //. coriaria, H. Scotti, H. monacha, II. morosa are undoubtedly identical with //. gulosa, Gould. It is some years since I came to the conclusion that Dr. Cox's species, Mastersi and Scotti, were not good species. According to Drayton, as mentioned by Gould (U. S. Exploring Expedition, vol. xn. p. 65, 1852), the living animal does not glide from place to place as other Helices, but proceeds by flexing the foot in an undulating manner, and on this account Gould, in 1862, bestowed upon the species the sub-generic name Badistes. Having examined many hundreds of living specimens, both in their natural haunts and in confinement, I am compelled to contradict the statement that this mollusc " flexes the foot ;" it moves in the ordinary gliding manner. I find that I made a marginal note to this effect in 1879 in a copy of Gould's Otia Conchologica, kindly presented to me by my valued friend and correspondent, Mr. John Howland Thomson, C.M.Z.S., New Bedford, U.S.A. Consequently, as pointed out by me to my young friend, Mr. Chas. Hedley, who has lately commenced to write upon the Australian Land Mollusca, and is about to publish an account of the anatomy of this species, the sub-genus Badistes has been created under an erroneous impression, and in my opinion //. gulosa, Gould, is attributable to the old sub-genus Hadra, as placed by Pilsbry. I have seen specimens of this species exhibited BY JOHN BRAZIER. 323 before this Society as large varieties of H. Grayi, Pfr., from Bottle Forest. Hanley and Theobald, in their Conchologia Indica, state that Australian specimens cannot be distinguished from the shell delineated in their figure ; to my eye the figure indicates dwarf specimens found by me on Comerong Island, Shoalhaven. The species may have been introduced into the Island of Ceylon in boxes of plants taken from New South Wales, specimens having, perhaps, been sent by the late Sir William Denison, when Governor of N.S.W., to the Indian Museum, as that gentleman was constantly contributing specimens to the Indian colony. Helix (Hadra) gulosa, Gould. 1846. Helix gulosa, Gould, Proc. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist., vol. n. p. 165 ; Expedition, Shells, p. 17 1847. //. coriaria, Pfeiffer, Zeitschr. f. Mai., p. 145 1847. H. coriaria, Pfeiffer in Martini and Chemnitz Conch. Cab., 2nd edition (Kuster), p. 265, pi. 120, fig. 1-2 1848. H. gulosa, Gould, Pfeiffer in Monogr. Hel. Viv., Vol. I. p. 339 1848. H. coriaria, Pfeiffer, Monogr. Hel. Viv., Vol. I. p. 445, sp. 501a 1852. H. gulosa, Gould, United States Exploring Expedition, Mollusca and Shells, Vol. xn. pp. 64, 65, pi. 3, fig. 43, animal with shell ; 43a, the aperture ; 43b, the base of the shell 1852. H. gulosa, Gould, Forbes in Appendix to Macgillivray's Voyage of H.M.S. Rattlesnake, Vol. n. p. 370, No. 32 1852. H. coriaria, Reeve in Conch. Icon., Helix, Vol. VII. pi. 79, fig. 417 1853. //. gulosa, Gould, Pfeiffer in Monogr. Hel. Viv., Vol. Hi. p. 229, No. 1302 22 ■Un OF HELIX IHADR.0 GULOSA, GOULD, H. norxMa, M mJ lie Conchy!.. Vol. iv. p. 369, - 15 H. coriaria, Monogr. Hel. Viw. Vol. in. p. 150, N . V?\ H. and A. Adams, Genera of recent Mollusc*, Vol. n. p. \ EL coriario* Pfr., Tenn«=: Island — Physical. Historical, and Topographical— 23£ ; '. 1049 H. vhIm, Gould, Pfeiifer in Monor i a synonym of H. Lt&cni Pfr. H. moroia, Morelet, Pfeiflerin Monogr. Hel. V-; -.-.. VoL n\ 1559. H. miwirUn, Pfeiffer, Proc ZooL Soc London. 43,05.7 I860. H. (Had™)m>orw*L. Albers, Die Heliceen, p. 166 391 1863. H. fmJbm, Gould, Oaa Conchologica. p, 17 1 R. (BmteksJfmlaML, Gould, Oaa Gmchologica, p. 243 1S64. R. mmmekm, Co, Catalogue of A nana Han Land Sheik, p. Skelk> p, 1- 18&L E. Midterm* Cox, Anaak and Mag. Nat. HklL, 3rd VoL rnr. p. 15L, No. 6; Catalogue of Aaatralim Skdk, pL 19, No. 109 18W, g Sartfc Cox, CVilnfflBi of AwttraKm Tamd SfcriK p. 36, BY JOHN BRAZIER. 325 1868. //. coriaria, Pfeiffer, Monogr. Hel. Viv., Vol. v. p. 236, No. 1428 1868. E. Mastersi, Cox, Pfeiffer in Monogr. Hel. Viv., Vol. v. p. 237, No. 1431 1868. H. monacha, Pfeiffer, Monogr. Hel. Viv., Vol. v. p. 27S, No. 1785 1868. II. gulosa, Gould, Pfeiffer in Monogr. Hel. Viv., Vol. v. p. 320 ; quotes it as a synonym of H. Lessoni, Pfr. 1868. H. morosa, Morelet, Pfeiffer in Monogr. Hel. Viv., Vol. v. p. 320, No. 2117 1868. K Scotti, Cox, Pfeiffer in Monogr. Hel. Viv., Vol. v. p. 340, No. 2230 1868. //. (Pomatia) coriaria, Cox, Monogr. Aust. Land Shells, p. 36, No. 92, pi. 2, fig. 7, pi. 8, fig. 10, pi. 10, fig. 5 1868. B.. (Pomatia) monacha, Cox, Monogr. Aust. Land Shells, p. 38, No. 98, pi. 18, fig. 13, from Proc. Zool. Soc. London, 1859 1868. H. (Camama) morosa, Cox, Monogr. Aust. Land Shells, p. 60, No. 151 1868. H. (Pomatia) Scotti, Cox, Monogr . Aust.Land Shells, p. 39, No. 100, pi. 10, tig. 4, 4a 1869. Galaxias monacha, Frauenfeld, Verh. k.-k. Zool. Bot. Ges. Wien, p. 875 1876. H. coriaria, Pfeiffer, Monogr. Hel. Viv., Vol. VII. p. 272, No. 1803 1876. H. monacha, Pfeiffer, Monogr. Hel. Viv., Vol. VII. pp. 322, 579, No. 2227 1876. H. coriaria (var.), Hanley and Theobald, Conchologia Indica, Land and Fresh Water Shells of British India, p. 25, pi. 53, fig. 10 1876. Fruticola coriaria, Theobald, Catalogue of the Land and Fresh Water Shells of British India, p. 25 326 ON THE SYNONYMY OF HELIX (HADRA) GULOSA, GOULD, 1876. H. gulosa, Gould, Pfeiffer in Monogr. Hel. Viv., Vol. vn. p. 367 ; quotes it as a synonym of H. Lessoni, Pfr. 1876. E. morosa, Pfeiffer in Monogr. Hel. Viv., Vol. vn. p. 367, No. 2618 1876. E. Scotti, Cox, Pfeiffer in Monogr. Hel. Viv., Vol. vn. p. 394, No. 2788 1877. E. coriaria, Pfr., Monogr. Hel. Viv., Vol. vm. p. 574 1878. E. (Badistes) gulosa, Gould, Pfeiffer in Nomenclator Heliceorum Viventium, p. 189 ; quotes it as a synonym of E. Lesson I, Pfr. 1888. E. coriaria. Cox, Handbook of Sydney, for the use of the members of the Australasian Association for the Advance- ment of Science, p. 84, No. 34 1888. E. monacha, Cox, Handbook of Sydney, for the use of the members of the Australasian Association for the Advance- ment of Science, p. 84, No. 35 1889. E. fPomatia) coriaria, Paetel, Catalog cler Conchylien- Sammlung, p. 120 1889. E. (Pomatia) monacha, Paetel, Catalog cler Conchylien- Sammlung, p. 157 1889. E, gulosa, Gld. ist Lessoni, Pfr., Paetel, Catalog der Con- chylien-Sammlung, p. 137 1890. E. (Pomatia) gulosa, Gould, Ethericlge, junr., Records of the Australian Museum, Vol. I. No. 1, p. 26 1890. //. (Eadra) gulosa, Pilsbry in Tryon's Manual of Con- chology, second series, Pulmonata, Vol. VI. p. 131, pi. 33, figs. 66, 67 1890. //. (Eadra) coriaria, Pilsbry in Tryon's Manual of Con- chology, second series, Pulmonata, Vol. vi. p. 132, p]. 43, figs. 48, 49, 51 1890. //. (Eadra) Scotti, Pilsbry in Tryon's Manual of Con- chology, second series, Pulmonata, Vol. vi. p. 133, pi. 43, fig. 47 BY JOHN BRAZIER. 327 1890. II. (Iladra) monacha, Pilsbry in Tryon's Manual of Con- chology, second series, Palmonata, Vol. vi. p. 133, pi. 43, fig. 39 1890. //. (Iladra) morosa, Pilsbry in Tryon's Manual of Con- chology, second series, Pulmonata, Vol. vi. p. 134, pi. 34, fig. 10 1890. //. (Iladra J gulosa, Pilsbry in Tryon's Manual of Con- chology, second series, Pulmonata, Vol. vi. p. 304 1891. Iladra gulosa, Hedley (Anatomy), Records of the Aus- tralian Museum, Vol. i. No. 9, October, p. 196, pi. 29 Habitat. — Illawarra (Mr. J. Drayton, 1839); Port Hacking, Sutherland, 353 ; Heathcote, 626 ; Waterfall, 720-800 feet above sea level (J. Brazier, 1859-1860) ; Rockdale, Kogarah, Hurstville, 55, 69, 217 feet above sea level, Bulli Pass, 1000 feet (./. Brazier, 1864, 1865, 1866) ; Merimbula, Kiama, Ulladulla (Mr. George Masters, 1864, 1865, 1866) ; Moss Vale, Blue Mountains, 2205 feet above sea level (J. Brazier, 1865) ; Clarence River (Mr. John Macgillivray, 1865, 1866) ; Nullo Mountains, County of Hunter {Mr. Edward King Cox, 1867) ; gullies in Cabbage-tree Scrub at head of Waterfall Gully, Illawarra railway line, at base of ranges and gullies in the Mulgoa Valley, running into the Nepean River, Kurrajong (Dr. James C. Cox, 1868, 1888); Wingham, Upper Manning River (J. Brazier, June, 1870) ; Comerong Island, Shoalhaven River (J. Brazier, October, 1874) ; Blackheath, Blue Mountains, 3494 feet above sea level (J. Brazier, 1875) ; Erskine Valley, Nepean River (J. Brazier, 1864, 1866, 1888); Cambe- warra (Mr. T. Whitelegge, 1885); Sassafras Tableland, 5000 feet above sea level (Messrs. R. Etheridge, Junr., and J. A. Thorpe, August, 1889) ; Lawson, Blue Mountains, 2399 feet above sea level (Mr. E. G. W. Palmer, June, 1891) ; Kangaroo Valley, in ranges above the Shoalhaven River (Messrs. J. A. Thorpe and C. Harris) ; Ash Island, Hunter River ( Mr. Alexander Walker Scott) ; Mount Keira, Wollongong, 1863 {Mrs. Edward Forde) ; Kiaina {Mr. Simeon P. Hitchcock, August, 1891) ; flank of Mount Keira (Mr. Simeon P. Hitchcock, December 12, 1891). 328 ON THE SYNONYMY OF HELIX (HADRA) GULOSA, GOULD. The whole of these localities are in the colony of New South Wales. Doubtful localities : Ceylon (Dr. Pfeiffer on the authority of Mr. Hugh Cuming, 1847) ; Moreton Bay (on the authority of Monsieur Morelet, 1853) ; Western Australia (Dr. Pfeiffer on the authority of Mr. Hugh Cuming, 1859). The correct spelling of one of the localities is Nullo Hills, or Mountains, not " Nulla," as quoted by some authors. 329 OBSERVATIONS ON THE CHLORAEMIDAE, WITH SPECIAL REFERENCE TO CERTAIN AUSTRALIAN FORMS. By William A. Haswell, M.A., D.Sc., Edin., F.L.S., Challis Professor of Biology, University of Sydney. [Plates xxvi-xxviii.] The following notes have reference chiefly to a remarkable member of this family which occurs on the Queensland coast ; but the opportunity has been taken to give some account at the same time of two other Chloraemids which have been found by the author in Port Jackson, and which have not hitherto been described.* A specimen of Stylarioides monilifer was investigated for comparison with the new species, and a few remarks on its structure will be found here and there in the following pages. I. Description of Coppingeria longisetosa, n.g. et sp. I have seen only two specimens of this remarkable Chaetopod. One was dredged in 1881 by Dr. Coppinger and myself in Port Molle, Queensland (lat. 20° S.), at a depth of 15 fathoms. The other was got long before by the Hon. Sir William Macleay during his expedition to Torres Straits and New Guinea in the 11 Chevert," and was dredged off Darnley Island. I have figured both of these specimens, as one is more complete in one respect and the other in another ; and I find it advantageous to describe * The only previously known Australian species of this family appears to be the Siphonostomum affine described by me in a paper published in the Proceedings of this Society. The same name had, unfortunately, been applied previously by Leidy to another species ; but the latter, as pointed out by Grube, is probably a Stylarioides. 330 OBSERVATIONS ON THE CHLORAEMIDAE, their external characters separately. The Port Molle specimen has been cut into sections ; the Darnley Island specimen remains in the Macleay Museum, in the University of Sydney. Specimen A (that from Port Molle) has, apparently, had a portion of the posterior extremity broken off. Otherwise it is admirably preserved — particularly as regards the branchiae, the tentacles and papilla?. Specimen B is entire as regards the seg- ments ; but the praestomium has been broken off, and the branchiae and tentacles are therefore lost. Specimen A (plate xxvi. tig. 1). — The body is sub-cylindrical, tapering gradually posteriorly, the greatest breadth being at a little distance behind the cephalic extremity, where there is a slight dilatation. Round the latter is a circlet of sixteen very large setae, which are nearly as long as the body, thick at the base, finely tapering, and slightly curved towards the distal end. They are marked transversely by tine transverse lines, giving them the appearance of being 'composed of a number of segments. In most cases there is situated close to the base of each large seta a very much smaller accessory seta. All the large setae in this specimen, as in the other, have attached to them numerous individuals of a species of Loxosoma. There are twenty-six segments in the body (from which the posterior portion has been broken off). The number of the segments can only be reckoned by counting the bundles of setae, except in the case of a few of the most posterior, which are separated from one another by distinct constrictions. All the segments behind the head bear setae ; but the parapodia are not distinguishable. All, except the first seven, have dorsal and ventral sets of setae separated from one another by a short space. The dorsal setae alone are present in the first seven segments, or, at least, if ventral setae are present in these segments, they do not project on the surface. In the first segment (behind those that bear the cephalic setae) there are four very long and very fine dorsal setae, stouter and longer than those of the succeeding segments, and directed forwards. The following segments, BY WILLIAM A. HASWELL. 331 except the first six, which have only dorsal setae, have each a bundle of four fine, tapering dorsal setae and three stouter, short ventral setae, which are curved at the ends. (Plate xxvu. fig. 9.) The dorsal setae are in fan-like groups directed forwards and out- wards. The body wall is tolerably firm. The surface is covered with closely-set papillae, which vary in size, some being elongate, others very short ; a number of those around the bases of the anterior large setae are very long and slender, with slightly enlarged rounded ends : a detailed account of the papillae is given further on. The head (fig. 2) consists of a stout base, bearing distally a pair of tentacles, and a pair of branchiferous lobes. The base is 8 mm. in length, and at its posterior end is about half the thick- ness of the anterior part of the body, narrowing slightly towards its distal end ; closely embraced behind by the bases of the ring of large anterior setae and by the elongated papillae ; its surface is dotted over with papillae similar to those covering the body, but smaller. It consists of the greatly produced peristomium surrounded, as by a sheath, by a thin prolongation of the first body- segment. The praestomium is produced in front laterally into the compressed bases of the branchiferous lobes ; mesially in front is a small lobe bearing two pairs of eyes ; in front of the mouth are borne the two tentacles. The branchiferous lobes are somewhat club-shaped, a little shorter than the head, and covered with branchiae, about sixty on each. The two tentacles are cylindrical, longitudinally grooved bodies, which taper slightly towards the end, rather longer than the head, but scarcely a third of the diameter, devoid of papillae. The total length of the specimen, including the setae, was 5 cm. ; of the body excluding setae and head-lobe, 2 J cm. The head lobe with the branchiae was 1*2 cm. in length. The greatest breadth of the body was -5 cm. ; the breadth at the posterior end •2 cm. Specimen B (fig. 3). — The form of the body is approximately cylindrical, broadest near the anterior end and gradually tapering 332 OBSERVATIONS ON THE CHLORAEMIDAE, backwards. There are forty-three segments, which are quite distinct behind, but in front are not to be distinguished but for the bundles of setae. The latter are situated on slight transverse elevations ; there are four slender dorsal setae directed forward and three curved ventral seta? ; the latter first appear on the fifth segment. The head-lobe is similar to that of specimen A, but its extremity with the tentacles and the branchiae has been lost ; it is separated into two parts by a distinct narrow annular groove. The large setfe surrounding the head are twelve in number. The total length, inclusive of the setae, is 1 decimetre ; that of the long setae 4 cm. The remnant of the head-lobe is 1 cm. in length. II. Position and relations of Coppingeria. There can be no doubt of the relationship of this remarkable Polychaet to the members of the family Chloraemidae, both in external features, and, as will subsequently be shown, in internal structure. But there can I think be little more doubt that it is sufficiently far removed from its nearest relative — Stylarioides — to require a distinct generic appellation. The anterior seta? constitute the most striking feature ; but perhaps a more important characteristic is the bifid and produced branchial apparatus with its numerous branchial filaments. I propose, to call the new genus Coppingeria* and the species longisetosa. The characteristic features of the genus may be thus summarised: — Body not greatly elongated, swollen in front, composed of a moderate number of segments which are not distinct except in the posterior portion of the body. Parapodia not prominent, * After my friend Dr. R. W. Coppinger, M.D., Fleet-Surgeon, R.N., surgeon of H.M.S. "Discovery," during the Arctic Expedition of 1875-6, and of H.M.S. "Alert" during her southern cruise. In the account which he published of the latter voyage Dr. Coppinger thus refers to the worm under consideration : — "Among the Annelids was one with long glassy opalescent bristles surrounding the oral aperture and projecting forwards to a distance of one and a half inches from the praestomium. " — (Cruise of the "Alert," p. 187.) BY WILLIAM A. HASWELL. 333 with two sets of setae, except in a few of the most anterior seg- ments ; seta3 of both sets few in number ; those of the dorsal set very fine, tapering ; those of the ventral set stouter, curved at the ends. The seta? of the most anterior segments greatly prolonged, forming a complete circlet directed forwards. The praestomium with two pairs of eyes. Branchiae numerous, cylindrical, borne on a pair of club-shaped prolongations of the praestomium. Tentacles very long,* cylindrical, smooth, with a ventral longi- tudinal groove. Peristomium produced, capable of being retracted together with the praestomium (and the branchiae?) within a sheath formed for it by the following segment. Papillae very numerous, not arranged in rows, and equally developed on all sides of the body ; some of those around the bases of the anterior large seta? extremely produced. Ill — Description op two species of Stylarioides*. Stylarioides cinctus (Plate xxvi. fig. 4). The total length (exclusive of the setae) is 2 -2 5 cm. The longest seta? of the anterior segments are nearly one centimetre in length. The greatest breadth of the body is 3 mm. The total number of segments is 48. The praestomium (fig. 5) is produced forwards Jon the dorsal side into a curved lamina, on the anterior edge of which are situated the branchiae. Of the latter there are ten, all cylindrical filaments, the central pair considerably longer than the others and not very much shorter than the tentacles : each branchia presents a pair of longitudinal crimson bands. The antennae are dorso- ventral ly compressed, transversely corrugated, with a deep longitudinal ventral groove, about -the length of the first four segments. The body is cylindrical, somewhat dilated in the anterior portion, narrowing suddenly behind the twentieth segment ; the posterior, narrow part tapering posteriorly. In a second specimen the ten * A3 defined by Grube. 334 OBSERVATIONS ON THE CHLORAEMIDAE, most anterior segments are constricted. The surface is of a dull brown colour, without a distinct layer of mucus, encrusted on the dorsal surface for some little distance at the anterior end with firmly fixed and closely set sand-grains.* The papillae are not very numerous or very prominent, scattered over the surface, with a tendency to the formation of irregular transverse rows ; they are equally developed on the dorsal and on the ventral surface. On the elevations from which the elongated setse of the two anterior segments spring, there are papillae of a slightly greater length than those on the general surface of the body. Each papilla is situated on a little elevated area. The segments are not very distinct in the anterior swollen part of the body, but are much more evident behind. The parapodia do not project from the surface. The seta? of the first two segments are 40-50 in number, slender, slightly curved inwards, directed forwards. On each of the other segments there are three or four very slender dorsal seta3 and three stouter ventral seta?. The former are transversely striated, as is usual in this family ; they are rather longer than the segments ; the latter have a short terminal segment, which is unjointed, curved, and pointed, articulating with the elongated, transversely striated basal portion ; the ventral seta? project more prominently from the surface in the anterior segments than in the posterior. Specimens of this species, together with the following, were got with the dredge near Watson's Bay in Port Jackson. It belongs to that section of the genus to which Grube refers S. parmatus, Gr., S. Cariboum, Gr., and S. cingulatus, Gr., and to which also S. cajiensis, Mcintosh, belongs — all these forms being characterised by the presence on the dorsal surface of the anterior part of the body of a space covered with closely cemented sand- grains. I cannot identify the Port Jackson species with any of these. * A similar feature is described by Grube ["Annulata Semperiana," 'M6m. de l'Acad. Imp. des Sci. de St. Petersbourg,' vii. serie, t. xxv. (1878)] in his Stt/larioides parmatns from the Philippines, and by Mcintosh in Troj>honia capemis (" Challenger" Reports, Annelida). BY WILLIAM A. HASWELL. 335 Stylarioides Horstii, (Plate xxvi. figs. 6-8). Both of the specimens of this species that are at my disposal are imperfect ; the more complete of the two is 1*5 cm. in length. The longest seta? are 2*5 mm. in length. The greatest breadth is 3*5 mm. The number of segments is 39. The head and branchial apparatus are retracted in both speci- mens, but, when dissected out, showed the following features : — The tentacles are of about the length of the first six segments of the body ; their greatest breadth is about one-seventh of their length. They are deeply grooved longitudinally on the ventral side — the ridges bordering the groove being convoluted — and are very finely and closely corrugated transversely on the opposite side. The branchiae, six (?) in number, are very long, cylindrical, and pig- mented at the ends. The body is cylindrical, of nearly uniform breadth as far as the 33rd segment, though rather narrower at the anterior end ; narrowing suddenly behind the 33rd segment. There is no encrustation of sand-grains. The seta? of the first two segments, about a dozen in number on either side in each, are greatly prolonged ; they do not form a ring, but are arranged in definite lateral bundles. They are exceedingly fine, and are divided by transverse lines into numerous joints; they are covered with stalked infusoria like the rest of the setae. The setso of the third segment, 4-5 in number, are more conspicuous than those of the rest of the body, and are about half the length of the second segment ; there appear to be no ventral setae on this segment. The remaining segments all have dorsal and ventral setae, which are both longer than is usual in this genus. Of the dorsal setas there are five to eight in each bundle, many-jointed, very slender, tapering, — their length nearly half the breadth of the body. The ventral setae, of which there are 4-6 — usually 5 — in each fasciculus, are much thicker than the dorsal, unjointed, laterally compressed, often twisted, slightly hooked at the ends, much longer in the anterior segments than they are further back. 336 OBSERVATIONS ON THE CHLORAEMIDAE, A remarkable feature is the arrangement of the papilla?. Those of the first two segments are elongated, especially round the bases of the fasciculi of setae. On the dorsal surface of the body each papilla is elevated on a conical wart-like protuberance, while on the ventral surface these elevations are absent. They are more numerous than in the preceding species, smaller and with a tendency to form transverse rows only on the dorsal surface. I am not quite clear as to the position of this species ; but if Grube's definitions of the genera Trophonia and Stylarioides be followed, the retractile praestomium would place it in the latter ^enus. At the same time, the considerable development of the setae behind the head brings it nearer the species of Trophonia. It has considerable resemblance to the European T. plumosa, Miiller ; but the tubercles on that species are described as being found all over the body instead of being confined to the dorsal surface. IV. — Integument and papilla. In Goppingeria the cuticle, which is of considerable thickness over all parts except the branchiae, is covered superficially with a layer of a granular-looking substance with included irregular particles, which is evidently the layer of mucus with entangled granules of foreign matter present in other members of this family. This layer, however, though represented in all parts except the prae- and peristomium, with the branchiae and ten- tacles, is comparatively thin, being for the most part of about the same thickness as the cuticle. A similar layer of tough gela- tinous matter has been noticed by all who have given attention to the structure of this family of Polychaeta. In Siphonostomum it is separable with a little trouble from the body of the worm ; but in the present form, as in Stylarioides, it is firmly adherent, so as to appear as a definite layer of the integument. In Coppingeria the cuticle has the appearance of consisting of a single layer. But in Stylarioides ductus (PI. xxvu. fig. 15) there are two, the more internal having many papillae and ridges, which penetrate into the outer. BY WILLIAM A. HASWELL. 337 The epidermis (plate XXVI I. fig. 15) is a very thin layer save in certain situations, only reaching a considerable development on the praestomiurn and part of the peristomium, the grooves of the tentacles and the branchial filaments. Beneath each of the papillae the epidermis becomes modified as described below. It consists of flattened cells (fig. 16) of polygonal outline, the reticu- lated protoplasm of which presents smaller and larger vacuoles. The reticulated substance of neighbouring cells is separated by narrow uncolourable bands, which anastomose and present the appearance of a branching system of fine channels, which may be connected with the secretion of the mucus. Like the adherent layer of mucus the papillce are specially characteristic of the Ohloraemidae, and appear to be present in one form or another in all the members of the family. They have been described under various names, " mucus-secreting papillae," " poils," "tubercles," "granules." They attain their greatest development as regards length in Sijyhonostomum, where they are greatly elongated, so as to penetrate to the surface through the relatively very thick layer of mucus. In Coppingeria (plate xxvn. figs. 11-14) they occur over the entire surface of the body, giving it a very remarkable appearance when examined with a lens, owing to their resemblance to the tube-feet of a sporadipodous Holothurian. They are not of uniform length, but vary considerably in this respect, a fact which might be apt to produce the erroneous impression that they are extensile and retractile. They are specially developed around the bases of the cephalic setae, where they attain a length of as much as 3 or 4 mm. In other parts they are much shorter, on an average -5 mm. in length. Their form is subcylindrical, with a slight terminal knob- like enlargement ; in the shorter forms there is usually a consider- able amount of constriction at the base, and in these also the apex is pushed in to form a shallow cup-like concavity, which may, however, though very regular, have been produced, or at least increased, by the action of the alcohol. The memoirs of Delle Chiaje not being at present accessible to me, the earliest detailed account of these papillae which I have 338 OBSERVATIONS ON THE CHLORAEMIDAE, met with is that of Dujardin. In hi3 account of Chloraema Edwardsii* he speaks of the sort of fleece or felt with which it is covered, composed of hollow flexible filaments, club-shaped at the extremity, and constituting a series of minute stalked glands secreting the mucus. Costaf in his account of Siphonostoma diplochaitos makes mention of the papillae or stalked glands, as he regards them. Those of Lophiocephalus he describes as vascular and as having an aperture at the extremity for the discharge of the mucus. Leuckart in his "Beitrage zur Kenntniss der Fauna von Island" J also describes the papillae of Siphonostomum vaginiferum as appendages of the vascular system ; but he contends that, though the extremity may present a pit-like depression, it is never per- forated. He is inclined to favour Rathke's and Costa's view that they have to do with the secretion of the mucus, but suggests that they may also be concerned in the process of respiration, Schmarda§ in his description of Trophonia xanthotricha men- tions the presence in each segment of a transverse row of little suckers which when retracted appear like minute warts. These, he states, the animal uses to fasten itself, and also employs them in locomotion, like the tube-feet of the Echinoderms. Quatrefages|| gives the following account of these structures in Chloraema Dujardinii : — " Les poils recouvrent le corps tout entier a l'exception de la face ventrale. lis sont formes par une tige tres grele, qui se renfle brusquement a l'extremite. Ce ren- flement est ordinairement presque piriforme aux poils voisins des pieds et simplement arrondi sur le reste du corps. A l'interieur, on distingue des cloisons cellulaires irregulieres, qui rappellent * " Observations sur quelques Annelides marines." 'Ann. des Sci. Nat.' 2e sene, tome xi. (1839), p. 289. + "Description de quelques Annelides nouvelles du Golfe de Naples." 'Ann. des Sci. Nat.' 2e s6rie, tome xvi., 1841. % Archiv f. Naturg. xxix. (1849). § Neue wirbellose Thiere. || Histoire Naturelle des Annoys," tome i., p. 474 (1865). BY WILLIAM A. HASWELL. 339 celles de l'ame d'une plume . . . Partout ils sont noyes dans une mucosite parfaiternent transparente." . . . In his "Memoire sur la famille des Chlorerniens,"* he had previously expressed the opinion that the granular contents, in the case at least of some of the papillae, were continuous with the epidermis. Claparedef gives the most complete account of the papillae. In Stylarioides monilifer he states that their form appears usually cylindrical, but adds that that is due to the encrusting layer of mucus, on the removal of which the papilla appears in the form of a spherical button at the end of a pedicle. Both pedicle and button are formed of two layers, the more external of which is homogeneous and is a continuation of the cuticle, while the other, finely granular, is the subcuticular layer. He had not succeeded by means of any re-agent in discovering any nuclei in the granular layer. The same structures in Trophonia eruca he describes in similar terms. In the case of SipJwnostoina diplochditos the same author describes the peduncle of the papillae as formed of a cuticular envelope and an axial granular layer with ill-defined longitudinal fibrillation. In this axial substance, numerous elliptical nuclei, having their long axes parallel with the axis of the peduncle, are brought into view under the action of acetic acid. The base of the club-like enlargement is filled with globular finely granular masses without cellular structure. Further on the central sub- stance re-assumes its ill-defined fibrillar structure, and terminates in several pyriform bodies of a sulphur-yellow colour. He denies the asserted vascularity of the papillae, and sets them down as without doubt tactile organs. Grubej comes back to the view of Costa and Leuckart that the papillse are concerned with the secretion of the layer of mucus. * 'Ann. Sci. Nat.' 3e sene, tome xn. (1849), p. 277. t " Les Annelides Ch^topodes du Golfe de Naples," p. 357 (1868). % " Bemerkungen iiber die Familie der Chlorhaeminen." * Bericht der Schles. Gesellsch.' 1876, p. 37. 23 340 OBSERVATIONS ON THE CHLORAEMIDAE, Studer in his acoount of Brada mammillata* describes the epithelium as consisting of narrow cylindrical cells, and gives an account of certain sac-like structures formed from groups of modified epithelial cells, which he regards as glands, leading by a duct to a pore on the summit of one of the tubercles. These so-called glands are the basal ganglia of the papillae described below. Joyeux-Laffuie holds with Kolliker that there is every reason to regard the papillae as tactile organs. In most respects my own observations on this point agree with those of Claparede; and I have been able to add some details regarding the structure of the appendages in question which go to confirm his opinion of their function. In Coppingeria (figs. 11-14) all the papillae have essentially the same structure. Most externally is a thick firm layer continuous with the cuticle of the general surface. Immediately below this is a thin layer continuous with the epithelium. These layers bound a cylindrical cavity, which is continued at the base into a narrow canal. Immediately below the base of each papilla is a little ganglion composed of a rounded group of cells with a mass of granular matter on its deeper face.f Delicate strands run outwards from this basal ganglion and, passing through the narrow neck of the papilla, enter a second ganglion in the base of the latter. From this there runs to the extremity of the papilla an axial strand of fibres with occasional nuclei, and from this run out a few similar but finer branch strands, which end in the epithelium. The axial strand breaks up at the end into a few delicate radiating fibres, which terminate in a group of cells, constituting what might be regarded as a third ganglion at the extremity of the papilla. In view of their structure, there can be no doubt that these are sensory papillae. They contain no muscular elements, and, there- fore, can have nothing to do with locomotion or fixation. They contain no cells that can be construed as gland-cells, and therefore * "Beitrage zur Naturgeschichte wirbelloser Thiere in Kerguelensland. " 'Arch, f. Naturg.' 1878. t The granular matter is not present in the case of the elongated papillae at the anterior end of the body. BY WILLIAM A. HASWELL. 341 they cannot have specially to do witli the secretion of mucus. Their structure is almost exactly similar in all essential particulars to that of the papillae on the elytra of the Polynoidae (fig. 18), and I have no doubt that the function is the same in both cases.* In Stylarioides ductus the form of the papillae (fig. 15) is similar to that of those of Copping evict ; but each papilla here is situated on the summit of a conical elevation, in which is contained the relatively large basal ganglion. In Stylarioides Horstii the papillae (figs. 17a and 176) are very long and slender, not unlike those of Siphonostomum, but with only a very faint terminal swelling. Each is covered, except at the extreme end, by a very thick layer of tough mucus. In Stylarioides monilifer (fig. 19) the form and structure of the papillae is essentially similar to those of S. cinctus, the basal part being, however, relatively longer. V. — Blood-vascular system; branchiae; unpaired gland. Considerable discrepancies exist between the descriptions of the vessels in the Ghloraemidae given by different authors. Dujardinf simply states that he had seen the green blood circu- late in dorsal and ventral longitudinal vessels with numerous transverse branches. CostaJ describes the ventral vessel ("vaisseau abdominal ou veineux ") in Lophiocephalus as not extending through the length of the body and not adhering to the body-wall, but as free, arising from the lower part of the oesophagus, increasing in size as it extends backwards, attaching itself to the walls of the stomach, again becoming reduced in size and losing itself in ramifications on that organ as well as on the wall of the body. From the ventral vessel it passes to the branchiae, by which it returns through the dorsal vessel or heart, which in turn breaks up into * Vide Jourdan, "Structure des elytres de quelques Polyuoes," ' Zool. Anz.,' 8, p. 128. + L.c. (8). JL.C. (6). 342 OBSERVATIONS ON THE CHLORAEMIDAE, branches on the stomach. In Siphonostoma diplocliciitos he des- cribes the circulation as similar to that of Lophiocephalus, with the exception that both dorsal and ventral vessels have a dilatation situated much nearer the head. Qnatrefages* states that in Chloraema Dujardinii there are two dorsal trunks, which are united in front and behind in all the extent of the narrow part of the intestinal tube. But they become isolated and attain a more considerable size on arriving at the dilated portion possessing a layer of hepatic cells. Here each of them becomes cemented to one of the sides of the digestive tube, and they become united anew in the region of the oesophagus to form a thick fusiform contractile trunk, which drives the blood towards the branchiae. Claparedef describes the dorsal and ventral vessels inStylarioides as both being simple, with lateral branches in each segment ; the intestine is accompanied by two inferior enteric vessels situated close together. G rube J merely mentions the presence of dorsal and ventral vessels with transverse branches. In his "Recherches sur le systeme vasculaire des Annelides"§ Jacquet describes at considerable length the vascular system in Sijihonostoma diplocha'itos. He alludes to the observations of Delle Chiaje, Costa, Quatref ages, and Claparede, already referred to, with regard more especially to their interpretation of the character of what he calls the dorsal vessel. Referring to the statement of Claparede that the structure in question is a gland which has been mistaken for a blood-vessel owing to its colour, he expresses the opinion that this soi-disant gland only differs from the ordinary blood-vessels in its deeper colour, which is due to its larger size and the larger quantity of liquid which it contains as well as to the presence of pigmented elements in its walls. * "Memoire sur la famille des Chloremiens," 'Ann. Sci. Nat.' 3e. serie, t. xii. (1849). t " Annelides Ch^topodes du Golfe de Naples," p. 363. X "Bemerkungen iiber die Familie der Chloraeminen," 'Bericht der Schles. Gesellsch.,' 1876, p. 39. § " Mittheil. a.d. zool. Stat, zu Neap.," vi. Bd. (1SS5), pp. 370-379. BY WILLIAM A. HASWELL. 343 His description begins with the branchial vessels. In each bianchia there are two vessels, communicating with one another at the extremity of the filament. To the bases of the branchiae the blood is carried by a canal coming from the neighbourhood of the end of the dorsal contractile trunk. This canal divides into branches for the branchial filaments (one to each), and also gives off a pair of branches to the tentacles. The dorsal contractile trunk or heart, he states, is united directly with the ventral at a point below a pigmented spot which he regards as a visual organ. Further back it gives off various branches, the course of which is described. One of the two largest pairs of these is directed forwards ; it is cemented to the inner surface of the skin in its dorsal part. The second pair, which is the larger, takes origin a little below the first and runs backwards ; it is also cemented to the skin, and it terminates abruptly at the sixth pair of parapodia. Behind this there is no dorsal vessel proper. The heart terminates behind in the wall of the stomach in a system of sinuses, and Jacquet conjectures that the anterior dilated part may have a glandular wall secreting some digestive substance, which is carried to the stomach in the blood ; the plexus of sinuses extends backwards in the wall of the intestine. A ventral vessel extends from one extremity of the body to the other. In the neighbourhood of the mouth it divides into two branches, which pass round the cesophagus to unite with the anterior end of the heart. He contrasts the arrangement described with that which is given by Quatrefages for Chloraema, and draws the inference that there is a considerable amount of difference in internal structure between the two genera. There would thus appear to be a considerable amount of diffe- rence in the arrangement of the vessels in the various genera. As far as my own observations on this subject extend, the following would appear to be the general features of the vascular system in this family. There is a peri-intestinal sinus or plexus of sinuses in the wall of the alimentary canal. This terminates in front at the cardiac end of the stomach, and from it runs forwards a large median dorsal vessel or heart, which is subject 344 OBSERVATIONS ON THE CHLORAEMIDAE, to regular peristaltic contractions, driving the blood from behind forwards. This vessel contains the unpaired cardiac gland, to which reference is made below. In the peristomial region it divides into two main afferent branchial vessels, each of which divides to give rise to the corresponding tentacular and branchial branches. In Coppingeria the arrangement of the vessels conforms in all essential respects to that described by Claparede for Stylarioides (Trophonia) monilifer. There is a peri-intestinal sinus or rather plexus of sinuses in the wall of the stomach. From this, at the anterior end of the stomach, passes forwards the short dorsal vessel or heart, almost parallel with and on the dorsal side of the oesophagus. This bifurcates in the anterior part of the peris- tomium. Each branch enters the branchial stalk and breaks up anteriorly into a number of afferent branchial vessels (fig. 25, br.), each running to the end of one of the branchiae. The blood returning from the extremities of the branchiae by means of the efferent branchial vessels must be carried back by a trunk, which appears in my sections as a vessel of small size, running backwards just above the oesophagus. This bifurcates behind, the two branches thus formed embracing the oesophagus at its posterior end and uniting below with the ventral vessel. The latter runs forwards only a short distance in front of this junction, but is continued backwards throughout the body. On the dorsal side there is given off from the heart a dorsal vessel which runs back- wards throughout the length of the body on the dorsal aspect above the alimentary canal. Claparede (I.e., p. 360) describes the branchial vessels in Styla- rioides monilifer as having lateral diverticula ("anses"), and in his figure of a portion of a branchia (plate xxv., 1b.) transverse dotted bands are described as the diverticula in question, covered with brown pigment. There are no lateral diverticula in Coppingeria nor in Stylarioides cinctus. The branchial vessels in the former are accompanied by bands of a granular material which colours deeply with haematoxylin and which may contain pigment; in the latter there is a reddish-brown pigment. These pigmented BY WILLIAM A. HASWELL. 345 elements remind one of the structures called " pigmented lymph- glands" by Eduard Meyer,* found on the branchial vessels of Terebellidae and Cirratulidae, and probably are of a similar character. The epithelium covering the branchise is peculiarly modified in Coj)pingeria, the cells as seen in sections having straight sharply- defined lateral borders, as if they had acquired a stiff and rigid character ; as there is no internal supporting layer, it is likely that this is actually the case, and that the ciliated epithelium acts to some extent as a supporting structure. Considerable confusion has existed regarding the relations of an unpaired gland situated in the dorsal region of the anterior part of the body ; it has been noticed and described by various observers, but by nearly all its position has been incorrectly interpreted. The structure in question seems to be represented in Costa's figures, though it is neither referred to in the text nor in the explanation of the plates. It does not seem to have been noticed by Dujardin, by Quatrefages, or by Leuckart. ClaparedHf states that it had been observed by Delle Chiaje in Stylarioides and regarded by him as a ccecum of the alimentary canal. Claparede describes it as a ccecal tube of an intense black colour, sometimes inclined to green, extending backwards as far as the stomach, to which it adheres by its blind posterior extremity. It appears to open in front on the dorsal wall of the buccal cavity. It is formed of two layers — an outer, very thick, colourless, muscular, and rich in vascular plexuses, the inner, an epithelium of intense blackness — the cells being loaded with dark granules. The functions of the gland he looks upon as entirely problematical. In his account of Siphonostoma^diplocha'itos the same author remarks (p. 370) that Max Miiller, following Costa, had fallen into a grave error in describing this structure as a large blind vessel. * "Studien uber den Korperbau der Anneliden." 'Mittheil. a. d. Zool. Stat, zu Neapel,' vh\, p. 645 (1887). tL.c.p. 362. 346 OBSERVATIONS ON THE CHLORAEMIDAE, Grube follows Claparede in his view of the structure in question. Langerhans* describes in Brada inhabilis three glands as opening in the neighbourhood of the mouth, a median one, the cells of which contain brown pigment granules, and a pair, in the cells of which are round concretions. Studerf describes the unpaired gland as opening in front over the oesophagus. Jacquet comments (I.e., p. 373) on the numerous misconceptions to which the dorsal vessel has given rise, and, after quoting the opinion of Claparede, to which reference is made above, goes on to say : — " Nous verrons que Claparede en voulant relever une donnee qu'il considerait comme erronee, retombe dans les idees de quelquesuns de ses predecesseurs, idees que je suis arrive a considerer comme fausses. Cet auteur croit avoir trouve la cause, qui a induit en erreur Costa, dans la couleur de cette glande. Si cette soi-disant glande est plus foncee qu'un vaisseau sanguin ordinaire, cela depend de deux motifs. Comme cet organe pre- sente dans sa partie la plus renflee un diametre de plus de vingt fois celui d'un canal sanguin, il est naturel que contenant une beaucoup plus grand quantite de liquide, celui-ci paraitra plus fonce. En outre, on remarque que les parois de cet organe con- tiennent des elements pigmentes." Further on he conjectures that the anterior dilated part of the dorsal vessel may have a glandular wall secreting a substance calculated to facilitate diges- tion. He thus denies entirely the presence of anything but a thick dorsal vessel or heart with a pigmented and perhaps glandular wall. Horstj was the first, so far as I have been able to determine, who gave an accurate account of this structure. He shows that it is the dorsal vessel enclosing in its interior an elongated narrow * "Die Wurmfauna von Madeira," 'Zeitschr. f. wiss. Zool.' xxxiv. Band. (1880). f " Beitrage zur Naturgeschichte wirbelloser Thiere in Kerguelensland" ♦ Archiv fur Naturgesch.' 1878. + " Ueber ein rathselhaftes Organ bei den Chlor?emiden," 'Zool. Anz.' vm. (1885). BY WILLIAM A. HASWELL. 347 dark body, which is continuous behind with the wall of the stomach. This peculiar dark body is composed of different strands irregularly entwined and mostly with an oval transverse section, formed of cells filled with brown granules, the cell-struc- ture not being always distinctly visible. He does not definitely suggest any function for the dark glandular body, but points out that it has its homologues in various sedentary Annelids — such as Terebella and Cirratulus — as well as in Polyophthcdmus, Cteno- drilus, and Enchytraeus. Cunningham* states that in Trophonia plumosa the somewhat cylindrical cords, of which the cardiac body is made up, are seen in sections not to be composed entirely of cells, but in most cases to possess a lumen, the cells around which form a glandular- looking epithelium of several layers — the more internal clear and vacuolated. He finds no trace of any opening either in front or behind. In Flabelligera affinis ( Siphonostoma) the organ in question is very different ; it is relatively narrow and occupies only a small part of the lumen of the heart ; it has the form of a narrow irregular flat band, which in transverse section appears as an irregularly branching narrow tract without distinct lumen, the walls being in close contact. The clear vacuolated cells are absent — the epithelium consisting entirely of elongated columnar nucleated cells ; and the granules are smaller and less numerous. Cunningham dissents from Horst's view that the organ in Enchytraeus is homologous with the cardiac body of the Chlorae- midae. He states that in Tropihonia there is no connection between the cardiac body and the intestinal epithelium. In Goppingeria, Stylarioides cinctus, and S. Horstii, and Sip>honos- tomum affine, this cardiac body is a greatly-elongated dark-coloured structure, which lies in the interior of the heart or contractile dorsal vessel. In front it is very narrow (fig. 20 c. b.) and does not nearly fill up the lumen of the vessel ; but further back it is broader, and in sections appears completely to block up the cavity. * "Some points in the Anatomy of the Polychseta," 'Quart. Journ. Micro. Sci.' vol. xxviii. 348 OBSERVATIONS ON THE CHLORAEMIDAE, In a living specimen of Siphonostomum affine, however, it was seen that the vessel in a dilated state is considerably larger than the enclosed cardiac body. The latter consists of longitudinally arranged lobes, which in all the specimens examined had lost their cellular structure, — this being represented in the case ofCoppingeria merely by nuclei and faint traces of cell-bodies. An examination of n^ sections confirms Cunningham's statement that there is no connec- tion whatever between the cardiac body and the intestinal epithel- ium. In front it is continuous with the wall of the vessel ; behind it is completely free and moves passively with the peristaltic con- tractions. Cunningham describes a lumen as being present in the cardiac body, but in this I think he is mistaken. The lobes are in some parts slightly separated from one another, leaving fissures here and there ; sometimes there is a star-shaped fissure in the middle, but where this is the case the space is filled with blood. Whatever may be their condition at an earlier stage, the lobes in the specimens I have examined are solid and contain no lumen. VI. Alimentary canal and nephridia. The special features of the alimentary canal in this family have been described by various authors, and I have little to add with regard to Copjringeria to what has been already published. The anterior part is in the form of a narrow oesophagus, with a high epithelium of ciliated cells. The wide stomach, with its anteriorly projecting ccecum, is thin-walled, with a low epithelial lining ; it is filled with particles of mud containing the remains of many microscopic organisms. The narrow intestine has a comparatively thick wall, with an epithelial layer of elongated ciliated cells ; its lumen contains no food particles. The peculiar orange colour of the stomach in its anterior portion, which appears to be general in this family, is, of course, not to be detected in a specimen so long preserved in spirits, but is well-marked in Stylarioides cinctus. In this species the hinder part of the stomach (fig. 21) is bent on itself so as to run obliquely forwards for a little distance before passing into the intestine ; the latter is bent round in the way BY WILLIAM A. HASWELL. 349 represented in the figure, before pursuing its straight course back- wards towards the anus. The nephridia were described by Otto as salivary glands, and the same view of their natu/e was taken by Quatrefages* as well as by Dujardin. They are only very obscurely referred to by Costa. Leuckart (I.e., p. 166) expresses a doubt as to the correctness of Rathke's view that these represent salivary glands, and suggests that they may be comparable to the Polian vesicles of Echinoderms. Claparede, to whom we owe the earliest recognition of the true nature of these bodies, statesf that they had been seen by Delle Chiaje and Rathke as well as Kblliker. He remarks that there is a great resemblance, as had already been pointed out by the last-named observer, between these organs and the renal organs of the Gasteropoda. He describes them in Stylarioides as tubular glands opening externally near the mouth and terminating behind in a cul-de-sac at the sides of the stomach, in the eighth segment. They are full of spherical bodies resembling cells, but without evident nuclei, and each of them containing a single spherical concretion or several. Grube's statement regarding these bodies is essentially a repe- tition of Claparede's. Langerhans,J as already mentioned, describes three glands as opening in the neighbourhood of the mouth in Brada inhabilis, Rathke, the unpaired one being evidently the cardiac body and the lateral, containing round concretions, the nephridia. Studer describes these excretory glands as opening in front into the anterior part of the pharynx. In Coppingeria these glands are of large size and deeply lobed. They extend from the posterior part of the praestomium backwards through the following two or three segments, and are prolonged * "Memoire sur la famille des Chlor^miens." 'Ann. Sci. Nat.' 2e serie, tome xii. (1849), p. 277. t L.c, p. 362. X "Die Wurmfauna von Madeira," 'Zeitsch. f. wiss. Zool.' xxxiv. (1880). 350 OBSERVATIONS ON THE CHLORAEMIDAE, for some distance further back in the form of two comparatively narrow tubes, which lie close together on either side of the middle line of the dorsal part of the body-qavity. Their ducts meet in front below the oesophagus, and the median duct thus formed appears to open on the ventral aspect of the praestomium, but defects in the sections leave this doubtful. The glands are lined with an epithelium of large irregularly-shaped cells (tig. 22) with vacuolated protoplasm containing numerous rounded granules of various sizes, some of which are stained darkly by haematoxylin, the largest having the appearance of being made up by the coales- cence of numerous extremely minute particles. In Stylarioides miotics these glands are in the form of narrow twisted tubes, the cells lining which are similar to those just described. The granules do not become stained by borax-carmine and a nucleus becomes revealed in each cell. In Siphonostomum affine the cells have the form represented in figure 23, mostly narrow at the base, with a rounded bulging at the free extremity, containing numerous minute granules scattered through their protoplasm and some larger ones at the base, where there is in most a zone of protoplasm which stains more deeply with haema- toxylin than the rest. VII. — Nervous system, eyes, and tentacles. The remarkable position occupied by the ventral nerve-chain in the members of this family was remarked upon by Leuckart in his account of Siphonostomitm vaginiferum, Kathke (I.e., p. 165). It is completely separated from the epidermis, and lies within the layer of circular and oblique muscular fibres of the body wall. The cord presents very distinct ganglionic swellings, which are bilobed externally, though completely fused internally ; between the ganglia the cord is distinctly double. The oesophageal commis- sures are of great length in co-ordination with the retractility of the prse- and peristomia. The anterior part of the nerve cord in Stylarioides ductus is represented in plate xxviii. fig. 24. The presence of eyes in members of this family has frequently been overlooked owing to the retractile character of the praesto- BY WILLIAM A. HASWELL. 351 mium on which they are situated. Quatrefages describes Chloraema Dujardinii as possessing a single pair of eyes placed close together. Leuckart describes two pairs of eyes in Siphonostomum vaginiferum, and Johnston* states that Siphonostomum uncinatum possesses four eyes. This is confirmed by Jourdanf as regards S. diplochaitos, and by Joyeux-LaffuieJ as regards Chloraema Dujardinii. I have observed the same to hold good in regard to Siphonostomum ajfine, Stylarioides cinctus, S. Horstii, and Copping eria longisetosa. It seems probable in fact that the presence of four eyes is general in this family. The two pairs of eyes in Coppingeria (fig. 26) are situated on a lobe, which is a process from the praistomium between the bases of the branchiae. Into the interior of the oculiferous lobe projects a group of nerve-cells, forming an optic ganglion, which is really a lobe of the brain, with which it is in immediate connection — the optic nerves mentioned by Quatrefages§ not being represented. Both eyes project prominently on the surface, those of the anterior pair being the larger. The cuticle forms a concavo-convex thickening (cu.) over the eye, immediately internal to which is a layer of cells (c), which present no regular arrangement. Then follows a layer of thick crystalline rods (r), which are probably continuous with elements composing a cup-shaped layer of darkly pigmented substance (pi.), outside of which are the nerve-cells. In Siphonostomum ajfine and Stylarioides cinctus the eyes are less prominent, and are buried in the substance of the prsestomial lobe. In Siphonostomum affine (fig. 27) they differ slightly from those of Coppingeria. The pigment (pi.) forms an almost complete capsule, with only a small opening. Enclosed within this are a series of thick rods, which fill up the whole of the cavity — there beiug no nucleated elements in the inferior of the pigment capsule. * " Catalogue of British Non-Parasitical Worms." t " Etude anatomique sur le Siphonostoma diplochaitos, Otto." 'Ann. Mus. d'Hist. Nat. Marseille,' Zool. t. 3, Mem. No. 2. This is known to me only through the abstract in the "Zool. Jahresb." (1887, Vermes, p. 64). X "Sur l'organisation des Chloremiens." ' Compt. Rend.' t. 104, p. 1377. § " Hist. Nat. des Annel6s," tome I., p. 471. 352 OBSERVATIONS ON THE CHLORAEMIDAE, There is a sort of cornea-lens, however, formed of a number of elongated epidermal cells, which pass over the outer side of the eye. The tentacles in Copjrinyeria are slightly corrugated transversely, and are marked by a deep longitudinal groove on the ventral surface. They are hollow, and the cavity is divided by a dorso- veutral longitudinal septum. In the septum runs the main blood- vessel. The wall of the tentacle contains a thin circular or oblique and a much thicker longitudinal layer of muscular fibres. The cuticle is very thin ; the epidermis has the cells more elongated than in the body ; here and there is a cell which stains more strongly than the others, of a spindle-like shape, perhaps a sensory cell. The epithelium (fig. 28) on the inner faces of the ridges bounding the ventral groove is specially modified. Many, or all, of the cells are provided with close-set short cilia. They are very long and narrow — many almost fibre-like, — and from their inner ends pass delicate fibres to a nerve situated (n) at the base of the ridge. We have here evidently an epithelium which is specialised not only in the direction of bearing cilia for driving food towards the mouth, but also in that of possessing numerous sensory cells, connected either with a specially developed tactile sense or with a sense of taste or smell. BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CHLORAEMIDAE* 1 . Beneden, P. J. van. Notice sur un nouveau genre de Siphonos- tome. Bull. Acad. Belg. t. 21, 2 p. 583 (1854). 2. Blainville, M. H. D. de. Dictionnaire des Sciences Naturelles. Vers. 3. [Chiaje, St. Delle. Memoria sulla storia e notomia degli animali senza vertebre (1822-29).] 4. [Chiaje, St. Delle. Descrizione e notomia degli animali senza vertebre (1831-41).] * The titles of papers to which I have not had access are placed in brackets. BY WILLIAM A. HASWELL. 353 5. Claparede, R. Les Annelides Chetopodes du Golfe de Naples (1868). 6. Costa, 0, G. Description de quelques annelides nouvelles du Golfe de Naples. Ann. des Sciences Nat., 2e Serie, tome xvi. (1841). 7. Cunningham, J. T. Some points in the Anatomy of the Polychaeta. Quart. Journ. Micro. Sci., Vol. xxviii. 8. Dujardin, F. Observations sur quelques annelides marines. Ann. des Sciences Nat., 2e Serie, tome xi., p. 289 (1839). 9. Edwards, Milne. Regne Animal de Cuvier, edition accom- pagnee de planches : Annelides. 10. Grube, E. Annulata Oerstediana. Naturhist. Foren. Yidensk. Meddelelser. (1858). 11. Grube, E. Familien der Anneliden. 12. Grube, E. Beschreibungen einiger von Georg Ritter von Frauenfeld gesammelten Anneliden und Gephyreen des Rothen Meeres. Verhandl. der k.-k. Zool.-bot. Gesell- schaft, xvm. (1868). 13. Grube, E. Annulata Semperiana. Memoires de l'Acad. Imp. des Sci. de St. Petersbourg, vii. Serie, t. xxv. (1878). 14. Grube, E. Beschreibungen neuer oder wenig bekannten von Hrn. Ehrenberg gesammelten Anneliden des Rothen Meeres. Monatsber. der Kgl. Akad. der Wissensch. zu Berlin (1869). 15. Grube. E. Bemerkungen iiber die Familieder Chlorhaeminen. Bericht der Schles. Gesellsch., 1876, p. 37. 16. Grube, E. Annelidenausbeute von S.M.S. " Gazelle." Monatsber. der Kgl. Akad. der Wissensch. zu Berlin, 1877. 17. Haswell, W. A. Observations on some Australian Poly- chaeta. Proc. Linn. Soc. N. S. Wales, Vol. x., p. 733. 18. Horst, R. Ueber ein rathselhaftes Organ bei den Chlorae- miden. Zool. Anz., vin., p. 12 (1885). 19. Horst, R. Mr. Cunningham on the Cardiac Body. Zool. Anz., xi., p. 135 (1888). 354 OBSERVATIONS ON THE CHLORAEMIDAE, 20. Jacquet, M. Recherches sur le systeme vasculaire des Anne- lides. Mittheil. a. d. Zool. Stat, zu Neapel, 6 Bd. pp. 370- 379 (1885). 21. Johnston, G. Catalogue of British Non-Parasitical Worms (1865). 22. Jourdan, E. Structure de la vesicule gerrainative du Sipho- nostoma diplochaitos, Otto. Compt. Rend. t. 102, pp. 1494-1496. 23. [Jourdan, E. Etude anatomique sur le Siphonostoma diplo- chaitos, Otto. Ann. Mus. d'Hist. Nat. Marseille, Zool., t. 3, Mem. No. 2.] 24. Joyeux-Laffuie. Sur l'organisation des Chlore miens. Compt'. Rend., t. 104, p. 1377. 25. Joyeux-Laffuie. Sur le Chloraema Dujardinii et le Siphonos- toma diplochaitos. Compt. Rend., t. 105, p. 179. 26. Kinberg, J. Annulata nova. Of vers af K. Vet.-Akad. F6rh. (1866). 27. [Kolliker, A. Lineola, Chloraema, Polycystis, neue Wurm- gattungen und neue Arten von Nemertes. Yerhandl. d. Schweitz. naturf. Gesellsch., 29 (1844).] 28. Langerhans, P. v. Die Wurmfauna von Madeira. Zeitschr. f. wiss. Zool., xxxiv. Bd. (1880). 29. Leuckart, R. Beitrage zur Kenntniss der Fauna von Island. Arch. f. Naturg. xxix. (1849). 30. Leidy, J. Contributions towards a Fauna of the Marine Invertebrate Animals of the coasts of Rhode Island and New Jersey. Journ. Acad. Philad., 2nd Series, Vol. in. (1855). 31. Mcintosh, W. C. Report on the Annelids of the "Valorous" (1877). 32. Mcintosh, W. C. Report on the Annelida of the "Challenger" Expedition. 33. Malmgren, A. J. Annulata Polychaeta Spetsbergiae (1867). BY WILLIAM A. HASWELL. 355 34. [Miiller, Max. Observationes Anatomicae de Vermibus qui- busdam Marinis (1852).] 35. [Otto, A. De Sternaspide thalassemoide et Siphonostoniate diplochaeto. Nova Acta Nat. Cur., 10 Bd.] 36. Quatrefages, A. de. Mernoire sur la Famille des Chloremiens. Ann. Sci. Nat., 3e Serie, t. xn. (1849). 37. Quatrefages, A. de. Note sur la Classification des Annelides. Ann. Sci. Nat. Zool., 5e Serie, t. in. 38. Quatrefages, A. de. Histoire Naturelle des Anneles (1865). 39. [Rathke, H. Beitrage zur Anatomie unci Physiologie, iv. Neueste Schriften der Naturforschenden Gesellschaft zu Dantzig (1842).] 40. [Rathke, H. Beitrage zur Fauna Norwegens. Nova Acta Nat. Cur., xx. (1843).] 41. Sars, G. 0. Diagnoser af nye Annelider fra Christianiaf- jorden. Vidensk.-Selsk. Forhandlingar (1871). 42. Schmarda, L. K. Neue wirbellose Thiere, I. n. (1861). 43. Studer, Th. Beitrage zur Naturgeschichte wirbelloser Thiere in Kerguelensland. Archiv f. Naturgeschichte, 1878. 44. Theel, H. Les Annelides Polyene tes des mers de la Nouvelle Zemble. Kongl. Svensk. Yetensk. Akad. Handlingar, Bd. 16. EXPLANATION OF PLATES. Plate xxvi. Fig. 1.— Port Molle specimen of Goppingeria longisetosa, three times the natural size. Fig. 2. — Produced peristomium and praestomium with tentacles and branchiae seen from the dorsal aspect: br., branchiae; te., tentacle. Fig. 3. — Darnley Island specimen, thrice the natural size ; lateral view. Fig. 4. — Stylarioides ductus, magnified. Fig. 5. — Anterior extremity of the same with the tentacles and branchiae ; ventral view : br., branchiae ; te., tentacles. Fig. 6. — Anterior end of Stylarioides Horstii, from the dorsal side ; magnified. 24 356 OBSERVATIONS ON THE CHLORAEMIDAE. Fig. 7. — The same, from the side. Fig. 8. — Ventral view of the same. Plate xxvii. Fig. 9. — Ventral seta of Goppingeria longisetosa, x 100. Fig. 10. — Ventral seta of Stylarioides ductus. Fig. 11. — Section of one of the shorter papillae of Coppingeria. Fig. 12. — Section through one of the longer papillae of the same: m., mucus ; g2., g3., ganglia. Fig. 13. — A papilla of the same with the extremity inverted : m., mucus ; 92-, , p. 376. || Loc. cit., p. 361. 370 AUSTRALIAN ABORIGINAL STONE WEAPONS AND IMPLEMENTS, somewhat by chipping, and then quite two-thirds of the surface smoothed by polishing, many of the transverse strise being still visible in places. The measurements of this fine implement are: — Length, 7 -Jin. ; breadth, 6in. ; thickness, 2Jin. ; weight, 51b. loz. The existence of these large implements along the Bulloo River is mentioned by Curr, who, speaking of the Wonkomarra Tribe, inhabiting the river within a radius of twenty miles of Thargo- mindah, says*: "Their tomahawks, before they obtained iron ones from the Whites, were of green stone, as large as an American axe, the sides rather roughly chipped, and the edges ground and smoothed." As another example of this type may be taken the axe brought from Kimberley by Mr. W. W. Froggatt, and described in a late paper by myself, f As compared with the present one it is smaller and lighter. A second axe, sent to me by Mr. De Vis, is slightly larger, and is more securely mounted (PI. xxxiii.). It is one of the finest examples I have seen, and is from Thornborough, N. Queensland. Like so many others, it is simply a large pebble, oval and flat, and more or less in the rough, the only manipulation it has undergone being the grinding of the cutting edge, which has produced a much less perfect curve than the axe just described from Mogul Creek. The pebble is a dolerite. The measurements are as follows: — Length, 8f in. ; breadth, 5in. ; thickness, If in. ; weight, 41b. The handle is a heavy split cane, bent, and passed round the stone, and held in place, like another axe from the Herbert Gorge, by whipping the handle, immediately below the head, with cane riband, but no gum is used. The whip is made doubly secure by passing the free ends over and under, thus as it were forming a collar. The length of the handle doubled is about two feet ten inches. The general aspect of this axe strongly recalls to mind the similar weapons from Lake Tyers in Gippsland figured by Smyth, J more particularly as regards the method of tying, the absence of gum mounting, and the shape of the stone heads. * The Australian Race, 1886, ii., p. 37. f Proc. Linn. Soc. N. S. Wales, 1890, v. (2), p. 370, t. 14. t Aborigines of Victoria. 1878, I., p. 366, f. 177, 178. BY R. ETHERIDGE, JUN. 371 The late Rev. P. MacPherson has described large axes from N. S. Wales, on which " numerous dints, abrasions, and scratches are strongly suggestive of the device of driving stone pegs between the handle and the hatchet for the purpose of tightening the handle."* Neither of the foregoing axes shows such traces, nor has any example with similar markings yet come under my notice. It is a very peculiar and at the same time suggestive fact that by the means of a bent wooden handle, the whole of the Australian tribes, except some of the West Australians, who have used tomahawks or axes, have so fastened them. They do not appear ever to have hit upon the plan of boring the stone heads for the insertion of a single handle, similar to some of the perforated Neolithic hammers of the Old World, f Indeed, a very interesting circumstance is related by Col. A. Lane-Fox, | bearing on this peculiarity. He states § that a European axe-head was found at an old native camping place, the hole of which the natives, unable to comprehend its object, had carefully filled with their cementing medium, and hafted by means of a withy, bent round the outside of the axe-head, in accordance with their traditional custom. || So far as I can gather, the distribution of these large axes appears to be limited. We have evidence that they were used in Queensland from north to south; the Rev. P. MacPherson knew of their existence in N. S. Wales. On the other hand, Smyth states :U " I have never seen any of these large implements in the hands of the natives of Victoria." At the same time, they were evidently in use in the latter colony in former days, for the same author remarks :** " There are found also in the mirrn-yong heaps and in the soil very large tomahawks of different forms, which, it is said * Journ. R. Soc. N. S. Wales for 1885 [1886], xix., p. 114. t See Evans' Ancient Stone Implements. &c, Gt. Brit., 1872, p. 196 et seq. X Now General Pitt-Rivers. § Report Brit. Assoc. Adv. Sci. for 1862 [1863], p. 160. || Aborigines of Victoria, 1878, 1., p. 374. IT Ibid., p. lv. ** Ibid., p. liv. 25 372 AUSTRALIAN ABORIGINAL STONE WEAPONS AND IMPLEMENTS, by the natives, were employed in splitting trees." One of these, found at Daylesford, was nearly fourteen inches in length and five inches in breadth. Such large and heavy implements are not tomahawks in the strict sense of the word, applying the latter term to forms similar to those described under Section A. Indeed the appearance of the fine tool from Thornborough, with its strong and firmly fixed handle, stamps it at once as an implement more in accordance with our idea of an axe, and could not have been put to such a use as the implement from the Herbert Gorge, to be described shortly. in. — Hand-Axes and Wedges. By this term I wish to designate those axes which bear evidence of having been simply held in the hand, and so used, or used as a wedge, rather than mounted in a withy. The Rev. P. MacPherson has drawn attention to this form of axe in the following words : * "Three of the third class of large hatchets are distinguished by another peculiarity : they have a piece knocked out of one corner so as to fit to the broad part of the thumb where it spreads out into the hand. They could thus be used without a handle, or when it came off." Speaking of the Cooper's Creek tribes, Mr. A. W. Howitt says : " They grasp the tomahawk with the fingers and thumb, holding the blunt end in the hollow of the hand."f A tool unmistakably meant to be held in the hand, although no finger-holds are seen, has been forwarded by Mr. C. W. De Vis, found at Toowong, near Brisbane. It seems to have been a rough weather-worn piece of rock, with traces of flakes struck off round the edges, but, generally speaking, advantage appears to have been taken of its flattened, large, oval form. A naturally weathered bevelled margin exists on one face, but the other is ground and polished. The peculiarity of this tomahawk, however, lies in the cutting away of the sides at the butt, until a handle has been formed capable of being grasped by the hand. This is, I think, • Journ. R. Soc. N. S. Wales for 1885 [1886], xix., p. 115. + Smyth's Aborigines of Victoria, 1878, I., p. 388 (note). BY R. ETHERIDGE, JUN. 373 self-evident from the shape of the implement, for in this state it coulcl hardly have been securely fastened between the halves of a bent handle ; but in whatever way it was held, the implement was awkward and unwieldy. The cutting edge is unsym metrical, and the bevel on each face unequal. The stone is a basalt, much in. weathered. Measurements : — Length, 9fin. ; breadth, 6 thickness, 1 Jin. ; weight, 5JJb. The Queensland Museum possesses two remarkably good oval axes. One of these (PL xxxiv.), a large flat tool composed of a fine micaceous mudstone, from the Herbert Gorge, and a travelled stone or pebble, has had its original form utilised by the cunning abori- gine, who has reduced its pristine bulk by rubbing, the irregularly concentric stria? on the surface, arising from the grinding process, being still visible. The broader end has been bevelled off to produce a cutting edge with a similarly wide sweep and truthful- ness of outline to the specimen last described. The butt is rather attenuated, the size here having been again reduced by friction above and below. The extremity of the butt is grasped by the flimsiest of withies — a supple stick of Eremophila, so Mr. Turner thinks, passed round it and retained in position by a " stop " of black gum, with which the butt is enveloped, but without in any way impinging on the withy, which remains free and loose. The withy is simply bent round the stone head without being fastened in any other way, whether by pegs between the stone and handle, as described by the Rev. P. MacPherson,*4 or otherwise. In this condition it is held precisely as a blacksmith holds his cold chisel when about to be struck by the hammer. The two portions of the handle are held together, immediately under the head, by a piece of thin split cane. The withy is in one piece, about twenty- two inches long when doubled, and where bent the bark has been removed and the fibre separated to render the bend supple. The bevel is rather flat. The general measurements are : — Length, 81in. ; breadth, 5±in. ; thickness, 1-J-in. ; weight, 31b. 2oz. One of the most remarkable implements I have yet met with is an axe, triangular in shape, and to some extent resembling the * Journ. R. Soc. N. S. Wales for 1885 [1886], xix., p. 114. 374 AUSTRALIAN ABORIGINAL STONE WEAPONS AND IMPLEMENTS, old-fashioned wood-cutter's axe. It is from Fraser's Island, and is again from the Queensland Museum. The cutting edge is the longest side, the butt being obtusely pointed, the rapidly increasing width, with the slightly concave edges, giving to it the old axe- like form referred to, and which effect may possibly have been heightened by friction. The sides are flat, and the edge is bevelled on one only. It is composed of a hard drab sand-rock, and the cutting edge, as might have been expected, is somewhat blunt. The concavity of the upper and lower edges gives to the cutting edge at its ends an upwardly swelling appearance. There are no signs of a hafting groove, flaking of the surface, or abrasions caused by pegs driven to tighten a handle. The measurements of this implement are : — Length, 8Jin. ; breadth, 6|in. ; thickness, If in. ; weight, 2ftt>. Triangular tools of this description seem to be rare, but Smyth records one from Coranderrk, Victoria, but it is not clear whether it was an axe or a tomahawk. The question naturally arises, are the implements from Toowong, the Herbert Gorge, and Fraser's Island, axes or wedges? I see nothing to prevent them from being wedges, but, on the contrary, a good deal in favour of such a use. In describing the Paterson axe, Mr. MacPherson said* — "its size is suggestive of its having been used as a wedge for splitting," and, " there is an appearance about the edge of this instrument which gives the idea of its having been forced through hard wood." The shape of the implements from Toowong and Fraser's Island renders it difficult to imagine a handle attached, whilst their size is against a simple grasping by the hand. On the other hand, the slight withy placed round the Herbert Gorge instrument, provided it is genuine, is enough to denote its use, that of being held in one hand and struck by some other body, probably a piece of wood. The presence of the withy indicates that it was not a manual weapon in the strict sense of the word, whilst the lightness of the withy equally forbids the use of the instrument as an axe. * Journ. R. Soc. N. S. Wales for 1885 [1886], xixM p. 115. BY R. ETHERIDGE, JUN. 375 Before concluding this part of the subject, I wish to draw attention to a portion of a tomahawk, which is with difficulty referred to its proper place in the series. It forms one of Sir Wm. Macleay's Collection, and is from N. S. Wales. Originally a flattened pebble, it has been further reduced by rubbing, and is unflaked. The interest, however, centres itself in the sharp point the anterior end has been brought to, an unusually pointed end and acute cutting edge for an Australian tomahawk. The finish of the tool is excellent, although the scratches still remain caused by the lateral reduction it has undergone. These are all in one direction. It is composed of a dark green chloritic greywacke, showing faint schistose structure. The rock has probably been derived from the alteration of a mudstone. It may not be out of place to point out in conclusion a few facts deducible from the study of Australian stone tomahawks in relation to what may be termed their physical structure, derived from the observations of Smyth, * Cox,f MacPherson,| Knight,§ Anderson,|| other minor observers, and my own investi- gations. Except on the broad lines laid down in the present communica- tion there is no uniformity in size or shape, but whether toma- hawks or axes, they are usually longer than broad, the exception being our third type of Section a, Group i. There appear to have been three well marked methods of preparation : — (1) Shaped by directed blows only; (2) The same accompanied by the polishing of the cutting edge ; (3) Selected pebbles, polished at the cutting edge, but not shaped or flaked. As a rule, stones flattened laterally were selected, and following this conception, the choice seems to have been given to water-worn pebbles. * Aborigines of Victoria, 187S, I., pp. liv. and 365. + Proc. Linn. Soc. N. S. Wales, 1875, I., p. 21. t Journ. R. Soc. N. S. Wales for 1885 [1886J, xix., p. 113. § Report Smithsonian Institution for 1879 [1880], p 213. || Records Geol. Survey N. S. Wales, 1890, ii., Pt. 2, pp. 73-81. 376 AUSTRALIAN ABORIGINAL STONE WEAPONS AND IMPLEMENTS, The smoothed and polished portions of these implements vary greatly in extent and finish, and seem to have been studied only so far as to produce an efficient cutting edge. Grinding may have taken place alone, or grinding and polishing may occur conjointly in the same implement. Such a thing as a wholly polished tomahawk, without the assistance of a natural agent, has never come under my notice. The cutting edge is, with remarkably few exceptions, always curved, and the curvature very rarely amounts to a semicircle. Mr. William Anderson, however, cites two exceptions to this rule, one a pebble from the conglomerate of the Gunclabooka Mountain, to the west of Bourke, in which the cutting edge is "nearly straight." A straight cutting edge is also exemplified in the third tomahawk of the deltoid or subtriangular type under Section a. The cutting edge is at times ground very sharp; "so sharp," says Rear- Admiral P. P. King, " that a few blows serve to chop off the branch of a tree.** The butt is never worked, only chipped ; but the production of tomahawks by chipping alone is very rare throughout Central and Eastern Australia, although common in Western Australia. Mr. Anderson mentions two examples from N. S. Wales. f Chipped weapons are flaked from the edges inwards, the size of the flakings decreasing in size forwards. The sides are sometimes grooved to assist in firmly attaching the handle. Single stones appear to have been universally used over the entire Continent, with the exception of Western Australia, where two are employed, attached to the same handle, placed butt to butt, and united in the hafting. Tomahawk or axe-heads perforated for the reception of a handle are unknown, with the exception of an instance recorded by Dr. J. C. Cox,t which appears to point in that direction. He says — " But specimens I have only recently received from the Macdonald * Intertrop. Coasts of Australia, ii., p. 69. + Records Geol. Survey, loc. cit., p. 77- % Proc. Linn. Soc. N. S. Wales, 1875, I., p. 23. BY R. ETHERIDGE, JUN. 377 River, a tributary of the Hawkesbury, lead me to assume that in some instances the handles were fixed in the centre of the stone, so that both edges were used." The bevel varies considerably, and depends for its extent on the original thickness of the stone employed. It is always convex or arched, but seldom ever bilaterally symmetrical. It is possible for general classificatory purposes to separate our stone implements of this description into three broad sections : — A. Tomahawks ; b. Axes ; c. Hand- Axes and Wedges. The use of such stone implements is not universal throughout Australia, for Curr informs* us that certain tribes in his Western Division, and the western part of his Central Division, or the Minung Tribes do not use tomahawks at all. As regards the halting of tomahawks, six methods were known : — (1) The handle formed of a single piece, and attached by a heavy swathing of gum ; (2) As a withy passed over the stone head and secured (a) with gum alone, or (b) gum and lashing; (3) As a withy reposing in the grooved sides of the head ; (4) Similar to last, but handle twisted on itself ;f (5) Head lashed to the handle after the fashion of the New Zealander or Dyak ;\ (6) Head fixed with lashing and gum in a cleft stick. § The composition of the cementing medium varies considerably in different tribes. xvit. — Modernised Aboriginal Tomahawks. In a recent Paper, after describing some flint knives, I showed the adoption and continuity of the aboriginal idea when brought in contact with articles of European manufacture. The rapidity with which the black abandons his stone tomahawk in favour of the white man's iron instrument is well known, but amongst the * Australian Race, 1886, I., pp. 287 and 367. t In South Australia, see Knight, Report Smithsonian Inst, for 1879 [1880], p. 237, f. 38b. Said to be Australian by J. G. Wood, Nat. Hist. Man. 1870, p. 32, f . 2. § Evans, Stone Implements Gt. Brit., 1872, p. 151. 378 AUSTRALIAN ABORIGINAL STONE WEAPONS AND IMPLEMENTS, half-civilized this seems to have been preceded by the adoption of both aboriginal and civilized materials. Thanks again to Mr. De Vis, I am able to show this by the four following implements, all made of scrap-iron, picked up, or, more probably stolen, and converted into tomahawks in the usual way by passing a withy round and securing the head with gum. The first implement is formed of a large piece of flat iron, nine and a-half inches long and three and a-half wide ; but it is very difficult to say what it has formed a part of, unless it be part of a wheel tire (PI. xxxiv.). It has been severed at the butt from the remainder simply by means of cutting. The two faces of the anterior end have been ground in the usual way, producing the bevelled surfaces and cutting edge. The handle is one foot in length, and it weighs three pounds eleven ounces. This probably represents an axe. The second implement has been made in a precisely similar manner, but the top edge of the iron is concave, and the bottom horizontal. Had the lower edge been convex, I should have suggested that this had once formed a portion of a small wheel tire. The head is held in place by gum, and a string collar is passed round under it. I think we may justly regard this as a tomahawk ; it measures four and a-half inches long and two and a-half wide. The handle is ten inches. The third presents no difficulties whatever in regard to the object selected to form the head. It is a piece of a horse-shoe (PL xxxvi.), six inches in length, and differs from the former specimens in that it is single-headed. The iron is securely fastened by an over and over lashing of a rush-like plant, and the whole enveloped in gum. The handle is fifteen and a-half inches long, and together with the head producing a very handy and efficient weapon as well as implement. It is from the Walsh River, and forcibly recalls to mind the peculiar quartzite-headed axe I figured* some time ago from Northern Queensland. The fourth, and last, is equally cunningly adapted, and is formed either of a cold-chisel or a ship's bolt. The head of the chisel * Froc. Linn. Soc. N. S. Wales, 1890, v. (2), t. 12, f. 14. BY R. ETHERIDGE, JUN. 379 forms the butt, and the chisel edge the cutting portion. The former is exposed from the gum mounting, and probably served the purpose of a hammer. The lashing in this instance seems to be string, and is thickly coated with gum. The chisel is five and a-half inches long, and the handle one foot three inches. The horse-shoe iron and the chisel are not confined by a collar holding the two halves of the handle together, but are held in position as described by string and gum. Neither of the handles is tied at the base, similar to the method of doubly securing some of those of stone tomahawks.* EXPLANATION OF PLATES. Plate xxix. Fig. 1.— Tomahawk (oblong-ovate type), highly finished, of greenish-black diorite. Braidwood ; Mr. J. W. Penney. J nat. Fig. 2. — Side view of the same. Fig. 3.— Tomahawk (oblong-ovate type), flaked, of silicified claystone. New England ; Mining and Geological Museum (Mr. Blomfield). Fig. 4. — Side view of the same. Plate xxx. Fig. 1.— Tomahawk (ovate type), of a felspathic quartzite. Macleay Collection. Fig. 2. — Side view of the same. Fig. 3.— Tomahawk (deltoid type), of dark green diabase (?) Normanton, Queensland ; Queensland Museum (Mr. C. W. De Vis). Fig. 4. — Side view of same. Plate xxxi. Fig. 1. — Tomahawk (gad-shaped type), of a dark green diorite. N. S. Wales ; Mining and Geological" Museum. Fig. 2. — Side view of the same. Fig. 3. — Tomahawk with a hafting groove (ovate type). North Queens- land ; Queensland Museum (Mr. C. W. De Vis). Fig. 4. — Side view of the same. * See Smyth, Aborigines of Victoria, 1878, I., p. 367, f. 179, p. 368, f. 181. 380 AUSTRALIAN ABORIGINAL STONE WEAPONS AND IMPLEMENTS. Plate xxxii. Fig. 1. — Tomahawk (chisel-shaped type), drab-coloured chert. Hexham, N. S. Wales; Mining and Geological Museum (Mr. R. W. Thompson). Fig. 2.— Side view of the same. Plate xxxiii. Axe, hafted ; a large pebble of dolerite. Thornborough, Queensland ; Queensland Museum (Mr. C. W. De Vis). Plate xxxiv. Wedge, with a slight withy handle. Herbert Gorge, Queensland ; Queens- land Museum (Mr. C. W. De Vis). Plate xxxv. Axe, modernised ; made of portion of a wheel tire. North Queensland ; Queensland Museum (Mr. C. W. De Vis). Plate xxxvi. Tomahawk, modernised ; formed of portion of a horse-shoe. Walsh River ; Queensland Museum (Mr. C. W. De Vis). 381 NOTES AND EXHIBITS. Rev. Dr. Woolls sent for exhibition specimens of lerp or manna — some still in situ on the branchlets — from Eucalyptus pulveru- lenta, Sims, found at Buckley's Crossing ; manna is frequently- met with on E. viminalis, Labill., (formerly called E. mannifera), and a few other species, and occasionally on E. punctata, DC, but this is the first instance of its occurrence on E. pulverulenta known to Dr. Woolls. Also, portion of an unusually fine specimen of a lichen, Usnea articulata, Ach., several feet long, recently brought from New England by Mr. C. S. Wilkinson, F.G.S. ; and a specimen of another remarkable lichen, Cladonia retipora, Flcerke, a species common to Australia, Tasmania, and New Zealand. Rev. J. Milne Curran exhibited a stalactite of metallic copper, showing obscure crystalline facets. The mass, which weighs 7^1bs., was found at Cobar in a cavity in carbonate of lime, hanging by a single thread of metallic copper. The copper was evidently deposited from solution by some inexplicable reactions. Mr. Etheridge exhibited a very fine series of Aboriginal Toma- hawks and Axes in illustration of his Paper. Mr. Maiden sent for exhibition a quantity of seeds of the sugar- cane from Barbadoes, with the intimation that he would be glad to furnish growers in the Northern River Districts with samples for experimental cultivation. Mr. Eroggatt exhibited some living beetles (Axionichus insignis, Pascoe, fam. Curculionidae), which afford a good example of protective coloration. They were found a few days since at Wellington, N.S.W., on the trunks oi Kurrajong trees (Sterculia), the bark of which they resemble so closely in tint and general appearance that it was quite by accident he first recognised their true character. WEDNESDAY, 26th AUGUST, 1891. The President, Professor Haswell, M.A., D.Sc, in the Chair, The Minutes of the previous Meeting were read and signed. The Chairman announced to the Meeting with deep regret the death, only that morning, of the Government Geologist, Mr. Charles Smith Wilkinson, F.G.S., F.L.S. Mr. Wilkinson was an Original Member of the Society, for several years was a Member of the Council, in the years 1883 and 1884 was President, and since 1885 had been one of the Vice-Presidents. His enthu- siasm in the cause of Geological Science, his extensive knowledge of the geological features of Eastern Australia, his many personal qualities, and his decease at the comparatively early age of 47, combine to render his loss one which will be severely felt. On the motion of Mr. Henry Deane it was resolved that a letter of sympathy from the Meeting be sent to Mrs. Wilkinson. The reading of papers and other business was deferred, and the Meeting then adjourned to September 30th. 383 WEDNESDAY, 30th SEPTEMBER, 1891. The President, Professor Haswell, M.A., D.Sc., in the Chair. Dr. F. Pick, Sydney, was elected a member of the Society. A letter from Mrs. C. S. Wilkinson, thanking the Members of the Society for their expression of sympathy, was read to the The President announced that the Council had elected Professor Sven Loven, M. & Ph. D., of Stockholm, and Professor S. P. Langley, LL.D., of the Smithsonian Institution, Washington, Honorary Members of the Society. donations (received since the July Meeting). "Journal of the Royal Microscopical Society, 1891." Parts 3 and 4 (June and August). From the Society. " Transactions and Proceedings of the New Zealand Institute." Vol. xxiii. (1890). From the Directory Colonial Museum. " Transactions of the Royal Society of South Australia." Vol. xiv., Part 1 (1891). From the Society. " Zoologischer Anzeiger." xiv. Jahrg., Nos. 366-370 (June, July, and August, 1891). From the Editor. "Perak Government Gazette." Vol. iv., Nos. 18-28 (June, July, and August, 1891). From the Government Secretary. " Abhandlungen herausgegeben vom naturwissenschaftlichen Vereine zu Bremen." xii. Bd., 1 Heft (1891). From the Society. "The Victorian Naturalist." Vol. viii., Nos. 4 and 5 (August and September, 1891). From the Field Naturalists' Club of Victoria. 384 DONATIONS. " Plants Indigenous and Naturalised in the Neighbourhood of Sydney." By W. Woolls, Ph.D., F.L.S. New Edition (1891). From the Field J\Taticralists' Society of N.S. W. "Zoological Society of London — Transactions." Vol. xiii., Parts 1 and 2 (1891) ; " Proceedings, 1891," Part 1. "Abstract," June 16th, 1891. From the Society. " Sydney Free Public Library — Report from Trustees for 1890." From the Trustees. " Department of Agriculture of Victoria — Bulletin." Nos. 8 and 12 (August, 1890, and July, 1891). From the Secretary for Agriculture. "Transactions of the Entomological Society of London, 1891." Part 2 (June). From the Society. " Bulletin of the American Geographical Society." Vol. xxiii., No. 2 (June, 1891). From the Society. " Kongliga Svenska Vetenskaps-Akademie — Handlingar." Bd. v. (Part 2) -xxii. and three Atlases (1864-87); " Bihang till Handlingarne." Bd. i.-xi., xii. (Parts 1 and 2), xiii. (Parts 1 and 2), xiv.-xv. (1872-90) ; " Oefversigt af Forhandlingarne." Arg. 1865-1889; " Lefnadsteckningar." Vols, i., ii. (1869-85); " For- teckning ofver innehallet i K. Vet. Akads. Skrifter (1826-83) ;" " Carl von Linne's Brefvexling — Forteckning af E. Ahrling" (1885); "K. Svenska Fregatten Eugenies Resa omkring Jorden, 1851-53;" "Insecta Caffraria. Auctore C. H. Boheman." Parts 1 and 2 (1848-57); " Monographia Cassididarum. Auctore C. H. Bohe- man." T. i.-iv. (1850-62); " Hemiptera Africana descripsit C. Stal." T. i.-iv. (1864-66): and the following works by C. J. Sundevall— " Die Thierarten des Aristoteles," &c. (1863) ; " Con- spectum avium Picinarum " (1866); " Methodi naturalis avium disponendarum Tentamen" (1873). From the Royal Swedish Academy. " Proceedings of the American Academy of Arts and Sciences." Vol. xxv. (1889-90). From the Academy. "Journal of the Cincinnati Society of Natural History." Vol. xiii., No. 4. From the Society. DONATIONS. 385 " New York Academy of Sciences — Annals." Vol. v., Nos. 4-8, and Index to Vol. iv. ; "Transactions." Vol. ix., Nos. 3-8 (1889- 90). From the Academy. ''Johns Hopkins University Circulars." Vol. x., No. 91 (July, 1891) ; " Studies from the Biological Laboratory." Vol. iv., No. 7 (1890). From the University. " Proceedings of the American Philosophical Society." Vol. xxviii., No. 134 (July-December, 1890). From the Society. "Journal of Comparative Neurology." Vol. i., Part 2 (June, 1891). From the Editor ; Professor C. L. Her rich. " Proceedings of the Rochester Academy of Science." Vol. i., Brochure 1 (1890). From the Academy. " Proceedings of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Phila- delphia for 1890." Parts 2 and 3. From the Academy. " Annual Report of the Board of Regents of the Smithsonian Institution for the Year ending June 30, 1888." From the Smith- sonian Institution. " The Missouri Botanical Garden." First Annual Report (1890). From the Director. "Journal of Comparative Medicine and Veterinary Archives." Vol. xii., Nos. 6-8 (June- August, 1891). From the Editors. " Bulletin of the Museum of Comparative Zoology at Harvard College." Vol. xxi., Nos. 2-4 (May and June, 1891). From the Curator. "United States Department of Agriculture — Division of Ento- mology—Bulletin." Nos. 23 and 25 (1891). " Insect Life." Vol. iii., Nos. 9 and 10 (June, 1891). From the Secretary of Agricul- ture. "Geological and Natural History Survey of Canada — Contribu- tions to Canadian Palaeontology." Vol. i., Part 3 (1891). From the Director. " Verhandlungen der k. k. zoologisch-botanischen Gesellschaft in Wien." xl. Bd., 3 u. 4 Heft (1890). From the Society. " Bulletin de la Societe Beige de Microscopic" xviime Annee, No. 8 (1891). " Annales." T. xv. (1891). From the Society. 386 DONATIONS. " Gesellschaft fiir Erdkunde zu Berlin — Zeitschrift." xxv. Bd., 6 Heft (1890); " Verhandlungen." Bd. xviii., Nos. 4 u. 5 (1891). From the Society. " Koniglich-Bohmische Gesell. der Wissenschaften in Prag — Sitzungsberichte." Jahrg. 1890, ii. Bd. ; " Jahresbericht, 1890." From the Society. "Catalogue of Mammalia in the Indian Museum, Calcutta." Part 2. By W. L. Sclater, M.A., F.Z.S. (1891). From the Trustees. " Queensland — Report on the Gympie Gold Field " and " On the Albert and Logan District." By W. H. Rands (1889). From R. Ether idge, Jun., Esq. " Queensland — Report on proposed Boring for Water at Bris- bane." By R. L. Jack (1890); " Second Report on Tin Mines near Cooktown." By R. L. Jack (1891); "Notes on Broken Hill." By R. L. Jack (1891): " Report on Cape River Gold Field." By W. H. Rands (1891); "Report on Paradise Gold Field." By W. H. Rands (1891); "Report on Coolgarra Tin Mines, &c." By A. G. Maitland (1891); "Report on the Geology of the Cooktown District." By A. G. Maitland (1891). "Report on Geology and Mineral Resources of the Upper Burdekin." By A. G. Maitland (1891). From the Government Geologist, Queensland. " Reports on the Zoological Collections made in Torres Straits by Professor A. C. Haddon, 1888-89 "— " The Land Shells," by E. A. Smith ; " Lepidoptera from Murray Island," by G. H. Carpenter, B.Sc. ; " Hydroida and Polyzoa," By R. Kirkpatrick. From Professor Haddon. " Societe Zoologique de France — Memoires." T. iv., Nos. 1 and 2 (1891) ; " Bulletin." T. xvi., Nos. 5 and 6 (May and June, 1891). From the Society. " Bulletin de la Societe Royale de Geographie d'Anvers." T. xv., 4me Fasc. (1891). From the Society. " The Australasian Journal of Pharmacy." Vol. vi., Nos. 68 and 69 (August and September, 1891). From the Editor. DONATIONS. 387 "The Pharmaceutical Journal of Australasia." New series, Vol. iv., Nos. 8 and 9 (August and September, 1891). From the Editor. Technical Education Series, No. 6 — " Wattles and Wattle- barks, being Hints on the Conservation and Cultivation of Wattles. Second Edition (1891)." By J. H. Maiden, F.L.S., F.C.S. From the Author. " Bulletin de la Societe Imperiale des Naturalistes de Moscou." Annee 1891, No. 1. From the Society. "Proceedings and Transactions of the Queensland Branch of the Royal Geographical Society of Australasia." Vol. vi., Part ii. (1891). From the Society. " Records of the Australian Museum." Vol. i., No. 8 (July, 1891). From the Trustees. " Annual Report of the Department of Mines, New South Wales, for the year 1890." From the Hon. the Minister for Mines. " Academie Royale Danoise des Sciences et des Lettres, Copenhague— Bulletin pour 1890." No. 3; "Bulletin pour 1891." No. 1. From the Society. Pamphlet entitled " On Chilostomatous Characters in Melicer- titidce and other Fossil Bryozoa." By A. W. Waters. From the Author. " Tillseg til Viridarium Norvegicum af Dr. F. C. Schiibeler." No. 1 (1891). From the Royal University of Norway. " Jaarboek van de Koninklijke Akademie van Wetenschappen gevestigd te Amsterdam voor 1890." From the Society. " Agricultural Gazette of New South Wales." Vol. ii., Part 7 (July, 1891). From the Director of Agriculture. " Department of Agriculture, Brisbane — Bulletin." No. 10 (August, 1891). From the Under Secretary for Agriculture. " Royal Irish Academy, Dublin — Transactions." Vol. xxix., Parts 1-16 (1887-91) ; " List of Papers published in the Transac- tions, &c, 1786-1886"; "Proceedings." Third Series, Vol. i. (1888-91). From the Academy. 26 388 DONATIONS. " Journal of Conchology." Vol. vi. No. 11 (July, 1891). From the Conchological Society of Great Britain and Ireland. " Iconography of Australian Salsolaceous Plants." By Baron von Mueller, K.C.M.G., F.R.S. Decade vii. (1891). From the Premier of Victoria, through the Librarian, Public Library, Melbourne. " Mittheilungen aus der Zoologischen Station zu Neapel." viii. Band, 2 Heft (July, 1888). From the Zoological Station. "Quarterly Journal of the Geological Society." Vol. xlvii. Part 3 (August, 1891). From the Society. "American Naturalist." Vol. xxv., No. 293 (May, 1891). From the Editors. "United States National Museum — Proceedings." Vol. xiv., Nos. 842-850 (1891); "Bulletin," No. 39, Part A. From the Museum. " Asiatic Society of Bengal — Journal.'" Vol. lix. (1890), Part i., Nos. 3 and 4; Part ii., Nos. 4 and 5, and Supplement No. ii. : Vol. lx. (1891), Part i., No. 1 ; Part ii., No. 1 ; " Proceedings for 1891." Nos. 2-6 (February- June). From the Society. " Memoires de la Societe de Physique et d'Histoire Naturelle de Geneve. T. xxxi., Premiere Partie (1890-91). From the Society. "Department of Mines, Victoria. — Annual Reports for 1889 and 1890"; " The Goldfields of Victoria— Reports of the Mining Registrars for the years 1886, 1887, and for quarter ended 31st December, 1889 "; " Reports and Statistics of the Mining Depart- ment for quarter ended 30th June, 1891"; "Geology and Physical Geography of Victoria." By R, A. F. Murray (1887). From the Secretary for Mines. University of Melbourne — Examination Papers; October and December, 1890; February, 1891; and May (Matriculation), 1891. From the University. " Royal Society of Tasmania — Abstracts of Proceedings, April August, and September, 1891." From the Society. "Journal of Morphology." Vol. iv., No. 3 (Jan. 1891) ; Vol. v., No. 1 (June, 1891). From Professor Haswell, M.A., D.Sc. 389 PAPERS READ. THE EXAMINATION OF KINOS AS AN AID IN THE DIAGNOSIS OF EUCALYPTS. PART III.— THE TURBID GROUP. By J. H. Maiden, F.L.S., F.C.S. My third large group of kinos I call the turbid group, — certainly a descriptive name, as the members of it all form turbid solutions in water, owing to the presence of catechin. This sharply defines them from the other two groups. Another characteristic is their extreme friability. This group contains a more heterogeneous collection of sub- stances than do the other two, but beyond submitting a few suggestions as to the affinities of certain kinos comprehended in it, I do not propose to form additional groups at present, until the number of authentic specimens worked at by other observers or myself is very largely increased. It follows, from the friable nature of kinos of this group, and the way in which they fall to pieces as soon as they get dry, that "Turbid Kinos" are always in small fragments, while the ruby and gummy ones are frequently in agglutinated masses of a con- siderable size, which require some force to break up. As a consequence of the foregoing the percentages of moisture are comparatively low. Description of a typical Kino of the Turbid group. Colour reddish-brown, with the following exceptions : E. maculata, E. microcorys. Most of them, perhaps all, possess an odour, at least when perfectly fresh. Bright looking when perfectly 390 THE EXAMINATION OF EUCALYPTUS KINOS, fresh and unhandled, but, in a few weeks in small fragments, dulled by their own disintegration. They powder readily between the fingers, forming a fine powder which, in the majority of instances, is of a buff colour. What this Kino research enables us to do. 1 . To pronounce whether a kino is the product of a Eucalypt belonging to the Renanthereaa or not. 2. To confirm the affinity existing between stringybarks, ironbarks, boxes, &c. It is a useful adjunct to, and check upon, the cortical system, which is of course founded on external characteristics merely. Eucalypts sometimes have variable bark, but, as far as known, the kino of a particular species is constant in character. 3. To furnish a guide in points of difficulty which arise in cases where diagnosis in the ordinary manner (e.g., by flowers and fruits) breaks down. See leucoxylon, fasciculosa, infra. 4. To name, in some instances (e.g., maculata, corymbosa), a species from kino alone. 5. To state whether a kino contains catechin from physical characteristics alone. 6. To pronounce what species are suitable for tincture- making and what are unsuitable. Partly dependent on the fore- going we are now in a position to indicate what species satisfy the requirements of pharmacopoeias for kino, and what do not. It must be remembered that the systematic examination of kinos is only just beginning. I desire to express my obligations to Mr. H. G. Smith, Labora- tory Assistant, Technological Museum, for valuable assistance in this research. Attention is drawn to the fact that the kinos of Eucalyptus maculata and E. microcorys are anomalous; they differ from the others in regard to colour, so much so, that they can be singled out from all others (so far as is at present known) by this colour-test BY J. H. MAIDEN. 391 alone. At the same time, other kinos tend to this colour, and it may be that a regular gradation of kino-colours will be found, as our knowledge of authentic species of these substances increases. It is also worthy of note that E. microcorys is the only* kino of the turbid group belonging to the Renantherese. Its resemblance to that of E. maculata is very marked, and it is as different as possible from any other Eenantherous kino. It is worth enquiring of what value this observation may be, as bearing upon the affinities of E. microcorys. The order in which kinos belonging to this group are placed is only provisional, as at present under 30 species belong to the group as the result of absolute experiment, and very much more material requires to be accumulated, in order that one may be in a position to subdivide it with any degree of finality. It promises to be the largest of the kino groups, and while already I can predict a number of species which will fall into it, I confine myself strictly to facts. Following are the species referred to in this paper : — E. hemiphloia „ ,, var. albens = E. albens E. odorata E. luelliodora E.fasciculosa (non E. panicidata, Sm.) E. corynocalyx E. leucoxylon (non E. sideroxylon, A.Cunn.) E. corimta E. rostrata E. viminalis E. Stitartiana E. Maideni E. Gunnii E. goniocalyx E. Bauerleni * The only species of the Renantherese I have not examined is E. acmenoides ; see p. 606, Vol. iv., Series 2. 392 THE EXAMINATION OF EUCALYPTUS KINOS, E. punctata E. longifolia E. corymbosa E. terminalis E. eximia E. clavigera E. tessellaris E. maculata E. microcorys and, as the results of the experiments of others : — E. calophylla E. globulus E. trachyphloia "Box" Provisional Sub-Group. E. hemiphloia E. odorata E. melliodora. E. fasciculosa kino seems to form a kind of connecting link between these and E. corynocalyx E. leucoxylon E. comuta Eucalyptus hemiphloia, F.v.M., B.F1. iii. 216. No. 35. "Box" or "White Box." Nerriga, N.S.W. Kino collected October, 1888. Height of trees, 80-120 feet. Diam., 2-3 feet. A freshly exuded, more than ordinarily bright-looking kino. It very much resembles light seed-lac in colour and general appear- ance. Friability and colour of powder normal. Its composition BY J. H. MAIDEN. Catechin and tannic acid ... ... 784 Gum ... nil Ligneous matter, &c. ... 2-3 Moisture ... ... 19-2 Ash •1 393 100-00 Tannic acid determination (Lowenthal), 34 539 per cent. This kino was analysed November, 1888. The catechin and tannic acid in these kinos were determined together by extraction with alcohol. The tannic acid was separately determined by Lowenthal's process (on an original aqueous solution). I cannot go further, in this place, into the chemical questions involved; this will be dealt with in a mono- graph on the whole subject of kinos. I may mention, however, that Lowenthal's process is only of limited application in the determination of tannic acid in turbid kinos, and the figures given in this paper of Lowenthal determinations have comparative values only. For medicinal or tanning purposes, the results obtained by Lowenthal's method will be a guide as far as practical astringent value is concerned. No. 36. "Box." Dromedary Mountain, Tilba Tilba, N.S.W. ; collected September, 1889, from trees 80-120 feet in height, and with a diameter of 2-4 feet. This kino resembles the previous one so closely that no second description is necessary. No. 37. Sample from Wagga Wagga, N.S.W. ; collected October, 1889. Tree known locally as " Grey Box." Collected and presented by Mr. J. J. Fletcher, M.A., B. Sc, Director of this Society, who described its appearance as like a boss, and that it had thrust up the bark of the tree as if it had been so much paper. The sample principally consists of a large oval mass, over an inch in thickness; it had solidified in this shape while adherent to the bark ; externally it is of a dull brown colour ; on the freshly fractured surface it is bright in appearance. 394 THE EXAMINATION OP EUCALYPTUS KINOS, Friability normal, the colour of the powder being a very light buff. It contains a large amount of catechin. This sample may be taken as one of the most strongly defined of the kinos of this group yet examined by me, and may be considered as an extreme type ; the amount of catechin remaining as a very light yellowish powder after the tannic acid has been dissolved out with cold water is very large ; on standing the water does not become clear. Analysis (made August, 1891) shows its composition to be : — Catechin and tannic acid ... 84*43 Ligneous matter, &c. ... ... 4*0 Moisture 9-94 Ash 1-63 10000 Tannic acid determination (Lowenthal), 15-2 per cent. No. 38. I have received a specimen of kino, also from the Wagga Wagga district, labelled " White Box, E. populifolia." From its composition and general appearance, and also partly because E. hemiphloia is the common " White or Grey Box " about Wagga, I am inclined, as I am unable to get herbarium specimens to settle the matter, to place this kino with E. hemi- phloia. In fact, I look upon this as an instance of the usefulness of kinos as a check upon species-naming. This kino is dull in appearance. Friability normal ; colour of powder light buff or raw sienna. It does not dissolve entirely in water, the catechin remaining as a light yellow powder; the colour of the water is that of a weak infusion of tea ; it remains slightly turbid. Analysis (made August, 1891) shows it to be composed of : — Catechin and tannic acid ... 90-05 Ligneous matter, &c. ... ... *4 Moisture 8-71 Ash -84 100-00 Tannic acid determination (Lowenthal), 14*5 per cent. BY J. H. MAIDEN. 395 No. 39. I have received (July, 1891) a sample of kino, most probably collected in Victoria, and labelled " E. hemiphloia." It is tough, not the least friable, of a dark reddish-brown colour externally, but by transmitted light it is of a bright ruby colour. Its physical characteristics are quite different from kinos of the turbid group hitherto examined by me. I do not hesitate to say that the tree producing it, although ranking under E. hemiphloia, is specifically distinct. I draw attention to the subject, as a revision of the trees grouped under E. hemiphloia may be desirable. Eucalyptus hemiphloia, F.v.M. var. albens (Syn. E. aliens, Miq.), B.F1. iii. 219. No. 40. " Northern Box " of South Australia. Kino from South Australia, received from Baron von Mueller, August, 1891. Physical properties same as the normal species, and as will be seen below, the chemical properties are very similar also. Composition (determined August, 1891): — Catechin and tannic acid ... 89-112 Ligneous matter ... ... -89 Moisture 9-008 Ash -99 100-000 Tannic acid determination (Lowenthal), 16*9 per cent. Eucalyptus odorata, Behr; B.F1. iii. 215. No. 41. Kino from a variety known as " White Box " at Wongrabell, near Eden, N.S.W. Diam., 6-8 feet. Height, 100-150 feet; collected February, 1887. Apparently an old sample, and much contaminated with bark. Dull-looking, prevailing colour brown, and readily crumbling between the fingers to a brown powder. Its composition (determined October, 1888) is as follows : — Catechin and tannic acid ... 78-24 Ligneous matter, &c. ... ... 1*66 396 THE EXAMINATION OF EUCALYPTUS KINOS, Moisture 193 Ash -8 100-00 Tannic acid determination (Lowenthal), 23-873 per cent. Eucalyptus melliodora, A. Cunn., B.F1. iii. 210. No. 42. The ordinary " Yellow Box." Kino received from Baron von Mueller, July, 1891. In very small pieces of a light brown colour, both in colour and appearance resembling small currants ; powders between the fingers to a light yellow colour. I have not sufficient for a complete investigation, but I place it here from a general examination. ov Eucalyptus fasciculosa, F.v.M. in Trans. Vict. Inst. Vol. I. (1854). This species has long been looked upon as a form of E. paniculata, Sm. (see B.F1. iii. 211, and Decade 5, Mueller's Eucalyptographia). As the discrimination of the two species is important, I think it necessary to go into the matter with a little detail. Under the name of E. paniculata are usually enumerated two distinct trees, viz. : — A New South Wales ironbark (the tree on which Smith founded the species), and a (Victorian and) South Australian white gum, with smoothish white bark as its name denotes. The timbers of the two trees are also totally different. This confusion caused Bentham to write (B.F1. iii. 211), "The notes on the bark uncertain." In making a rough grouping of Eucalypts according to the vernacular names, he adopts the name " White Gum," B.F1. iii. 189, and leaves it out of the list of " Ironbarks." I give a few notes on the trees known as E. paniculata in the colonies of New South Wales, Victoria, and South Australia. I have not dwelt upon the inflorescence and fruits, as these are palpably similar in the various trees referred to, and afford an instance in which determinations from such material break down. To discriminate between certain Eucalypts, the bark, timber, or kino (or all three), should be taken into consideration. BY J. H. MAIDEN. 397 New South Wales.— "She Ironbark " (Woolls, B.F1. iii. 211). It is the "Red Ironbark" of the Southern Coast districts (E. paniculata) ; var. angustifolia is " Narrow-leaved Ironbark " (Woolls, B.F1. iii. 212). Victoria. — Bark persistent, hard and rough, or by outer decorti- cation whitish and smooth outside. "The Box-Ironbark Tree" (Mueller), Dichotomous Key. This is E. fasciculosa. South Australia.— "White Gum " (Behr, B.F1 iii. 212). It is gured in Brown's Forest Flora of S.A. and called by him " Panicle-flowered White Gum " in order to distinguish it from the other white gums of that colony. From the description of the bark, and the figure of it given, it is at once seen that the South Australian paniculata (E. fasciculosa) is quite a different species from our New South Wales ironbark of that name. The colour of the South Australian timber is not given ; that of our ironbark is medium red. No. 43. Kino received from W. Gill, Esq., F.L.S., Conservator of Forests, South Australia, July, 1891. Known locally as " White Gum." The physical properties of this kino resemble those of a typical kino of the group. Composition (determined August, 1891) : — Catechin and tannic acid ... 83*384 Ligneous matter, &c. ... ... '6 Moisture 15-78 Ash -236 100-000 Tannic acid determination (Lowenthal), 24-1 per cent. Eucalyptus corynocalyx, F.v.M. B.F1. iii. 218. The Sugar Gum of South Australia. " Slowly but completely soluble in water ; solution slightly acid, yellow-red, on cooling- turbid, no gum-resin. Broken reddish-brown lumps, fatty lustre, mixed with particles of bark" (Wiesner, Zeitschr. d'allg. (Est. Apotheker-Vereines, 1871 ; Pharm. Journ. [3] ii. 102). 398 THE EXAMINATION OF EUCALYPTUS KINOS, No. 44. A specimen received from W. Gill, Esq., F.L.S., Con- servator of Forests, S.A., July, 1891, is in small pieces, very dull externally. Friability normal. Colour of unground kino a dull sienna-brown, colour of powder ochre-yellow. It does not entirely dissolve in cold water ; the supernatant liquid is pale yellowish, and it does not entirely dissolve in alcohol ; the liquid becomes clear on standing, but on agitation has a very turbid appearance. Its composition (determined August, 1891) is : — Catechin and tannic acid ... 82-471 Ligneous matter, &c. ... ... 3*827 Moisture 13*370 Ash -332 100*000 Tannic acid determination (Lowenthal), 26*2 per cent. Eucalyptus leucoxylon, F.v.M. B.F1. iii. 209, and Decade 1, Mueller's Eucalyptographia. Under the above name two distinct trees have been included, viz. : — A New South Wales ironbark, and a white or blue gum found in Victoria and South Australia. The New South Wales tree is E, sideroxylon, A. Cunn., the southern one is E. leucoxylon, F.v.M., a tree with a pale-coloured wood as its name denotes, while the N.S.W. ironbark has red timber, and also one of quite a different character to the other. I give notes under the heading of each colony to help to set the matter clear, and would point out that in this instance examination of the kinos is a valuable help, showing that the products of the N.S.W. ironbark and the Victorian or South Australian white gum are very different. New South Wales. Syn. E. sideroxylon, A. Cunn. — The " Red Flowering Ironbark " ; it, however, sometimes has white flowers. Red ironbark of Mudgee district (Hamilton) and other parts of the colony. In a "Note on Eucalyptus leucoxylon, F.v.M.," by the Rev. Dr. Woolls (P.L.S.N.S.W. [2], i. 859), this matter of the confusion BY J. H. MAIDEN. 399 which has arisen between the two trees is clearly set forth, and I am but emphasizing Dr. Woolls' remarks in the paper referred to. I have for some years been impressed with their specific differences, and the use of the name leucoxylon in my former paper (P.L.S.N.S.W. [2], iv. 1277) for sideroxylon is a slip of the pen. Victoria. — Bark either rugged, hard, dark and persistent, or decorticating and then smooth and whitish outside. The "Victorian Iron-bark Tree" (Mueller, Dichotomous Key)', see also Eiicalyptographia, where it is stated : — " This is the iron-bark tree of Victoria and many districts of New South Wales." This is a slip of the pen as regards Victoria, the tree being not a true iron- bark in that colony, although sometimes having rugged bark about the butt. The Victorian species varies somewhat in bark in different localities. Mr. W. R. Guilfoyle, exhibiting Victorian E. leucoxylon timber at the Sydney International Exhibition of 1879, describes it as " Milk white Gum or Spurious Iron-bark. Said to be synonymous with E. sideroxylon, the true iron-bark, although very distinct in appearance." It is called "Iron-bark " in Howitt's paper (Trans. R. S. Vict. II. pt. 1). It is called " Box" at p. 215, and "Spurious Ironbark" at p. 226 of the Official Record, Intercol. Exh. of Australasia, Melbourne, 1867, a scientific publication of great value. South Australia. — Figured as the "Blue Gum" in J. E. Brown's " Forest Flora of S. A." The specimens on which the species-name leucoxylon was founded by Baron Mueller, were obtained from near Adelaide. Known also in South Australia as "White Gum." " On the matured trees the bark upon the stem is hard, woody, rugged, and of a dark bluish-grey — sometimes almost black — on the surface and brown beneath ; it falls off in curled, broken up, longitudinal pieces two or three feet long, and from a-half to one inch in thickness " (J. E. Brown). This is, of course, quite different to an ironbark. Queensland. — The following note on a Queensland form of leucoxylon has no direct bearing on the point at issue (viz. 400 THE EXAMINATION OF EUCALYPTUS KINOS, sideroxylon and leucoxylon being distinct species), but I give it for completeness. The typical E. sideroxylon does not appear to extend to Queensland. " E. leucoxylon": bark white on the branches, more persistent on the trunk ; var. minor, C. Ext. (Bailey). See also Scortechini, P.L.S.N.S.W. viii. 248, who states that this variety barely crosses the boundaries of Queensland, near Wilson's Peak, South .Queens- land. Memo. — Bentham (B.F1. iii. 210) states "this variety seems almost to pass into E. melliodora" and certainly the kino of that species and that of E. leucoxylon, F.v.M., strongly resemble each other. No. 45. "Blue Gum" of South Australia. Kino received from Mr. W. Gill, F.L.S., Conservator of Forests, South Australia, July, 1891. This is apparently a freshly exuded sample, being very bright and sparkling in appearance. Its general colour is a warm sienna- brown ; it is easily reducible to a powder between the fingers, such powder having a bright yellow colour, almost chrome. It is very new, which accounts for some of the brightness of colour. Its general behaviour at once places this kino in the turbid group. Behaviour and appearance iu water similar to E. corynocalyx sample. In alcohol it does not entirely dissolve ; the supernatant liquid is bright, clear, and of a reddish-brown colour ; the liquid is very turbid when agitated. Its composition (determined August, 1891) is : — Catechin and tannic acid ... 79*279 Ligneous matter, &c. ... ... 4-9 Moisture 14*95 Ash -871 100-000 Tannic acid determination (Lowenthal) 21*5 per cent. MM. E. Heckel and Fr. Schlagdenhauffen ( Le Naturaliste, July 1, 1890, p. 151) have been experimenting upon some kinos BY J H. MAIDEN. 401 of E. Uucoxylon and E. viminalis received from M. Ch. Naudin of the Villa Thuret, Antibes, France, where is a celebrated planta- tion of many species of Eucalyptus. I will refer to E. viminalis under that heading, and would observe that apart from the evidence yielded by the experiments on the kinos themselves, the leucoxylon trees must have been raised from seed of trees indigenous to Victoria or South Australia. Following is their analysis : — Eau hygroscopique ... ... 18*94 Sels fixes ... 1-32 Tannin et catechine 74-95 Gomme ... 2-74 Debris cellulaires... 1-51 Perte 0-54 100-00 The constituent in the above analysis worth noting is the gum. Obviously the conditions under which these trees grow favour the development of gum, as this substance, though always carefully looked for, is absent in turbid kinos obtained from Australian grown trees. In several species I have believed that I have found gum (never much more than a barely weighable quantity, however), but on more thorough examination the substance is found not to be precipitable by alcohol. Care must be taken to remove all catechins before the alcohol is added. Eucalyptus cornuta, Labill. B.F1. iii. 234. No. 46. The " Yeit" or " Yate" of Western Australia. Speci- men of kino received from Baron von Mueller, July, 1891. General appearance, friability, and colour of powder normal. It does not entirely dissolve in cold water; it forms a dirty brown liquid, which does not settle readily. It does not entirely dissolve in alcohol, the supernatant liquid is clear and bright, but when agitated it forms a very turbid liquid of a dirty brown colour. 402 THE EXAMINATION OF EUCALYPTUS KINOS, Its composition is as follows : — Catechin and tannic acid Ligneous matter, &c. Moisture ... Ash 100-00 Tannic acid determination (Lowenthal) 36*1 per cent. It was analysed August, 1891. 80-9 2-51 15-72 •87 The following species, viz. : — E. rostrata E. Maideni E. viminalis E. Gunnii E. Stuartiana E. goniocalyx and perhaps E. Bauerleni yield kinos possessing many points of resemblance, and are grouped together provisionally. Eucalyptus rostrata, Schlecht., B.F1. iii. 240. The well-known " Red Gum " of Victoria and the Murray and Edwards Rivers, KS.W. The kino of this species is perhaps the best known of all Eucalyptus kinos, chiefly through the enterprise of Mr. Joseph Bosisto, of Melbourne. It is a useful astringent, and it seems to be increasing in favour with medical men in England, America, and Australia. The official kino (Pterocarpics) contains, I believe, no substance which is not contained in this and some allied kinos, for which they appear to be a perfect substitute. See Pharm. Journ. [3], xx. 221, 321. The kino of E. rostrata will be found mentioned in all modern works on Materia Medica. In Martindale and Westcott's Extra Pharmacopoeia, for instance, we have the following : — " E. rostrata and E. corymbosa, and probably other species imported from Australia. It is semi-translucent and garnet-coloured, not so BY J. H. MAIDEN. 403 dark as, but resembling kino in appearance, soluble in water, tough, difficult to powder [not correct as applied to these two kinos, J. H. M.], it adheres to the teeth when chewed, is intensely astringent to the mucous membrane, useful in diarrhoea, relaxed throats, and given with success to check the purging of mercurial pills." But the following statements pertaining to the percentage of tannic acid, and the solubility, are somewhat misleading, since I have shown the enormous variation in the properties of kinos caused by age. 11 Of 100 parts 90 are dissolved in cold water, the solution being clear. 27 parts of isinglass precipitate all the astringent matter." Squires' Companion to the B.P. Dr. Wiesner says of a sample : — " Easily soluble in water and alcohol ; solution neutral, free from gum-resin. Broken masses of a zircon-red, sometimes light brown, mixed with bits of dark." 47. " Red Gum;" purchased in Sydney, 22nd November, 1888. Of Victorian origin. In lumps up to the size of peas, though angular. Prevailing colour purplish- brown. Is readily powdered between the fingers, forming an ochrey-brown powder. The mass of kino has not the brilliant appearance of the kinos of the ruby group, owing to this friability. In cold water it dissolves fairly readily and almost entirely to a reddish-brown liquid. Its composition (determined November, 1888) is : — Catechin and tannic acid ... 84*3 Ligneous matter, &c 3 Moisture ... ... ... ... 15*2 Ash ; ... -2 100-00 Tannic acid determination (Lowenthal) 46*22 per cent. No. 47. E. rostrata, var. " Creek Gum," Tarella, Wilcannia, 23rd August, 1887. Diam., 1-2 feet. Height, 30-40 feet. 27 404 THB EXAMINATION OF EUCALYPTUS KINOS, Only obtainable in rather small quantities, and in rather small pieces. Pale, as kinos go, very bright-looking, and of a ruby colour. Powders fairly readily, forming a powder of a light brown tint. It dissolves almost immediately to a pale brownish or almost orange solution, leaving a sediment of a whitish-salmon colour, with a few dark-coloured particles, like those of E. goniocalyx, only cleaner looking. Its composition (determined October, 1888) is : — Catechin and tannic acid ... 82*7 Ligneous matter, &c. ... ... *6 Moisture ... ... ... ... 15-8 Ash -9 100-00 Tannic acid determination (Lowenthal) 47*746 per cent. Eucalyptus viminalis, Labill. (Syn. E. fabrorum, Schlecht.), B.F1. iii. 239. Dr. Wiesner says of two samples of kino belonging to this species : — " E. viminalis. Only partly soluble in water, with light brown colour; contains a little gum-resin. Brittle, like kino. Add hydrochloric acid to the solution, then ammonia, a precipitate is obtained which blackens in the air." " E. fabrorum., not readily soluble in water : solution yellowish, faintly acid, turbid on cooling; contains gum-resin. Particles dark black-red, slightly transparent shiny fracture." The following statement occurs in the Report Intercol. Exhib., Melbourne, 1861 : — "The resin (sic) of E. viminalis in its decom- posed state furnishes a real pigment." No. 48. "Ribbony Gum," "Manna Gum." This is a variety with bluish, broad leaves. Quiedong, near N.S.W. : Victorian border, 26th March, 1887. Height, 60-80 feet. Diam., 3-4 feet. In small fragments, prevailing colour reddish-brown of all depths of tint. Bright-looking. Easily reducible to a powder between the fingers. Colour of powder light orange-brown. BY J. H. MAIDEN. 405 In cold water it forms a solution of an orange-yellow colour, something like linseed oil. Residue of a pale salmon colour, with a few dark particles. Of the strength of 1 grm. to 1 litre a beautiful clear solution of a dark amber colour is formed. Its composition (determined October, 1888) is : — Catechin and tannic acid ... ... 82*9 Ligneous matter, &c. ... ... -8 Moisture ... ... ... .... 15-8 Ash -5 100-00 Tannic acid determination (Lowenthal) 31*99 per cent. No. 49. A sample procured by me from Mt. Victoria, N.S.W., March, 1889, was perfectly fresh, and some of it was even treacly when collected, though like other kinos of this group it dries almost immediately. It is orange-brown of all tints, and very crumbly, new as it is. I have not sufficient for a complete investigation. It was from a tree which may provisionally be known as the variety multiflora of this species. Messrs. Heckel & Schlagdenhauffen (op. cit., p. 151) have ex- amined kinos of this species grown in the South of France. Following is their analysis : — Eau hygroscopique ... ... 7*083 Cendres 0*250 Tannin et catechine ... ... 92*667 100*000 on which they make the following remarks : — "La quantite de tannin renfermee dans le kino d' E. viminalis est extraordinairement considerable, et semble en promettre un emploi industriel assure." Eucalyptus Stuartiana, F.v.M., B.F1. iii. 243. No. 50. The collector of this kino, Mr. W. Bauerlen, states that when collecting it on the borders of Victoria and New 406 THE EXAMINATION OP EUCALYPTUS KINOS, South Wales, some ladies, who saw him thus occupied, assured him that they knew of nothing which cleanses the teeth so quickly and so effectually as this kino. Its friability combined with its astringency have doubtless secured it this reputation as a dentifrice. E. rostala kino is similarly used on the Murray. "Apple-tree," Quiedong, 24th April, 1887. Diam., 3-4 feet. Height, 80-100 feet. This is a comparatively dull-looking kino, having somewhat the appearance of seed-lac, and the particles are equally variable in point of colour. Exceedingly brittle and forming a powder of a dull sienna-brown. In twenty-four hours it completely disintegrates under water, forming two well-defined layers. The sediment is of an ochrey- brown colour, while the supernatant liquid is of a dark reddish- brown. The behaviour of this kino is very much the same as that of E. viminalis. Its composition (determined October, 1888) is : — Catechin and tannic acid ... . . 83-0 Ligneous matter, &c. ... ... 1*0 Moisture 15-3 Ash -7 100-00 Tannic acid determination (Lowenthal) 26-412 per cent. Eucalyptus Maideni, F.v.M., in P.L.S.KS.W. [2], iv. 1020. " Blue Gum " ; called also "White or Spotted Gum." Until quite recently this tree had been only cursorily examined ; it was for many years looked upon as E. globulus, and surprise was expressed that E. globulus had such a wide range in New South Wales. The Eev. Robert Collie found it several years ago between Braiclwood and Araluen, announced it to be E. globulus (to which, indeed, it bears much resemblance), and this statement has been copied into several books. Had not sucli prominence been given to the statement, it would not now be BY J. H. MAIDEN. 407 necessary to contradict it at such length. To be specific, E. globulus does not occur in the county of St. Vincent, or so far east ; it is only here and there, and then sparsely, found on the N.S.W. side of the Murray. E. Maideni is a common tree on the mountains about Araluen, where it is called " Blue Gum." E. globulus has been specially looked for, during six seasons, from Shoalhaven to the Victorian border, but without success, and the specimens seen, referred to E. globulus by local people, all belong to the species named E. Maideni by Baron von Mueller. No. 51. From Colombo, Candelo, N.S.W., « Blue Gum." Height, 80 to 120 feet. Diam., 2 to 5 feet. This sample has a brighter appearance externally than the majority of kinos belonging to this group ; it is of a dark sienna colour, powders readily between the fingers, the powder having an ochrey colour. Dissolves in water almost entirely to a dirty brown colour, the water remaining very turbid. Its composition (determined August, 1891) is : — Catechin and tannic acid ... 79*75 Ligneous matter, &c. ... ... 3*2 Moisture 15*77 Ash 1*28 100 00 Tannic acid determination (Lowenthal) 25*5 per cent. No. 52. "Blue Gum," from Bolaro Mountain, gathered Sept., 1890. Height of tree, 150 feet. Diam., 2 feet. Resembles previous specimen in appearance. Eucalyptus Gunnii, Hook., B.F1. iii. 246. No. 53. The kino examined is from a variety known as " Flooded or Bastard Gum," and was obtained from Delegate, near the Victorian border. Collected May, 1887. Height of trees, 60-80 feet. Diam., 2-3 feet. Appearance and friability normal. Cold water yields a pale orange solution, leaving a quantity of sediment of a salmon colour, in which are interspersed a few dark coloured particles. 408 THE EXAMINATION OF EUCALYPTUS KINOS, Its composition (determined October, 1888) is: — Catechin and tannic acid ... 79*22 Ligneous matter, &c. ... ... "78 Moisture ... ... ... ... 19-6 Ash -4 100-00 Tannic acid determination (Lowenthal) 34-032 per cent. Eucalyptus goniocalyx, F.v.M., B.FL iii. 229. Usually known as " Spotted Gum " in Victoria, but not to be confused with the common N.S.W. " Spotted Gum " (E. maculata). No. 54. Specimen of kino from Bonang, near Delegate, where the tree is known as " Mountain Gum." Height of trees, 100- 180 feet. Diam., 4-8 feet. Kino collected May, 1887. This sample is the dullest looking of all the kinos examined, friability normal. It yields a brown powder. The general colour of the unground portion is purplish-brown. The bulk of this sample is much older than that of the sample of E. rostrata (No. 47), but specimens taken from bulk cannot in any way be dis- tinguished from it from outward appearances. In cold water it forms a light reddish-brown turbid liquid, leaving a muddy-looking residue of a salmon colour ; like most kinos of this group, it is exceedingly tedious to extract the last portions of soluble matter. Following is its composition (from analysis made October, 1888) :— Catechin and tannic acid ... 76*02 Ligneous matter, , elytris (his obscure geminato-striatis) fortiter minus crebre, punctulatis ; tibiis anticis externe fortiter (maris quam feminse minus fortiter) BY THE REV. T. BLACKBURN. -185 3-dentatis \ tarsorum posticorum articulo 2° quaru lus paullo longiori ; antennis 8-articulatis j clypei marginibus lateralibus et anticis truncatis, illis obliquis. <£ clypeo antice inagis fortiter reflexo inagis abrupte truncato, tarsis multo crassioribus. [Long. 3,1, lat. It lines. The following characters in combination will distinguish this species I think from all its previously described congeners : — antenme having only 8 joints, clypeus having three truncate faces, front tibia3 normally tridentate externally, 2nd joint of hind tarsi much less than twice as long as basal joint. Probably this insect is nearest to L. ferrugineus, Blanch., but it has a facies very different from that species and very distinct characters, — inter alia the sides of the clypeus are strongly oblique in both sexes, and the femora and tibiae are uniformly of dark colour. N.S. Wales ; taken by Mr. Froggatt near Mudgee. Heteronyx baldiensis, sp.no v. Brevis ; validus ; fortiter convexus ; postice dilatatus ; vix nitidus ; supra setulis brevissimis vix perspicuis sparsim vestitus ; niger, antennis palpis tarsis et pilis erectis in marginibus in pedibus et in corpore subtus positis rufescentibus ; capite prothorace scutello pygidioque (hoc pilis erectis vestito) fortiter rugulose sat crebre, — clypeo pygidioque magis crebre, — punctulatis ; prothorace quam longiori duabus partibus latiori, antice paullo angustato, basi fere recto, angulis posticis rotundato — rectis, lateribus vix arcuatis ; elytiis (his basi quam prothoracis basis angustioribus) sparsim leviter nee subtiliter punctulatis, ovatis, nullo modo striatis ; corpore subtus (abdomine sat leviter sat crebre subtilius punctulato excepto) fortiter vix crebre punctulato ; coxis posticis quam metastemum vix brevioribus ; antennis 8-articulatis ; labro a clypeo obtecto ; tibiis anticis externe fortiter 3-dentatis ; unguiculis appendi- culatis, unguiculorum posticorum parte basali quam apicalis paullo longiori. [-Long. 65, lat. 3| lines. 486 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN COLEOPTERA, An extremely distinct species which it is possible ought not to be placed in Heteronyx, as T have not been able to examine the inner organs of the mouth. Its elytra much narrower at the base than the base of the prothorax and then arcuately dilated to considerably beyond the middle (where they are much wider than the prothorax) give it a facies out of harmony with its congeners; the shortness of the elytra (their length not exceeding the width by much more than a quarter of the latter) is also unusual. This insect, in my tabulation of Heteronyx, would fall in the 1st section (P.L.S.N.S.W., 1888, pp. 1328, &c.) under "FF" on page 1329 beside//, spretus, from which, inter alia multa, its very much larger size will distinguish it. H. lilliputanus, Blackb., (described since the tabulation was published), also falls under "FF" on p. 1329, but is still smaller than spretus. The three species probably attributable to "Section I," which I have not succeeded in identifying, are all very different, Victoria; under a stone on the summit of Baldi in the Victorian Alps, at an elevation of more than 6000 feet. Heteronyx terrena, sp.no v. Sat elongatus, postice vix dilatatus ; minus nitidus, pallide ferrugineus, antennarum clava testacea; pilis brevibus pallidis sat crebre vestitus; crebre subtilius sat sequaliter punctulatus ; labro clypeum baud superanti ; antennis 9-articulatis ; coxis posticis metasterno plus quam paullo brevioribus ; unguiculis appendiculatis ; unguiculorum posticorum parte basali quam pars apicalis multo longiori. [Long. 4, lat. 2 lines. A clay-coloured species closely resembling in miniature //. piceus, Blanch., but a little narrower and more parallel in outline, with the hind coxa a little shorter in proportion to the metasternum, and the appendiculation of the hind claws nearer to the apex; the prothorax, moreover, is evidently less transverse, being not more than | again as wide as long. I do not observe any other respects in which the characters differ from those of //. piceus. The specimen mentioned in P.L.S.N.S.W., 1889, p. 1228, as 'My a small var. of //. piceus is this species. BY THE REV. T. BLACKBURN. 487 Victoria; Ballarat (W. W. Froggatt).; also N.S. Wales (T. G. SI oar e). Heteronyx incognitus, sp.nov. Elongatus ; postice dilatatus ; subnitidus ; ferrugineus, anten- narum clava testacea, pilis brevibus fulvis sat sparsim vestitus; capite sequaliter crasse minus crebre, prothorace subtilius sparsius, elytris sparsius sat crebre, pygidio sparsim vix perspicue, squamose punctulatis ; labro clypeum haud superanti (hoc antice sat fortiter reflexo) ; antennis 9-articu- latis, unguiculis appendiculatis, unguiculorum posticorum parte basali quam pars apicalis sat longiori ; coxis posticis metasterno parum brevioribus. [Long. 5f, lat. 2 § lines. This species is another ally of H. piceus, Blanch. It is a much more elongate species, however, with the ventral series of erect setse continued strongly all across the hind body and the punctu- ration— especially on the head and prothorax — considerably less close. The prothorax is not much less than twice as wide as long and its base is little more than a quarter again as wide as across the front ; its hind angles are fairly well defined. I refer to this species with some doubt two smaller specimens from the Blue Mountains, sent by Mr. Froggatt ; they have the pygidium much more distinctly punctured and the general punc- turation a trifle closer. The differences may possibly be sexual. N.S. Wales. Heteronyx alpicola, sp.nov, Sat elongatus; postice leviter dilatatus; subnitidus; ferrugineus antennarum clava dilution ; pilis brevibus fulvis sat sparsim vestitus ; capite rugulose sat crasse, prothorace pygidioque sat crebre vix fortiter, elytris, subfortiter subrugulose, punctulatis ; labro clypeum (hoc antice rotundato reflexo) haud superanti ; antennis 9-articulatis ; unguiculis appendicu- latis, unguiculorum posticorum parte basali quam pars apicalis multo longiori ; coxis posticis metasterno paullo brevioribus. [Long. 3-3i, lat. lj-l^ lines 488 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN COLEOPTERA, Also belongs to the group of piceus, owing to the combination of 9-jointed antenna?, clypeus free from labrum and not emarginate, hind claws normally appendiculate. The prothorax is about \ again as wide as long, and at the base is not much more than J again as wide as across the front, which is not strongly bilobed ; the base is feebly lobed in the middle ; the front angles are not very prominent ; the hind angles, viewed from above, are very well defined and nearly rectangular. Victoria ; on the higher mountains. As the described species allied to H. piceus are now becoming rather numerous, it will perhaps be well to substitute the following tabulation for that falling under E (on 1st line of p. 1330, P.L.S.N.S.W., 1888) :— E. Clypeus not emarginate. F. Basal piece of hind claws evidently longer than the apical piece. G. Upper surface not clothed with long erect hairs. H. Sculpture of upper surface uni- form (or nearly so) and more or less close and fine. I. Front tibiae strongly tridentate externally. J. Sculpture (though uniform) considerably stronger than in thefollowing two species *gracilipes, Blackb. JJ. Sculpture fine and close. K. Size large, prothorax nearly twice as long as wide picPAhS, Blanch. * These species were stated by me (in P.L.S.N.S.W., 1889, p. 1225) to be better placed near //. piceus, Blanch., than in the allied group (where I originally placed them), having the apical piece of the hind claws extremely short. BY THE REV. T. BLACKBURN. 489 KK. Size medium, prothorax moderately transverse terrena, Blackb. II. Uppermost tooth of front tibia? scarcely defined pubescens, Er. HH. Sculpture of prothorax much more sparse than of head and elytra *Victoris, Blackb. HHH. Sculpture of prothorax and elytra subequal; that of head much more coarse and rugulose. I. Prothorax only very slightly narrowed anteriorly incognitus, Blackb. II. Prothorax considerably nar- rowed anteriorly alpicola, Blackb. GG. Upper surface clothed with long erect hairs deceptor, Blackb. FF. Basal piece of hind claws not longer than the apical piece Froggatti, Mel. Heteronyx tridens, sp.nov. Minus elongatus; sat convexus ; postice sat dilatatus ; sat nitidus ; ferrugineus, antennis dilutioribus ; pilis brevibus sparsim vestitus ; capite crebre crasse rugulose, prothorace fortiter nee crebre, elytris crasse fortiter subcrebre, pygidio (hoc longe hirsuto) fortiter sat crebre, punctulatis ; tibiarum anticarum dentibus externis validis ; labro clypeum anguste minus fortiter superanti ; antennis 8-articulatis ; unguiculis appendiculatis; unguiculorum posticorum parte basali quam pars apicalis parum longiori. % [Long. 4J, lat. 2°g lines (vix). In many respects this species resembles H. nasutics, Blackb., (P.L.S.N.S.W., 1889, p. 147), the puncturation (except of the pygidium) and the remarkable structure and relation of the * See note, ante p. 488. 490 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN COLEOPTERA, clypeus and labrum being very similar. The following seem to be the points of difference from H. nasutus ; clypeal suture not angulated, prothorax a little less transverse (about once and § as wide as long) and more narrowed anteriorly, hind coxae very much shorter (nearly as short as the 2nd ventral segment), hind body (not " finely coriaceous " but) very nitid, basal piece of hind tarsi (not " exceptionally strongly " but) not in the least prominent at the apex. In the tabulation of the sub-group of Heteronyx to which this species belongs (P.L.S.N.S.W., 1889) it falls under «GG" (near the end of p. 143) along with H. auricomus, Blackb., from which its clypeal suture not angular in the middle and the more sparse puncturation of its prothorax will, inter alia, distinguish it. The rather strong anterior narrowing of the prothorax approximates it to the species under " FF " (anceps, tfcc.) ; all those, however, have the labrum and clypeus quite differently related to each other except Sloanei, Blackb., in which these parts are a little (but not very much) similar, but in that species the prothorax is much more closely punctured. W. Australia ; Yilgarn ; sent by C. French, Esq. Heteronyx consanguineus, sp.nov. Sat elongatus ; sat convexus ; postice leviter dilatatus ; ferru- gineus, antennis palpisque testaceis ; pilis brevibus fulvis minus crebre vestitus ; clypeo crebre parum rugulose, capite postice prothorace pygidioque subfortiter sat crebre vix rugulose, elytris crebre sat fortiter transversim rugulose, punctulatis ; tibiis anticis externe sat fortiter 3-dentatis ; labro clypeum parum late sat fortiter superanti ; antennis 8-articulatis ; coxis posticis metasterno multo brevioribus, unguiculis appendiculatis ; unguiculorum posticorum parte basali quam pars apicalis paullo longiori ; labro minus forti- ter sat crebre ruguloso-punctulato. [Long. 4% lat. 2? lines (vix). The prothorax is about § again as wide as long and the base is about | again as wide as the front which is somewhat evenly and BY THE REV. T. BLACKBURN. 491 moderately strongly emarginate, the base being but little lobed, the sides gently arched (their greatest divergence close to the base), the front angles sharp and moderately produced, the hind angles obtuse but fairly well defined. The underside is much like that of II. punctipennis, Blackb., except in being throughout more strongly and less closely punctured. This species belongs to Section III. of Heteronyx, and in the tabulation (P.L.S.N.S.W., 1889) would stand with raucinasus under " EE " near the end of p. 142. From that insect it differs by its much less strongly rugulose labrum, head and prothorax (the sculpture especially of the head behind the labrum being extremely different, — in rauci- nasus very coarse and close, and very strongly rugulose, — in consanguineus almost smooth, and consisting of isolated and but little crowded punctures scarcely differing from those of the prothorax), and by the very much more strongly marked clypeal suture. Victoria ; Alpine district. Heteronyx nitidus, Blackb. I have received from Mr. French another specimen (from Yilgarn) of this insect, the elytra of which are a little more strongly punctured than in the type, — so that the expression " leviter punctulata " could hardly be applied to those organs. As in the type the puncturation has the blurred appearance con- fused with transverse rngulosities which I mentioned as distin- guishing it from the puncturation of H. frontalis. I think the type was an old specimen which had probably been dead some time when captured and that its puncturation was somewhat obliterated. Heteronyx setifer, Blackb. Among some specimens of Heteronyx from Yilgarn (sent by Mr. French) I find a single example which I should not like to separate from the S. Australian, and in my experience very rare, EL. setifer. It is a little more sparsely punctured than the type (especially on the elytra), but I do not think it can be regarded as distinct. 492 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN COLEOPTERA, Heteronyx pygidialis, Blackb. Among the specimens of Heteronyx mentioned above is a much damaged specimen which belongs, I think, to this species. Heteronyx proditor, sp.nov. Sat elongatus ; postice leviter dilatatus ; sat nitidus; obscure ferrugineus, antennis dilutioribus ; pilis f ulvis minus brevibus suberectis sat dense vestitus ; capite elytris pygidioque sat sparsim, prothorace paullo magis sparsim, sat for titer punc- tulatis ; labro antice emarginato clypei supernciem vix attingenti nihilominus superne conspicuo ; antennis 9-articu- latis; coxis posticis metasterno multo brevioribus ; unguiculis prope apicem obscure appendiculatis. [Long. 3^, lat \\ lines. This is one of the difficult species that seem to hover between the 2nd and 3rd sections of the genus, the labrum being prominent and turned upward just about to the level of the clypeus, but so shaped (emarginate in front) that from no point of view does the outline of the head present a trilobed appearance. It is not very close to any species known to me, but I think should be placed in the 2nd section in the neighbourhood of H. diversicej)s, Blackb. In the tabulation of this section (P.L.S.N.S.W., 1889, pp. 1230, &c, and there called " Group III.") it would fall under " F " (on page 1231) in company with H. granum, Burm., from which it differs inter alia by the very sparse puncturation of its prothorax. The prothorax is moderately transverse, about half again as wide as long, and is nearly twice as wide across the base as across the front margin ; the sides are rather strongly rounded, being at their widest a little behind the middle ; the base is strongly lobed, and the hind angles viewed from above appear as nearly right angles. W. Australia ; Yilgarn ; sent to me by Mr. French. Heteronyx brevicornis, Blackb. This species is also represented among the Yilgarn specimens mentioned above. BY THE REV. T. BLACKBURN. 493 RlIOPiEA. I have never seen a specimen that I can confidently affirm to be a female of this genus, although male examples are by no means rare. Germar states that the female of R. heterodactyla is distinguished by its short hind tarsi, and Burmeister adds that the club of its antennse has only 6 joints (that of the male having 7), while Erichson states that the club of the male has 6 joints. There is no doubt that the antennal club has a different number of joints in the males of different species, so that it is .possible that the male of one species may have been taken for the female of another. I have in my collection three examples which appear to belong to this genus and which I suspect may be females. They are from widely separated localities and pertain to three species. They differ from the males in being markedly smaller, and in having fewer joints in the antennal club and shorter tarsi, and also in being very much more coarsely and sparingly sculptured than any Ehopcea that I have seen and known to be a male. I should feel greatly indebted to any of my correspondents who could let me inspect a R1io}xea that can be positively affirmed to be a female. Anoplognathus brevicollis, sp.nov. Sordide brunneo-testaceus, capite prothoraceque certo adspectu cupreo purpureo tincto, hoc oculos versus viridimicanti, illo antice posticeque segmentis ventralibus postice scutello et elytrorum sutura anguste viridi-marginatis, tarsis posteri- oribus basin versus infuscatis ; capite prothoraceque leviter subtilius sat crebre, elytris sat fortiter crebre vix lineatim, pygidio (hoc albiclo-piloso) crebre subtilius subsquamose, punctulatis ; capite magno, antice inter oculos leviter biimpresso, sutura clypeali bene determinata ; prothorace vix canaliculato, trans basin quam longiori multo plus duplo latiori, margine basali quam apical is dimidio latiori, hoc leviter emarginato trisinuato, illo medio vix lobato, lobo postice leviter emarginato, lateribus a basi ad apicem arcuatim 49-i NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN COLEOPTERA, convergentibus, angulis anticis sat acutis posticis sat acute rectis ; elytris apicern versus externe denticulatis, hie illic obsolete costatis, disco ante apicem transversirn tumido et denticulato, sutura in spina gracili producta ; corpore subtus albido-piloso, mesosterno fortiter sat acute producto. [Long. 11-12, lat. 6£-6£ lines. Maris clypeo antice sat fortiter sat anguste producto, tibiis anticis externe apicem versus bidentatis, dente altero minuto in medio instructis. Feminse clypeo antice rotundato, tibiis anticis externe tridentatis. N.B. — Cujusdam ex exemplis femineis meis tibiae anticse externe subsimplices sunt. The clypeus of the male narrows forward evenly for much more than half its length, and thence is almost parallel-sided, so that it is very much narrower across the apex than across the base ; it scarcely differs from that of A. Boisduvali, Dup., except in having its front margin more arched ; it also resembles the clypeus of rugosus, Kirby (male), but in that species the produced apex (i.e., the piece beyond the level of where the sides cease converging forward) is evidently wider, shorter, and more truncate. The puncturation, sculpture, and pubescence are almost as in A. Odeivahni, except that the pubescence is less dense in the specimens before me (possibly the result of abrasion), that the sutural apex of each elytron is produced into a slender and well-defined spine about or nearly as long as the width of the levigate space that runs down the elytron close to the suture, and that the external margin of each elytron for a short distance a little behind the middle has a fringe of well-defined sharp denticulations. The prothorax is unusually short in appearance owing to its base being scarcely lobed in the middle, but might rather be called " gently tri-sinuate " ; in all, or nearly all, the other species of the genus the middle part of the base of the prothorax reaches a good deal further backward than the hind angles, but in this species the middle part is very nearly on a level with the hind angles; the prothorax thus being very small, the head appears proportionately BY THE REV. T. BLACKBURN. 495 exceptionally large. All the claws are simple in both sexes. The transverse denticulate tumidity a little before the apex of the elytra renders this a very distinct insect. N. Territory of S. Australia ; taken at Burrundie by Dr. Bovill. Anoplognathus macleayi, sp.nov. Latus ; robustus ; minus convexus ; pallide brunneus ; capite prothoracis (hoc fusco-umbrato) elytrorumque marginibus scutello pygidio (hoc viridi-marginato) corpore subtus femori- bus tibiis anticis tarsisque (abdominis segmentis postice plus minusve viridibus) subaureis ; capite creberrime subtiliter (postice minus crebre), prothorace sparsim subtiliter, elytris minus sparsim minus subtiliter sublineatim (puncturis hie illic in striis subobsoletis positis), pygidio crebre rugulose parum subtiliter, punctulatis ; prothorace quam longiori fere cluplo (postice quam antice plus quam dimidio) latiori, mar- gine antico vix bisinuato postico utrinque leviter late (in medio sat fortiter) emarginato, lateribus leviter arcuatis, angulis posticis subrectis; elytris singulis apice subacuminatis, lateribus apicem versus sinuatis ; pygidio sat sequaliter albido-piloso ; corpore subtus (sterni abdominisque parte media excepta) albido-piloso, mesosterni processu elongato acuto ; tibiis anticis externe obtuse 3-dentatis. Maris (?) clypeo antice rotundato-truncato leviter reflexo. [Long. 13, lat. 7 lines. I am doubtful of the sex of my type of this species ; the extremely wide membranous interval between the apical and penultimate ventral segments points to its being a male, but the clypeus is more like that of a female. The species bears a good deal of resemblance to A. Odewahni, Macl. ; compared with that species the prothorax is much less strongly bisinuate in front, has much more sharply defined hind angles and is much more strongly emarginate in the middle of the base, the elytra are much more dehiscent at the apex, the pygidium is less finely sculptured, the mesosternal process is much longer, &c; also the colouring is quite different. 496 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN COLEOPTERA, It is not improbable that this is the insect which Sir W. Macleay regarded as possibly the female of A. Odewahni. Both sexes of that species are known to me ; the female differs from the male only by the characters that are usual in the genus. S. Australia; basin of Lake Eyre. BUPRESTID^E. ASTRjEUS. In P.L.S.N.S.W., 1889, there are descriptions of three new species of this genus from my pen. In the same year a monograph of Astrceus by J. R. H. Neervoort van de Poll appeared in the "Tijdschrift Ent.," containing descriptions of new species. As might be expected the two clash, and it is clear to me that the species which I described as A. Meyricki and A. Tepperi were named by my colleague A. Badeni and A. Jansoni respectively. My A. major does not appear in the monograph, which also mentions (as did my paper) the identity of A. Master si, Mac!., with A. Samonelli, Saund., and seems to indicate that A. pygmmus^ Poll, is a good species and not (as I. suggested to be possible) a var. of Samouelli. Melobasis monticola, sp.nov. Subtus senea vix cuprascens, prosterno medio et abdomine antice viridescentibus, epipleuris antice aureo-cupreis; capite prothoraceque obscure cupreis ; elytris nigro-seneis, sutuia antice et maculis binis discoidalibus (altera fere ad medium altera sat longe ante apicem positis) laete aureo-cupreis ; pedibus antennisque cyanescentibus ; capite (hoc fere piano) creberrime rugulose, prothorace (hoc quam longiori fere duabus partibus, postice quam antice tertia parte, latiori) sat fortiter punctulatis ; scutello lsevigato, elytris sat fortiter striatis, striis subtilius punctulatis, interstitiis (prresertim alternis postice) nisi prope basin sat convexis, superticie magna pone humeros sat fortiter transversim rugata; corpore subtus fere glabro sat sparsim punctulato ; prosterno antice declivi. [Long. b\-5\, lat. 1J-2J lines. BY THE REV. T. BLACKBURN. 497 A rather wide depressed species, at its widest slightly behind the middle of the elytra. The puncturation of the head is closer than in any of the commoner species known to me of the genus (e.g., nervosa, Boisd., verna, Hope) ; that of the prothorax is, in the male a little in the female much, less close and strong than in the corresponding sex of M. verna ; the elytra are punctulate- striate almost as in M. azureipennis, Macl., (more distinctly than is usual in the genus), but the alternate interstices are markedly more convex in their hinder half than in that species ; the sides of the prothorax are only very slightly arched (evidently less than in M. verna, Hope). On the underside the anteriorly declivous prosternum furnishes a distinction from many species of the genus, and the puncturation is unusually feeble throughout (much more so, e.g., than in M. nervosa, Boisd.). Compared with the puncturation of the undersurface of M. verna, Hope (in the less closely-punctured sex, — male I think), that of the present species differs (besides being in all parts evidently less strong) on the prosternum in being very evenly distributed in the middle portion (not becoming coarser and rougher towards the front margin) and on the ventral segments in being almost evenly distributed, whereas in verna it becomes extremely sparse towards the middle line, especially on the intermediate segments. In my example (which I take to be a male) the apical ventral segment has the subapical spine on either side very sharp and well developed, though much smaller than the apical spines ; the apex of the segment is a kind of flat coriaceous plate, this plate being deeply and semicircularly emarginate quite through its substance {I.e., the inner surface of the substance does not, — or scarcely, — project beyond the outer surface of the same), so that the margins of the emargination run out on either side in a strong free spine and the internal organs or the under surface of the substance of the dorsal segment is visible through the cavity of the emargination. In the corresponding sex of M. verna the inner surface of the substance of the ventral segment projects far beyond the outer surface, so that the emargination does not go through the substance, and the lateral spines (which also are 498 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN COLEOPTERA, really shorter) have very little free projection ; the emarginate part of the segment, moreover, is not flattened or otherwise distinguished from the general surface. I have seen an example belonging to Mr. French, of Melbourne, which I have no doubt is the female of this insect (though the golden coppery spots on the elytra are reduced to a single transverse blotch on the disc about at its middle longitudinally) ; it differs on the undersurface in the punctures being throughout evidently larger, though scarcely more numerous or more strongly impressed, in the subapical spines being scarcely marked and in the apical emargination being much wider and feebler with the inner surface of the substance much more produced, so that the emargination goes through the substance only in its hinder portion, and the free projection of its lateral spines is less. On the upper surface the colour (of this example) is greenish-black, very nitid (as in the male), and the punctures in general differ a little, in the same way as on the undersurface. I do not feel quite satisfied that this may not be a very small Alpine race of M. superba, Hope, with the golden colouring much reduced, — but even in that case it seems to call for a distinctive name. Victoria ; my example was taken near the summit of one of the higher mountains. Melobasis rotundicollis, Blackb. A recent revision of the species of Melobasis in my collection has suggested a doubt whether this species may possibly be identical with M. viridi-obscura, Thorns., obscurella, Thorns., or simplex, Germ. The descriptions of those species are too brief to be applied confidently to any insect without a comparison of types, — but they are all about the same size as rotundicollis, and coloured more or less like some of its vars. ; the description of the puncturation, however, does not agree very well. As regards simplex, however, I have another Melobasis which I think still more likely to be it. M. rotundicollis differs from all its near allies (apart from the characters I mentioned when describing, BY THE REV. T. BLACKBURN. 499 Trans. Roy. Soc, 1887, p. 241) by the presence on the elytra of a large space round the scutellum on which the longitudinal direction of the elytral sculpture absolutely ceases. Its sexual distinctions are not very strongly marked ; in the male the apical emargination of the last ventral segment is a little narrower and deeper than in the female, and its lateral spines are a little stronger ; also the intermediate tibiae are slightly arcuate and a little shorter and stouter than in the female. Melobasis beltanensis, sp.nov. ^ ..*s»y. **v-'-.* ^fe -■* -.'"^ HMl?v ' * ■**> .. ^*> . . *%e^ f'' HBK& *' ■-.*£*T$ .JB^, ^jrab> ..••ri'- "SM-* I ^ ■^S& ■ ,-.^ > gHk. r J8f AUSTRALIAN ABORIGINAL IMPLEMENTS. P.L.S.N-.S.W. (i?id Ser.) VdL \'i. PL. XXX. AUSTRALIAN ABORIGINAL IMPLEMENTS. P.L.S tf.S.W. (4,t,/ .SVrJ Vol. PL /■/.. XXXI. AUSTRALIAN ABORIGINAL IMPLEMENTS. P.L.S.N.S.W. (ind Ser.J Vol. / 7. PL. kXXU. AUSTRALIAN ABORIGINAL IMPLEMENT. P.L.S.N.S.IV. (ind Ser.) Vol. VI. PL. WXX1I1. AUSTRALIAN ABORIGINAL IMPLEMENT. P.L.S.N.S.IV. (ind SerJ Vol. VI. PL. XXXIV. AUSTRALIAN ABORIGINAL IMPLEMENT. P.L.S.N.S. IV. (2nd SerJ Vol. VI. PL. XXXV. AUSTRALIAN ABORIGINAL IMPLEMENT. P.L.S.XS.IV. (ind Scr.) Vol. VI. PL. XXXVI. AUSTRALIAN ABORIGINAL IMPLEMENT. ACACIA PROM1NENS. 579 WEDNESDAY, OCTOBER 28th, 1891. The President, Professor W. A. Haswell, M. A., D.Sc, in the Chair. DONATIONS. "Agricultural Gazette of N.S.W." Vol. ii., Part 8 (August, 1891). From the Director of Agriculture. " Reichenbachia — Orchids illustrated and described." By F. Sander. Second Series. Vol. i., Part 6 ; " Stettiner Entomolo- gische Zeitung." 52 Jahrg., Nos. 1-3 (1891). From the Hon. bir William Macleay, M.L.C., F.L.S. " Zoologischer Anzeiger." xiv. Jahrg., Nos. 371 and 372 (August-September, 1891). From the Editor. " Nova Acta Regise Societatis Scientiarum Upsaliensis." Third Series. Vol. xiv., Fasc. ii. (1891). From the Society. " Proceedings and Transactions of the Royal Society of Canada for the year 1890." Vol. viii. From the Society. U.S. Department of Agriculture — Division of Entomology — " Insect Life." Vol. iii., Nos. 11 and 12 (August, 1891). From the Secretary of Agriculture. "Smithsonian Institution — U.S. National Museum— Proceed- ings." Vol. xiv., Nos. 852-855, 857, and 862-863 (1891); "Bulletin." No. 39, Parts B-E (1891). From the Museum. " Bulletin of the American Museum of Natural History." Vol. iii., No, 2, one sheet (pp. 307-322) (August, 1891). From the Museum. 38 580 DONATIONS. " Reprints of Three Editorials regarding the priority in demon- strating the Toxic Effect of Matter accompanying the Tubercle Bacillus and its Nidus." (1891). From the Bacteriological Laboratory, Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia, U.S.A. " Bulletin of the Museum of Comparative Zoology at Harvard College." Vol. xxi., No. 5 (June, 1891). From the Curator. "Records of the Geological Survey of India." Vol. xxiv., Part 3 (1891). From the Director. " Gesellschaf t fiir Erdkundezu Berlin — Verhandlungen." Band xviii. (1891), No. 6; " Zeitschrift." Band xxvi. (1891), No. 3. From the Society. "The Victorian Naturalist." Vol. viii., No. 6 (Oct., 1891). From the Field Naturalists' Club of Victoria. " Records of the Australian Museum." Vol. i., No. 9 (Oct., 1891). From the Trustees. " Journal of the Bombay Natural History Society." Vol vi., No. 2 (1891). From the Society. " Revista cle Sciencias Naturaes e Sociaes orgao da Sociedade Carlos Ribeiro." Vol. ii., No. 6 (1891). From the Society. "Department of Agriculture, Brisbane — Bulletin." No. 11 (Sept., 1891). From the Secretary for Agriculture. Six Conchological Pamphlets. By E. A. Smith, F.Z.S. From the Author. "Perak Government Gazette." Vol. iv., Nos. 29 and 30 (August and September, 1891). From the Government Secretary. "The Australasian Journal of Pharmacy." Vol. vi., No. 70 Oct., 1891). From the Editor. " The Pharmaceutical Journal of Australasia." n.s. Vol. iv., No. 10 (October, 1891). From the Editor. 581 PAPERS READ. REVISION OF AUSTRALIAN LEPIDOPTERA. By E. Meyrick, B.A., F.Z.S. V. The present paper practically concludes the Australian Geome- trina, except in so far as future discoveries may produce fresh material. The alterations of generic nomenclature which will be found in it, and the substitution of the family name Selidosemidae for Boarmiadae, are necessary, and will be understood by reference to my paper on the classification of the European Geometrina, which will, I hope, appear in the Transactions of the Entomo- logical Society of London for the current year. Hence I shall not in general discuss them here. The classification of the Selidosemidae is difficult, owing to the fact that in this family many structural characters are often different in closely allied species, and others vary greatly within the limits of the same species. Much judgment is therefore required in selecting suitable points on which to lay stress for distinction, so that the genera may be at once definable and natural. The results given are the outcome of considerable labour, and I think will be found satisfactory on the whole ; but in some instances too little material has been available to make sure of accuracy. The neu ration is in some genera very variable, in others constant, but I have in all cases examined every speci- men that could be obtained ; where variation has been found, it is always mentioned. 582 REVISION OF AUSTRALIAN LEPIDOPTERA, SELIDOSEMIDAE. Ocelli and maxillary palpi usually obsolete. Forewings with vein 5 rising midway between 4 and 6, parallel, 7 and 8 rising out of 9. Hindwings with frenulum developed ; vein lc absent, 5 obsolete or reduced to a thickened fold, not tubular, 8 free or coDnected to cell at a point only. A very large and cosmopolitan family. The group of which Chlenias may be considered the type is more developed in Aus- tralia than in any other region, and may be regarded as endemic and characteristic ; yet even here it has evidently suffered much loss, and is now comparatively fragmentary ; whilst the group of Selidosema, dominant in all regions but probably much later in reaching Australia, has already developed numerous endemic and connected forms, and has largely taken the place of earlier types. In the following tabulation of genera 38, Neoteristis and 39, Moclilotona are not included, as the characters of the £, which are necessarily made use of, are unknown for those genera ; they must be borne in mind and consulted separately. It should be noted also that the anterior triangular thoracic crest, when not largely developed, is easily rubbed off, and may then be erroneously regarded as absent (this often the case in Amelora), nor can I be sure, where the material has been scanty, that I have not myself passed it over in some instances. The posterior thoracic crest is less exposed. The structure here called the fovea (characteristic of the Selido- sema group, but not present in all genera of it) is a circular depression on the lower surface of the forewing, placed at the base of vein lb, and found in the , upper half somewhat concave; vein 1 1 connected with 12 and 9 ; pale brownish-ochreous, sprinkled with dark fuscous dots or short strigulae, and sometimes suffusedly irrorated with whitish towards disc and costa ; first line slender, fuscous or dark fuscous, indented in middle, sometimes obsolete ; a faint or indistinct fuscous median shade ; a narrow transverse somewat irregular ochreous discal spot, strongly edged with blackish in ft, less strongly in Q ; second line formed by a series of dark fuscous dots, nearly straight, bent near costa, sometimes obsolete ; terminal area beyond this line in £ suffused with ferruginous-ochreous, except a triangular apical patch, which is edged anteriorly by a darker streak, which exists in ft also as a conspicuous short dark ferruginous-fuscous streak from costa. Hind wings rather strongly angulated on vein 4, more prominently in £ ; colour, median shade, and second line as in forewings ; a cloudy dark fuscous discal dot, sometimes indistinct ; terminal area beyond second line more brownish-tinged, with anterior margin of a faint subterminal line usually more or less indicated with ferrugiuous-ochreous. Sydney, Bathurst (2300 feet), and Orange (3000 feet), New South Wales ; Melbourne, Victoria ; Launceston, Deloraine, and Hobart, Tasmania ; from August to January, common amongst Acacia decurrens, on which the larva feeds. The species is variable, but not excessively so, though the difference in the sexes is rather marked. 588 REVISION OF AUSTRALIAN LEPIDOPTERA, 3. Diast. margaritis, n.sp. colour and markings as in forewings, but first line and discal spot absent, subterminal white spots reduced or nearly obsolete. North Queensland ; two specimens. 3. Hyposidra, Gn. Face with appressed scales. Tongue short, imperfect. Palpi rather short, porrectecl, rough-scaled, terminal joint very short. Antennae in g strongly bipectinated, apex simple. Thorax not crested, slightly hairy beneath. Femora glabrous ; posterior tibiae in $ not dilated. Forewings in <£ with well-marked fovea ; veins 10 and 11 separate. Hindwings normal. Further material is required to prove the validity of this genus, which includes only the following species, a Malayan insect which ranges into Australia. 4. Hyp. janiaria, Gn. ( Hyposidra janiaria, Gn. X, 150; Lagyra agrealesaria, Walk. 59; L. dijfusata, ib. Suppl. 1537; L. in/usata, ib. 1538; Hypo- sidra australis, Felcl. pi. cxxix, 23, 24.) ^ 9- 38-48 mm. Head and thorax pale yellow-ochreous, densely irrorated with reddish-brown. Forewings with hindmargin BY E. MEYRICK. 589 obliquely sinuate, waved ; whitish-ochreous or pale yellowish- ochreous, irrorated with reddish-brown, in Q wholly suffused with reddish-brown ; lines cloudy, dark reddish-fuscous, sub- dentate, first curved, second rather curved, sinuate towards extremities ; median shade thick, cloudy, dark reddish-fuscous, somewhat curved and sinuate, space between this and second line in $ suffused with reddish-fuscous ; second line followed towards costa by three cloudy somewhat confluent whitish spots, beyond which is a fuscous suffusion. Hindwings with hindmargin in . 25-27 mm. Forewings with hindmargin bowed ; brown, sprinkled with short blackish strigulse, and usually partially very finely irrorated with pale whitish-ochreous; costal edge sometimes 590 REVISION OF AUSTRALIAN LEPIDOPTERA, whitish-ochreous ; first line somewhat irregular, usually nearly obsolete, sometimes preceded by a whitish-ochreous line or marked with blackish at lower extremity; median shade sometimes faintly darker ; a blackish discal dot, sometimes obsolete ; second line whitish-ochreous, often distinct in middle only, rarely throughout, slightly sinuate in middle, where it is preceded by a well-marked black dot, and followed by a more or less prolonged ferruginous suffusion, and sometimes also by a small blackish spot ; generally two or three small blackish spots towards costa, indicating anterior margin of subterminal line. Hind wings with hindmargin bent on vein 4; pale brownish-ochreous or sometimes ferruginous-ochreous, more or less densely irrorated with fuscous ; a dark fuscous discal dot ; second line fuscous, bent in middle, usually indistinct ; an irregular fuscous hindmarginal suffusion, with faint traces of a paler subterminal line. Duaringa, Queensland ; Sydney, New South Wales ; Adelaide, South Australia ; in October, November, April, and June, not uncommon, but somewhat local. It varies rather considerably. 5. Discalma, n.g. Face with short tuft of scales. (?). Tongue developed. Palpi moderate, subascending, rough-scaled, terminal joint short. An- tennae in a, but immediately separable by the ochreous-white face ; it is also duller and more indistinctly marked, with the lines not dotted. 32. Sel. pallidiscaria, Walk. ( Aspilates p)cdlidiscaria, Walk. 1683.) £. 28 mm. Head fuscous, face rather dark fuscous, lower margin white. Antennal pectinations 8, apical ^ simple. Fore- wings with hindmargin obliquely rounded, waved ; 10 connected with 9, 11 rising out of 10 ; rather light purplish-fuscous, basal and hindmarginal areas darker, inner margin tinged with reddish ; costa strigulated with whitish ; first and second lines and median shade slender, hardly darker except on inner margin, slightly curved, second line nearly followed by a parallel shade merged in darker posterior area ; subterminal subdentate, hardly per- ceptibly paler except towards inner margin, where it is distinct and whitish. Hindwings with hindmargin unevenly rounded and waved ; colour and subterminal line as in forewings ; median shade well-marked, rather dark fuscous, nearly straight ; a dark fuscous discal dot ; second line very faint. Sydney, New South Wales ; in October, two specimens. Distinguished from the other species with dark fuscous face by the fuscous forehead, purplish tinge of wings, and very indistinct lines and median shade of forewings. 33. Sel. despicata, Walk. (Teplirosia despicata, Walk. 418.) 29 mm. (Head broken.) Form of wings and markings much as in Ectropis fractaria, but colouring distinctly brown ; all BY E. MEYRICK. 613 markings indistinct ; cliscal mark of hinclvvings (apparently lunular) touching median line. Said to be from South Australia ; one specimen in the British Museum, from which the above notes are taken ; it is a very obscure insect, and not in fit condition to be worth describing, yet it does not seem identifiable with any other species, and claims some notice. 34. Sel. destinataria, Gn. (Gnophos destinataria, Gn. IX, 297 ; Boarmia attenta, Walk. 393 ; Tephrosia indirecta, ib. 418 ; T. vagaria, ib. 1542.) <£.- 29-33 mm. Head pale ochreous, face irrorated with fuscous. Antennal pectinations 7, apical ^ simple. Forewings with hind- margin rounded, strongly waved ; 10 connected with 9, 11 out of 10; light yellowish-ochreous, irrorated with grey and a few blackish-grey and whitish scales ; veins partially suffused with bright ferruginous-ochreous; first and second lines and median shade indistinct, ferruginous-ochreous, dotted with black on veins, rather irregular, forming small rather dark grey spots on costa ; a blackish discal dot ; subterminal forming a series of disconnected whitish marks ; a hindmarginal series of black dots. Hindwings with hindmargin rounded, dentate ; colour and markings as in forewings, but first line absent. Blackheath (3500 feet), New South Wales ; occurs also in Tasmania ; in September, three specimens. A distinct species, easily known by the mottled yellowTish-grey appearance, ferru- ginous veins, and dotted lines. 35. Sel. zascia, n.sp. (j£. 31-32 mm. Head blackish, -with a few whitish scales. Antennal pectinations of g 6, apical i simple. Thorax blackish, irrorated with whitish, with three black bars. Abdomen white, sprinkled with black, two basal segments barred with black. Forewings with hindmargin bowed, w^aved ; 10 connected with 9, 11 rising out of 10 ; grey, densely irrorated with black and white ; first line and median shade blackish-grey, bent near 614 REVISION OF AUSTRALIAN LEPIDOPTERA, costa, somewhat curved ; a large black discal dot immediately preceding median shade ; second line blackish-grey, marked with black on veins, bent above middle, slightly sinuate below middle, nearly followed by a strong blackish-grey parallel shade, connected with hindmargin below apex by an ill-defined blackish-grey oblique streak ; subterminal white, margined with blackish-grey, dentate, interrupted above and sometimes below middle ; a hind- marginal row of large black dots, connected by a fine line. Hindwings with hindmargin rounded, dentate ; colour and markings as in forewings, but first line absent, median shade straight and indistinctly marked, discal black dot considerably beyond it. Melbourne, Victoria ; a pair taken by Dr. Lucas and Mr. G. H. Raynor. Very distinct by the dense black and white irroration, and the almost wholly black head. 37. Sel. perfectaria, Walk. ( Tephrosia yierfectaria, Walk. 418.) (J(J). 28 mm. Face grey-whitish, with black median band. Antennal pectinations of $ 4, apical }, simple. Forewings with hindmargin bowed ; grey-whitish, sprinkled with black ; first and second lines and median shade fuscous, strongly dotted with black on veins ; first somewhat curved ; median slightly sinuate ; second sinuate outwards in middle, inwards below middle, nearly followed by a dentate fuscous shade ; subterminal dentate, whitish, preceded by cloudy blackish dots, two above middle larger and more conspicuous; a hindmarginal series of large black dots. Hindwings with hindmargin rounded, waved; colour and markings as in forewings, but first line absent, median nearly straight, a large black discal dot beyond it, second line hardly sinuate, a single larger dot (not two) before subterminal. Said to be from Sydney, New South Wales ; three specimens in the British Museum, from which the above description is taken. It is a very distinct species, characterised by the pale colouring and rows of strong black dots on all lines. BY E. MEYRICK. 615 37. Sel. euboliaria, Walk. (Tephrosia euboliaria, Walk. 419 ; Scotosia fr aetata, ib. 1359.) . 18-22 mm. Head ochreous-whitish, back of crown more ochreous, face shortly rough-haired, forming short tuft beneath. 638 REVISION OF AUSTRALIAN LEPIDOPTERA, Antennal pectinations in g 8, apical \ simple. Femora glabrous. Forewings with hindmargin straight on upper half, rounded beneath ; 11 anastomosing or connected with 12, rarely rising out of 9 ; pale greyish-ochreous, irrorated with whitish, with a few blackish scales ; costal edge pale rosy-ochreous, strigulated with blackish ; first line and median shade fuscous, bent near costa, sometimes very indistinct; a black discal dot before median shade; second line fuscous, upper half rather curved outwards, usually darker below middle ; subterminal obscurely whitish or hardly paler, irregular, preceded by a series of light red spots, sometimes incomplete, partially blackish-margined, especially below middle, where the red is sometimes obscured with black and sometimes confluent with second line ; a hindmarginal series of black dots. Hindwings with hindmargin rounded ; colour and markings as in forewings, but first line absent, discal dot beyond median shade, median shade and second line straight, markings preceding sub- terminal line fainter or usually obsolete. Adelaide, South Australia ; Geraldton and Perth, West Aus- tralia ; in November, common. Distinguished by the wholly whitish face ; this and the two following are nearly allied, aud have the face more distinctly tufted than in the other species. 65. Deil. cremnias, n.sp. £. 22-24 mm. Head white irrorated with fuscous, face shortly tufted. Antennal pectinations 7, apical t simple. Femora glab- rous. Forewings with hindmargin gently rounded ; 11 anasto- mosing with 1 2 ; fuscous, closely irrorated with white ; lines somewhat darker, very ill-defined, first angulated near costa, almost obsolete, median shade thicker on lower half, sinuate near costa, marked with a dark fuscous discal dot, second sinuate inwards, somewhat irregular ; subterminal obscurely whitish, preceded by a darker fuscous suffusion ; a hindmarginal row of black dots. Hindwings with hindmargin strongly rounded ; rather light grey ; median and second lines, and anterior margin of subterminal line faintly darker, hardly defined ; a dark fuscous discal dot; an interrupted dark fuscous hindmarginal line BY E. MEYRICK. 639 Geraldton, West Australia; in October and November, common. Larger and more obscure than the preceding, without red spots, and with the hindwings greyer and more obsoletely marked. 66. Deil, ochthadia, n.sp. (JQ. 22-24 mm. Head ochreous-brown ; with a white band behind antennae, face shortly tufted. Antennal pectinations in (J 10, apical J simple. Thorax pale whitish-ochreous, more whitish anteriorly. Femora glabrous. Forewings with hind- margin straight on upper half, rounded beneath, slightly waved ; 11 rising out of 9, anastomosing with 12; pale brownish-ochreous, with scattered grey or dark grey strigulse ; first line represented by two fuscous marks in disc ; a blackish discal dot ; second line dark fuscous, sinuate, obsolete towards costa or more or less throughout ; subterminal cloudy, obscurely whitish, anteriorly margined rather thickly with fuscous or dark fuscous, not reaching costa ; a more or less interrupted blackish hindmarginal line. Hindwings with hindmargin rounded, unevenly waved ; colour and markings as in forewings, but lines almost wholly obsolete. Mount Kosciusko (2700 feet), New South Wales ; in January, locally common. Differs from the two preceding by the distinctly contrasted white band of the vertex ; it is also the only species in which vein 11 appears to rise constantly out of 9, but this character would perhaps hardly be absolute. 18. Scardamia, Gn. Face with short conical scaled projection. Tongue developed. Palpi moderate, ascending, with tolerably appressed scales, terminal joint minute. Antennae in (J bipectinated, apex simple. Thorax not crested, glabrous beneath. Abdomen shortly crested towards base. Femora glabrous ; posterior tibia? in $ not dilated. Forewings in g without fovea; 11 rising out of 10, anastomosing with 12. Hindwings normal. An Indo-Malayan and African genus of very few species. 640 REVISION OF AUSTRALIAN LEPIDOPTERA, 67. Scard. chrysolina, n.sp. (J). 26 mm. Head, thorax, and abdomen ochreous-orange ; abdomen with a small golden-metallic fuscous crest near base. Forewings with hindmargin obliquely rounded ; ochreous-orange ; costal edge brownish; lines slender, pale golden-metallic, appearing purplish-fuscous from above: first line proceeding from base along costa, then beneath costa to J, thence abruptly bent and running in a gentle curve to inner margin before middle ; a dark fuscous discal dot ; second line gently curved, sinuate inwards towards inner margin ; an interrupted hindmarginal line. Hindwings with hindmargin rounded ; colour and markings as in forewings, but first line obsolete towards costa. Newcastle, New South Wales j one specimen (Australian Museum). 19. Rhinodia, Gn. Face with projecting tuft of scales. Tongue developed. Palpi long, porrected, rough-scaled, terminal joint moderate. Antennae in ^ strongly bipectinated throughout. Thorax not crested, slightly hairy beneath. Femora glabrous ; posterior tibiae in g hardly dilated. Forewings in $ without fovea; 10 out of 9, 11 anastomosing or connected with 12 and 10. Hindwings normal. Founded on the following endemic species only. 68. llhin. rostraria, Gn. (Rhinodia rostraria, Gn. X, 125; Panagraundiferaria, Walk. Suppl. 1663; P. jucundaria, ib. 1663; Stegania allogata, Feld. pi. cxxxi, 15.) (££. 29-33 mm. Antennal pectinations in $ 10. Forewings with hindmargin bowed, slightly prominent in middle, upper half somewhat sinuate inwards ; in £ pale whitish-fuscous, somewhat ochreous-tinged, more or less strewn with blackish or fuscous strigulse, in $ light ochreous, strigulee almost obsolete ; first line faint, fuscous, angulated and darker towards costa ; median shade in £ fuscous or dark fuscous, in Q ferruginous, rather slender, somewhat curved ; second line partially marked with BY E. MEYRICK. 641 fuscous or dark fuscous, in £ with ferruginous, only distinct near costa, usually followed by a blackish dot in middle and another towards costa. Hindwings with hindmargin obtusely angulated in middle ; colour and markings as in forewings, but first line absent, a blackish discal dot beyond median shade, second line sometimes well-marked throughout, somewhat waved, sometimes followed by a series of dark fuscous dots. Duaringa, Queensland ; Sydney, New South Wales ; Melbourne and Fernshaw, Victoria ; York, West Australia ; in October and November, rather common. 20. Proboloptera, n.g. Face smooth. Tongue developed. Palpi moderate, porrected, shortly rough-scaled, terminal joint moderate. Antennae in g bipectinated throughout. Thorax not crested, hairy beneath. Femora hairy beneath ; posterior tibiae in £ not dilated. Fore- wings in . 38 mm. Thorax dark brown, collar cinnamon-brown, edged with black. Forewings with hindmargin dentate ; dark brown suffused with black ; first line black, angulated acutely inwards in middle and outwards on submedian fold ; second line black, angulated. Hindwings with hindmargin dentate ; fuscous, becoming whitish towards base. I have not seen any specimens identifiable with this description, which is a modified interpretation of that given by Guenee ; but it appears likely to be truly referable to this genus, and is certainly distinct from those given above. Stress must be laid on the dentate hindmargin. 33. Smyriodes, Gn. Face with short projecting scales. Tongue developed. Palpi rather short, porrected, rough-scaled, terminal joint moderate. Antennae in £ bipectinated to apex. Thorax with small anterior triangular and posterior transverse crests, beneath very densely hairy. Femora densely hairy beneath; posterior tibiae in (J BY E. MEYRICK. 667 slightly dilated. Fore wings in g without fovea; 10 connected with 12 and 9, 11 out of 10 between connections. Hindwings normal. Contains the following species only. 105. Smyr. aplectaria, Gn. (Smyriodes aplectaria, Gn. IX, 223, pi. xx, 1 ; Nisista notodon- taria, Walk. 294 ; Vunga delineata, ib. Suppl. 453.) $. 33-40 mm. Antennal pectinations 6. Forewings elongate- triangular, hindmargin bowed, dentate ; light fuscous, partially ochreous -tinged, indistinctly strigulated with darker; a fine blackish transverse line near base, angulated beneath costa ; a round blackish suffusion on lower half between this and first line; first line slender, blackish, somewhat irregular, curved ; median shade cloudy, blackish, ill-marked, rectangularly angulated out- wards above middle and sinuate inwards below middle ; second line slender, blackish, running from costa beyond middle to § of inner margin, angulated outwards beneath costa and above middle, sinuate inwards between angulations and on lower half ; sub- terminal irregular, cloudy, pale, more whitish at extremities, anteriorly more or less distinctly margined with dark fuscous suffusion, marked with two or three short black streaks between veins above middle ; a short oblique blackish-fuscous streak from apex; a fine black hindmarginal line. Hindwings with hind- margin rounded, subdentate ; fuscous-grey, becoming whitish-grey towards base ; an indistinct slender irregular darker line beyond middle ; subterminal faintly paler. Mount Lofty, South Australia ; also from Tasmania ; in May, three specimens. Larva 10-legged ; apple-green; dorsal light crimson ; spiracular pale yellow ; spiracles orange-yellow, black- centred : feeds on a prickly species of Pultenaea. It has been bred by Mr. E. Guest, to whom I am indebted for this information. 34. Gastrina, Gn. Face with slightly projecting scales. Tongue developed. Palpi moderate, subascending, rough-scaled, terminal joint short. An- 668 ■ REVISION OF AUSTRALIAN LEPIDOPTERA, tennse in g bipectinated, apex simple. Thorax with posterior crest, densely hairy beneath. Abdomen with strong dorsal crests. Femora glabrous ; posterior tibiae in P- 436.] (4) Presidential Address, 1884. [Vol. viil, p. 535.] (5) Presidential Address, 1885. [Vol. ix., p. 1207.] Kenrick Harold Bennett, who died on June 30th, was one of that unfortunately not too numerous school of educated bush- naturalists, who spending their lives in the country, engaged in pastoral and other pursuits, are yet sufficiently in touch with societies such as ours, to permit of their observations bein» recorded and utilised. Mr. Bennett's observations were chiefly on birds — their habits, their nesting, and their eggs ; and he contributed a number of new facts in connection with these subjects, many embodied in Mr. A. J. North's " Catalogue of Birds' Nests and Eggs," published by the Australian Museum ; but he at one time devoted much attention to native weapons, implements, and utensils, in which he" was well versed. Several papers from his pen have been published in the " Proceedings " of this Society. More recently we have to deplore also the death of Sir William Macleay, to whom this Society owes, if not its very existence, at least its prosperous maintenance for a good many years, and to whom Australian Science is indebted for many benefits. William 46 708 president's address. Macleay was born in Scotland, but, coming to New South Wales as a very young man, he became the most patriotic of colonists, and spent all the rest of his life in this country, never once leaving it except on the occasion of his expedition to New Guinea. During all the earlier part of his life in this colony he was engaged in pastoral pursuits on a large scale, being concerned in very extensive stations in the district of the Murrumbidgee. He also during these earlier years took an active share in the political life of the country. But during the last 15 or 20 years of his life, though he never ceased to take a keen interest in all public matters and remained a member of the Upper House, and though until comparatively recently he retained the ownership of large stations, yet he gave a very large share of his time to the cultiva- tion of Natural Science, and left his stations to his managers — very rarely indeed leaving Sydney even for a single day. With remarkable single-mindedness and still more remarkable absence of ostentation, he set himself to advance the study of the Natural History Sciences in this colony ; and this in a manner which — though, in common with everything he did, not by any means free from the impress of a strongly-marked individuality — was characterised by a very exceptional breadth and liberality of view. There are several ways in which an individual possessed of the necessary means and the necessary enlightenment may further the ends of science. He may himself add by his own investigations to the sum total of our knowledge. He may, without himself prosecuting any researches, accumulate in an intelligent way material with the aid of which others may be enabled to advance the science in which he is interested. He may by his personal influence and example be the means of inducing others to devote their energies to scientific work. He may provide facilities, as, for example, by building laboratories or biological stations, fur- nishing instruments and apparatus, and forming collections of scientific books, by which scientific workers may carry on their work with convenience and, thoroughness. Or he may provide funds by means of which investigators may be enabled to devote all their time and energy to the work of research. president's address. 709 Now I think I may say that Sir "William Macleay contributed to the progress of science to a greater or less extent, not in one or two only, but in all of these ways. As an original investigator his name is best known as an entomologist and ichthyologist. In the former field he worked diligently for many years, devoting with the greatest regularity the morning hours of every clay to his collections. The results of his work are embodied in a large number of papers contributed to the Transactions 'of the long defunct Entomological Society of New South Wales ; and to the Proceedings of this Society. In these papers very many new species of Australian Coleoptera of a number of families are described. Ichthyology was taken up as a special study at a somewhat later stage — the first contributions to this subject being the papers descriptive of the Fishes of the "Chevert" Expedition, in which the late Dr. H. G. Alleyne collaborated with him ; these' were published in 1876. In subsequent years numerous papers on this subject appeared, the most important of which were those entitled " Descriptive Catalogue of the Fishes of Australia," sub- sequently issued in a separate form, and constituting a most useful and convenient handbook to the study of Australian Fishes. In these entomological and ichthyological studies Sir William Macleay had pretty constantly in view the economic bearing of his subject, as is witnessed by his not infrequent notes on noxious insects in the Entomological Society's Proceedings, and in many observations contained in his ichthyological papers. His know- ledge of the latter subject was brought specially to bear on the subject of the fisheries of the colony in the work of the Royal Commission appointed in 1880 to enquire into the subject of the fisheries — a Commission of which he was elected chairman. The practical outcome of the Report of this Royal Commission was the Fisheries Act of 1881, still in force, under which the Com- missioners of Fisheries hold their appointment. The practical side of his character was also shown in the efforts which he made to promote and support various enterprises for securing to the metropolis a more adequate supply of fish. 710 president's address. Sir William Macleay's work as an investigator, though it was extensive and useful, was none of it of an epoch-making character, and it is mainly in the other ways to which I have directed attention that he deserved well of the republic of science. Our distinguished friend Baron von Mueller's phrase " the Maecenas of Australian natural science " is scarcely an exaggeration ; and, though he has had no Horace to enshrine his name in immortal verse, yet his benefits are of such a kind as to ensure that his name will be handed down to future generations. Sir William Macleay's services to natural science in this colony as a collector of specimens which have proved, and are likely still more to prove, of value in adding to faunistic knowledge are well known to all of you. His most imposing enterprise in this direc- tion was the expedition which he undertook in the year 1875 to the Northern Queensland Coasts, to the Islands of Torres Straits and New Guinea. In a paper which he read before this Society on his return in October, 1875, Sir William Macleay gave a general sketch of the results of his expedition, of some of the more interesting phenomena observed, and some of the more important collections which had been made. From this I quote the opening paragraph and part of the last : — "It is now five months since I took my departure from Sydney for a few months' cruise among the Islands of New Guinea and Torres Straits. I was accompanied, as you are aware, by Mr. Masters and Mr. Brazier, both members of our Society, and I had, besides, with me two very competent taxidermists and collectors — Messrs. Spalding and Pettard. The results of the expedition I hope to be able to exhibit to you in a few weeks upon the arrival of the ' Ch evert,' now on her way from Cape York. In the meantime, I have jotted down, from memory, a few notes and observations, which, I trust, will not be altogether uninteresting to you." .... "Altogether," he sums up, "I have succeeded in getting together a vast and valuable collection — a collection which, considering the president's address. 711 short time at my disposal, seems wonderful, and which affords undoubted proof of the industry and zeal of my staff of collectors. For it must be remembered that, though the full time of my intended absence from Sydney has expired, the actual time avail- able for the purposes of the voyage was much less than I calculated on. The ' Chevert,' though a good, dry, and comfortable ship, was unable to sail against the wind, and it was so constantly against us during a great part of the expedition that I do not think we had more than sixty days for collecting during the five months' cruize." Though this expedition was in some .measure disappointing — the plans formed before starting not having been fully carried out — yet the result in the acquisition of new and rare objects of natural history of all kinds were very rich. Most of the new forms have since been described, though there are still some groups awaiting investigation. But for many years Macleay was constantly adding to his collection from sources nearer home — having skilled men collecting for him in various parts of Australia, and haviug for years a taxidermist and articulator, as well as his curator, working in his private Museum. The result was the accumulation of a large collection, embracing all depart- ments of Zoology, which was always accessible' to those desiring to make use of it for purposes of research. This generril collection, together with his unrivalled collection of Australian and other insects, partly inherited from William Sharpe Macleay, partly accumulated by himself, he presented, as you are aware, two years ago to the University, stipulating only that a suitable building should be provided, and that the collection should be accessible to members of the Linnean Society of New South Wales and to students of natural science generally, as well as to students of the University. Together with the collections he presented the sum of £6000, the interest of which serves for the salary of the curator. A large, though, unfortunately, not very handsome, building was erected by the Government at the request of the Senate of the University, and the collections were transferred thither in the course of the year before last. The 712 president's address. control of the Macleay Museum has been vested by the Senate in a Committee consisting of the Professor of Geology — Prof. David — and myself as Professor of Biology, and we are fortunate in having an able and zealous curator in Mr. George Masters. As this collection and its fate must be of special interest to you on the present occasion, I propose to give some brief account of it, the building in which it is housed, and of the way in which it is proposed to utilise it. The collection is, as might be expected, richest in Australian objects ; but many specimens from various parts of the South Pacific region were obtained from various sources, and a consider- able number of specimens from other Zoological regions were purchased from dealers. To begin with the anthropological and ethnological collections : there are over 200 crania of aboriginal Australians, and natives of New Guinea and the South Sea Islands, besides six entire skeletons of natives of Torres Straits. There are many hundreds of specimens of weapons and utensils from Australia, New Guinea, Melanesia, etc. The collection of Mammalia comprises nearly 500 specimens (including skins, skeletons, and skulls) of Marsupials and Mono- trenies, and nearly 400 specimens of other orders. The collection of Birds is a particularly valuable one, comprising no fewer than about 10,000 specimens — a fair number of representatives of the Australian species mounted, the rest unmounted. There are upwards of f>000 specimens of Reptiles of all orders, mostly in spirits. The collection of Fishes is very extensive ; on a rough estimate, there are about 13,000 specimens of all kinds, mounted and in spirits. Of the Invertebrata the Insecta are the most largely repre- sented, and it would be quite impossible to arrive at even an approximate estimate of the immense multitudes of representa- tives of all orders that fill the drawers of the insect cabinets. There is also a fine collection of Crustacea, comprising 7000 or 8000 specimens, and a good series of Australian Spiders. president's address. 713 The Mollusca, though not nearly so numerous as the Insects, are yet a very numerous collection, which Mr. Masters estimates at not less than 50,000. Of the numbers of the other Invertebrata, no estimate has been formed ; but there are many thousands of specimens of Worms, Echinoderms, Coelenterates, and Sponges. Besides these zoological specimens, there is also a considerable, though much less important, collection of geological specimens from various sources. The building in which these Macleay collections are now housed at the University, contains a single spacious hall, 200ft. long by 76ft. wide. Around this runs a gallery, 13ft. wide at the sides and 26ft. at the ends. The space below the gallery is divided by partitions into a series of bays, eleven on each side, each bay having a large window. The presence of the gallery, divided, like the space below it, by a number of partitions, and capable of being completely closed off from the body of the hall, will enable us very conveniently to effect that division of the Museum into general or public collections and special or scientific collections which is now so generally aimed at. In this gallery will be placed such portions of the collections as are not required in the series on exhibition below for the benefit of students and other visitors : these will comprise the unmounted skins of Birds and Mammals and all the duplicate specimens of all kinds, together with the cabinets of Insects. These special collections will be open for study, with permission of the Committee, to any student of zoology wishing to investigate any particular group. One of the special features of the Macleay Museum ought, in my opinion, to be a good, well-displayed series illustrative of the Australian fauna in all its branches. For this there is ample material in the Macleay collection, which would require but little supplementing to render the series as complete as need be. This will occupy a considerable part of the available space. While this faunistic collection will form an important feature of the Museum and will always be the most interesting to the 714 president's address. general visitor, a University Museum would fall very far short of its purpose did it contain nothing more. For the benefit of the general student of science, there must be a series of specimens and preparations, accompanied by models and explained by diagrams, illustrative of the morphology and life-history of all the various main groups, both of plants and animals, together with small collections illustrative of various special biological phenomena, such as variation, mimicry, and the like. Such a series as this aims at enabling the student to see for himself as many as possible of the most characteristic features in the external form, internal structure, the embryology, conditions of life, and the like, of the leading types of animal and plant life. With the slender resources at present at our disposal, only very slow progress can be made in this important department of the Museum ; but a commencement at least has been made, and when the necessary cases are con- structed, there will soon be a good educational series for the use of the student of science. Another section of the Museum has been set apart for the geological collections, comprising all the mineralogical, petrological, and palseontological specimens previously belonging to the University, supplemented by those in the Macleay collection. And, finally, the ethnological collections, which are not very large, will occupy several of the bays. During the greater part of the life of this Society, Macleay has provided it with a home, and in 1885 he presented to it the commodious building in which we are now met, containing not only this meeting hall and library with the secretary's office and council-room attached, but also the spacious laboratory adjoining. Most of you will remember the manner in which this presentation was made on Oct. 31st, 1885. After relating how the Society had been previously accommodated with a temporary home (the rent of which was paid by himself, though this he omitted to mention), he went on to say — " The necessity, however, for more room, and I may add, less noise, has induced me to build the edifice we are now assembled in, which I beg to present, such as it is, to the Society for the period of 89 years, the unexpired term of my original lease of the ground for 99 years." president's address. 715 He spent, moreover, a large sum of money in the purchase of books for the Society's library, and, when these were un- fortunately destroyed by fire on the burning down in 1882 of the Garden Palace, in which the Society was then lodged, he immediately set to work anew to form the fine collection of scientific works constituting the greater part of our library as it now stands. By Sir William Macleay's generosity several workers in various branches of science have been enabled to carry on their researches here or in the former home of the Society in Phillip-street, without requiring to expend their time and energy on bread-winning work. Dr. R. von Lendenfeld was for two years working in this way under the auspices of the Society, and the results of his work have seen the light in a large number of papers treating chiefly of the Sponges and Hydrozoa published in our Proceedings. Succeeding Dr. von Lendenfeld, Dr. Oscar Katz for several years worked in the Linnean laboratory, the outcome of his researches being a series of contributions to Bacteriology which have been published in the Proceedings. Mr. Skuse has also been engaged under Sir William Macleay's auspices in entomological work, and has thus been enabled to make a very good beginning towards filling in a previously blank space in our knowledge of the Australian fauna by means of his numerous descriptions of Dipterous Insects of various families. And, finally, I must not omit to mention that by his appoint- ment by Sir William Macleay to the post of Director and Librarian of this Society, Mr. J. J. Fletcher has secured sufficient leisure in the intervals when his numerous secretarial and editorial duties have been less pressing, to carry on zoological work, the results of which are before us in his valuable papers on the Australian Earthworms, the Batrachia, and other subjects. Not only did Sir William Macleay present this Society with this commodious building, and the greater part of its library, he also paid all salaries, defrayed the expense of the greater number of the plates, and gave it most generous and much-needed assistance in many other ways. So that it might be able to :■/ 716 president's address. maintain itself in the position to which he had raised it, he made over to it during his lifetime an endowment of £14,000, to which will be added, in accordance with his will, .£6,000 more, so that the Society will be shortly in the possession of a sum sufficient, with its other sources of revenue, to enable it to carry on its work — to issue annually well illustrated volumes, to pay its officers, and to maintain and add to its library. As 3^ou are all aware, by a provision of his will, he has left the munificent sum of £35,000 to be applied eventually to the founda- tion of four fellowships, to be called the Macleay Linnean Fellow- ships, and to be held by Bachelors of Science of the University of Sydney, who shall be engaged in research on some subject connected with natural science. The election to these is to be in the hands of the Council of the Linnean Society of 1ST. S. Wales, and the results of the work done by the holders are to be published in the Society's Proceedings. Now, I have a proposal to make which, I hope, will meet with your approval. This Society is very deeply indebted to Sir William Macleay, and it is felt that some appropriate means should be found of commemorating the generous actions to which I have just been directing your attention. And it has appeared to me and such of the Society as I have had the opportunity of consulting, that more appropriate in every way than any monu- ment which we might erect, would be the publication of a Macleay Memorial Volume to contain a series of original contri- butions to botany, zoology and geology by members of the Society. Such a Memorial would, it appears to me, be peculiarly fitting, when we take into account the nature of the benefits which we aim at signalising, and the views and tastes of our benefactor ; it would, moreover, if the contents of the volume were worthy of the occasion, be a monument of a lasting character, and one which would be before the eyes of the whole scientific world. I should like, in conclusion, to say a few words as to the present position and prospects of the Society. You will hear presently the statement of the Honorary Treasurer as to our financial position ; and also in what way it is proposed that the income president's address. 717 should be expended. We are thus assured in the possession of a commodious building and an excellent library ; we have sufficient funds for the payment of the necessary salaries, and sufficient for the printing and illustration of the Proceedings. But let me remind you, in the contemplation of this condition of material prosperity, that the spiritual ivellbeing, if I may so call it, of the Society is by no means assured by this ; and that it can only be by continuous and well-directed effort that the essential objects of such an association as ours can be carried out. Our object is defined in our Rules and in our Act of Incorpora- tion as being " the cultivation and study of the science of Natural History in all its branches." Like all kindred associations we must keep before us as our principal end and aim the advance- ment and extension of exact knowledge in the departments of science with which we deal. Such a Society as ours would be falling greatly short of its duty could it not show every year in its published Proceedings some substantial gain to science, some little area, however small, added to the domain of our knowledge of Nature. It is true that the Society as such can do little in this way ; new accessions to science must always be made by the individual worker, and the number of such workers in such a Society as ours — though I hope they will increase as time goes on and scientific training becomes more widely diffused — can never be very great. But one of the duties of the Society, which its members should keep steadily in view, is to keep up and increase the number of such investigators, and to do everything in its power to aid them in their work and facilitate the publication of its results. Now I think we can all do something in this direction : we can all do something to extend a taste for the study of natural science, and we may even occasionally have an opportunity of encouraging one or another to devote himself to it. In extending the sphere of the Society's influence, even in attending its meetings, we are doing something to promote the objects at which it aims. Were such members of the Society as are not active workers in natural science to withdraw all but their nominal and pecuniary connec- tion with our body, the working members would, I am assured, 718 president's address. sustain a heavy loss. For though the intrinsic value of the scientific work done can only be finally decided upon by a tribunal that does not belong either to the present time or to any particular society or particular country, yet the sympathy and co-operation of those with whom they come in immediate contact must always be of importance to investigators in science, as to workers in any sphere of life. The choice of subjects for investigation which the devotee of biological science resident in Australia has before him is a very large one. To the botanical worker there are very numerous tempting fields promising rich harvests. For instance among the Algse the abundant Siphonece that live on the tropical parts of the coast are only known as regards their general form ; and their structure and especially their development offer a promising field of investigation. The same holds good of the Red Seaweeds; for though many have been described by Agardh, Sonder, Harvey and others, yet in the case of many — one might say most — of the genera that seem to be specially characteristic of our coasts little is known but the form of the thallus. The development of some of the Australian ferns is unknown, and in the case of such remarkable genera as Schizcea, Lyyodium, and Alsophila is a study likely to lead to interesting results. Among the Lycopodiacece we have three remarkable genera — Tmesij)teris, Psilotum and Phylloglossum ; and as absolutely nothing is known respecting their development, whoever should succeed in tracing the germination of the spore and the formation of the prothallium stage would be making an important contri- bution to botanical science. Among the higher plants many subjects of enquiry lie before the Australian botanist. For example the embryonic development of the Proteads and the development of the parts of the flower I might mention as untouched subjects, for the investigation of which a botanist resident in Australia has special opportunities. The mode of fertilisation of members of this order is also still a matter of conjecture. Another promising subject for investigation president's address. 719 in the ProteaceaB is the leaves. While comparatively uniform and highly specialised as regards the structure of their flowers the members of this characteristic order are, as you are aware, distinguished by a great amount of variety in the form and texture of the leaves : it is the foliage, in fact, that is protean much more than the flower ; and the remarkable circum- stance connected with this variability in the leaves is that widely divergent forms of leaf are to be found in members of the order otherwise closely allied. How are such extreme differences to be explained 1 It seems probable, a priori, that a thorough- going investigation would reveal, in some instances at least, a definite usefulness to the plant of the particular form of leaf to be observed ; and perhaps this order is one through which general results on the meaning of various forms of leaves might favourably be attained. There is a peculiarity in the minute structure of the leaves of certain Proteacece (species of Banksia) which they share with the Oleander, that has not been fully accounted for. This consists in the presence, on the under surface, of numerous very minute apertures bordered with hairs, leading into cavities in the substance of the leaf — the stomata being entirely or almost entirely confined to these cavities, instead of being dotted over the general surface. Whether, as has been conjectured, the object of this arrangement is to prevent the stomata from being clogged by excessive moisture, transpiration thus being seriously interfered with, remains to be determined : it seems unlikely, taking into account the circumstances under which the Banksias now live, that any such special modification to provide against excess of moisture is required. The zoologist has before him in Australia a very extensive field. Leaving out of account such departments of his subject as can equally well be dealt with in other parts of the world, there are many themes for dealing with which he has special advantages owing to his position in Australia. Let me briefly direct your attention to a few of these. The Protozoa are so cosmopolitan in their distribution that they do not display very marked geographical features. Most of the 720 president's address. Rhizopoda and Infusoria which we find in the sea or in fresh water here are nearly i-elated to, though very often clearly distinguishable from, northern forms. Some peculiar forms have, however, been observed, and T think that a student of any of the groups of Australian Infusoria or Rhizopoda need not despair of finding something new of importance and interest. Among the Sporozoa a species of Myxobolus ( Myxosporidia) is common as a parasite of certain frogs, and affords a good opportunity for the investigation of the unknown life-history of that group. Sponges are so abundant and varied that the working out of the embryology which is thoroughly known in so few cases, ought to be a fruitful subject of study. The Australian lower groups of worms have only been examined as regards certain small and restricted groups — that which has hitherto received most attention being that of the Land-Planarians. The Rhabdoccela and the marine Polycladidcn and Tricladidce are, with the exception of a few superficially described (by Stimpson and Schmarda), entirely untouched ; and the same holds good of the Trematodes and Cestodes, while I only know of three published descriptions of Australian species of marine Nenierteans. Dr. Cobb is expected to render a good account of the free-living Nematodes ; but the parasitic forms are in the same position as the Cestodes and Trematodes, and the same may be said of the Acanthocephala. No Australian Archiannelida are known ; but they and the Australian Enteropneusta are biding their time. Of the Ch^etopoda, on the other hand, we know many. Prof. Baldwin Spencer and Mr. J. J. Fletcher are both occupied with the terrestrial OligochaBta ; but the fresh-water Oligocholia, though numerous and varied, have not yet received their due share of attention. Of the Polychce.ta there are a number of families that have not even been touched ; though, judging from what is already known, there is not likely to be a wide divergence from the fauna of other regions. Of the Leeches only three or four species have been described out of a considerable number that have been observed. A good deal still remains to be done with the Gephyrea, though a few have been superficially described by president's address. 721 Baird and others. Neither Echiurus nor Sternas]ns have as yet been observed in Australian seas. In the great group of the Mollusca one of the most promising entirely new fields for research is the development of the Pearly Nautilus, for though this survivor from remote times is only occasionally found on the Australian coast, yet operations against it would best be conducted with Australia as a base. The development of the Paper Nautilus (Argonauta) is also an important desideratum in Zoological science ; but unhappily the visits of the Argonauts are not to be reckoned on. The develop- ment of Sjrirula, on the other hand, ought not to be beyond the reach of well-directed efforts. Among the Brachiopoda, Waldheimia Jlavescens is somewhat abundant at some points in Port Jackson, and whoever takes it in hand may contribute something of importance to our somewhat scanty knowledge of the development of this class. There is much to be done in describing species in the various orders of Crustacea and Insecta, while among the Arachnida whole sections remain untouched. The Australian Tunicata offer a promising field for research. Professor W. A. Herdman has taken in hand the description of a number of them, and we hope soon to have his account of them ; but there is much in this class that can only be adequately done on the spot with abundance of fresh material. The observer in Sydney ought, I may here remark, to be peculiarly favourably situated for working out the development of that most interesting of all Tunicates — Appendicularia — since both Append icularia proper and Fritillaria occur in abundance in Port Jackson right up to the wharves of Sydney. The investigation of the development of some of the peculiar Australian forms of fishes would be of immense importance and interest. I may mention the Port Jackson shark ( Heterodontus or OestracionJ, Trygonorhina, Pristiophorus, and Gallorhynchus as particularly tempting. The development of Ceratodus is still a desideratum ; but I trust we shall hear something about it before long. 722 president's address. There are so many peculiar forms of Australian Batrachia that a life-time might be spent in working out the development of some of the more interesting forms. Pseudophryne, with its limited number of large ova, undergoing the early stages of their development out of the water, and that remarkable genus Chelydobatrachus may be mentioned as particularly likely to yield important results. Among the reptiles the development of the crocodiles is now, since the publication of the results of Clarke's and Yoeltzkow's observations, no longer terra incognita ; but the peculiar fresh- water tortoises of Australia would, doubtless, well repay investi- gation in this direction, and so, no doubt, would many of the genera of Lacertilia and Ophidia. Of the birds, the anatomy of some of the peculiar families, such as the scrub birds, the lyre birds, and others, is only known (and that imperfectly) as regards the skeleton. The most interesting of the birds, as regards the development, is, of course, the emu, some of the stages of which I have had the opportunity of examining, though the later stages still require to be investigated. Our information on the development of those characteristic and remarkable Mammals — the Monotremes — is still of the most meagre character, and among the Marsupials not only is there little known as to the embryology, but in many cases, such as Peragalea^ Chaeropus, and ffypsiprymnodon, even the anatomy of many of the systems of organs is unknown. The foregoing is, I am conscious, a very imperfect sketch of some of the things we do not know ; but it may serve to indicate how much still remains to be done by the biologist in Australia, while it may by chance be of use in suggesting some subjects of investigation likely to yield interesting and important results. On the motion of Dr. Cox, a vote of thanks was accorded to Professor Has well for his able address. Dr. Cox moved and Mr. Maiden seconded, — " That, in the opinion of this meeting, in order to commemorate in a suitable manner the late Sir William Macleay's benefits to the Society OFFICE-BEARERS AND COUNCIL. 723 and to Science in general, a memorial volume, consisting of original scientific contributions by members of the Society and others, be published, as suggested by the President in bis Address, and that the Council of the Society be asked to make all necessary arrangements." The motion was carried unanimously. The President, in the unavoidable absence of the Hon. Treasurer, made a short statement as to the finances of the Society, showing that, on December 31st last, there was a credit balance in the bank of £86 8s. The following gentlemen were elected OFFICE-BEARERS AND COUNCIL FOR 1892. President : Professor W. A. Haswell, M.A., D.Sc. Vice-Presidents : James C. Cox, M.D., F.L.S. Rev. W. Woolls, Ph.D., F.L.S. Henry Deane, M.A., M.I.C.E. Honorary Secretaries : P. N. Trebeck, J.P. Thomas Dixson, M.B., Ch.M. Honorary Treasurer : The Hon. James Norton, LL.D., M.L.C. Director and Librarian : J. J. Fletcher, M.A., B.Sc. Council : John Brazier, F.L.S. Cecil W. Darley, C.E. N. A. Cobb, Ph.D. J. H. Maiden, F.L.S., F.C.S. Professor T. W. E. David, E. G. W. Palmer. B.A., F.C.S. Percival R. Pedley. Robert Etheridge, Jun. Thomas Whitelegge, F.R.M.S. 47 INDEX TO VOL. VI (SECOND SERIES.) Names in Italics are Synonyms. — *n PAGE st— PAGE Abispa australiana ... 15 Adelium similatum ... 535 Abraxas ... ... 631 tropicum ... 537 Absyrtes magnificaria . ... 653 victoriae ... 535 Abutilon leucopetalum . ... 460 .Echalia ... 545 Acacia conspersa... . 468, 469 Agarista albamedia ... 301 decurrens 5 37, 610, 621, cseruleotincta ... ... 303 [654, 680 donovani 302, 303 fiavescens 468 latinus ... ... 302 hemignosta 468 semyron ... 304 kelleri ... 468 simplex... ... 301 linaroides 468 tropica ... 302, 303 lycopodifolia 467 Agathia distributa ... 296 pallida ... ... 469 iodioides ... 296 penninervis ... 138 laitata ... ... 297 prominens . 572, 577 lycsenaria ... 297 sentis ... ... 33 Alastor ... 13 sericata ... 468 Albizzia canescens ... 469 stipuligera ... 468 Alchornea ilicifolia ... 166 suberosa ... 469 Alsophila ■ ... 718 tetragonophylla . ... 138 Amelora 582, 583, 646 translucens ... 467 amblopa 647, 649 Acidalia primaria . 642 arotraea 647, 651 Ackama muelleri ... 138 australis 647, 649 Actinotus helianthi ... 44 catacris ... 647, 650 Adansonia gregorii ... 133 demistis... 647, 648 Adelium ... ... 543 goniota ... 647 aequale ... ... 539 leucaniata 647, 651 alpicola ... ... 536 milvaria 647, 650 angulatum . 538, 540 sparsularia 647, 648 augurale ... 537 Ammophila suspiciosa ... ... 14 auratum ... 538 Amphioxus lanceolatus ... ... 155 brevicorne ... 536 Anas elapsa ... 455 calosomoides . . 536, 537 Ancylus australicus 563, 575 cisteloides . 539, 540 Andropogon montanus ... ... 477 iucouspicuum .. ... 536 procerus . . . ... 477 lindense... 1 38, 539, 540 sericeus var. poly- neophyta . 535, 536 stacha . . . ... 477 parallelum ... 540 triticeus . . . ... 477 porcatum ... 537 Aneitea graeffei ... 595 pustulosum . 534, 535 Angophora ... 253 INDEX. PAGE Angophora cordif olia 253 intermedia, 61, 253, 254, [255, 257, 307 lanceolata, 253, 254, 255, [257, 307 subvelutina... ... 253 woodsiana ... 253, 254 Anisomeles salvifolia 474 Anoglypta launcestonensis, 22, 25, 26 Anoplognathus boisduvali ... 494 brevicollis ... 493 macleayi . . 495 odewahni 494, 495, [496 ... 494 ... 300 ... 293 ... 293 ... 293 ... 293 ... 292 ... 477 ... 16 ... 531 ... 149 rugosus. Anteia canescens... Antheraea banksii eucalypti helenae intermedia . . loranthi Anthistiria membranacea Anthopora pulchra Apalochrus cinctus Aphelenchus Apis mellifica Aporoctena scierodes Appendicularia ... Apteryx 449, 450, 451, 452, 453 australis ... ... 451 mantelli, 449, 451, 452, 453 [456 Arethusina 585, 622 ... 622 721 Argonauta Aristida ramosa ... Artematopus Artocarpus incisus Arundinella nepalensis . Aspilates clarissa exfusaria pallidiscaria . Asplenium nidus ... Aster axillaris Astrseus ... badeni jansoni ... major mastersi ... meyricki pygma'us samovelli Astragalus 317 ... 721 ... 703 ... 523 ... 90 ... 477 ... 592 ... 590 ... 612 559, 682 ... 665 ... 496 ... 496 ... 496 ... 496 ... 496 ... 496 ... 496 ... 496 ... 681 Astur Asura bisecta Atalaya hemiglauca Atopos australis ... prismaticus Babbagia ... Badistes gidosa . . . Balea australis ... Banksia dentata . . . sp. Barringtonia acutangula Baza Bellardiella minor Bipalium kewense Biziura exhumata Blepegenes aruspex equestris nitidus Boarmia acaciaria alienaria attacta ... attenta ... attributa bitaeniaria camelaria canescaria cognata... decertaria displicata disrupta epistictis exsuperata gelidaria illustrariti lyciaria poecilaria proposita semitata suasaria Boronia barkeriana serrulata Bossirea phylloclada Brachychiton diversifolius paradoxus Brachyscelis ovicola pharetrata Brada inhabilis ... mammillata Bradshawia PAGE ... 438 ... 279 ... 463 693, 694 551, 694 ... 694 465, 682 321, 322 324, 326 ... 570 ... 471 ... 719 ... 470 123, 438 ... 560 102, 116 ... 44 ... 449 ... 455 ... 533 ... 533 ... 533 ... 617 ... 617 ... 624 ... 613 ... 609 ... 616 ... 630 ... 603 ... 606 ... 609 ... 617 ... 59S ... 619 ... 628 ... 617 ... 618 ... 604 ... 604 ... 601 ... 604 ... 601 ... 6S2 ... 682 ... 465 ... 460 ... 460 ... 577 ... 682 346, 349 ... 340 ... 473 INDEX. 111. PAGE PAGE Bridelia tomentosa ... 463 Carenum brisbanense ... ... 431 Bronteus ... ... 317 campestre ... 430 Buechnera browniana . . . ... 474 castelnaui ... 431 Bulbine bulbosa ... ... 135 decorum ... 431 Bulimus beddomei ... 97 dispar ... ... 429 bidwilli .. ... 557 distinctum ... 430 dufresni 19, 22, 24, 25, 26 habilis ... ... 428 hobsoni ... 567 ignotum 427, 428 macconnelli ... 570 inconspicuum... ... 428 macleayi... 97, 694 kingi ... ... 431 mastersi... ... 21 murrumbidgense ... 431 scotti ... 568 occidtum ... 431 tasmanicus 21, 25 odewahni ... 430 Bulinus ... 563 ordinatum ... 430 beddomei ... 562 scaritioides ... 428 brazieri ... ... 575 scittdum ... 430 fusiformis ... 563 sex puncta turn ... 431 gibbosus ... 575 subcostatum . . . ... 431 gracilentus ... 562 submetallicum ... 431 kreffti ... 562 viridipenne ... 430 mammillatus . . . ... 562 ivestwoodi ... 430 pectorosus ... 562 Carphibis ... 442, 443 productus ... 562 Cartonema spicatum ... 475 proteus ... 562, 575 Carya australis ... ... 470 pyramidatus . . . ... 563 Gasbia irrorata ... ... 636 reevei var. obesus ... 562 rectaria ... ... 636 var. truncatus . . . 562 Cassia concinna ... ... 467 Burtonia subulata ... 465 mimosoidea ... 467 Butea frondosa ... ... 680 sp ... 136 Byblis liniflora ... .. 458 Casuarina suberosa ... 704 Bythinia tryoni ... ... 564 Celmus ... 313 Callicarpa pedunculata . . . ... 166 Centranthera hispida ... ... 474 Callicoma serratifolia ... ... 138 Ceratodus ... 236, 721 Calligenia melitaula ... 279 Ceroplatus mastersi ... 249 pilch eri ... 279 Cestracion ... 721 Callimorpha selenaea ... 653 Chaeropus... ... 722 Calliscapterus ... 430 Chalcolampra ... 542 Callorhynchus ... 721 Chalcophaps ... 121 Calochromus ... 528 Charopa duncani.., ... 574 Calophyllum inophyllum ... 134 funerea ... 553, 574 Caly cia isseliana ... ... 97 iuloidea ... 553 Calycothrix microphylla ... 469 mussoni... ... 574 Camaena ... ... 325 nautiloides ... 574 Canarium australasicum ... 463 " omicron... ... 553 Canavallia obtusifolia ... ... 467 paradoxa ... 574 Cardiophorus bicolor ... 516 texta 79, 116 elisus ... 516 Cheilanthes tenuifolia ... .. 478 eucalypti... ... 516 vellea ... 478 victoriensis ... 516 Cheiragra macleayi ... 482 Carenidium kreusleree . . . ... 432 Chelyconus worcesteri ... ... 276 lacustre ... 432 Chelydobatrachus ... 722 Carenum arenarium ... 431 Ghemerina cuneifera ... 663 bonellii ... 430 Chenopis .. ... 449 IV. INDEX. PAGE Chiroleptes australis 168, 264, 270 platycephalus 125, 265, [269, 270, 271, 272 Chlenias ... 582, 583, 647, 652, 660, [662, 673 arietaria ... 662, 663 auctaria... .. ... 664 banksiaria ... 662, 664 beggaria ... ... 660 belidearia ... ... 659 carburaria ... 662, 666 crambaria ... .. 663 fucata 658 galearia ... 674 indecisata ... ... 664 melanoxysta ... 662, 663 porphyrinaria .. ... 660 seminigra ... 662, 666 umbraticaria ... 662, 664 vittuligera ... ... 651 zonaea ... ... 662, 665 Chloraema ... ... ... 343 dujardinii 338, 342, 351 edwardsii 338 Chloritis 693, 694 aridorum ... ... 555 beatricis ... ... 691 blackmani ... ... 555 brevipila 555 chloritiodes 688, 694, 696 dinodeomorpha ... 83 leei 69, 83, 687, 696, 697 var. papuensis ... 83 var. sudestensis ... 83 var. woodlarkensis 83 mansueta ... ... 555 porteri ... 84, 555, 688, 694 rehsei 691 subcorpulentus ... 84 Ghoara siculoides 643 Chosornis 448 praeteritus 454 Chromadora 154, 156 Chrysis sp. ... ... ... 13 Ciampa defixella . . ... ... 663 Ciconia ... ... ... ... 442 Circus 438 Cirratulus... ... ... ... 347 Claytonia uniflora .. ... 464 Gleora velutinaria ... ... 630 Cochlospermum heteronemum ... 459 Cochlostyla 693 papuensis ... 96, 116 PACE Cocos nucifera ... 133 Coeliaxis australis .. 559,570 Commelina ensifolia 475 Conosara .. 584, 660 castanea 660 Conulus maino ... 75, 115 russelli ... 101 starkei ... 75, 76, 101, 115 subrugosa 75 turriculatus 553 Couus worcesteri 276 Coppingeria 332, 336, 337, 340, 341, [344, 345, 347, 348, 349, 351 longisetosa 329, 332, [351, 352, 355, 356 Corbicula minor 564 nepeanensis ... ... 575 ovalina ... ... 564 prolong ata 575 Corchorus allenii 462 echinatus 462 elderi 462 hirsutus ... ... 462 Cosymbia 583, 591 clarissa ... 591, 592 penthearia ... 591, 592 rupicolor ... ... 591 Crinia froggatti 274, 275 georgiana ... ... ... 276 signif era . . . 272, 273, 274 victoriana 276 Criomacha ... ... 583, 659 belidearia ... ... 659 Cristigibba corniculum 82 deaniana ... ... 81 dentoni ... ... 82 dominula ... ... 81 macgregori 82, 116, 687, [696 plagiocheila... ... 81 rhodomphala var. alpha 81 Crocallis newmannaria ... ... 673 Crocisa nitidula ... ... ... 16 Crotalaria alata ... ... ... 466 calycina ... ... 465 crassipes .. ... 465 incana ... ... 466 laburnifolia ... ... 466 linifolia .. ... 465 medicaginea ... ... 466 retusa... ... ... 465 verrucosa ... ... 465 INDEX. v. PAGE PAGE Ctenodrilus ... 347 Diastictis australiaria . . . ... 587 Cyathus ... 167 margaritis 587, 588 Cycas media ... 475 Dicliptera glabra ... 474 Cyclothorax eyrensis ... 480 Didiscus hemicarpus ... 470 f ortis ... 481 Dinoria picta ... 543 lophoides . . ... 481 Dinornis ... 453 obsoletus .. ... 481 queenslandiae . . . ... 455 peryphoides ... 480 Dioseorea sativa ... ... 475 punctipennis 480, 481 Dipeltis 143, 155 Cyclotropis papuensis .. ... 108 cirrhatus ... 156 Cyclotus belfordi... 109, 116 minor ... ... 156 horridus 80, typicus ... 157 kowaldi 109, 116 Diphucephala aurulenta ... 482 levis ... 692 elegans ... 481 novae-hibernae .. ... 693 Diplommatina 693, 694 poirieri... ... 108 egregia . . . ... 561 tristis ... 108, minus ... 561 Cynanchum floribundum ... 473 scalatella ... 561 pedunculatur n ... 473 symmetrica 107, 116 Cyphaspis ... 319 Diplomorpha coxi ... 571 bowningensis ... 312 Diplosis sp. ... 249 Cyphon ... 517, 520, 521, 522, 523 Diprotodon 160, 162, 163 164, 165 pallidulus 521, 522 Discalma ... 585, 590 variabilis ... 521 normata ... 590 Cypraea tigris ... 8 Discoelius sp ... 14 Cystopelta ... 29 Distichostemon phyllopterus ... 463 petterdi 24,26 Dolichandrone heterophylla ... 474 Dacelo ... 444 Dorylaimus 143, 146, 147, 148, 149, Dsedrosis victoriae ... 533 [150, 151 152, 153 Daphnandra micrantha .. ... 284 latus ... 150 Darala asciscens ... ... 288 Dromaius 447, 451 expansa ... ... 286 gracilipes 445, 447, 448, linearis ... ... 289 [455, 456 magnifica 286, 289 novae-hollandiaa 446, 447, rosea ... 291 [448 rubriscripta ... 291 patricius 446, 447, 448, scortea ... 290 [455 stygiana ... ... 288 Dromoeohis interioris ... 502 succinea ... 290, 291 lugubris ... 503 Dascillus ... 518 Dromornis ... 453 Deilinia ... 584, 600, 633, 634 australis ... 455 cremnias 635, 638 Drosera indica ... 458 eccentritis ... 635 petiolaris ... 458 impressaria 635, 636 Drymoptila 585, 670 lithodora 634, 637 temenitis . . . ... 670 ochthadia 635, 639 Echinocarpus australis ... 140, 141 oenias 635, 637 Echiurus ... 721 reetaria ... 635, 636 Ectropis .. ... 583 624, 625 Dendrobium speciosum . ... 125 argalea ... 626, 627 Dendrocygna validipennis ... 455 camelaria 626, 630 Desmodium biarticulaturr i ... 467 exsuperata 626 627, 628 parvifolium ... 466 fractaria 612, 626, 629 Diastictis 583, 586 isombra... 626, 627 VI. INDEX. Ectropis pristis . . . subtinctaria Ectrosia leporina... Ellopia cumularia Emex australis ... Enchytrajus Endotricha crobulus PAGE ... 626 626, 628 ... 477 ... 673 ... 578 ... 347 ... 305 dispergens ... ... 306 pyrosalis ... ... 306 Enoplus cirrhatus ... ... 155 Epicompsa ... ... 584, 585 xanthcrossa ... .'.. 585 Epione incaria ... ... ... 673 Equisetum 167 Eremophila 373 mitchelli ... 278, 279 Eriachne obtusa . 476 squarrosa 476 Erianthus irritans ... ... 477 Eriocaulon setaceum ... ... 476 Eriochloa punctata ... ... 703 Erythrauchen 121 Erythrina indica 680 vesper tilio ... ... 467 Esacus 442 Eucalyptus 49, 53, 54, 55, 57, 58, 59, 61, 65, 69, 253, 389, 503, 504, 505, 507, 516, 537, 670 abergiana ... ... 65 acervula ... ... 50 acmenoides . . . ... 391 aliens ... 391, 395 ambigua ... .. 51 amygdalina... 51, 56, 64 aspera 53 aurantiaca ... ... 53 bauerleni 391, 402, 409 baxteri ... ... 56 bicolor ... 53, 56 bigalerita ... ... 53 botryoides, 49, 50, 51, 58 brachyandra ... 53 brevifolia 53 calophylla 55, 392, 424, [425 capitellata ... 49, 50, 59 cinerea ... ... 64 citriodora ... 53, 419 clavigera ...53, 56, 392, [411, 416 cneorifolia ... 51, 136 conf ertiflora ... 53 PAGE Eucalyptus cordata ... 51,64 cornuta,50, 391, 392,401 corymbosa ... 8, 49, 50, 51, 65, 254, 390, 392, 402, 411, 412, 415, 416 corynocalyx 391, 392, [397, 400 crebra ... ... 53 cunninghami ... 51 dichromophloia ... 53 diversifolia . . . .. 51 doratoxylon ... 64 elongata ... ... 51 ery throcorys ... 64 eugenioides... 56, 59 eximia, 58, 392, 411, 416 exserta .., ... 53 fabrorum ... ... 404 fasciculosa 390, 391, 392, [396, 397 ferruginea 53 fibrosa ... ... 53 ficifolia ... ... 65 f oelscheana ... ... 65 gamophylla 64, 65 glauca ... ... 51 globulus ... 51, 58, 64, [392, 406, 407, 425 gomphocephala ... 51 goniocalyx, 64, 391, 402, [404, 408 grandifolia 55 gunnii, 135, 391, 402, 407 haamastoma... 49, 50, 51, [58, 59, 60 hemilampra ... 53 hemiphloia... 391,392, [394, 395 var. albens 391, 395 hypericifolia 51, 56 incrassata ... ... 50 largiflorens ... ... 60 latifolia ... ... 53 leptophleba ... 53 leucoxylon, 63, 390, 391, 392, 398, 399, 400, 401, 577 var. minor ... 400 ligustrina ... ... 51 lindleyana ... ... 51 longifolia ... 50, 56, 60, [392, 409, 411 INDEX. Vll. PAGE Eucalyptus macrocarpa... ... 64 maculata, 56, 58, 59, 255, 256, 389, 390, 391, 392, 408, 409, 417, 418, 419, 422 maideni 391, 402, 406, [407 marginata 50 media ... ... 51 melanophloia 53, 64 melissiodora ... 53 melliodora ... 391, 392, [396, 400 micrantha ... ... 50 microcorys ... 389, 390, [391, 392, 411, 422 microphylla ... 51 microtheca ... ... 53 myrtifolia ... ... 51 obliqua ... 49, 50, 51 oblonga ... ... 50 obtusifolia ... ... 51 odontocarpa 53, 64 odorata 391, 392, 395 oldfieldii 65 ovata ... ... 51 pachyphylla 53, 65 pallens ... ... 51 paniculata ... 49, 50, 51, 60, 61, 63, 391, 396, 577 var. angustifolia... 397 patellaris ... ... 53 pellata ... ... 58 perfoliata ... 56, 64 persicifolia ... ... 50 phcenicea ... ... 53 pilularis, 49,50,51, 60, 64 piperita 49, 50, 51, 59 platyphylla 53 polyanthema 56, 63 polycarpa ... ... 53 populifolia ... ... 394 populnea ... ... 53 pruinosa ... ... 64 ptycbocarpa, 53, 65, 469 pulverulenta 51, 64 pulvigera ... ... 51 punctata ... 50, 58, 60, [392, 409 purpurascens ... 51 pyriformis ... ... 65 radiata ... ... 51 PAGE Eucalyptus resinifera, 49, 50, 58, 425 reticulata ... ... 51 rigida ... ... 51 risdoni ... ... 56 robusta 49, 50, 59, 412 rostrata ...53, 61, 391, [402, 403, 406, 408 saligna, 49, 50, 58, 59, 60 santalifolia ... 56, 65 scabra ... ... 51 semicorticata ... 53 setosa ... 64, 65 siderophloia ... 56 sideroxylon... 63, 391, [398, 399, 400 signata ... ... 53 stellulata ... 50, 60 stenophylla... ... 51 stricta ... ... 51 stuartiana ... 64, 391, [402, 405 tectifica ... ... 53 tereticornis... 49, 50, 53, [59, 60, 61 terminalis ... 53, 392, [411, 415, 469 tesselaris ...53, 65, 392, [411, 417 tetragona ... 64, 65 tetrodonta ... 53, 64, 469 todtiana ... ... 65 trachyphloia,53,392,426 tuberculata ... ... 51 umbellata ... ... 51 variegata ... ... 53 viminalis 50, 56, 58, 60, 64, 135, 391, 401, 402, 404, 405, 406 var. multiflora ... 405 virgata ... ... 50 Eucryphia moorei ... ... 138 Eulimella laxa 247 moniliforme ... ... 247 Euowenia 160, 163, 164, 165 grata ... 160, 161, 162 robusta ... 160, 165 Euphorbia schizolepis ... ... 463 Euschemon rafflesias ... ... 30 var. albo-ornatus 30 Eutoma newmani ... ... 431 punctulatum ... ... 431 Exocarpos latifolia 471 Favosites fibrosa 193 Vlll. INDEX. PAGE PAGE Ficus macrophylla ... Geotrochus hunsteiiii ... 88 platypoda ... .. 463 lacteolatus ... ... 94 Fidonia amitaria . . . .. 673 louisiadensis 69 , 90, 92, atom aria .. 673 [689, 695, 696, 697 Flabelligera affinis ... .. 347 macgillivrayi 88, 694 Flagellaria indica .. 476 meditatus ... ... 93 Flemingia lineata .. 467 mendana ... 94 pauciflora .. 467 millicentee ... ... 90 Fodina gloriosa ... .. 304 oxystoma 86, 116, 691 Foeniculum vulgare .. 135 pelechystoma ... 87 Forbesia ... 312, ridibundus ... ... 93 euryceps 312, 313 rollsianus ... 70, 90, 91, Frenchia casuarinse ... 704 [689, 696, 697 Fritillaria.. ... 721 siculus ... 94 Fruticola coriaria ... 325 tapparonei ... 88, 116 Fuirena umbellata ... 476 taumantias ... ... 92 Fulica ... 439 var singulatus ... 93 prior 439, 454 taylorianus ... 69, 87, 88 Fusanus spicatus . . . ... 137 var. katauensis ... 87 Galaxias monacha ... 325 var. roseolabiatus 88 Gallinula ... ... 439 # var. strabo ... 87 peralata 440, 454, 456 var. yulensis ... 87 strenuipes 440, 441, 454 thomsoni ... 91 tenebrosa 440, 441 tomasinellianus ... 93 Gasteruption sp ... 13 var. alpha ... 93 Gastrin a ... 584, 667 var. azonatus ... 93 cristaria ... 668 trobriandensis 92, 116, erebina . . . ... 616 [690, 695, 696, 697 Gastrolobium grandiflorum ... 465 woodlarkianus 91, 690, Geonemertes chalicoph ora ... 167 [697 palaensis ... 167 zeno ... 88, 116 Georissa multiliriata ... 559 var. latiaxis ... 88 Geotrochus 86, 691 Glaucus atlanticus ... 576 albocarinatus ... 91 var. gracilis ... var. lineatus ... ... 576 ambrosia ... 94 .. 576 bevairi 116, 691 var. longicirrhus ... 576 boyeri 95, 689, 690, 696, jiagellum .. 576 [697 pacificus... ... 576 bi^azierae 70, 94 peronii ... ... 576 brumeriensis 69, 89, 90, Gleiche ilia platyzoma . . . ... 478 [116, 689, 696, 697 Glenodinium sp. ... 167 var. albolabris ... 89 Gnophos dentinal aria ... 613 canovari ... 95 Gomph rena canescens ... ... 464 chapmani ... 95 flaccida ... 463 coniformis ... 96 globosa ... 464 coraliolabris ... 95 leptoclada . . ... 463 dampieri ... 96 Gorgouia sp. ... 8 diomedes ... 89 Gossypium costulatum ... ... 460 elisus "86, 116, 691 thespesioides ... 459 gestroi ... 94 Goura ... 121 (joldiei ... 86 Grevillea agrifolia ... 471 gurgusti ... 95 dryandri ... 471 horderi .. 96 heliosperma ... ... 471 INDEX. IX. PAGE ... 140 ... 462 ... 704 ... 167 ... 645 ... 694 84, 691 ... 556 ... 556 broadbenti 69, 85, 688, 694, [696, 697 coriaria 326 derbyi 566 f rased ... ... ... 556 gerrardi ... ... ... 84 gulosa 321, 322, 323, 326, 327 Grewia mollis polygama Gryllus servillei ... Gymnodinium spirale .. Gynopteryx ada ... Hadra beatricis ... blomfieldi var. warroensis hixoni incei var. aureedensis var. bay ensis .. var. lessoni inform is ... liverpoolensis monacha ... morosa oscarensis... pachystyla var. daemeli .. rehsei 84 556 556 556 556 694 ... 574 327 324, 327 565 557 557 69," 80, 84, 691 rockhamptonensis ... 555 var. pallida ... ... 556 scotti .. 326 Hakea arborescens ... ... 471 saligna ... ... ... 138 Halia australiaria ... ... 587 Haliaetus 123,124,438 leucogaster ... 123, 437 Haliastur 123, 124, 438 Harpalus 543 Hectomanes crocea ... ... 2S3 fusca 283 simulans ... ... 283 Hedleya 569 macleayi ... ... 568 Heleioporus albopunctatus ... 271 pictus Helicarion fumosa hyalinus milligani musgravei robustus 271, 272, 273 77, 693 24 24 24 ...77, 84, llt>, [6S7, 691, 697 24, 248, 552 PAGE Helicarion verreauxi 24,26 visi 76, 116 Helichrysum lucidum . . . ... 472 Helicina ... 694 congener ... 112 coxeni ... 69, 111 dentoni ... 112 diversicolor ... 561 fischeriana ... 112 gladstonensis ... ... 562 insularum 69, 113, 116, 692 jana ... ... ... 694 leucostoma ... ... 115 var. muruensis ... 113 var. rosselensis ... 114 var. sinus 113, 114, 116 var. trobriandensis .. 113 Helodes ... 114 115, 116 115, 116 ... 112 ... 112 112, 114 ... 692 114, 116 ... 474 ... 71 ... 85 321, 322, 323, 324, [325, 326 566 576 85 ... 321, 323 321, 322, 323, 324, [325, 326, 327 321 .321, 322, 325, 326 .321, 322, 324, 325 322, 324, 325, [326, 327 321, 322, 324, 325, [326, 327 565 scotti 321, 322, 324, 325, 326 louisiadensis maino ... multicoronata npvo-guineensis solitaria... Stanley i... suprafasciata woodlarkensis Heliotropium tenuifolium Helix achilles bevani derbyi ericetorum goldiei grayi gulosa jervisensis. lessoni in aster si . monacha . morosa oscarensis . adelaidas cinctus . f rater lind ensis minutus.. montivagans 517, 518 ... 521, 522 517, 518, 519 520 522 '.'.'. 518, 519 519 olliffi ...517,518,519,520 X. INDEX. PAGE i PAGE Helodes ovensensis ... 520 1 Hyla aurea 264, 272 pictus ... 520, 521 cserulea ... 44, 264 , 265, 272 princeps 517, 523 citropus 212, 264 spilotus ... 521 dentata ... 274 Htmerophila excursa via ... 598 ewingii ... 274 luxaria ... 609 gracilenta ... 44 , 263, 264 mundifera... ... 598 peronii ... 44, 265 , 272, 273 silicaria ... 598 phyllochroa ... 263 vestita ... 609 rubella ... 272 Hemodia lythrifolia ... 474 Hyperolia mai-morata ... ... 272 Hepialus daphnandrse ... ... 284 Hypochroma aurantiacea ... 297 hilaris ... 284 diffundens ... 298 scotti ... 284, 285 dissonata ... ... 629 Heterodontus ... 721 muscosaria ... 298 Heteronyx . . . 486 , 490, 491 nigraria . . . ... 629 alpicola 487, 489 velutinata . . . ... 668 anceps ... 490 Hypoestes floribunda ... 474 auricomus ... 490 moschata ... 474 baldiensis ... 485 Hyposidra 583, 588 brevicornis . . . ... 492 australis ... 588 consanguineus 490, 491 janiaria ... 588 deceptor ... 489 Hypsiprymnodon ... 722 diversiceps ... ... 492 Icerya purchasi ... ... 126 f roggatti ... 489 Idiodes 585, 642 frontalis ... 491 apicata ... 642, 643 gracilipes ... 488 inspirata... ... 643 granum ... 492 introducta ... 643 ijicognitus . . . 487, 489 mitigata ... ... 643 lilliputanus ... ... 486 primaria ... ... 642 nasutus 489, 490 privata ... ... 658 nitidus ... 491 punctiger ... 643 piceus... 486 487, 488 rinata ... 643 proditor ... 492 Indigofera hirsuta ... 466' pubescens ... 489 linifolia ... 466 punctipennis ... 491 trif oliata ... 466 pygidialis .. 492 viscosa ... 466 raucinasus ... ... 491 Iodis barnardse ... 293 setifer .. 491 centrophylla ... 295 sloanei ... 490 crenulata ... ... 294 spretus ... 486 implicata ... ... 293 terrena 486, 489 leucomerata ... 295 tridens ... 489 militaris ... 295 victoris ... 489 multitincta... ... 295 Hibbertia lepidota ... 458 ocyptera ... 293 Hibiscus golds worthii ... ... 459 Jasminum simplicifolium ... 472 panduriformis ... ... 459 Kibara longipes ... ... 682 tiliaceus ... 90 Knoxia corymbosa ... 472 zonatus ... 459 Laccopterum loculosum... ... 430 Hybernia 584, 623 variolosum ... 430 boreophilaria ... ... 623 Lacon 504,506, 507, 508 • indocilis ... 623 adelaidae ...505, 506, 508, 509 Hydrobia brazieri ... 563 andersoni 508, 509 Hydrusa recedens ... 281 brightensis 503, 509 INDEX. XI. PAGE PAGE Lacon caliginosus 505, 507 Liparetrus apser ... ... 483 carinulatus ... 506 brunneipennis ... 484 divaricatus 506, 509 depressus ... 484 duplex . . . 506 508, 509 ferrugineus ... 484, 4S5 eucalypti ... 507 508, 509 iridipennis ... ... 483 h umilis ... 509 spretus ... 482 lacrymosus 505, 509 sylvicola ... 483 lindensis ... 504, 509 Lithophaps ... 121 murrayensis 504, 509 ulnaris 122 123, 454 sculptus ... ... 504 Livistona sp. ... 475 variabilis ... ... 504 Lobivanellus ... 442 variolus ... 504 sp 439, 454 victoriae . . . 507 508, 509 Lomatia f raseri ... 139 Lagyra agrealesaria ... 588 Lomographa 584, 633 diffasata ... ... 588 isocyma ... 633, 634 infusata ... ... 588 spodina ... 633 Laius cinctus ... 531 Lophiocephalus . . . 338 341, 342 eyrensis ... 531 Lophodes ... ... 583 620, 621 femoralis ... ... 531 sinistraria ... 620 pretiosus ... .. 532 Lophoictinia ... 438 ruf ovirens ... ... 532 Lopholaimus ... 121 Larentia exprimataria . . . ... 604 antarcticus ... 121 Larina strangei ... 564 Loranthus acacioides ... 472 Lecanomerus flavocinctus 479, 480 sp ... 293 major 479, 480 Loxosoma... ... 330 striatus . . . ... 479 Lucerna gulosa ... ... 324 Leptopoma gianelli ... 110 Ludwigia parviflora ... 470 luteum ... 110 Luffa aegyptiaca ... ... 248 nitidum ... 110 graveolens ... ... 472 parvum 111,116,693,694 Luperus ... ... 549 venustulum... ... Ill flavipes ... ... 549 vitreum 70 110, 694 Lycaon expulsus ... ... 503 Leptospermum ... 606, 624 Lycus ochraceus ... ... 526 Leschenaultia agrostophylla ... 472 Lygodium sp. 478, 721 Leucosarcia ... 121 Macaria fr Ontario, ... 587 Libythea ... 27, 28, 29 gratularia ... 587 myrrha... 27, 28, 29 injixaria .... 5S7 nicevillei ... 28 'panagraria ... 587 rohini ... ... 29 porrectaria ... 587 Licinoma ... ... 543 remotaria ... 587 pallipes ... 542 Macropygia ... 121 Limax laevis ... 553 Manihot aipi ... 578 Limnea lessoni 562, 575 Manisuris granulans ... 476 var. angasi ... ... 562 M-asicera pachytyli ... 249 Liranodynastes dorsalis 271 , 272, 273 Megacarpaea polyandra... ... 463 ornatus . . . ... 271 Megachile... ... 16 peronii ... ... 272 Megaloprepia ... 121 salminii 44 265, 272 Melaleuca leucadendron ... 16 tasmaniensis ...271, Melania balonnensis ... 575 [272, 274 denisonensis ... 563 Liodes leucaniata ... 651 queenslandica ... ... 563 Liparetrus ... 484 tatei .. 563 alpicola .. 483 Melanodes... 585, 621 XII. INDEX. PAGE PAGE Melanodes anthracitaria . . . 622 Monocrepidius australasiae ... 513 Melo diadema 701 baldiensis 514, 515 Melobasis azureipennis 497 brucki .. ... 512 beltanensis ... ... 499 cerdo ... 510 monticola ... ... 496 fictus ... 513 nervosa 497 frontalis 510,512,515 obscurella ... ... 498 jekeli 512, 513 rotundicoll is 498 macleayi 512, 515 simplex ... ... 498 nitidulus ... 512 superba ... ... 498 ovensensis 514, 515 verna ... ... .. 497 rectangulus ... 511 viridi-obscura ... 498 ruficollis 509, 511, Mermra 121, 438, 444 [515 Metapteryx bifrons 453, 455, 456 Monoctenia digglesaria .. ... 300 Metriorhynchus 524, 525 Monohammus frenchi .. ... 543 clientulus ... 525 Monolepta benallae ... 549 erythropterus 524, croceicollis .. ... 549 [525, 526, 527 f roggatti ... 549 gigas . . ... 524 modesta ... 549 inquinulum ... 525 Monstera deliciosa ... 248 laetus 527 Myoporum sp. ... 41 lugubris ... 526 Myristicivora ... 121 marginatus ... 528 Myxobolus ... 720 monticola ... 526 Nanina bruijni ... ... 74 occidentals ... 526 cairni ... 73 rufipennis 524, 527 citrina ... 71 semicostatns ... 525 dorise ... 71 Metrocampa 584, 644 divisa ... 73 ada 644, 645 var. inclinata... 73, 686, glaucias .. ... 644 [6< )5, 696, 697 Metrosideros paradoxa 469 var. minor ... 74 Mezoneurum brachypodum ... 681 var. rosseliana ... 74 scortechinii ... 680, 681 var. woodlarke] isis ... 74 Microcystina 76, 693 dora ... 574 calcarata 76, 115, 116 exilis ... 73 rinkii 687 f raudulenta ... 73 sappho 75, 115, 686, hunsteini 69, 72, 685, 695, [695, 696 [696, 697 Micromelum pubescens 682 orbiculum ... 74 Mictodoca 584,661 sophise ... ... 685 toxeuta ... ... 661 Necrastur 437, 439 Milletia megasperma . . . 679, 680 alacer... 439,454,456 Mitrasacme longiflora 472 Neoteristis 582, 672 Mnesampela ...584,585,652,656 paraph an es .. ... 672 comarcha ... .. 656 Neptunia monosperma .. ... 469 fucata ... 656, 658 Neritodes... 584, 651 lenaea ... 656, 657 verrucata ... 651 privata ... 656, 658 Nicotiana suaveolens ... 136 Mochlotona ... ... 582, 672 Ninox ... 438 phasmatias ... 673 Nisaetus 123, 438, 439 Mollinedia longipes 682 Nisista notodontaria ... 667 Monocrepidius ...510, 511, 514, 515 Notaden bennettii 26 5, 266, 267, alpicola ... 511, 515 [268, 270, 271, 272 INDEX. Xlll. PAGE PAGE Nototherium 160, 162, 163, 164 Panicum indicum .. 476 victorise . . . 163 majusculum ... ... 476 Nyctemera arnica 280, 281 minutum ... 476 annulata 281 mitchelli ... 703 crescens 280, 281 Papuina ... ... 691 secundiana ... 280, 281 bidwilli ... ... 557 tertiana 280, 281 conscendens ... 557 Nymphaea coerulea 457 fucata ... ... 557 gigantea 458 naso 691, 694 stellata 457, 458 Paralaea 584, 670 tetragona 458 promacha ... 671 Nyroca robusta ... 455 Paropsis ... 545 sp 455 latipes ... ... 546 Obba 693 lutea ... 545 bevani 691 maculata ... 545 elisus ... 691 marmorea ... 545 oxystoma 691 regularis ... 547 Ochthephila albertisi 79, 116 sublimbata ■ ... ... 547 Odontopera australis 649 waterhousei ... 545 Odynerus bi color 14 yilgarnensis ... ... 545 concolor 14 Partula occidentalis 98, 116 (Edematophora cacaalis... 306 sirailaris ... ... 97 Omphalotropis brazieri, 80 101 116 woodlarkiana . . . ... 98 protracta 101 116 Paryphanta ... 69 Onyx 143, 146, 148, 149 151 153 f umosa ... 24 perfectus ...147, 152 153 154 milligani ... 24 Ophideres salinrinia 249 Paspalum scrobiculatum ... 476 Ophiodes disjungens 304 Passa latifasciata ... 668 parcemaula . . . 304 Patula f abref acta 80,81 Osbeckia australiana 470 Pedinogyra cunninghami ... 554 Osteocarpum 465 682 var. minor ... 555 Osteodes ... 583 589 Pelicanns ... 444, 445 procurata 589 conspicillatus ... 445 Ostrea edulis var. angasi 307 proavus 444, 455, 456 Owenia 159 160 Pelopoeus ketus ... 14 Owenia vernicosa 459 Penthea vermicularia ... ... 544 Oxytes flyensis ... 71 115 Peragalea ... ... 722 hercules ... 70 115 Perga affinis ... 307 Pachtylus australis 249 dorsalis ... 307 Palasobia longestriata . . . 17 Peridinium .. 167 Palseopelargus 441 Peripatus leuckarti 167, 577 nobilis 442 , 455 456 novse-zealandias ... 577 Palmeria scandens 166 Persoonia chamgepeuce .. ... 166 Panaethia matutinata . . . 632 falcata .. ... 471 Panagra ferritinctaria . . . 589 Petalostigma quadriloculart ... 462 jucundaria 640 Petraia ... 193 rupicolor 591 Phaeton 312, 313 sparsularia 648 Phalacrocorax ... 438 undiferaria 640 Phallaria conductaria ... ... 643 Panda falconari var. maconelli 554 inductaria .. 643 Pandanus ... 108 Phallus ... 167 Pandion 123 Phascolomys ... 235, 237 238, 246 Panicum brevif olium 476 angustidens 243, 244 XIV. INDEX. PAGE Phascolomys curvirostris . . . 236 gigas ... 237, 239 krefftii 236 latifrons 236, 237, 240, [241, 246 medius 23S mitchelli 239, 241, 242, [243, 244, 245, 246 parvus ... 236, 243 platyrhinus 237, 238, 239, 240, 241, 242, 243, 244, 245, 246 thomsoni 239 Phascolonus 237, 239, 258, 260, 262 Phillipsastraaa currani 193 verneuilii ... 193 Philoscaphus tuberculatus . . . 430 Phylloglossum 718 Phylloxera vastatrix 166 Phytomyza sp 704 Pimelea punicea 470 sanguinea ... ... 470 Pison tnarginatus ... ... 14 spinolse ... ... ... 14 Pitta 444 Placostylus hobsoni ... ... 567 Planispira cyclostomata . . . 554 in arise ... ... 554 Planolocha ... ... 584, 645 autoptis ... ... 646 Planorbis brazieri ... ... 575 gilberti 563 Platalea 443 flavipes ... ... ... 444 regia 444 subtenuis 443, 455, 456 Platycerium alcicorne 682 grande 682 Plectroscelis concinna ... ... 548 olliffi 548 Plotus parvus ... ... ... 455 Pluchea tetrodonta ... ... 472 Podargus ... ... ... ... 444 Polistes humilis ... ... ... 14 variabilis ... ... 14 Pollichia zeylanica 474 Polycarpaea longiflora ... ... 463 Polygala chinensis ... ... 459 leptalea 459 Polyophthalmus 347 Pomaderris cinerea .. ... 139 P&matia coriaria ... 325,326 gulom 326 PAGE Pomatia monacha .. 325, 326 scotti 325 Pompilius aurifrons 14 Porina kershawi ... 282 Porphyrio... 439 mackintosh!, 440, 454, 456 reperta ... 440, 454 Portulaca australis 464 digyna 464 Praxis corvus ... 622 illapsa ... ... ... 668 Pristiophorus 721 Proboloptera 584, 641 clelia 642 embolias 641 Proetus .. .. 312, 313, 319 archiaci ... ... ... 319 ascanius ... 312,316,317 australis ...315, 318, 319, 320 bohemicus ... ... 313 bowningensis, 312, 313, 314, [315, 319 corycceus ... ... 317 decorus ... 315, 317, 319 euryoeps... ... ... 315 latifrons... ... ... 315 lepidus 313 longicaudus 315 loveni 319 parviusculus 315 prouti ... ... ... 313 rattei, 315, 316, 317, 319, 320 rowi 313 sculptus 315 stokesii 312, 319 striatus ... ... ... 319 Progura gallinacea ... ... 454 Prorocentrum micans ... ... 167 Pseudophryne ... ... ... 722 bibronii ... 271, 272, [273, 274 Psilosticha 585, 624 mactaria ... ... 624 Psilotum 718 complanatum ... ... 682 Psoralea bodacana ... ... 466 testariaa ... .. 466 Psylla 682, 704 Pterocarpus ... ... ... 253 erinaceus ... ... 680 marsupium... 423, 680 Ptilotus alopecuroides ... ... 464 corymbosus ... ... 464 INDEX. XV. PAGE Ptilotus gracilis ... 465 spicatus... 464 Puccinia 249 Pultenaea sp. ... 650, 667 Pupa anodonta ... 558 artends 99 hyalina 99 kingi 558 macdonnelli 99 nacca 99 nitens 99 pacifica ... 558, 575 pedicula, 76, 99, 101, 558, 575, 694 reeondita ... ... ... 99 samoensis ... ... ... 99 Pupina 693, 694 costata ... ... ... 559 coxi 559, 560 gibba ... ... 107, 116 meridionalis ... ... 560 ovalis 106, 116 petterdi ... ... ... 560 planilabris ... ... 560 strangei ... ... ... 561 ventrorsa ... ... 560 wilcoxi ... ... ... 560 Pupinella angasi 103,104 angasi ,. ... ... 104 brazierse 70, 91, 103, 105 var. aignanensis .. 105 crossei... 105 forbesi 103 grandis ... 69, 103 var. minor ... ... 104 intermedia ... ... 104 leucostoma ... ... 104 loiiisiadensis ... ... 104 macgregori ... 102, 103 minor 102, 103 moulinsiana ... 103, 104 rosseliana ... ... 105 smithi 103, 104 tapparonei 106, 116, 691 tyjnca 105 Pycnospora hedysaroides ... 467 Pythia scarabaeus 101 Rhamphicarpa 473 macrosiphonia . . . 473 Rhinodia 584, 640 rostraria ... ... 640 Rhopsea 493 heterodactyla ... ... 493 Rhynchonella pleurodon ... 194 48 PAGE Rhynchonella sp. 229 Rhytida capillacea ... ... 574 globosa 69,80,116 lampra 23, 26 splendidula 554 var. strangeoides ... 554 walkeri ... ... ... 553 Ricinocarpus ... ... ... 458 Roeperia ... ... ... ... 458 cleomoides ... ... 458 Rotala verticillaris ... ... 470 Rottboellia formosa ... ... 477 Salsola kali ... ... ... 465 Santalum cygnorum 137 Sarcostemma australe ... ... 472 Scardamia... ... ... 584, 639 chrysolina ... ... 640 Sceparnodon 164, 237, 238, 258, [260, 262 ramsayi ... ... 259 Schizaea 718 Scioglyptis 583, 593 hemeropa ... 593, 594 lithinopa ... ... 593 Scirtes helmsi 524 hemisphaericus ... ... 524 Sclerocyphon ... ... ... 522 maculatus .. 523 Scodiona milvaria ... ... 650 Scolia coronata ... ... ... 14 Scotosia fr aetata ... ... ...615 Sebastiania chamaelea 462 Sechium edule ... ... ... 168 Segmentina victoriae ... ... 563 Seirotrana... .. ... ... 540 dispar ... ... 542 integricolle ... ... 540 monticola 541 parallela 540, 541, 542 simplex ... 540, 542 Selenia apamaria ... ... 587 Selidosema 582, 583, 586, 591, 593, [594, 622, 673 acaciaria 596, 617, 618 adelphodes ... 596, 611 aganopa 597, 610, 612 agoraea ... 598, 608 amphiclina ... 596, 599 argoplaca ... 595, 615 bitaeniaria ... 596, 616 canescaria ... 597, 603 capnota ... 596, 605 cheleuta .. 596, 598 XVI. INDEX. PAGE Selidosema cognata 597 , 606, 607 curtaria 597, 602 despicata ... 595, 612 destinataria 596, 613 epistictis 596, 619 eremias 596, 600 euboliaria ... 595, 615 excursaria 597 , 609, 629 exprimataria 596, 604 externaria ... 597, 602 hemipteraria ... 609 illustraria ... 596, 618 leptodesma... 597, 606 leucoplecta ... 596, 607 luxaria 597, 609 lyciaria 597, 604 pallidiscaria 597, 612 penthearia . . . ... 592 perfectaria ... 597, 614 silicaria 597, 598 suasaria 597, 601 thermaea 598, 600 zascia 596, 613 Serpentulu8 gulosus ... 324 Sesbania grandiflora ... 466 Seseli harveyanum ... 135 Setaria glauca ... 476 Sideroxylon arnhemicum ... 472 Silis ... ... 531 australis ... 530 Siphonostoma diplocha'itos, 338, 339, [342 345, 351 Siphonostomum ... 336 337, 341 affine 329, 347, 348, [350 351, 356 uncinatum ... 351 vaginif erum . . . 338, [350, 351 Sloanea australis... ... 140 Smyriodes... 583, 666 aplectaria ... 667 Sphserium queenslandicum ... 564 Sphinx eremophilse 277, 279 marmorata 277, 278 Spilopyra olliffi ... 544 sumptuosa ... 544 Spirifer disjunctus ... 194 »P ... 229 Spirogyra ... ... 247 Spirula ... 721 Stackhousia viminea . 470 Stathmorrhopa ... 583, 659 beggaria ... 660 PAGE Stegania allogata.. 640 Stenocarpus cunninghami ... 471 Stenogyra artensis ... ... 99 diaphanea ... ... 99 gracilis 557, 691, 694 gyrata ... ... 99 juncea 98 novemgyrata 99 octonoides ... ... 98 panayensis ... ... 99 procera ... ... 98 souverbiana ... ... 99 subula 98, 557, 691 tuckeri 98, 101, 557 upolensis ... ... 98 walli 98 Sterculia acuminata ... ... 578 diversifolia ... ... 134 Sternaspis... - ... ... ... 721 Sthenomerus .. ... ... 164 Stibaroma 5S4, 669, 670 melanotoxa ... ... 669 Stictonetta naevosa ... ... 8 Strigoptera 499, 500 australis ... 501, 502 frenchi 499, 500, 502 marmorata ... ... 501 Stromatopora striatella 193 Strychnos lucida... ... ... 472 Stylarioides 329, 332, 333, 336, 342, [345, 349 capensis 334 caribou m ... ... 334 cinctus 333, 336, 341, 344, 348, 350, 351, 355, 356 cingulatus ... ... 334 horstii 335, 341, 351, [355, 356 monilifer 329, 339, 341, [344, 356 parmatus 334 Succinea arborea... ... 559, 575 simplex 100,116,691,692, [697 strigata ... ... 559 Syncarpia... ... 422 Syrphus ... ... ... ... 704 Tachinasp. 249 Tacparia zalissaria ... ... 643 Taphaetus brachialis ... 123,454 Teara albidescens 285 edwardsi 285 INDEX. XV11. PAGE PAGE Teara fimbriata . . . 285 Thy nnus brenchleyi ... 15 togata 285 conspicuus 15, 16 Telephorus fusicornis 529 pulchralis ... 15 galeatus 529 smithii ... ... 16 nobilitatus 530 sp ... 15 pauxillus 528 Thysanotus chrysantherus ... 475 pusio... 528 Tigridoptera 585, 631 vibex . . . 530 mar i ana ... ... 631 victoriensis .. 528, 530 matutinata 631, 632 Telopea oreades ... .. 166, 703 rotundata . . . 631, 632 Tephrina adustaria 592 Tipula sp ... 577 impressaria .. 636 Tmesipteris ... 718 normata 590 Tornatellina eucharis ... ... 558 procurata ... 589 terrestris . . . ... 99 Tephrosia absorpta 624 Trianthema pilosa ... 464 bispinaria .. 599, 673 Tribonyx 439, 440 curtaria 602 effluxus 439, 454 despicata 612 mortieri ... 440 disperdita 609 Triodia procera ... 478 disposita 628 Tristania psidioides ... 470 euboliaria 615 Triumfetta appendiculat ... 461 excursaria 609 bradshawii ... 460, 462 exesaria 674 f abreana ... 461 exportaria 609 johnstoni ... 461 externaria 602 plumigera ... ... 461 fractaria 629 winneckeana ... 461 gratularia 601 Trochomorpha lomonti ... ... 78 indirecta 613 nigrans ... ... 79 integraria 624 var. cornea ... mactaria 624 planorbis ... 78 perfectaria 614 Trophonia... 336, 347 phibalapterai •ia ... 609 capensis ... 334 propinquaria .. 601 cincta ... ... 347 subtinctaria . 628 eruca ... ... 339 vagaria 613 horstii .., 347 Terebella ... ' 347 monilifer ... 344 Terminalia microcarpa 470 plumosa 336, 347 Tetracis cachexiata 673 xanthotricha... ... 338 Thalaina ... 585, 652 Truncatella cerea ... 100 angulosa .. 652, 655 ceylanica . . . 100, 694 australiaria 653 co?ispicua . . . ... 100 clara .. 653, 654 nitida ... 100 inscripta .. 652, 655 semicostata ... ... 100 klenaea... 653 sp ... 694 principaria 655 teres ... ... 100 punctilinea 653 valida 100, 694 selenaea 653 vitiacea ... 100 Thalassia annula... 78, 116, 694 vitiana ... 100 delta . . . 553 Trygonorhina ... 721 moretonensis 552 Tylenchus... ... 149 pudibunda 552 Unio australis 564, 575 rustica... 78, 552 depressus var. angasi ... 564 Themada arguens 477 var. mutabilis... 564 XV111. INDEX. Unio novse-hollandise Uraria cylindracea Uroaetus .. audax ... brachialis Vedalia cardinalis Verbena officinalis Verticordia cunninghami Vitis acetosa trifolia Vivipara essingtonensis, sublineata Voluta magnifica... Vunga delineata ... Waldheimia flavescens . Waltheria indica... Weinmannia paniculosa. . PAGE PAGE 564 Wistaria ... 679 467 Xanthorrhcea ... 16 123 Xenomusa metallica ... 299 123 monoda ... 300 .. 123, 454 Xenorhynchus 442, 443 .. 126, 166 nanus... ... 455 137 Xerotes brownii ... 475 ti .. 469 media ... 475 .. 471 Xesta ... 693 .. 471 Xiphogonium ... 313 .. 564 Xylocopa restuans ... 16 .. 564 muscaria ... 16 .. 307 Zanclopteryx ... 674 .. 667 permensata ... 674 .. 721 Zerene devinctaria ... 674 .. 460 Zermizinga indocilisaria ... 623 .. 138 Zygomaturus ...160, 163, 164, 165 F. Cunninghame 6c Co., Printers, 1U6 Pitt Street, Sydney. PLSN.5W.(2nd SerOVoi-V! PJXXXVH1. Hed/ey de/.adnar. STLeiph&Clith P.LS.NS.W.(2ndSer.)VoLVI PI XXXIX. //is//* §h C Medley del. adnat. STLeiph&L'lith. PL.SN.S.W.(2ndSer)VoLVI PI. XL C Hedle/.dei ad rial s-T-lttjbtPM. PLS.N5W.(2ndS^WoL.VI P1XLI, Hedky del.ddnsr STLeigh&Plith. P.L5N.S.W.(2ndSer.)VoLVI PI XL 11. ■ffl 19. 37. C.Hedky.deJ.ddndt. ST-LeiphtPlirti Issued September 9, 1891. yp^; K THE PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SOCIETY OF NEW SOUTH WALES SECOND SEEIES. VOL. VI. PART THE FIRST. Containing the Papers read at the Meetings HELD IN JANUARY, FEBRUARY, AND MARCH, 1891. WITH THIRTEEN I»LATES- (Plates i.-xii. and xii. bis.) SYDNEY : PRINTED AND PUBLISHED "FOR THE SOCIETY BY F. CUNNINGHAME & CO., 146 PITT STREET, AND SOLD BY THE SOCIETY. [Price, 10/ ] ^g-zehstts msr eueope -. ^^S^> Messrs. Dulau & Co., 37 Soho Square, London, W. 'f&Qf^k. Messrs. R. Friedl.ender & Sohn, Carlstrasse 11, Berlin, N.W, ®S NOTICE. With the exception of Volumes I. -VI. of the Proceedings — of which the Society's stock was totally destroyed in the Garden Palace Fire — the Publications of the Linnean Society of N.S.W. may be obtained at the Society's Hall, Ithaca Road, Elizabeth Bay, Sydney, from Dulau & Co., 37 Soho Square, London, W., or R. Friedlander & Sohn, Carlstrasse 11, Berlin, N.W., at the fol- lowing prices : — £ s (| Vol. VII. Containing Proceedings for 18S2, Part 1 0 7 6 „ Part 2 0 10 0 „ ,, ,, „ Part 3 0 5 0 „ Part4 0 10 0 Vol. VIII. Containing Proceedings for 1883, Part 1 0 10 0 „ Part 2 0 5 0 „ Part 3 0 7 0 ,, ,, ,, Part4 0 8 0 Vol. IX. Containing Proceedings for 1884, Part 1 0 8 0 „ Part 2 0 12 0 » Part3 1 5 0 ,, ,, „ Part4 15 0 Vol. X. Containing Proceedings for 1885, Part 1 0 12 0 „ Part 2 0 7 6 „ Part 3 0 15 0 „ Part4 0 17 6 Vol. I. (Second Ser.) Containing Proceedings for 1886, Part 1 0 10 6 „ Part 2 0 12 0 „ Part 3 0 13 0 „ Part 4 0 12 6 Vol. II. (Second Ser.) Containing Proceedings for 1887, Part 10 7 0 „ Part 2 0 8 0 „ Part 3 0 12 0 „ Part 4 1 7 0 Vol. III. (Second Ser.) Containing Proceedings for 1888, Part 1 0 15 0 „ Part 2 1 4 0 „ Part 3 1 0 0 Part4 0 18 0 Vol. IV. (Second Ser.) Containing Proceedings for 1889, Part 10 110 Part 2 0 16 0 Part3 0 19 0 Part4 0 11 0 Vol. V. (Second Ser.) Containing Proceedings for 1890, Parti 0 11 0 Part 2 0 9 0 ,, Part 3 0 9 0 „ Part 4 0 9 0 Vol. VI. (Second Ser.) Containing Proceedings for 1891, Part 1 0 10 0 A reduction of 20 per cent, on the above charges is made to Members of the Society. Copies of Vol. II. of the Transactions of the Entomological Society of New South Wales are also obtainable, price fifteen shillings. CONTENTS OF VOL. VI., PART 1 (SECOND SERIES.) PAGE Notes on the occurrence of Stilbite in the Eruptive Rocks of Jamberoo, N.S.W. By B. G. Engelhardt. (Plate i ) 5 Notes on a small Collection of Hymenoptera from Narrabri, N.S.W. By W. W. Froggatt ... 13 Description of a new Species of. Tortricidse. By J. Hartley D.crrant 17 On the Anatomy of some Tasmanian Land Snails. By C. Hedley, F.L.S., Corr. Mem. (Plates n. -in.) 19 Stray Notes on Lepidoptera. No. 2. By A. Sidney Olliff 27 Notes on Australian Aboriginal Stone Weapons and Implements. Nos. x.-xv. By R. Etheridge, Junr. (Plates iv.-viii.) 31 On the Classification of Eucalypts. By the Rev. W. Woolls, Ph.D., F.L.S. ... 49 The Land Molluscan Fauna of British New Guinea. By C. Hedley, F.L.S. , Corr. Mem. (Plates ix.-xii. and xu. bis) 67 On the Trail of an Extinct Bird. By C. W. De Vis, M.A., Corr. Mem. 117 Note on an Extinct Eagle. By C. W. De Vis, M.A., Corr. Mem. ... 123 Elections and Announcements ... ... ... ... ... 1,9,45 Donations ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 1 , 9, 45 Notes and Exhibits 8,43.12.3 Issued December 22, 1891. THE PKOCEEDINGrS OF THE LINNEAN SOCIETY OF NEW SOUTH WALES. SECOND SEEIES. w VOL. VI. PART THE SECOND. Containing the Papers read at the Meetings HELD IN APRIL, MAY, AND JUNE, 1891. WITH EIGHT I>LATES_ (Plates xiii.-xix., and xxii.) SYDNEY : PRINTED AND PUBLISHED FOR THE SOCIETY BY F. CUNNINGHAME & CO., 146 PITT STREET, AND SOLD BY THE SOCIETY. [Price, 9 6 1 -A-GKEJISTTS ZCUST EUEOPE = Messrs. Dulau & Co,, 37 Spho Square, London, W. Messrs. R. Fkiedl^ender & Sorix, Carlstrasse 11, Berlin, N.W NOTICE. With the exception of Volumes I.-VI. of the Proceedings — of which the Society's stock was totally destroyed in the Garden Palace Fire — the Publications of the Linnean Society of N.S.W. may be obtained at the Society's Hall, Ithaca Road, Elizabeth Bay, Sydney, from Dulau & Co., 37 Soho Square, London, W., or R. Friedlander Description of a new Cone from Mauritius. By J. Brazier, F.L.S. (Plate xix., fig. 4.) 27b' On Queensland and other Australian Lepidoptera, with Descriptions of New Species. By Thomas P. Lucas, M.R.C.S.E., L.S.A. ... 277 Elections and Announcements ... ... ... ... ... 127, 169 Donations 127,169,250 Notes and Exhibits 166,248,307 Issued May 23, 1892. THE PROCEEDINGS OF THE LINNEAN SOCIETY OF NEW SOUTH WALES SECOITD SERIES, VOL. VI. PART THE THIRD. Containing the Papers read at the Meetings HELD IN JULY AND SEPTEMBER, 1891. WITH SEVENTEEN PLATES. SYDNEY : PRINTED AND PUBLISHED FOR THE SOCIETY BY F. CUNNINGHAME & CO., 146 PITT STREET, AND SOLD BY THE SOCIETY. [Price7l7/ ] ^GKEZSTTS I3ST BI7EOPB :